JP6513148B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the game ball fired in the game area of the game board enters the starting opening (hereinafter also referred to as "start winning combination"), a big hit lottery is executed triggered by this starting winning combination, and it is elected , Transition to a special game state advantageous to the player. Also, in the conventional gaming machine, after the start condition triggered by the above-described start winning is established, variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display device, and effects that suggest the result of the big hit lottery are displayed using the display device. Execute with symbol variation.

JP, 2014-23551, A

However, suppressing produce a reduction in the interest of Yu skills who is being sought.

The present invention aims to suppress a decrease in the interest of Yu technique's.

In order to solve the above-mentioned subject, the present invention adopts the following composition. A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination means for determining whether it is a hit based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and a predetermined start condition based on the establishment, and special symbol variation execution means for executing a special symbol variation, demonstration execution said that suggestions can produce a result of determination by the determining means, for execution by pre SL special symbol variation executing means during the special symbol variation period A game machine, and the effect execution means is capable of executing a first effect capable of stepwise development and a second effect capable of stepwise development; The second stage and the second stage are allowed to appear in the same special symbol variation, and the first stage and the second stage are revealed and the stage development is performed. As expected degree improves Are, the first number of steps that can be taken at the stage development of the effect, the second being a greater than the number of steps which can be taken at the stage development of the effect, the first effect is revealing The timing at which the staged development is performed and the timing at which the second stage effects are produced and the staged development are performed are different from each other. When there is at least a low low expected appearance effect and a high expected appearance effect with a high degree of expectation which is the hit, and the predetermined number of stages is reached in the second effect, the high expected appearance effect is executed with high frequency And the first effect can be performed in a display mode in which the degree of expectation that is the hit is high, when the number of stages has advanced in the second effect. When the first effect is performed again after the first effect is performed in the display mode in which the number of stages progresses in the output and the expectation degree that is the hit is high, the first effect is performed. In the second aspect of the present invention, the stage number is advanced in the second stage, and the appearance degree is considered to be high. After the first effect to be performed is displayed, the movable body is positioned so as to overlap the area in which the first effect performed in the display mode in which the expectation degree as the hit is high is displayed is displayed. It is possible to not carry out the stepwise development in the second production after the high expectation final production started after reaching the predetermined number of stages in the second production. It is characterized in that the Game machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of Yu technique's.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position from the right front. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. The other form is shown and it is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly of an outer frame, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and seen from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 38 (a). It is the YY sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the fowl cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line disabling member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the elements on larger scale of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the elements on larger scale of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional front view of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member, (b) is a cross-sectional top view. It is a longitudinal front view of a fal cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. 45 which shows the normal flow of a game ball (far ball), (c) is a principal part enlarged view of FIG. 45 which shows the reverse movement prevention state of an irregular | improper ball . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of the fal cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a longitudinal front view of a fal cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49, (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 showing a state in which a far ball passes. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) shows the state which electrically operated the operation line invalidation member, and is an enlarged view corresponded to the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is inactivated. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled a handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer base unit in a saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in a saucer unit from the direction of movement of a production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation button unit and was seen from the front lower. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a rotational drive unit in the left view of a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board | substrate in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, (c) is a central pressing operation section of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a plate unit when pressing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the back sectional view which cut the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the front-back direction center of a delivery blade. (A) is a back sectional view which cut a dispensing device in the front-back direction center of a dispensing blade, when a ball extraction movable piece is an open state, (b) is a sectional view cut by the AA line in (a) . It is a rear view of the delivery apparatus for demonstrating the rotation position of a delivery blade. It is a rear view of the delivery apparatus for demonstrating ball clogging and ball fall prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of a pachinko machine which was cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows upper part in the perspective view which looked at a main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. in the ball | bowl tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball which overflowed from the ball | bowl tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in a main body frame upper part. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line of Fig.117 (a). It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (The structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 5th Embodiment) of this invention to which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 130 as viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board of the state which made the game panel transparent. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the game panel is made opaque and the inside of the game area where the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail are shown. FIG. 5 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of an attacker unit in the game board. It is a front view of the front component and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at a front component and a game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a front component and a game panel from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component and the game panel and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component and the game panel and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the gaming panel shown with the substrate cover removed, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the area near the lower panel decoration substrate in (a). It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a decoration pattern of a game panel, a front component, and a front unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relation between the decoration pattern and obstacle nail in a game panel. It is an enlarged view which shows the installation aspect of an upper left panel decoration board | substrate. It is an enlarged view which shows the game panel in a modification. It is a front view of the table rendering unit in a modification. It is a front view of the panel board in a modification. (A) is a front view of the panel board in which the decoration pattern different from FIG. 143 was formed, (b) is a front view which shows the panel board of (a) with a surface unit. It is a front view which shows the nail adjustment film for adjusting the obstacle nail currently installed by the game panel. It is a front view of a main part frame shown in the state where a game board was attached. (A) is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the state before mounting a nail adjustment film to a game board, (b) is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the state which mounted a nail adjustment film to a game board. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of drawing of the wiring from the function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of a table production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which light-emission decorated the 1st pattern in a table | surface effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which light-emittingly decorated the 2nd pattern in a table | surface effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 2nd pattern of the table | surface rendering unit different from this embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the under-back movable decoration body with which the under-back effect unit in a back unit is equipped, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the under-back movable decoration body with which the under-back effect unit is equipped, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows a motion of a back down movable ornament. It is a schematic perspective view of internal structures, such as back left movable ornaments. It is a front view showing the movement of the back left movable decorative body of the back left effect unit in the back unit. Same as the back lower left movable decoration of the back left directing unit and the back lower right movable decoration of the back right directing unit by raising the back lower movable decoration of the back lower directing unit from the standby state from the normal state and raising the back lower moving arm from the standby position. The height of the back up movable decoration of the back up rendering unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back up moving arm is the same as the back left upper moving decoration of the back left directing unit and the back upper right movable decoration of the back right directing unit It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made height. In the state of FIG. 165, the back down movable decoration, the back up movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back lower left movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back lower right movable decoration are shown being rotated. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state where the back left moving arm of the back left rendering unit and the back right moving arm of the back right rendering unit are moved from the normal state to the second state. FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are moved to the second state from the state of FIG. The back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and the back upper left movable decoration and the back lower right movable decoration, and the back lower left movable decoration and the back upper right movable decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made the effect display apparatus display the effect image, after rotating the body so that it might face each other. From the normal state, the back movable movable decoration, the back movable movable decoration, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable movable decoration are moved to the second combined position It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. From the state of FIG. 170, move the back bottom movable decoration, back top movable decoration, back top left movable decoration, back bottom left movable decoration, back top right movable decoration, and back bottom right movable decoration to the first combined position It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 1st pattern in the light-guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of an effect which performs light emission decoration with the decoration pattern of a game panel, and the 1st pattern in the light-guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 2nd pattern in the light-guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of presentation which performs light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of a game panel, and the 2nd pattern in the light guide plate of a table | surface presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIGS. 172 and 174 is decorated with light emission. The first pattern is illuminated and decorated in the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back movable movable decoration, the back movable movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back lower right It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the movable decorative body is moved to the second combined position. The first pattern is illuminated and decorated in the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back movable movable decoration, the back movable movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back lower right It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the movable decoration to the first uniting position. In the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIG. 178, the second pattern is illuminated and decorated, and the back movable movable decoration, the back movable movable decoration, the back left upper movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the movable decorative body and the back lower right movable decorative body are moved to the first combined position. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a periphery control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a view on arrow A of FIG. 182. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a connection relation with a panel drive substrate. FIG. 186 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 186. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earthing | grounding board. It is a circuit diagram explaining an outline of a circuit composition of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which partially expanded the power supply board. FIG. 190 is a view on arrow B of FIG. 190. It is silk printing (the 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. It is silk printing (the 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of the production discontinuation electronic component. It is the structure of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of the wiring to the board | substrate handled as a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decoration board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of a LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 202 is an enlarged view of a portion D in FIG. 202 as viewed from an LED non-mounting surface. It is the composition of measures, such as a reflectance fall concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is the composition of measures, such as a reflectance fall concerning a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 205 is an enlarged view of a portion D 'of FIG. 204 or a portion D' 'of FIG. 205 as viewed from an LED non-mounting surface. It is the composition of measures, such as a reflectance fall concerning a 4th embodiment. FIG. 208 is an enlarged view of a D ′ ′ ′ portion in FIG. 207 as viewed from the non-LED mounting surface; It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with a magnetic type pole change detection circuit etc. of a magnetic type. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 210. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power supply ON of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of a payment control part power-on process following on FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a modification of a payment device. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric motorized item control processing which are executed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for a type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning a prize opening opening-and-closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and the common_motor_effects control process which are performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a suspension notice determination table used to determine a suspension notice pattern at 1:00, and (B) is a suspension notice determination table used to determine a suspension notice pattern at 2:00 (C Is a pending notice determination table used to determine a pending notice pattern at 3 o'clock. (D) is a suspension notice determination table used to determine a suspension notice pattern at 4 o'clock. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of an effect pattern set as the first pending change effect. It is an example of a concrete effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of the first hold change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the 2nd pending change presentation. It is an example of a concrete effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of the second pending change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the 3rd pending change effect. It is an example of a specific effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of the third pending change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of stock production which straddles a plurality of changes in the case of judging beforehand execution of operation production. (A) is a type of operation effective time, (B) is a scenario determination table used to determine a scenario determination pattern at 4 o'clock, and (C) is a scenario determination pattern at 3 o'clock Scenario determination table used in It is an example of concrete presentation with a production display device at the time of execution of stock production and operation production. It is an example of concrete presentation with a production display device at the time of execution of stock production and operation production. (A) is a type of the mode immediately before operation, (B) is a scenario determination table used to determine a scenario determination pattern at 4 o'clock, and (C) is a scenario determination pattern at 3 o'clock Scenario determination table used in It is an example of a concrete effect with the effect display device at the time of execution of stock effect and stock of operation effect which stock the contents of the mode just before operation. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification in the case where a specific period occurs after execution of the fluctuating light guide effect. It is an example of a concrete effect by the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation and the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of stop pre-reading effect and disappointing effect in the temporary stop period of a lost design. It is an example of a concrete effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of stop pre-reading effect and disappointing effect using the temporary stop period of the lost design. It is an explanatory view showing the serif notice as an example of the button-related effect performed by the effect display device. FIG. 259 is a timing chart of the speech preview shown in FIG. 259. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation opportunity pseudo | simulation error production as an example of the button-related production performed with a production display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-operation pseudo | simulation error production as an example of the button-related production performed with a production display apparatus. (A) It is a timing chart of the operation opportunity pseudo error production shown in FIG. 261, (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error production shown in FIG. It is the schematic of the handling of the conductor floated with respect to the earth | ground equipped with the various presentation units equipped with a game board. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern pattern table. It is one example which divided the first index determination table into two. It is an example of the other which divided the 1st index determination table into two. It is an example of a first promotion lottery table. It is an example of a 2nd index determination table. It is an example of a 2nd promotion lottery table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of barbell reach production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of barbell reach production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of barbell reach production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of barbell reach production. It is an example of an effect color selection table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of notice board notice effects. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of notice board notice effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of a bulletin board notice production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of a bulletin board notice production | presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the pre-reading presentation which used the bulletin board advance presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice production using a press operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice preliminary | backup gusset production which used the press operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice production using a center press operation part and a rotation operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice production using a center press operation part and a rotation operation part.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position from the right front is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And the game board 5 having the game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 106) is inserted.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 Attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame upper member 30, the lower end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body The frame lower hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be able to open and close in a forward direction centering on the left side in a front view.

  In the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to partially cover the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-reversed and radiated forward to allow the player to hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained also by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2. Main frame upper hinge member 510 and lower main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 openably and closably, and a metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main frame base unit 500 And a payout base unit 550 for receiving the gaming balls B supplied from the island facilities of the gaming hall, and a payout base unit 550, and a ball launching device 540 for hitting the gaming balls B into the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5. It is attached to a payout unit 560 for paying out the received gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 having a power supply substrate 630 and a payout control substrate 633, and a main body frame base 501. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the top and bottom of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so as to close the opened front side. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square in a front view, It is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a center of the game area 5a in front view The effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the rear side of the game display panel 1100 and the rear side of the effect display device 1600 A peripheral control unit 1500 is configured as that the transparent substrate box, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emission effects according to the game state.

  In the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails which are in contact with the gaming ball B and are installed in a predetermined gauge array, and a predetermined benefit for the player by receiving or passing the gaming ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the front effect unit 2600, and the back-down effect according to the game state which changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. A player can be entertained by causing a movable effect or a light emission effect to be performed by various effect units such as the unit 3100, the back effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, separated from the left and right and extending vertically, the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. Outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends, outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, and upper surface of outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-reversed and emitted forward.

  The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend in the vertical direction, and are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 has an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And the lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame left member 11 is a portion from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a which is recessed to the right in a flat shape in the rear side portion of the left side in the front-rear direction divided into three, and the right side from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a The bulging part 11b bulging toward the direction and the hollow part 11c which penetrates the bulging part 11b up and down are provided. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 11c.

  Moreover, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed to be symmetrical with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b at the left side of 12a is provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a of the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat contact portion 13d which extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and brings the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hooking member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame right member 21 is provided with a recess 21a recessed leftwardly in a flat shape at the rear side of the right and left sides of the right and left sides from the front and back, and a left side from the side opposite to the recess 21a in the left side A bulging portion 21 b bulging in the direction, and a hollow portion 21 c penetrating the bulging portion 21 b up and down are provided. The outer frame right member 21 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the recessed portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side is formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side is formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the right side 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and further front side And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the lower surface of the right end of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout 30a of the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state in which the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut the upper surface of the right end of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout 41a of the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are members to which an outer frame collar 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later is hooked. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21 And a flat plate-like locking piece portion 24b on which the outer frame collar 653 at the upper side is locked.

  The lower hooking member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left from a flat mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 The flat-plate shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame collar 653 is locked and the insertion through which the lower outer frame collar 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the left and right notches 30a.

  Moreover, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with the attachment step part 30b in which the upper surface and front surface were recessed rather than the general surface in the left side edge part. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right, and extends in the left and right direction; A box-shaped front curtain member 42 which is disposed forward of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain member 42 And a box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forwardly open, and a ball biting prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41 a that are respectively recessed to the left and right center sides in a state of penetrating vertically at the centers of the left and right side surfaces in the front and rear direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutouts 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and is provided with a recess 41 b into which the lower portion of the rear curtain plate member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41 b extends in the left and right direction, and extends from the rear position of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recessed portion 41 b widens the volume of the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate formed by the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 as much as possible.

  The front curtain plate member 42 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height The entire rear side is open. The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 has a length in the left-right direction extending slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape whose front is open. The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylindrical portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction which is about 1/3 the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and a depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. Is also formed slightly short. In the connection cylindrical portion 43a, a plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In communication with the internal space of 620 a, an enclosure 624 is formed.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the gaming ball B is retained at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the gaming ball B is held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is for preventing that it is pinched.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is provided with a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 to be described later may be involved; A first discharge port 44b opened upward at the left end of the left end 44a, and a second discharge port 44c opened upward on the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a; An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the resting portion 44a, and an upper end projection projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and inclined to be positioned upward as the upper surface goes rearward And a unit 44e.

  The first discharge port 44 b is formed at a position that matches the discharge hole 60 d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open at the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, when the ball biting preventing mechanism 44 is inserted into a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire is inserted. The rising wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tool entry. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, even if it is bent upward, it abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided on the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the gaming ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is blocked by 44d, the gaming ball B is easily retained on the placement portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B is staying on the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 can not be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is firstly discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The lower outer frame assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance to the left and right and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front and rear direction and attached to the inside of the front curtain plate member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46; And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the pair of guide members 45. The guide member 45 is formed of a low friction material having low friction resistance, and the lower end of the main body frame 4 is made slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain inner space 40 a (the enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame and upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig.22 (a) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper side, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 extends from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a to the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends horizontally from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extension 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending to the left and right center of the front extension 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion The plate-like horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from the end edge to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open from the left side to the front side of the front extension 51b And a flat plate-like end edge wall 51e which is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front and rear direction, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left side extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally forward to the left and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the rear end of the lock main body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to abut on a portion of the edge wall 51e which extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the attachment hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion on the front side of the lock main body 52a in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view by rotating the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation piece 52b, and the bearing groove 51c Can be completely through. Thereby, the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. And an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; and a discharge hole 60d which has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through vertically through the horizontal portion 60a. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached at a left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in a reverse U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The lower portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the state assembled to the outer frame 2, and a screw not shown Is fixed to the rear curtain member 43 by the Further, the rising portion 60 b is attached to a portion on the front side of the bulging portion 11 b in the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60 d matches the first discharge port 44 b of the anti-ball bite mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between 4 and 4 gradually narrows, it rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be more easily prevented from rolling backward than the main frame 4 by discharging the game balls B from the discharge holes 60 d. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 23 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in the front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 which is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4 A glass unit 160 closing the gaming area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, A handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner, a pan unit 200 mounted to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and a front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the pan unit 200. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101 a which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the front right of the door frame base 101 Handle attachment member 102 attached below, speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and attached near the rear end right end in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the left side A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the rear handlebar relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handlebar relay board 106 from the rear side A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and a door A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the gaming balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 which can be operated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing the game which is thrown into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. Fig. 32 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side in a front view in a hinge rotatable manner with respect to the main body frame 4 and closes the front of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle attachment member 102 attached to the front lower right of the door frame base 101 for attaching the handle unit 180. And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in a rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in the rear view in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 A door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the substrate 104 and a handle back relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, the door frame base 101 The back handle handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the back of the handlebar and covers the handle back handle relay board 106 from the back side, and is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 to cover the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-like door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 180 is in the front lower corner, the dish unit 200 is in the lower front of the door window 101a, the door frame left side unit 400 is in the front left outside of the door window 101a, and A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass frame 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and the transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the door window 101a formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 101 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101 a penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the front right lower corner of the front view and is inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the front end and the insertion recess 101c in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth in the cylinder lock 130 The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the

  The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates the ball outlet 150d of the far cover unit 150 forward for the lower bowl ball A passing hole 101f, a ball passing hole 101g for the upper tray which penetrates forward and backward through the ball passage 150a of the far cover unit 150 so as to penetrate forward and backward adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view And a glass unit attachment portion 101h into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, which is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed at the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate) in a front view and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i has the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200 located forward and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101 j which passes through in the front and rear direction below the door window 101 a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101 b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the plate unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101 j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 to be described later penetrates It is formed to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 102a, and a tubular A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c which project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a The outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a are provided.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102 b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. The three ridges 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state in which the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similar inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the speaker duct 103 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 The player can be favorably guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker opening 211 b of the dish unit base 211.

  Moreover, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with the cable holder 103a which hold | maintains the connection cable 503 in the back surface of the downward direction of a cylindrical site | part. The cable holder 103 a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is the same as that of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle back relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle back relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay substrate 104 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle back relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. And FIG. 100) are connected.

  The outer shape of the door frame sub relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending right and left on the front view right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically is combined and extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay substrate 104 and the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 with the door frame base unit 100 assembled are The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the rear cover unit 150.

  The handle back relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101 b below the ball feeding opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle back relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. To relay the When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the handle back relay board 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered by the handle back relay board cover 108.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover · handle back relay board cover · cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the back handle handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending in the reverse L shape up and down) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left in front view are open. In the state assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 covering the rear side and the door frame sub relay board 105 are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle back relay board cover 108 is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the back side of the handle back relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is used. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and an opening for passing the wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction of the lower surface.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is connected to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending up and down, which are disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and the left and the right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 which has been extended, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 which is attached at the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 to the left and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart mountings on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked And the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes which are vertically separated and penetrated in the front-rear direction. In these insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame wedge 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched in a square shape from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end. The notch portion 114 a is formed at a position at which the upper plate ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b coincide with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated from each other in the left and right direction, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction in front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending flatly forward from the side and a flat plate-like front piece portion connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extending portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the site of the insertion hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are stamped and formed of a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is , And assembled so as to be located below the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the ball passing opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101 and the through hole 101j. The cylinder attachment frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101 c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Door frame and hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 mounted movably in the vertical direction on the hinge bracket 121, and a hook attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a square shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the attachment piece 121a is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The wedge member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121 b of the door frame upper hinge pin 122. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the wedge member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124 via the wedge member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121 b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121 b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it down. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 extending in the vertical direction is coaxial with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square-shaped flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125 b.

  The mounting piece 125 a and the protruding piece 125 b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125 b when assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is attached.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged rotatably with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the body frame lower hinge member. Can.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking with The cylinder lock 130 is attached to a cylindrical cylinder main body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter becomes larger toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 for rotation.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 substantially coincides with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the pan unit main body 252 in the pan unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball emitting device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by the operation of the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a which is supplied with gaming balls B from the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. And the rear end of the front cover 141 are closed and the front is opened in a box shape, and the game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front and rear direction A front cover pivotally supported on a rear cover 142 having a striking ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and an axis extending between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 in the front-rear direction. The ball extraction member 143 having a partition 143a that divides the entrance 141a from the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction 143 one back cover 14 The ball feeding member 144 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feed solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144 A ball feed solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feed member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. From 141c, an operating rod 143c of a ball pullout member 143 described later extends forward. Also, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed and guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper ball. And it is formed so that the site | part currently open | released to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from a back side.

  The ball extraction member 143 divides the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b below the inlet 141a, and has a partition 143a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 144; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and being bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a lower part of the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The actuating rod 143c moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extraction button 222 of the disc unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 is directed to the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-like plan view centering on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and the back of the blocking portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b which is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 144c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° centered on the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one gaming ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the collar portion 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 144 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 144b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 142a at the same time as the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b has a partition portion 143a. It is pivoted between the directionally oriented holding position. When the ball feed member 144 is at the supply position, the gaming ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540 and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the gaming ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the gaming ball B remains on the partition portion 143a (the state of staying at the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b is directed to the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b is closed at the ball feeding port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding movement rod 146 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for pivoting the ball feeding member 144 around the vertically extending axis.

  The ball feed operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable about an axially extending axis. It is done. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feed around the right end The left end side closer to the crank 147 is pivoted to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. As it is pivoted back to its initial state. As a result, the ball feed operating rod 146 causes the left end portion (tip) near the ball feed crank 147 to swing in the vertical direction by the ball feed solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and extends in the left and right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b disposed on the side opposite to the side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft portion 147b And a transmission portion 147c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, whereby the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be pivoted about an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feed solenoid 140 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed unit 140 is in a state where the ball feed operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is held Turn to That is, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 144 receives one gaming ball B in the standby position, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released (OFF And the gaming ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 185) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the ball extracting member 143 pivotally supported pivotally or by the weight portion 143 d. However, the actuating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts on the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 222 of the disc unit 200. In the normal state, since the rotation is restricted, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b, and is separated. The game ball B does not intrude.

  Then, when the player presses the upper disc ball extraction button of the dish unit downward, the upper disc ball extraction slider slides downward with the operation transmission unit, and the movement lever 143c is moved with the movement of the operation transmission section downward. Will move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion, the ball extracting member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition Is released. As a result, the gaming ball B entering from the entrance 141a drops toward the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball withdrawal guiding path 241c of the unit 240 after pulling out the upper ball in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper disc ball removal slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242 b with which the operation rod 143 c of the ball removal member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition part 143 a Can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the actuating rod 143c, so that breakage of the ball pullout member 143 etc. can be prevented, and the gaming ball B is a partition It is possible to prevent bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right as viewed from the back of the bat supply port 142a of the rear cover 142. An operation line disabling member 700, which is a first fraud prevention means, is mounted so as to be accommodated in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side There is. In this case, invalidation of the operation line means that the operation of the irregular sphere can not be normally performed by cutting or pinching (stopping) the operation line, winding it up, bonding with hot melt or the like. It says to make it a state.

  The operation line invalidation member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated into upper and lower portions substantially at the center in the vertical direction between predetermined distances from the right side to the left Inclined portions 703 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip end side (the right end side in the front view) of the opposing sides of the portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 And have. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidation member 700 is bent with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700 so that the right end in the front view in the rear view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece portion 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line disabling member 700. Thus, in the plan view, the first portion 701 and the second portion 702 form a sheared portion 700v that spreads in a V-shape toward the right.

  The operation line invalidation member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped sheared portion 700 v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is in the hitting supply port 142 a. It communicates with the

  According to this operation line invalidation member 700, an irregular ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as that of a game ball or the like) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a yarn, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached. Or, synthetic resin balls (of approximately the same diameter) are shot from the upper tray 201 through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540, and are ejected to the upper tray 201 attached to the irregular sphere The ball firing device 540 plays a game when an operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or an illegal action is performed such that an illegal ball is taken in and out of the first starting opening 2002 or the like. An operation line attached to the wrong ball is inserted between the first and second pieces 701 and 702 by the force of the wrong ball fired with a strength that can reach the area 5 a (hit ball). The first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  In addition, as a 1st fraud prevention means provided in the ball | bowl feed unit 140, not only the thing of an above-described form but another form may be sufficient. For example, if the operation line attached to the incorrect ball is cut or narrowed to suppress the cheating, the metal plate may be bent into a form different from the above or the operation line disabling member 700 may be bent. It is good also as composition provided, and it is good also as composition replacing with a metal plate and having a resin molded member which has a shape which can cut or narrow the operation line attached to a false ball.

  In addition, when the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, the non-contact type (for example, proximity switch) of the metal game ball at the above-mentioned standby position (on the above-mentioned partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140. It is possible to prevent the firing of the illegal ball itself by detecting it with the sensor of (4) and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 which is the electric feeding means. In the non-contact type sensor, an irregular ball made of synthetic resin is not detected, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive the ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. Fig.37 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover unit with the lid removed and seen from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover with the lid removed and seen from the rear.

  The false cover unit 150 is attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a force (a launch force that can not reach the game area 5a) weaker than a predetermined force (a launch force that can reach the game area 5a). The game ball B (Fall ball) that did not reach the inside is guided to the lower plate 202, and the game ball B dispensed from the payout device 580 is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 150 is a shallow box-like unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit main body 151 And 152.

  The false cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and the lower normal discharge passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper flat ball supply port 211 a which is a ball opening of the dish unit 200. And the rear ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower ball ball passage unit 610 of the lower part of the main body frame 4 can be communicated with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the main body frame 4 And the ball receptacle 150b.

  In addition, the far cover unit 150 is opened upward at the right side in a front view of the full tank receptacle 150b, and the momentum is insufficient in spite of being fired from the firing rail 544 by the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. A far ball receiving portion 150c for receiving the game ball B (fall ball) dropped to the far ball drop opening 1013 formed between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a; The lower flat ball supply port 211c, which is a forward opening near the lower corner and discharges the gaming ball B received by the full ball receiving hole 150b and the far ball receiving portion 150c forward, as well as an opening for the bowl unit 200. Communication passage 150 for connecting the ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball, the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, the storage passage 150e described later) and the far ball receiving portion 150c It has a, and. The communication passage 150h is provided on the lower side of the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c at a slope opposite to the bottom wall 150g, and an upper passage wall 150i, and approximately one ball from the upper passage wall 150i. The lower passage wall 150j is disposed parallel to each other with a space between them separated, and the start end opens upward to the lower inclined end of the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c, and the end portion with respect to the storage passage 150e. Open downwards.

  In addition, a series of paths from the far ball drop opening 1013 opened between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 through the far ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h and the storage passage 150e to the ball outlet 150d It is a passage, and a return passage 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving hole 150b and the far ball receiving portion 150c and the ball discharging hole 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of gaming balls B. A reservoir passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receptacle 150 b and the far ball receptacle 150 c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball outlet 150 d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the flat cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152; And a spring 155 for biasing the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e. The full tank detection sensor 154 detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e.

  In the far cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B are not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, to some extent in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the gaming balls B moves the upper end of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. As the movable piece 153 rotates, the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls B, so if fullness is detected by the full detection sensor 154, the payout of more gaming balls B is stopped At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall of that effect, and to urge the player to eliminate the filling of the lower tray 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150 a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the dispensing passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 described later of the body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f is provided, which can be in contact with the actuating projection 613a of 613 (see FIG. 109). The door opening and closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to lower end of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b The front opening can be opened.

  In addition, the fal cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidation member 7000 which is a second fraud preventing means for deterring fraud due to the illicit ball Q to which the operation line L is attached. An operation line disabling member 7000H, 7000S, which is a third fraud prevention means, is provided at the foul ball drop opening 1013 established between them.

  The second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the false cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the false ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the figure, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and attached (bonded) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, it is covered and accommodated from the outside by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that it is difficult for the employee or the assembly machine worker or the like to make contact with the hand for safety reasons.

  A specific operation line invalidation member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidation member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the first bent portion 701 in FIG. A V-shape opening in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the ball of the communication passage 150 h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extended from the convex 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 The sheared portion 7000 v of is formed.

  In the fowl cover unit 150 of the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 is the lid member 152 constituting the fal cover unit 150. It is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface and directed toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line disabling member 7000 at the folded portion of the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, while the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface, the bottom wall 150g is directed to the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The width is narrow toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka that descends to the operation line invalidation member 7000 side and the first inclination portion 150ka. And a tapered second guiding portion 150k having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L). Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by rolling of the irregular ball Q or tension from the outside, is in sliding contact with the guiding portion 150k in a wound shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the second inclined portion 150ka to The operation line L is guided to the operation line disabling member 7000 so as to slide the inclined portion 150 kb of Thereby, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal balls and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the incorrect balls Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, corner portions of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the fool cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is set using the space communicating with the game area 5a from the lower ball supply port 211c. The illegal ball Q attached is made to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L extending to the lower ball ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or illegal It is possible to prevent an unfair act that causes the ball Q to move in and out of the first starting opening and the like.

  For example, a fraudulent action such as pushing the wrong ball Q into the return passage 1014 from the lower bowl ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and feeding it back to the firing position of the ball firing device 540 If the incorrect ball Q goes over the folded portion of the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c to the firing position of the firing rail 544, When it is pulled (tension is applied), the operation line L turns around in the same U-turn along the same folding portion. Then, the operation line L is guided by the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, and enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v formed by the first and second portions 7010 and 7020, and finally, Since the operation line L can not be operated as a result of disconnection, it becomes possible to inhibit an illegal act using the illegal sphere Q.

  In addition, a plurality of incorrect balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, and it is intentionally made into a far ball. Even when an illegal act (hereinafter referred to as "incorrect act B") is performed by grabbing the operation line L connected to the illegal ball that has become a far ball and firing the subsequent incorrect ball Q onto the game area 5a, The operation line L present at the folded back portion of the upper aisle wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent firing of the irregular ball Q (tension is applied) L is pressed against the same folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L can not be manipulated, so that cheating using the illegal sphere Q can be suppressed. OK To become. 39 and 40 are explanatory views assuming the case where the injustice B is performed. In addition, for the above-mentioned fraudulent action B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidation member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means can not sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent sphere Q which becomes a foul sphere (for example, it becomes a foul sphere Since the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent sphere Q is fired with a certain level of strength, the present embodiment reinforces the fraud prevention measures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of Therefore, when the fraudulent action B is to be performed, the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud prevention means and the operation line invalidation member 7000H as the third fraud prevention means described later. And 7000S as appropriate, and it is preferable to use a first operation line invalidation member 700 and another second operation line invalidation member 7000 or a third operation line invalidation member 7000H, 7000S. The pachinko machine 1 may be provided together. In this case, since the first operation line invalidation member 700 and the second operation line invalidation member 7000 are provided on the side of the door frame 3 so as not to be exposed to the outside together, they are hard to be noticeable Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble of the fraud countermeasure information is hard to leak. In addition, since the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 affect the crime prevention performance due to a reduction in sharpness, etc., it is easy to maintain the crime prevention performance if they are replaced together with the door frame 3.

  By the way, although the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut and invalidate the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v, the operation line L is clamped. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to make it impossible to push or pull the flexible operation line L, so that it is not possible to easily operate the irregular sphere Q connected to the operation line L May be invalidated.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion in the enlarged view of FIG. The front half of the non-joining portion at the front end of the front end is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joining portion is a stopper portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidation member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, it is difficult to contact the hands of an employee or a game machine assembler, etc., for safety reasons. And is covered and accommodated from the outside by a lid member 152.

  According to the operation line invalidation member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the incorrect ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded back portion is turned into a U-turn, it is guided to the operation line disabling member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k of the folded back portion, and the holding portion in the second half of the non-joined portion of the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 It is pinched and pinched by 7044 like tweezers.

  As a result, the incorrect ball Q backflowing from the lower flat ball supply port 211c due to the above-mentioned incorrect action A reaches the firing position of the launch rail 544, or the incorrect ball Q intentionally turned into a far ball by the incorrect action B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower flat ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, and the operation line L is pinched by the operation line disabling member 7000 even if it reaches it. Because of the presence of the flexible operation line L from the lower ball supply port 211c, it is only slackened there, and as a result, the extension amount of the operation line L can not be adjusted (the irregular ball Q hanging in the game area 5a Since the height can not be adjusted), it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the illicit ball Q.

  In the embodiment described above, the front half of the non-joining portion of the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033 and the rear half of the non-joining portion is the stopper portion 7044 However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the leading end portion of one bent plate surface is expanded in a V shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guide portion And the pinched portion of both plate surfaces may be used as the stopper portion 7044. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud deterrence effect.

  Although not shown, the operation line invalidation member 7000 for holding the operation line L is provided with a double-sided tape in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. Thus, the adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L thus induced to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion and be immobile.

  Further, the operation line disabling member 7000 for holding the operation line L changes the above-described one composed of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 into a coil spring as shown in FIG. The guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guiding portion 150 k may be installed and formed so as to be substantially orthogonal to the central axis of the self. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted and held between adjacent coils of the coil spring.

  It is to be noted that coil springs having a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other at no load, such as tension coil springs or torsion coil springs, need to be installed in compression as in compression coil springs. It is advantageous in installation work compared with.

  Also, the coil spring may of course be installed in a straight state with no load, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coils on the entry side of the operation line L are curved and installed in a slightly expanding direction This is preferable because the approach of the operation line L becomes smoother. As described above, when the operation line invalidation member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured inexpensively, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidation member 7000 described above from the ball opening (lower bowl ball supply port 211c), and the induction plate 150k to the operation line invalidation member 7000 is blocked with this cell plate. In the embodiment described above to cope with this, the course change portion of the return passage 1014 of the far ball (in the present embodiment, the portion corresponding to the lower ball supply port 211c) A slit 1015 is formed in which the cell plate (foreign substance) enters (see FIG. 39). As a result, it is also possible to prevent a further fraudulent attempt to insert a foreign substance from the opening for ball (the lower flat ball supply port 211c) to close the guiding portion 150k. In addition, as correspondence of the illegal work which inserts foreign substances, such as a cell board, from the opening for balls (lower bowl ball supply port 211c) and tries to block the induction part 150k, foreign substances such as the cell board as the above-mentioned slit 1015 The configuration is not limited to the one that forms the intake port, but as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 39, a configuration is provided that has a projection-like obstacle 1016 that causes foreign objects such as cell plates to collide and hinder reaching the induction 150k. As a further advanced fraud protection may be achieved.

  Also, the first and second operation line disabling members 700 and 7000 described above have a static structure that waits for entry of the operation line L to be disabled, but FIGS. 49, 50, and 51. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D may be used to actively invalidate the operation line L due to the presence of the incorrect sphere Q.

  49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). Is pivotally attached to a path change unit (a corner corresponding to the lower flat ball supply port 211c).

  That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line invalidation member 7000D has a horizontal plate-like ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-like invalidation portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. And an arc-shaped ball stopper 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 which is provided on the right side of the upper edge of the invalidation section 2646, and has an axial hole 2647 formed at a corner where the invalidation section 2646 crosses A support shaft 2649 implanted in the fal cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a). It can swing to the release position. Further, a balance weight 2660 is provided on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the shaft hole 2647 of the invalidation portion 2646 in the operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is activated by the balance weight 2660. In the state where no external force (specifically, a load for one game ball) is applied, the ball receiving attitude of FIG. 50 (a) is maintained, while a load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. When it is rocked to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b).

  Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersection side portion 2651 which pivots around the shaft hole 2647 and which crosses the far ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b), the cross side 2651 is fitted to the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal farball flows into the far cover unit 150 provided with the above-described dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, this far ball flows in the communication passage 150h of the far ball return passage as shown in FIG. 50 (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward in the course changing portion, the ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. The load of the ball causes the operation line disabling member 7000D to rotate counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 to change to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b). As a result, the ball placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is discharged to the storage passage 150e downstream, so the operation line invalidation member 7000D released from the far ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, there may be a case where a plurality of fall balls are generated at one time, but even in such a case, while the previous fall ball is processed by the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the later fall ball is as shown in FIG. Is stopped by the arc-shaped ball stopper 2648, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is returned and subsequently processed. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul spheres are generated at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any problem.

  Next, the above-mentioned fraudulent action B (a plurality of incorrect balls Q are connected to the operation line L to the fal cover unit 150 provided with the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D The ball is deliberately weakly fired to make a foul ball and removed from the lower ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball, and further grasping the operation line L connected to the ball for subsequent fraud When an illegal ball Q flows into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the course changing portion changes the course downward. Immediately after, the ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the incorrect ball Q, the operation line invalidation member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 to change to the release posture of FIG. 51 (b). At this time, the invalidation part 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is also rotated, and the cross side 2651 of the end edge crosses the far ball return passage and is fitted to the receiving part 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the fowl ball return path, the operation line L passing through it naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L can not move between the crossing side 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. 51 (b) Stop. In this case, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L can not be dropped, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is located at a position where it does not reach even if the hand is inserted from the lower flat ball supply port 211c which is an opening for balls, there is no possibility that the irregular ball Q stopping at this position is extracted from the outside.

  If reverse movement of the operation line L is made difficult by, for example, meandering the operation line L between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the state captured in the operation line invalidation member 7000D It will also be difficult to pull the incorrect ball Q back to the hitting supply port 142a. Thereby, the irregular sphere Q remaining in the operation line invalidation member 7000D can be stored and recovered as a proof sphere.

  The above-described dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D utilizes the weight of the incorrect ball Q. However, even if the operation line invalidation member 7000D is operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D shown in FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as the electric drive means to the portion provided with the above-described balance weight 2660 and a ball detector in the disabling portion 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when the gaming ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised and the operation line disabling member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the release posture Also, when the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (change of signal from presence to absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered to operate the operation line The invalidation member 7000D returns from the release position to the ball receiving position .

  When a normal ball is mounted on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the generation and emission of the ball is detected by the change of the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives In order to operate appropriately, the balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line invalidation member 7000D using the own weight.

  On the other hand, when the incorrect ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the incorrect ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the incorrect ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is held between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation unit 2646 and the incorrect ball Q does not fall Since the ball detector 2655 does not emit a release signal, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the raised position. Therefore, since the unfair ball Q can not be taken out from the targeted ball opening, it is possible to prevent unfairness in advance.

  The above-described dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D cuts and invalidate the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersection side 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation unit 2646. be able to. In addition, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of blocking the intrusion of the incorrect ball Q from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 1014, an incorrect ball described later It can also be used as means for preventing reverse travel. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has a shutter plate structure that opens and closes the communication passage 150h by linearly advancing and retracting the disabling portion, for example, and the tip of the shutter plate The ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream from the movable area of the intersection side while passing through the movable area of the intersection side. After this, the irregular sphere Q is detected by this sphere detector to activate the nullifying portion, and the operation line L is then pinched or cut off at the intersection side across the communication passage 150h. It is also good.

  Also, the above-described dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D can be applied to the first operation line disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line disabling member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line disabling member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launcher 540, the fraud suppressing effect can be surely enhanced.

  Further, FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D which winds up the operation line L to invalidate it.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D is mounted in the communication passage 150h of the fal cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable about the rotation axis 2656 that is orthogonal to the passage, and the angular ring disabling portion 2646 is provided. And a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the invalidation unit 2646 as the intersection side 2651 and provided downstream of the movable (rotational) area of the intersection side 2651. A sphere detector 2655 is provided, and the disabling unit 2646 is rotated once each time a sphere is detected by the ball detector 2655.

  When a normal farball flows into the far cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line invalidation member 7000D, this farball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the invalidation section 2646, and the farball is detected as a ball. The invalidation unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the container 2655, but the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged from the ball opening to the outside.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B flows into the fal cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal sphere Q dives the invalidation unit 2646. Since the irregular sphere Q is detected by the sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L wraps around the invalidation unit 2646 because it passes through the conversion unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal sphere Q remains in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that it will be in the hands of the illegal person.

  The sphere detector 2655 for detecting the irregular sphere Q may be displaced upon receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the irregular sphere Q. In such a case, the irregular sphere Q can be detected with certainty. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line disabling member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

  The above description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line disabling member includes the following technical ideas.

"A game area where a game is played with a game ball,
A ball launcher for launching game balls;
A launch passage portion forming a launch ball passage communicating from the launch position of the sphere launcher to the gaming area;
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening for releasing gaming balls to the outside in front of the machine;
The fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation of the operation line attached to the incorrect ball from the front of the machine;
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidation member that inactivates by holding or cutting or winding the operation line,
The operation line invalidation member has an intersection side crossing the far ball return path of the game ball and activates the intersection side after the irregular sphere passes the movable area of the intersection side to activate the far side ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is made to cross a return passage, and the operation line passing through the far ball return passage at the intersection side is stopped or cut or wound up. "

  Next, the third fraud prevention means provided at the above-mentioned foul ball drop opening 1013 is the end (end) of the firing rail 544 as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 39, FIG. And an operation line invalidation member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a rail base 1001x made of resin).

  The operation line disabling member 7000H provided at the end of the launch side of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-shaped so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge thereof. It covers with the safety cover part 1017 put in order. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, the illegal ball Q is pushed back into the return passage 1014 from the lower ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and is fed back to the discharge position of the ball discharge device 540. When A is performed, when the incorrect ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolled by inclination to the firing position, it is pulled (tension is applied) to it and the operating line L is the operating line disabling member It is cut by touching the 7000H cutting blade. Therefore, the operation line L can not be operated.

  In addition, a plurality of incorrect balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, and it is intentionally made into a far ball to be a ball opening lower ball supply port 211c. Even when an illegal act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is fired to fire the subsequent illegal ball Q onto the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q becomes a far ball and the return passage 1014 Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line disabling member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L can not be operated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47, the operation line disabling member 7000S provided on the resin-made rail base 1001x that constitutes the outer rail 1001 includes a large number of hard resin-made wire members in a brush shape. It will be erected.

  According to the operation line invalidation member 7000S, the incorrect ball Q temporarily hangs in a state where it reaches the game area 5a and is connected to the operation line L, and the lower control ball supply port which is an opening for the ball is the end of the operation line L Even if an illegal person is grasping through 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the incorrect sphere Q of the game area 5a, the tension of the operation line L is caused by the tension between the wires of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. After that, even if the hand operating the operation line L is loosened to lower the incorrect ball Q, the operation line L is not easily slipped due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line disabling member 7000S. The movement of the hand loosened from the ball is not transmitted to the wrong ball Q. That is, since the injustice ball Q in the game area 5a can not be lowered, it is possible to suppress the injustice using the injustice ball Q as a result.

  Thus, in the third fraud prevention means, the operation line disabling member 7000H on the side of the firing rail 544 exerts an effect at the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line disabling member 7000S on the side exerts an effect, a higher degree of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Of course, either one of the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S can be used alone, and the operation line invalidation member 7000H and the specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidation member 7000S can also be implemented. The forms may be interchanged, or the same invalidation member may be adopted.

  In addition to the case where the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S are separately provided as in the embodiment and attached to the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001, for example, the metal plate constituting the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line The integral member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire is integrally formed on the resin rail base 1001x forming the outer rail 1001, or a V groove shape is formed at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. The clamping portion 7000Sv may be engraved and the operation line L may be drawn and clamped in the back of the groove of the clamping portion 7000Sv.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, the operation line invalidation member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line invalidation member 7000, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIGS. , 7022, and the guide base 1501x formed of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, in the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidation member 7000 for invalidating the operation line L attached to the incorrect ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, the third operation line invalidation member 7000 is Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is of course not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the operation line disabling member 7000 is provided at the folded portion of the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, at the entrance of the communication passage 150h A line disabling member 7000 is provided at the outlet portion (see arrow z in FIG. 39) of the communication passage 150h, provided on the rear surface side of the ball outlet 150d in FIG. The operation line L is a portion where the operation line L is bent in contact with a part of the return passage 1014, such as provided at each of the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the emission rail 544. Provided at any position in the return passage 1014 on the condition that it is a portion to be subjected to pressing force when trying to stretch straight under tension by an unauthorized person and tension. Unishi may be. The installation position of the operation line invalidation member 7000 in the embodiment is a position where the player can not touch even if the player inserts a fingertip through the ball opening, and this position is the player's safety surface and operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of a crime prevention surface that makes it difficult to tamper with the conversion member 7000 itself.

  Further, in the embodiment, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided to be offset to one side of the communication passage 150h, but as the operation line invalidation member 7000 as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b) A cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the communication passage 150h are comb-shaped safety cover portions 1017 so that the cutting edge of the cutting blade is a worker Do not touch the The cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000 in this case uses a known blade structure or tip structure and is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and the unit main body 151 If a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152 so that the cutting blade can be pushed out in a grater manner for replacement between new and old, sharp sharpness can always be maintained. In FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), reference numeral 1021 denotes a holding parting line for the operation line L cut into the valley part of the safety cover 1017, and the operating line L can bite into the holding parting line 1021. It is supposed to be. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidation member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the holding parting line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g or the like. improves.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the balls are returned to the lower plate, but there is also a gaming machine having a structure in which the balls are returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, using the space communicating with the game area 5a from the upper ball and ball supply port (the opening for ball), the illegal act Q causes the illegal ball Q attached to the game area 5a to Cheating similar to B) may occur. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that the second fraud preventing means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating with the gaming area 5a from the upper ball feeding port as in the embodiment described above. it can.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the fal cover unit 150 which comprises the return channel | path part 1014 was provided in the door frame 3 side, you may provide the fal cover unit 150 in the main body frame 4 side.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although one 2nd fraud prevention means was provided in the foul cover unit 150 which comprises the return channel | path part 1014, you may make it provide multiple. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the embodiment described above are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (in each of the folded portions) Two fraud prevention means may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to further enhance the deterrence effect of the fraudulent acts using the fraudulent sphere Q.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the metal cover was provided as a 2nd fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 which comprises the return channel | path part 1014, not a metal plate but the resin molding of the same structure is provided. Alternatively, the molding itself of the fal cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so that it can function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, without providing the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the embodiment described above, instead, a taper provided in a folded portion of the bottom wall 150g of the far ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest portion (the narrowest portion) of the guide portion 150k, a slit-like capture portion is formed on the resin molded component constituting the return passage portion 1014. The operation line L attached to the irregular sphere Q may be held by the capturing portion which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same fraud suppression effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or held by the operation line invalidation member 7000. However, as shown in FIG. 45, FIG. 46, and FIG. 49, the unauthorized ball Q is prevented from entering from the ball opening without affecting the flow down of the normal far ball (i.e., the reverse / reflux of the incorrect ball Q is prevented) By providing the reverse movement preventing means, it is possible to prevent the fraud due to the fraud sphere Q.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, for example, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign substance) that pushes the incorrect ball Q into the path changing portion of the return passage portion 1014 (the portion corresponding to the upper right of the lower flat ball supply port 211c). Not only that, but it can be illustrated that the attractor 1022 is provided to attract the incorrect sphere Q itself to another passage and seal the movement (first incorrect sphere reverse prevention means). In this way, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent action such as the fraudulent action A described above that backflows the fraudulent sphere Q without affecting the flow of the normal farball. In addition, at the inlet portion of the inducer 1022, a capture valve (permits intrusion into the attractor 1022) which can swing only in the direction of intrusion of the counterfeit ball Q into the inducer 1022, and from the attractor 1022 A single-opening type valve (not shown) may be provided to make it impossible to withdraw, whereby it is possible to leave a trace of using the wrong ball Q and a proof of performing a wrongdo.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 which can be swung only in the flow-down direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage 1014 to prevent reverse movement of the incorrect ball Q. Yes (2nd illegal ball reverse prevention means). With such a configuration, it is also possible to prevent a cheating action that backs up a cheating ball Q such as the cheating action A described above without affecting the flow of normal far balls. The operation line disabling member 7000D shown in FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  Also, the above-described static operation line invalidation member and dynamic operation line invalidation member may naturally be combined.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidation member different from the first operation line invalidation member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014, but such an operation line invalidation member may be, for example, a fall ball drop opening 1013. And the firing position, or between the ball drop opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects as described above can be exhibited.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably inserted from the rear into the glass unit attachment portion 101 h so as to close the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 enables the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (forward) It closes the front of the area 5a.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 101h larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the inside of the glass frame 161 closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be in contact with the projection 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 115).

  The glass unit attachment member 163 has a disk-like base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-like projection from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101 a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure to the procedure mentioned above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 by the protrusion 163b when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is located below the base 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the protrusion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the backward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 170 is disposed with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projection 172 projecting short rearwardly along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 171, and left and right And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward beyond the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed along a portion of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection 172, and its strength and rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projection 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area It does not prevent the game ball B from being driven into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is resiliently locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the crime prevention cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 54 and the like. FIG. 54 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the player. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182 A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and a cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state in which the three groove portions 181c coincide with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively inserted in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is such that the side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the portion of the handle 182 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 182 b is configured such that the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges outward and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 182a It also protrudes slightly high. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182 d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183 a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In the present example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and has a light transmitting property. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can make the user perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is applied with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a by the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes, in the handle 182, four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, and the handle 182 is rotated most in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Of the first protrusion 182 a when the fourth protrusion 182 d does not rotate the handle 182 when the game ball B is most strongly hit into the game area 5 a (so-called “right hit”). The position is substantially the same as the position, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 at the position of “right-handed” in a comfortable state by changing the fourth protrusion 182 d as the first protrusion 182 a and holding the handle 182. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the plate unit from the back. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 at a position lower than the door window 101 a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper dish 201 and the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper dish 201 and the far cover unit 150 And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The pan unit 200 has a pan 201 and is mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The pan unit 210 is mounted on the front of the pan base unit 210. And a rendering operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-like plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to the front and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the top surface of the mounting base 213; An upper counterball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper counterball removal unit 240 mounted at the rear of the upper counterball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. Tray unit main body 252, a lower plate ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decorative unit 270 separately attached to the upper front of the plate unit main body 252 A dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 mounted below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotating operation by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by pressing operation by the player. The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 for emitting and decorating the rendering operation ring 330, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320 Vibration speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 And have.

  The whole is bulging forward as a whole, and the rendering operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 is obliquely upward forward at the center in the lateral direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper surface While the upper plate 201 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, the ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed of the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in the shape of a container which is largely expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. In the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. In the upper tray 201, the front end recedes rearward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). In the upper tray 201, the entire bottom surface including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end side in a front view of the guiding passage portion 201a is below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is placed on the lower end of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper ball supply port 211a. It inclines so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thus, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The induction passage portion 201a is provided with a metal earth metal fitting 201b electrically grounded (earth ground) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game The static electricity charged to the ball B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction in a front view. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the gaming balls B, and is provided at the bottom wall with a lower countersink extraction hole 202a which penetrates up and down and can discharge the gaming balls B. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 a of the lower tray 202 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lower bowl ball extraction unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends leftward and rightward, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray 202, lower countersink holes 202a penetrating vertically are disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower ball open hole 202a. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the tray unit 200.

  The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower flat ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and open the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the above can be discharged to the lower side (e.g., dollar box) of the dish unit 200. Further, in the state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower flat ball supply port 211c, so It is possible to quickly discharge the released game ball B downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is a front perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 60 is a rear perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front.

  The plate base unit 210 is a flat plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The mounting base 213 is attached to the right of the main body 212 and the upper pan body 212 at the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the pan unit base 211 And the tray unit relay board 214.

  Further, the bowl base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper bowling ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , And an after-the-counter ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 at the rear of the table ball removal front unit 230.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open rear) Box-shaped).

  The pan unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan ball supply port 211a and the upper pan and ball supply port 211a extending cylindrically rearward. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower circular bulb supply port 211c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and cylindrically extends backward; A notch 211d is notched in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and front and rear in the front right upper side of the lower flat ball supply port 211c And an upper flat ball feed port 211e which extends upward and downward and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, and is raised on the left side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, on which the mounting base is placed. A slider insertion port 211g which penetrates back and forth in the lower part of the pan body and into which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper disc ball removal slider 242 of the upper disc ball removal unit 240 is inserted and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view Handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view And a mouth 211i.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 211 a of the bowl unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper bowl 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper bowl ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101 g is penetrated from the front side to be connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 is supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper ball dispensing port 211 a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and the cylindrical rear end is the lower disc ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected with the front end of ball emission mouth 150d of far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower countersink supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball extraction guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the removal of the upper ball is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower ball supply port 211c. ing. Thus, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball extraction button 222, the upper ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper The lower ball and ball supply port 211c is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b and the ball removal and introducing passage 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper flat ball feeding port 211 e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241 a of the rear base 241 in the upper flat ball dropping unit 240 in a state assembled to the flat base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the unit 240 after ball removal to the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the upper dish 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends in the left and right direction, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward largely from the center in the left and right in a front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes backward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B ing. The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper tray main body 212 is closed at the top near the right end.

  The upper tray main body 212 is attached to the lower end of the bowl unit 200 so that the portion closed at the upper side in the vicinity of the right end sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled in the tray unit 200. Further, in the upper tray main body 212, a rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the pan base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the pan unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211 f of the pan unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper side is open. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetration port 213b penetrating vertically in the rear right corner.

  The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is a hole through which the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is removed. Moreover, the wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213 b.

[3-5-3 d. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay substrate 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, and the operation unit relay substrate 392 It is to do. The tray unit relay substrate 214 is attached to the right of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the back side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the bowl base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 55 to 62 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine, or use the ball rental machine It is for deducting and returning the part of the game ball B from which the cash and prepaid card thrown in to were loaned out, or returning.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is configured of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be viewed through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit when the ball rental machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Upper flat ball removal unit and upper flat ball removal unit]
The unit 230 for removing the counter ball and the unit 240 for removing the counter ball in the disc base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper flat ball extraction unit 230 and the upper flat ball extraction unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed to operate the upper tray 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower tray 202.

  The upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement projection 211 f on the front surface of the bowl unit base 211. The upper bowl ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the bowl unit base 211 at a position behind the upper bowl ball removal unit 230.

  The upper ball and ball removal front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the disk unit base 211 and extends in the up and down direction, and is movably inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 211 near the front of the upper pan and ball feed port 211 e and the slider insertion port 211 g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper flat ball extraction. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper countersink ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the disk unit base 211 so as to close the upper ball and ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction An upper ball ball slide slider 242 slidably mounted, a spring 243 urging the upper ball ball slide slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241; Is equipped.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is opened forward and a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. The ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received gaming ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and the game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b And a ball extraction guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and guiding it to the right in a rear view.

  The ball socket 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feed guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feed unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the gaming ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 is made to enter the entrance 141 a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241 a and the ball feeding guide path 241 b.

  The portions of the ball extraction guide path 241c that extend to the left and right are projected to the right in the rear view and inclined so that the right end in the rear view is lower than the part to which the upper disc ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached. And open on the right side in a rear view. The rear side of the ball extension guiding path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The upper part of the part extending vertically up and down below the ball feeding and guiding passage 241b is located in front of the ball pulling out port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when the ball pulling and guiding passage 241c is assembled in the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending leftward and rightward is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211 d of the lower circular bulb supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guiding path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

  The upper flat ball slide slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242 a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and the operation receiving portion 242 a And an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a is formed flat. In addition, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper ball ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the front flat ball. Further, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation transmission portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates the ball extraction member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. A weir 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper countersink slider 242, and the upper countersink slider 242 is biased upward. Therefore, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

  The upper counter ball removal unit 230 and the upper counter ball removal unit 240 have the upper counter ball removal slider 242 positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper counter ball removal slider 242 The upper flat screen extraction button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper flat ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmission portion 242b is blocked. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b to separate the two.

  Therefore, in a state in which the upper ball and ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141 a and the ball extraction hole 141 b is separated in the ball feeding unit 140, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball socket 241 a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting supply port 142a to the ball emitting device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 The actuating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removal member 143 rotates the ball removal member 143 to divide the partition 143a. Is retracted from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the gaming ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receptacle 241a and the ball feed guiding path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. It will be done. The gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower flat ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper plate 201 are discharged into the lower plate 202 after being discharged into the plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is released, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper pan via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 is lifted, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the actuating rod 143c in contact with the actuating transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 is decorating almost the whole of the dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish main body 251 and the dish unit base to cover the outer circumference of the lower dish main body 251. A bowl unit main body 252 attached to the front of the bowl 211, a lower bowl ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and a bowl separately mounted on the upper front of the bowl unit main body 252 Upper left decorative unit 270 and lower right upper decorative unit 275, and lower left upper decorative unit 280 and lower right upper decorative unit 275 mounted on the entire surface of lower unit body 252, lower left lower decorative unit 280 and lower right lower decorative unit And 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) which extends in the left and right direction and is open at the upper and the rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear is closed.

  The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends in the left and right direction, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray main body 251, in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view, a lower countersink hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed. The lower tray main body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the lower spherical ball opening 202a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower tray body 251 is in a state in which the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the tray unit main body 252 in a state where the lower tray main body 251 is assembled in the tray decoration unit 250. Further, the lower tray main body is in a state assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is positioned lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is a lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210, and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The pan unit body 252 bulges so that the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left and right direction bulges forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the plate unit main body 252 is curved such that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward.

  The pan unit main body 252 bulges forward toward the center in the left and right direction from the left and right ends in the upper part and extends upward and separately from the upper side bulged part 252a spaced apart in the left and right And a bottom plate portion 252c extending in the form of a flat plate from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b to the rear in such a manner as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251. .

  The left and right upper side bulged parts 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and the front left dish upper left decoration unit 270, the lower left lower decoration unit 280, the upper right upper decoration unit 275 and the lower right decoration unit 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The pan unit main body 252 is formed with a lower pan opening 252d which penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that the player's finger can be inserted, and the lower plate opening 252d is formed to be wider upward and downward as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 is a front notch portion 252e which is notched upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is notched at a lower part of The lower countersunk ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Furthermore, the pan unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted; It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h which penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging parts 252a which becomes the center in the horizontal direction. And a rendering operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where it is assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower disc ball extraction button 263 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260 faces forward from the front notch portion 252e, and the lower disc ball extraction base 261 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower bowl ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and stores the game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges the game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction holes 202a. It is intended to

  The lower disc ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower disc body 251 and has a flat lower disc ball extraction base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view; A slider 262 slidably mounted to the front and back on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower countersunk ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward; The lower disc ball lid 265 opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and the holding mechanism 266 holds the lower disc ball lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262.

  The lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed to close the bottom notch 252f of the disk unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a of the lower disk 202 (lower disk main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted on the lower disc ball removal base 261 in the front and rear direction at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the left. The slider 262 is provided with a projecting pin projecting cylindrically upward.

  The lower disc ball ejection lid 265 is attached to the lower disc ball ejection base 261 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending up and down at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at the left end side. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower flat ball lid 265 is formed with a slit extending in the left and right direction in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the plate unit main body 252 in a state assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate 252c. In addition, the lower countersunk ball extraction button 263 is facing forward from the front cutout 252e of the main dish unit main body 252. Under normal conditions, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower microcontroller ball lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole in the normal state. And the through hole (the lower countersink hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265, and the gaming ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower ball ball extraction button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  Under normal conditions, when the lower ball extraction button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower ball extraction button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower flat ball lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower flat ball lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end is backward It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower countersink hole 202a is opened, The gaming ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  In addition, when the slider 262 is moved backward by the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 is not moved forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower ball removal cover 265 is kept turned to the rear, and the lower ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the gaming balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously used. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower ball extraction button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pushed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. Ru. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball releasing button 263 returns to the state where it matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower ball removal cover 265 is pivoted so that the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5-4e. Upper left decoration unit and upper right decoration unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the main unit 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are for decorating the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semicylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the back side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending to the left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the back into the dish upper left decoration 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the plate upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decoration substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left decoration 271 can be made to emit light.

  The left upper part of the upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the left left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the upper central decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left decoration 271 is The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semicylindrical shape extending laterally and has a light transmitting property, the dish upper right decoration 276 and the dish upper right reflector 277 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, A dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is mounted on the back side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decoration 276 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely rightward at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from behind into the dish upper right decoration 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decoration 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decoration 276 can be decorated to emit light.

  The right upper part of the upper right decoration unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the upper part decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are illuminated, the entire front face of the dish upper right decoration 276 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4 f. Lower left decoration unit and lower right decoration unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower front of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the main unit 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Be The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 .

  The lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The lower left decoration 281 has a lower left reflector 282 mounted on the rear side of the lower left decoration 281. A dish lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the back side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The lower left decorative body 281 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decorative body 271 and the upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped so that the semi-cylinder is bent. The left lower end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. This dish lower left decoration 281 is formed milky white.

  The lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left decoration substrate 283 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the lower left decoration 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decoration board 283 is a full color LED, and by emitting light, the lower left decoration 281 can be made to emit light.

  With the lower left decoration unit 280 assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it looks as if the left end is sunk into the door frame 3. The lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical, horizontally extending, light transmitting dish lower right decoration 286 and a dish lower right decoration attached to the back of the dish lower right decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration 286 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a of the right side. The lower right decoration 286 is a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the half cylinder is formed to be bent. The right lower end of the lower right decoration 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This dish lower right decoration 286 is formed milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the back into the inside of the dish lower right decoration 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. The lower right decoration substrate 288 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending leftward and rightward along the lower right decoration 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish lower right decoration 286 can be decorated with light emission.

  The right lower end of the lower right decoration unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration 286 of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the dish lower right decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plural LEDs of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the dish lower right decoration 286 The entire front surface of the light emitting device can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the pan unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the direction of movement of the effect operation button. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and while decorating the plate unit 200, the player operates and participates in the rendering when the player participation type rendering is performed. It can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than a half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. The ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation portion 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 A transmission gear 350 for operation ring that transmits rotation between the unit 302 and the gear 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for operation ring to the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the rendering operation ring 330, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 The decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the above, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face inside the ring of the effect operation ring 330 The rendering operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Effect operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and expanded forward, and a unit front The dish center upper reflector 313 is mounted from the rear in the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 And a lower center decoration substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit main body 252 It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to a virtual plane formed on the front semicircular arc extending upper end edge is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drainage holes 311 a formed at the lowest position when assembled into the pan unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward so that the shape in plan view follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. It is attached. The unit front cover 312 is a plate central upper decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front below the dish central upper decoration 312a. And a dish center lower decoration body 312 b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulging semicircular arc follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the dish center lower decoration 312 b.

  The plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed by dividing a cylinder of substantially the same thickness (radius) into halves and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the dividing surface facing the center side It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends with a large curvature in a semicircular arc shape with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It has a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish upper center decoration 312a protrudes forward than the front end of the dish center lower decoration 312b. Further, when assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper center decoration body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275 The left and right ends of 312 b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed milky white.

  The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about half the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish upper central reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape which bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish central upper decoration body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) on the upper surface Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper center decoration body 312a can be illuminated and decorated.

  The lower center dish reflector 315 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower stage center decoration 312 b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The lower center dish reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower center dish decoration substrate 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) on the upper surface Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b can be lighted and decorated.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of extending in a semicircular arc shape in the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, so When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower center lower decoration substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end projecting forward more than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper center decoration body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decoration body 271 and the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b is the dish lower left decoration body 281 and the dish right It is continuous with the lower decoration 286. Thus, the rendering operation unit 300 is made to stand out and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5-5 b. Controller base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper tray main body 212 in the dish base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having a substantially cubic outer shape and extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 whose upper portion is open, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape The upper attachment which is formed on the flange base 322, the plurality of (here four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom of the main body 321, and the rear end of the flange 322 and attached to the disc base unit 210 A portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 which is opened upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for operation ring.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into a sound such as voice or music and output it. it can.

  The leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. In the main body portion 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outer side of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outer side of the rear wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer periphery thereof substantially matches the inner periphery of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. A rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 and a decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the rendering operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for operation ring around an axis extending in the left and right direction in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is attached to the gear bearing 325, the upper portion of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring protrudes upward, and the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is a flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  The upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in a state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 300. Moreover, in the state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with it.

[3-5-5 c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 71 and 72 and the like. FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 71 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 which can be rotationally operated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) about twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

  The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and rotatably mounted around a vertically extending shaft on the ring mounting base 331 and are attached to the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotating base 332 upward And a ring retaining member 334 which regulates the movement.

  Also, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotational operation portion 302 and the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation portion 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 to constitute a part of the rotation operation portion 302 And an in-ring cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the placement portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably disposed in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge and the placement portion 331a on the upper surface And a boss 331 b for projecting cylindrically upward from a plurality (four in this case) of parts and for mounting the bush 333 rotatably and spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331 a on the upper surface And a through-hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. The plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The outer diameter of the rotation base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332 a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes to the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332 a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332 a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332 a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350 a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which circular arcs forming the outer and upper portions in a circular shape are arranged three-dimensionally And an outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extending in the circumferential direction after extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335 a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc in the range of 1⁄4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335 b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335 c extends slightly lower than the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer lower portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction And a plurality of outer lower cover attachment portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336 b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc constituting an inner upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis And an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1⁄8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337 c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion in the range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 is capable of emitting light by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5 d. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and the like. FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for operation ring A gear cover rotatably mounting the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covering the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side 346, and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346, and detects a rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape which is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and opened leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is constituted by a spur gear-like first gear 344a meshing with the drive gear, and a spur gear-like second gear 344b integrally rotating with the first gear 344a and having a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a having a diameter (a size twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) larger than the transmission gear 344 and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345 b have a length in the circumferential direction equal to the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345 b are arranged circumferentially at intervals of a rotational angle of 45 degrees. The detection pieces 345 b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345 b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated at a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected through the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring. Engage with Further, the whole of the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 can freely set the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 may cause the rotary operation unit 302 to oscillate in a reciprocating manner by oscillating the drive gear 343 by means of the operation ring drive motor 342 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  In the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345 b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction of the rotation operation. The rotation operation of the player can be assisted by driving the motor 342, and the rotation operation of the player is controlled by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Can be loaded. Therefore, by combining these as appropriate, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or click feeling according to the contents of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation portion base 320 It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The transmission gear 350 for operation ring rotates integrally with the ring gear portion 350a in the bevel gear shape, which meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 And a spur gear-like drive-side gear portion 350b engaged with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The pitch circle of the ring gear portion 350a and the drive gear portion 350b are formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-like ring side gear portion 350 a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for operation ring is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320, so that it is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320. Be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted and rotated.

[3-5-5 f. Effect operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can emit light and decorate the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided back and forth, and a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a semicircle on the rear side It is comprised with the back decoration board | substrate 352b formed in the elongate strip plate shape which has arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. Similar to the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the decoration substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear, and is a front substrate cover that covers the front decoration substrate 352a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 A rear substrate cover 353 b and a rear substrate cover 353 b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 from the upper side covering the rear decorative substrate 352 b are configured.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and thereby the rotation operation unit 302 is configured through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331 c of the ring attachment base 331. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the light emission decoration that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and can output various frequencies of vibration in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds (sounds) such as sound, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player has a feeling as if the effect operation unit 300 is shaking. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared to a vibration device in which a decentered weight is rotated by a motor, and can provide a player with more various effects.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, so that sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In this case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in the characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is input as a frequency having a width rather than being a single frequency. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweeped) eight times in about one second for each one cycle in 1 Hz units. Intermittently, this is intermittently input for 1 second, and input is repeated again after 1 second.

  In the assembly work of the gaming machine, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game is operated for inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment. It is supposed to be based on that. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (or when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the inspector operates the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation check process for testing the vibration speaker (operation check). The inspector can confirm the sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation process, and can also check the vibration of the rendering operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5 h. Production operation button unit]
The rendering operation button unit 360 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78 and the like. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. FIG. 78 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 which can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is configured of a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has an outer periphery formed in a substantially circular shape, and is disposed at an object bordering on a central axis of the button unit base 361 attached within the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the button unit base 361. A disc-like member having a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having a circular outer periphery smaller than the button unit base 361 Between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, the guide shaft 362 is movably attached in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  In addition, the presentation operation button unit 360 extends cylindrically upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has a central shaft 366 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363 and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 Engaging with the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361 and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably inserted by the central shaft 366 being inserted therein. 370, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected and the central shaft A lift cam member 371 for vertically moving the lift base 364 by inserting and rotatably attaching and moving the lift base 364, the lift drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lift cam drive gear member 370 is covered from above. And a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is larger than the upper base and extends vertically, and is mounted movably in the vertical direction by the pair of guide shafts 362 above the lift base 364 Substantially the same as the central button main body 373 and a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the elevation base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward; The central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter and the upper end side is closed and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing portion 303a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button main body 373 on the upper surface of the elevation base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted; An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative substrate 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and raised and lowered so as to cover the outer peripheral surface and upper surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having translucency with three-dimensional decoration A transparent perimeter button attached to the base 364 with the center button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is configured by the outer periphery substrate cover 378, the outer periphery decoration lens 379, and the outer periphery button cover 380.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and the elevation cam driving gear member 370. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting a rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base main body 361 a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361 b projecting downward from the base main body 361 a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed in a size slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached on the top surface of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361 a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter that is about one half of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevation base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 is slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrated with a size that allows the lift cam member 371 to pass through at the center. An upright wall portion 364c cylindrically projecting upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axial core and rotatably mounted around the axial core.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The upper end of the upright wall 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict the upward movement of the elevating base 364 and a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364c. It is formed. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The lift cam drive gear member 370 has a spur gear-like gear portion 370a engaged with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b projecting upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lift cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. The elevating detection piece 370 c has two cylindrical portions projecting downward from the lower side and facing each other, which are notched and detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The lift cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by the central shaft 366 being inserted at the center. The lift cam member 371 is spaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and includes a pair of cam portions 371a protruding outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevation base 364.

  The cam portion 371a has a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end parallel to the axial center, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371 a.

  Further, the lift cam member 371 is provided at the lower end thereof with a connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the lift cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the lift cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as. The raising and lowering cam member 371 can rotate and thereby guide the guide pin 364d of the raising and lowering base 364 by the cam portion 371a to raise and lower the raising and lowering base 364.

  The central button body 373 penetrates the cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b, and the pair of guide shafts A pair of guide holes 373c into which the guide 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevation base 364 and downward from the bottom 373b It includes a pressing detection piece 373 e which is projected and detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373 f which project in a cylindrical shape rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the cylindrical portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom 373 b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373 d is formed in a cylindrical shape which is extended short downward, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the lift base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button main body 373 is restricted. Through the central opening 373 d of the central button body 373, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f is inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f is formed such that the lower end extends downward through the lift base 364 and a screw having a washer inserted therein is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts the lower surface of the lift base 364 to restrict the upward movement of the central button body 373.

  When the bottom portion 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the elevation base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 It is formed to project downward through 364. The central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevation springs 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

  The central button decoration substrate 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface as full color LEDs. The center button decoration substrate 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer circumference decoration lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has an annular base portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and cylindrically extending upward from the inner periphery of the base portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378 b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending to the center side from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is in a state where the elevation base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevation springs 365, The locking portion 371 c of the cam portion 371 a of the lift cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 Also project upward (see FIG. 79 etc.).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373 e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303 a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven through the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 78 is moved to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. While rolling to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in one cam 371b, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relative to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to be in the raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in the state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected to be larger than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 when moved to the raised position in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300 (FIG. 81 (b) etc. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes in contact with the lift base 364. In a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevation base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the central button main body 373 protrudes downward relative to the elevation base 364, but the elevation base 364 is a button unit base 361. Because the pressure detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and along with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button main body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button main body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 However, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressure on the center button cover 375 (center pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force more than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 lifts the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380 The lower end of the lifting base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevation base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) protrudes upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body The pressing detection piece 373 e does not protrude downward from the elevation base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer periphery button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising and lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising and lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 is moved downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d becomes the first cam Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the locking portion 371c which is recessed upward, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay substrate unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay substrate 392 attached inside the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay substrate 392 is a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a presentation operation ring decoration board 352, a vibration speaker Relay the connection between the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the pressure detection sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 There is.

[3-5-5 j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in the plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. Fig. 81 (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a saucer unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player on the top surface. The effect operation unit 301 is configured of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a circular center pressing operation unit 303 a positioned at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer periphery pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And 303 b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303 a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b is formed by the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery substrate cover 378.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operating unit 302 (the rendering operation ring 330) is lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward) .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Figure 79 etc.)

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can repeat the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a range of a predetermined rotation angle to swing the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth to vibrate. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in left side view through the transmission gear 350 for operation ring, and the rotation is performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors of a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345 b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 spaced apart in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The intervals are not integer multiples. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. Do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. The rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342. At the same time, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, whereby the rotation operation can be made heavier or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more circular arc extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And since the rotation operation part 302 is attached in the state which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of inner peripheral surface exposed, as shown in figure, it is formed in the shape which is easy to grasp with a player's hand .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that the player can easily do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 Sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the rotation operation part 302 is attached to the operation part base 320 on the lower surface side, it can not be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the rendering operation unit 300 is provided below the rendering operation ring 330 with a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged. Thus, the light emitting decoration of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be performed by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, the player can be illusive as if the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 81A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descent position which projected slightly upwards. In this state, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303 a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). The sensor 381 detects a press.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) is not moved downward, and the pressing is detected The sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  In the normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b) The urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing and operating portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 to vigorously project upward to be in the state of the raised position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the center pressing unit 303a is pressed downward with the pressing unit 303 in the raised position, first, the center pressing unit 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374 to move the center pressing unit 303a. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b are the rotation operating unit 302. The height is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects a press.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 presses the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b downward with the pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a is projected above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. The outer periphery pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing unit 303b becomes substantially flush with the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 81A). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment can not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be drawn to the operation of the rendering operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type can be more enjoyable.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotating operation may be facilitated by the pressing operation unit 303 or may be difficult to perform due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more versatile operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front of the door frame left side base 401 A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape which extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is done. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left-side decoration 404 to emit light and decorate by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thus, the door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 door frame It is formed to be continuous with the left lower end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and appears as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends from the right side of the door frame 3 in the form of a flat plate to the front substantially to the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left and right direction And a light emitting side window interior decoration 410b disposed in a plurality in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 is a player who makes it difficult to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right in the gaming hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 inconspicuous, and to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward cylindrically and arranged in a row vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the plurality of side window in-window decorative members 412 And an internal reflector 414 which is inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration 410b.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed to the front of the front end of the side window inner decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the door frame A door extending in a plate shape in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and having a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction to constitute a side window 410a It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 Door frame having a through-hole 417a which extends in the shape of a circle and which penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the right side reflector 415 And a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened rearward. The in-side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a connecting the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) in-side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window inner decoration portion 410b of the side window inner decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed hemispherical ing. In the side window inner decoration member 412, the front end of the side window inner decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower side position to the upper side with respect to the vertical center. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to have a translucent white light.

  The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the side window interior decoration member 412, and in the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, the side window interior decoration member 412 Is attached to the rear of the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of upper, lower, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The inner reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window inner decoration portion 410b into four in the upper, lower, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wave shape such that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates in the front and rear direction, and a plurality of through holes 415 a are formed in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending up and down along the door frame right side decoration 419, and is configured of a right side upper decoration substrate 418a and a right side lower decoration substrate 418b. It is done. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration 419 to emit light and decorate by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavelike manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends in a wavelike manner forward so that a quarter of the portion from the top protrudes forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and can visually recognize the opposite side through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window inner decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LEDs of the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window interior decoration 410b can be illuminated and decorated. Then, the light emission decoration is performed on the side window inner decoration portion 410b, so that the inside of the side window 410a can be made bright and the opposite side can be made less visible through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, since the LED of the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decorative portions 410b is turned off in the normal state, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of this pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, this pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the other part including the in-side window decorative part 410b. It is possible to make the whole game area 5a hard to see from the player, and by making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to cause the other players to play the game without hesitation .

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a glare, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes Let At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial manner, so the side window inner decoration portions 410b are made to be dazzling and the opposite side is made between them It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a from another player such as the next player. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to avoid that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the other player is distracted by being noticed. Can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable because you can not concentrate on playing games, or you can feel you are lost due to the induction of mistakes, and you can make the game more fun by letting the player concentrate on playing games It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 and the like. Fig. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is an outside of the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451 attached on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451 And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the frame.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted A door frame top right decoration substrate 457 attached to the right of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front Have.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top decoration Between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front of the top top cover 452.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached respectively to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 from below And a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from the lower side, and a door frame top Door frame top relay mounted near upper right end of base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the right and left in the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction; And a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451 a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined in such a way as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in the shape of a box opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most projecting forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward as going from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a curvature which becomes smaller as going from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the lateral direction bulges upward Extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape such that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically separated between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a which are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462; and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically in the lateral direction outside of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464; ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front as full color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can emit light and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs appropriately.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 Through holes are formed at the positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending leftward and rightward, and is mounted such that the pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and frontward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

  The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, and the front end thereof is locked to the top upper cover 452 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and the outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has, at the center in a front view, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame The outer periphery of the door window 101 a is surrounded by the door frame 101 a by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Top left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, top right decorative body 276, top center decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body Since the reference numeral 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame 101 Behind the door frame top decoration 453, the dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish upper center decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate appropriately. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is coaxially disposed on the upper surface in an annular annular donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and the rotation operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. Of the upper and lower two-centered upper decoration 322a and the lower center decoration 312b of a large diameter donut shape (semi-cylindrical shape or semi-tubular shape), The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration of the plate 312b, the door frame right side unit 41 Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically aligned with the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center decoration 3a and 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303 b and the center pressing operation unit 303 a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish lower left decoration 281 disposed below the dish upper center decoration 312a, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish lower center decoration 312b, The tube-like tube has a slightly smaller thickness, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center dish decoration 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 is larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation portion 302 or the like operable by the player disposed on the upper side. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the tray unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since it is possible to immediately make the player recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to make the player's interest strongly attract and appeal to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. Body frame upper hinge member 510 to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted and the body frame mounted on the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2; Body frame lower hinge set attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball emitting device 540 for driving the game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, and the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 which is attached to the rear side of the game machine so as to be openable and closable and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connecting cable guide member for guiding a connecting frame 503 for connecting the main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically and a door frame 3 side. And 502 a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-like ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a slot-like guide channel extending leftward in the form of a groove opened upward, and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 Between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be spaced leftward from the first rail cover 554 At the upper end of the tank rail 553 and at the downstream end of the tank rail 553. It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding passage for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and the gaming ball guided by the one guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. B. Payout device 580 that pays out one at a time based on an instruction from payout control board 633, upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding gaming ball B which has passed through discharge device 580 downward, and upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the back surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the back side of the base unit 620b. 620 c, a payout control unit 620 d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620 c, and an interface unit 620 e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620 a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame wedges 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame ridge 652 or the outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame ridge 652 downward. A lock spring 655 which biases and presses the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 which moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Main unit frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 100 and the like. FIG. 99 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front to the rear, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide the connecting cable 503 And a game board lock member 505 rotatably mounted on a lower portion of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 in an attachable and detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion slot 501b which penetrates back and forth in the height range of the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b is formed, and the game board on which the game board 5 is placed A placement board 501c, and a game board regulation part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left and right and backward.

  Further, the main frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front of the base main body 501a in the front view, and the launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540; It penetrates back and forth in the cylinder insertion port 501f which penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the part 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth in the front view lower left side of the game board placement part 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward under the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. The cable attachment recess 501 h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached and the positive of the cable attachment recess 501 h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the front right side of the gaming board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 640 is at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear extension portion 501j rotatably mounted and the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, and for mounting the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main body frame base 501 at a position below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b, thereby making the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b removable.

  The cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is attached to the right of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501 h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 is projected forward on both the upper and lower sides of a flat guide body 502a extending in the left and right direction and the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are extended, a cylindrical attachment shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right ends of the guide main body 502a And a plurality of through holes 502d aligned in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501 h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 100 etc., the connection cable guiding member 502 is an end (right end) opposite to the side (left) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. In a state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide main body 502a so as to extend leftward from the right side of the guide main body 502a of 502, the lateral direction is the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being clamped together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 which penetrated to the pair of through-holes 502d of the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 in a state where the assembly door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board cover It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed to the left of the left end of the connection cable guiding member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the open angle α of the door frame 3 and the open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies: α / 2 ≧ β (desirably, α / 3 ≧ β) (See FIG. 100 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guiding member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees) Transition as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward relative to the main body frame base 501. The guiding of the connection cable 503 can prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 is relatively moved backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guiding member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the side of the door frame 3, the cable holder 103a is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502, and the door rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 centering on the central axes (axial centers) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126. A tangent line contacting a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) projecting backward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and an angle of 45 degrees crossing the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is configured to be as follows. Thereby, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the tip end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened through the connection cable 503. Since it is possible to press in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 which rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Main frame upper hinge member]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  An upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511 And a main frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically in the front view left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 at a horizontally extending portion, and the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 Have.

  A portion of the upper hinge main body 511 which is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501 k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted in the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 can be mounted so that the main frame 4 can be hinged rotatably relative to the outer frame 2 in cooperation with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520, and the door frame relative to the main frame 4 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape upward And a lower hinge second body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate material extending horizontally is bent in an L shape upward. The lower horizontal hinge assembly 520 is provided with a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 at a distance from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower portion thereof. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below for the outer frame It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a at the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the pivoting range of the door frame 3; And. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 5011 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. Be The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the main frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted forward and upward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position control members 531 are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 101 and the like. FIG. 101 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launcher in the main frame, and FIG. 101 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launcher. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door unit 3 is attached to the main unit 4 It is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can strike the gaming ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 541 in a front view From around the tip of the hitting ball 543, a shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose axis extends forward through the shooting base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and The game ball B is mounted on the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward and to the left, and the game ball B is rollable.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feed unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544 When the handle 182 is turned in the state where it is in motion, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hit ball 543. The game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rails 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) Between the two, it falls to the ball receiving portion 150 c of the lower far cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the far cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Disbursement base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as viewed from the rear. Dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of main body frame base unit 500.

  The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view A left side plate portion 551b that extends substantially the same width downward and a right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the front right side of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. Back plate left portion 551e which extends to the lower end by width, inner plate portion 551f extending backward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and in an L shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, a convex portion 551da protruding rearward is formed in the left and right direction at a portion spaced apart from the lower side by a predetermined length.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the lateral direction substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game board slot 501b of the main frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is the upper and lower sides of the game board slot 501b It extends up and down approximately the same length as the direction height. The front end of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the dispensing base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion which is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the portion is dispensed Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner side plate portion 551 f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551 i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  Dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of top plate portion 551a of dispensing base 551 and extends in the left and right box-like ball tank 552 opened upward, and the portion of dispensing base 551 extending in the left and right And a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 at the upper side and extending in the form of a groove opened upward to the left.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 on the left side of the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction, A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553 and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 And a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end in the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded to be opaque black, and the left and right direction is formed about half the width of the top plate portion 551 a of the dispensing base 551 in the left and right direction. In addition, the front-rear direction is formed to have a length shorter than the depth of the top plate 551a in the front-rear direction. The ball tank 552 is attached on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position on the right side in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is molded of a nonconductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center of the top surface of the top plate 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is approximately one minute from the depth at which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and back from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 and several times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B After extending so as to be depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left at a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, thereby forming a single guiding passage. It is done. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is in communication with the upper end opening of one guiding passage 570 a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the left end. It inclines so that the left end side becomes low at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane. It has become so. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is bent downward in a plurality according to the direction from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. In addition, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the tank rail 553 at the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded to be opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball straightening member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is formed to be opaque white, and at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 The end on the side of one rail cover 554 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball | bowl rectification | straightening member 556 is provided with the rectification | straightening piece 556a which protrudes in the tank rail 553 and is extended in the left-right direction (refer FIG. 110). The flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in two stages in the upper and lower directions is delayed by the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow is rectified in the downstream side to flow in the tank rail 553 Even if the height is lowered, it does not clog the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is mounted slidably in the left and right direction near the left end in the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553 By sliding it, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed so that the gaming ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the delivery unit side downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the downward direction from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in the shape of a step bent into a plurality. Among the portions formed in a plurality of bent steps, a partial region is formed as a substrate accommodating portion 551 aa to which the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are attached. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered by a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal board 558 has its mounting surface and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (in the present embodiment, the external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from left to right as viewed from the rear of the discharge base unit 550) When the dispensing base 551 is viewed from the front, and the mounting surface thereof is vertically directed rearward of the dispensing base 551 so that the ten external terminals of XCN10 are exposed) It is attached to section 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) is mounted downward. As viewed from the front, the dispensing base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the substrate accommodation portion 551aa so as to be covered by the terminal cover 551k. For this reason, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in the space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodation portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be viewed from the outside of the terminal cover 551k It has become.

  Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm). In contrast to this, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm). When the frame ground board 559 is accommodated and attached inside the board accommodation portion 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate accommodation portion 551aa, the frame ground board 559 is viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1 However, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 out of the lower side of the external terminal board 558 out of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame earth board 559 It can be viewed from the back of 1 (see, for example, FIG. 93). The ground terminal ECN 3 is 13.4 mm high as described above, and is high. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the ball rectifying member 556 hides and makes it difficult to view. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm as described above and can not project from the lower side of the external terminal board 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the presence of the external terminal board 558 hides it. It is difficult to see A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame earth substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (earth ground).

[4-7. Overall configuration of the payout unit]
The entire configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. FIG. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear is there. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B disposed under the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570 A payout device 580 for paying out one at a time based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B having passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in one row by the guiding path of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 is provided with one payout passage 580a through which the gaming balls B supplied from the one lead passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a single ball withdrawal from the middle of the payout passage 580a In the normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the gaming ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the gaming ball B discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 103 and FIG. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, receives the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the gaming ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is to do.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-like guiding unit base 571 having a meanderingly extending guiding passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571 closed. The game ball B in the guide passage 570a is detected by detecting the movement of the flat guide channel front lid 572 and the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. And a ball-off detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of (see FIG. 110).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front cover 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The induction passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the induction unit base 571 and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the induction unit base 571 and then bends to the right It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

  The guiding passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front and rear right and the width in the right and left direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B in the distribution direction in which the gaming ball B is It can be guided in one row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the movable piece member 573 is mounted to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a near the top. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side in a front view of the guide passage 570a, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to be. In this movable piece member 573, when the gaming ball B is in contact with the portion projecting into the guiding passage 570a, the projecting portion is pushed by the gaming ball B and does not protrude backward from the inside of the guiding passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guiding passage 570a, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from inside the guiding passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the gaming ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non detection state when the gaming ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is a dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It is in communication with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B extends in a serpentine manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many gaming can be performed in the guiding passage 570a. The ball B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108 and the like. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 106 (a) is a back sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is open, and FIG. 106 (b) is a sectional view taken along line A-A in (a) It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for illustrating the rotational position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the dispenser for illustrating ball clogging and ball falling prevention. In addition, in order to demonstrate the rotation position of a delivery blade, FIG. 107 has described the delivery gear member which can not be visually recognized from the back of a delivery apparatus and a part of various gears visibly, and is object of description. A small circle is attached to the bottom portion of the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Here, first, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described, and then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade, ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
Dispensing device 580 is removably attached to the underside of ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of back plate left portion 551e of dispensing base 551 of dispensing base unit 550 from the rear. The payout device 580 has a box-like opening in the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can be distributed and a payout device main body 581 having a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a It has a flat-plate-like dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-like dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device back lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded to be transparent. Therefore, the gaming balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a and the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 can be viewed from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear cover 582.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, and the rotating shaft is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. Spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached, and spur gear-shaped meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583 Gear-shaped second gear engaged with the first transmission gear 586 (the number of teeth Z 1: 20) and the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583 It extends outward from the delivery gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) and the spur gear-like delivery gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587 and the delivery gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) A discharge gear member 588 having a number of detection pieces 588b rotatably mounted between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device front cover 583 and a discharge between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device rear cover 582 Dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a integrally rotated with the gear member 588 and projecting into the dispensing passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 And a blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 to be step-driven. When the dispensing motor 584 is driven stepwise, the rotating shaft is stepwise rotated at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The discharge blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque white.

  Furthermore, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects the gaming ball B, and after the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball extraction movable piece 592 mounted so as to be able to open and close the ball extraction passage 580b at a site branched from the ejection passage 580a by the lid 582 and the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be held at the position where the ball extraction passage 580b is closed. And a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser rear lid 582. The ball pullout movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque white. The ball pulling lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded to be opaque red.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger in the front view right than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the rear view, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position near the left from the center in the lateral direction, and the downstream end at a position near the right end in the lateral direction. It opens downward. Dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height from the upper end so as to move little by little leftward, and after bending slightly diagonally downward from the upper side, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589. Then, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B above the center of the dispensing blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the gaming ball B with the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 It extends downward in a circular arc concentric with the discharge blade 589 so as to be formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right of the rear view from the center of the discharge blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the payout detection sensor 591.

  The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches off at a portion bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side in a rear view to the lower end in the rear view of the bottom surface It opens downward near the left end. A ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball removal passage 580b with a portion of the inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a having a predetermined distance dimension at this branched portion, and the ball clogging prevention portion The upper surface 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane, and are inclined downward to the right in a rear view. A detailed description of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r will be described later.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball B A main body side guide wall 581a which protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap than the other, and which is formed to be continuous with the left side wall in a rear view of the discharge passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and are a back view of a portion extending to the right in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the dispensing device body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in a rear view. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 is provided with three detection pieces 588b in the shape of flat plates having an arc shape extending outward, at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device back cover 582. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape and extending concentrically outward from the rotation shaft in a plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending in the dispensing passage 580a from the upper side to the rotational axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. And protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. Dispensing blade 589 is provided with three ball pieces 589a, and a ball accommodating portion 589b which is recessed to the center side with an arc having a radius larger than the radius of gaming ball B, and is recessed with a circular arc in a cylindrical outer peripheral portion. By forming the spherical ball accommodating portions 589 b at equal intervals, three blade pieces 589 a serving as peaks and three ball accommodating portions 589 b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can regulate movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. Thus, the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially integrally rotatably mounted by the dispensing device rear lid 582 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left in the rear view of the rotation shaft of the delivery gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the discharge gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the discharge blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces in the dispensing passage 580a. The depth of the ball removal movable piece 592 is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a Through the gap between the two, and may be projected into the ball removal passage 580b or retracted out of the ball removal passage 580b.

  The ball extracting lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear view left in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball extracting movable piece 592. A part of the ball extraction lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lowering end, the lower portion can be in contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580 b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. See 106). Thus, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When the ball extraction is performed by raising the ball extraction lever 593 to turn the ball extraction movable piece 592 into a rotatable state, the gaming ball B, which is in a state like a beaded connection on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 Will flow down the ball removal passage 580 b beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early.

  As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7-2 b. Rotation position of the dispensing blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 has the spur gear drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, and the spur gear first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 ( Number of teeth Z1: 20), spur gear-like second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) meshing with the first transmission gear 586, spur gear-like delivery gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) Z3: 24), a delivery gear member 588 having a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a delivery blade 589 integrally rotating with the delivery gear member 588, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 for detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588; When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate, the rotation is discharged through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotational speed of the delivery gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotational speed of the delivery motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 of the drive gear 585 (= 9) / the number of teeth Z3 of the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 (= 24) according to a calculation by mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotary shaft rotating 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps to 360 degrees = 18 degrees x 20 steps)), the discharge blade 589 integrally rotated with the discharge gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x speed reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation), 4.5 It will rotate an extra degree.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees, so one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is performed. Stepping drive to the dispensing motor 584 that corresponds to one rotation (360-degree rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is required to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 step 53.333 ... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees) The number of steps which is the number of times is not to be an integer.

  That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589 b are formed at equal intervals in the discharge blade 589, and the rotary shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to step driving. The discharge blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the discharge gear 588a of the discharge gear member 588 (that is, the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is 1). When the step rotation (18 degrees rotation), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), so the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every rotation of 120 degrees, and the payout In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is set as the 18 step rotation which is an integer in which the decimal part is rounded up. By rotating 589 by more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), the rotational position of the payout wing 589 to the position where the next game ball B is received It is possible to rotate.

  Although the payout wing 589 can pay out three game balls B every one rotation (360 degrees rotation), there are also cases where only one ball pays out the game balls B. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotational position of the payout blade 589 due to, etc., the processing of setting the origin of the rotational position of the payout blade 589 should be performed each time one game ball B is dispensed. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation which is an integer in which the decimal part is rounded up. The payout wing 589 is rotated over 120 degrees (in fact, it is 121.5 degrees rotation (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and each time one game ball B is paid out, the payout is made. A process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the blade 589 is performed to enhance the accuracy of the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589.

  Further, since the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the game ball B of one ball by the payout wing 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one ball is paid out for the game ball Even if the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the dispensing blade 589 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation shaft of the dispensing blade 589, thereby making the gaming ball one ball The accumulated error can be reset each time the money is paid out. As a result, even if an error occurs every time the game ball is paid out due to the influence of the tobacco dust or the like, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time the game ball is paid out It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends the gaming ball.

  Further, since the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the game ball B of one ball by the payout wing 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one ball is paid out for the game ball The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member that causes such a positioning error is set, although the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is The detection is performed by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the delivery gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105, which are provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, and reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotary unit which receives and sends the game ball is changed each time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where dust and / or dust adheres are dispersed to the dust or the like. It is possible to have a strong dispensing device 580. As described above, the dispensing device 580 has one dispensing passage 580a. For this reason, when the payout speed of the game ball is made the same as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blades 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout wings 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout path 580a in the embodiment collide with the gaming balls and the payout wings 589 compared to the payout devices having the payout wings in the two payout paths. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high probability that tobacco dust and dirt adhere to the discharge blade 589.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, as described above, since the discharging blade 589 exceeds one rotation, 54 rotations of the rotating shaft of the discharging motor 584 are performed one rotation of the discharging blade 589. If control is performed to set and manage as a set, an angular difference of 4.5 degrees with respect to one rotation of the discharge blade 589 is produced each time the rotary shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates 54 steps, for example, 80 sets In this case, the angle difference is finally stacked up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to pay out the game balls B is increased by three.

  As described above, the delivery gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120 degree areas including the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588 b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control substrate 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control substrate 633 is based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angular difference does not occur, and the rotational position of the payout blade 589 rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588. The game ball B is a single ball by setting a 120 degree area having a 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

  Specifically, first, in the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588, the region of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b is formed blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Because it is in the state, 9 steps rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the discharge blade 589 integrally rotating with the discharge gear member 588) as a light shielding range. The 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is managed as 9 o'clock of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 as a light receiving range because the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. (It corresponds to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 integrally rotating with the dispensing gear member 588).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588 is detected with nine steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 with the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588 b is formed as the light blocking range. It is managed by 18 step rotation which united the 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 60 degree area where the piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range, against the payout of one ball of the game ball B It is performed by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates nine steps, the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps), so the light shielding range is 60 degrees. Since the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can rotate a little larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, a 60 degree area (light shielding range) where the detection piece 588 b is formed, A 60-degree region (light receiving range) in which the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method of setting the origin of the delivery blade 589 which rotates integrally with the delivery gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 changes the detection axis 588b of the payout gear member 588 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 Detection position) is set as the point A. At this point A, movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade 589a of the payout blade 589.

  As shown in FIG. 107B, the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the point A as the origin. At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotational shaft of the dispensing motor 584 four steps from the origin as a point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as "second edge detection state"). In a region where the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, from point A to the origin and then to point B, as shown in FIG. Of the 120 degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is obtained.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 nine steps from the point B as the above-mentioned A point. At this time, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580 a at the origin. In a region where the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, from point B to point A, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light shielding range (that is, the discharge gear member 588 described above). In the area of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, the area of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588 b is formed).

  Here, the control of the dispensing device 580 by the dispensing control substrate 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control-side power-on process upon power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (temporary power failure occurs momentary power failure). The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady process when the initialization setting process and the interrupt start setting are performed in the process on power-on at the payout control side. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after setting the interrupt start, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processing such as payout motor control processing, history creation processing, origin setting processing and the like in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt processing.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation having a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the history creation processing to check the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms. The payout control board 633 performs switching of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed respectively this time and last time. The result of checking whether the detection axis 588 b is in the blocking state or in the non-blocking state is one of the least significant bits of the history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit shift toward the bit one by one, when the detection result of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 cuts off the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when the detection result of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is in the state in which the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, When the result of the check is different from that of the current (for example, one of the result of the present and the previous check is when the detection piece 588 b is blocking the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the blade rotation detection sensor When the detection piece 588b is in a non-blocking state) of the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  As described above, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms of switching the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation in the history creation processing. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process of setting the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. As described above, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A. Since the rotational position of the discharge blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned in the 60 degree area where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 It will be in the state which 588b does not interrupt.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588 b is a blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is positioned at point A. 00000001B ("B" indicates that it is bit information. The same applies hereinafter.) Is set because it becomes a state (first edge detection state) in which the optical axis of is shifted from the blocking state to the non-blocking state. . Then, when the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, 00111111B is set to the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs a first mask process on the history information with a first determination value of 11110000 B, thereby extracting data from 8 times before to 5 times before from history information as an operation result. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000 B by the first mask process), and the second judgment process of 00010000 B is further subjected to the second mask process to the extracted data, thereby obtaining the data five times before the history information. The data is taken out as the operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask process) If the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the origin.

  When the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the rotational axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is B point, and the rotational shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the B point The present process is terminated as it is in a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotational position of the discharge blade 589 is again set to the A point. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotational shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps in total has elapsed. A home position detection prohibiting time for prohibiting the home position setting for the delivery blade 589 is provided.

  The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing the payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A to make the rotational position of the payout blade 589 the origin. The time for setting is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 steps rotation), and the rotational position of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin. The time for setting the point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point B The time to again set the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, which becomes the light receiving range again, to the point A, is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 steps rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by the 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time taken for the game ball B to pay one is the payout By performing 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584, 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps of rotation) is obtained.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a payout device for dispensing the game balls according to the amount of rotation of the payout rotating body by receiving the game balls and driving the game balls by driving the payout motor (e.g. Open 2004-041261 (paragraphs [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of data drive data for four steps to pay out one game ball. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is impossible to avoid that the tobacco dust or the like attached to the gaming balls adheres to the inside of the payout device. In addition, since the dispensation device is not disassembled and cleaned, there is a demand for a dispensation device that is strong against cigarette dust, dust, and the like. By the way, in the gaming machine of this reference, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the driving of 4 steps of the payout motor to pay out one game ball, so accurate operation can be expected. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotary body is the same each time. For this reason, there is a problem that the position where the cigarette dust and the dust adhere is also fixed and it is easy to be deposited.

[4-7-2 c. Ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball falling prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, ball clogging prevention at the time of ball removal will be described first, and subsequently, ball falling prevention by the non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, the ball extraction lever 593 can turn the ball extraction movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened. It can be done. When ball removal is performed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to bring the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Is a predetermined distance dimension, and a total of four gaming balls B are parked up to the rib-like ball clogging prevention portion 581 r protruding toward the ball removal passage 580 b. As this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B retained on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581 r is on the right side from the left end side of the ball jam prevention portion 581 r and downstream (in other words, the discharge blade 589 is present) (The downstream side of the delivery passage 580a). Thus, a rib-like ball clogging prevention portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and protrudes toward the ball removing passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B are parked in the payout passage 580a until 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be parked is pushed out toward the ball evacuation path 580b in the ball jam prevention portion 581r. That is, as the predetermined distance dimension, the gaming ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is held on the upper surface of the ball clogging preventing portion 581r, and is formed to constitute the side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the back lid side guide wall 582a as mentioned above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) parked on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581r Even in this case, it has a length capable of flowing down to the ball removal passage 580b. In this manner, a portion of the gaming ball B (that is, the last gaming ball B) on the upper surface of the clogging prevention portion 581r stays in a state of protruding toward the ball pulling passage 580b (in other words, clogging prevention) A part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the section 581r is restricted by the length that one ball of game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b) It can be done.

  Further, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581 r has the upper surface thereof and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580 a formed in the same plane, and is a downward slope to the right in a rear view.

  That is, in the case where the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention portion 581r, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout path 580a However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r, the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r is a downward sloping surface in rear view The center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B (that is, the last gaming ball B) staying on the upper surface of the clogging prevention portion 581 r is located on the right side and downstream of the left end side of the clogging prevention portion 581 r Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention unit 581 r from being pushed by the collision and flowing down toward the ball extraction passage 580 b. Be able to Going on. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from being clogged in the vicinity of the left end of the ball jam prevention portion 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball jam prevention unit 581 r is a ball removal path (a main ball guide wall 581 a and a rear lid side guide wall 582 a along the ball extraction passage 580 b The flow path of the game ball B on the flow path to the side is restricted to the width where one game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball extraction passage 580b as shown by the dashed dotted line in FIG. 108 (a). This can prevent ball clogging. Therefore, ball clogging at the time of ball removal can be reliably prevented. In the present embodiment, although the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotational position of the discharge blade 589, the width is set so as to be from 12 mm to 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm in the state where the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging easily occurs at a place where the width of each passage is narrowed from a place larger than twice the diameter (11 mm) of the gaming ball to a little smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball (for example 21 mm).

  Next, ball fall prevention by the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. In the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. As a result, the game ball B is in a state of being held in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the subsequent game balls B are in contact with the game balls B by beading. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the dispensing passage 580a obliquely extends downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and slightly rightward from there After being bent diagonally downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward approximately vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589.

  Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the gaming ball B in contact with the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout wing 589 is the center of the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589 b of the payout wing 589 It will be shifted slightly to the left compared with the center of gravity position, and it will follow the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 in a state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin. A rightward force (i.e., a force rotating clockwise) acts on the central axis of rotation of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure of the game ball B due to its own weight.

  In such a state, when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The gaming ball B will flow down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout path 580a, and ball drop will occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is of the dispensing blade 589 even if it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589. The shape of the dispensing passage 580a on the right side of the dispensing blade 589 is formed in the rear view so as to be able to be stopped by six steps of rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. In the above, the game ball B in contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 abuts on the side wall of the payout passage 580a and the outer periphery of the blade piece 589a having the arc shape of the payout blade 589 Of the faces, the ball accommodating portion 589b is closer to the gaming ball B is accommodated (in other words, the ball accommodating portion 589b accommodating the gaming ball B, and the ball accommodating portion 589b and the following ball accommodating balls B are not accommodated) Of the outer peripheral surface of the wing piece 589a connecting the portion 589b, the point S2 which is in contact with the ball housing portion 589b side closer to the side containing the gaming ball B from the center of the outer peripheral surface) It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure can be generated to press the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the dispensing blade 589, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can be rotated six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  When the dispensing control board 633 starts controlling the dispensing motor 584 in a state where the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and is stopped, it rotates 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 Of the light shielding range (9 steps) beyond point B shown in FIG. 107 (d), where it has advanced by 4 steps from the origin and has advanced by 2 steps. However, if the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps (shown in FIG. 107 (d), the remaining 7 steps of rotation + 5 steps of rotation from point A to proceed to rotate 2 steps out of 9 steps) The game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b of the discharge blade 589 flows downstream (is sent out) to the downstream side of the It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even in the state where the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (in a six-step rotation) and stopped, an excessive number of balls for which the gaming ball B is dispensed is not generated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 is a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the instructed number of gaming balls B to the player side (the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (a momentary power failure occurs momentarily), the dispensing motor 584 is controlled so as not to return the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 to the origin. As described above, this causes the gaming ball B to generate an excessive number of balls to be paid out in a state where the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 and rotated (six steps to advance). To prevent that.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is to be emitted downward from the payout device 580 and guide the gaming ball B to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-like upper full tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached at the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the open front And a dispenser pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the top full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispenser 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601 a for attaching a back cover.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 600 is an upper discharge that opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side to a position about 2/3 the height from the lower side. It is in communication with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper discharging ball receiving passage 600a and extends about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the full height An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper normal discharge passage 600c An upper full tank delivery passage 600d extending downward from the front right side from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the upper surface And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 110).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left in front view. The upper full ball passage unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the gaming ball B released (disbursed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d It is discharged downward from any of the The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate 551 g of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550 and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball channel unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full-tan ball passage unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank passage unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. And a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at the front end of the lower full tank base 611, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 which can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end opening of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b And a closing spring 614 which is biased.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view In the state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b extend forward in a side-by-side manner, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. The lower full tank delivery passage 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal delivery passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the longitudinal direction.

  The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise as viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, the front end openings (downstream end) of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613 a protruding forward. The actuating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and as the front end face approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction It is inclined to project forward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a is formed to abut on the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the wafer cover unit 150 in the door frame 3.

  In the lower full tank unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are opened upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are assembled to the upper It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue passage unit 600. Thereby, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is the lower full payout passage 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball-opening passage 600e flow in the lower ball-opening passage 610c.

  Further, when the lower full-tank passage unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal delivery passage 610 a and the lower full delivery passage 610 b pass through the fal cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is opened immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receptacle 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610 c is opened to face the ball removal guiding portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in the normal state (the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the actuating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing of the fal cover unit 150. By being in contact with the portion 150f, the plate is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. Thus, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are opened, and are communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving hole 150b of the far cover unit 150. It is in the state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the far cover unit 150 Is turned clockwise in a front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the gaming balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can not move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of gaming balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lowering end, and the ball pulling passage 580 b branched from the discharging passage 580 a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

  A predetermined number of ball tanks 552, which are open upwards, are detected from the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The gaming balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 through the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 in a state of being aligned by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the gaming ball B can not move (flow downward) downstream of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of gaming balls B stagnate upstream of the payout blade 589 It becomes.

  Then, the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball breakage detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the gaming ball B is stored in the passage from at least the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the dispensing blade 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the dispensing motor 584, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a It is released downstream of 589. Then, the gaming balls B discharged from the dispensing blade 589 (the ball accommodating portion 589 b) are sent to the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 after being detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591.

  The gaming ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passing unit 600 is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. Then, the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600 c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate-ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 in the case of FIG.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 becomes full with the game balls B, the game balls B can not be released forward from the upper ball feed opening 211a, so the payout device When the game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full tank passage unit 610 and the game ball B is further discharged, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the communicating upper full ball passage unit 600. Then, when the gaming ball B is further dispensed in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the gaming balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicated on the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is stored. The gaming ball B starts to stagnate, and the gaming ball B starts to flow to the upper full payout path 600d side adjacent to the upper regular payout path 600c.

  Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper full discharge passage 600 d passes through the lower full discharge passage 610 b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and fills the full ball receptacle 150 b in the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Received by Thereafter, the gaming balls B received in the full tank receptacle 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. As a result, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The gaming ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full with gaming balls B (( The player is informed that the container is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected.

  When discharging the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descent end Slide it to the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a , And is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, in the region of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581 a and the rear lid side guide wall 582 a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592. Is less likely to break.

  The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, the ball ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 pass through the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged to the island facilities side of

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 111 to 115 and the like. Fig. 111 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the bottom rear. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate units disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The base unit 620 is a main unit frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side than the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main unit frame base 501 in the main unit frame base unit 500. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the front end of the speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501. And a container-like speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view and extending in the vertical direction, and a front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a A space front recess 621b recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side and a space protruding downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extending in the lateral direction and directed diagonally backward And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 . The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container opened forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most greatly, and is stepped backward in a step-like manner toward the right in front view. It is formed so that the protrusion of. As a result, a space on the rear side to the right of the center in the front view of the speaker box 623 can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620 b, the power supply unit 620 c, and the like can be disposed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621 c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has the space front concave portion 621b which bulges forward in the front view right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 goes to the right The space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is secured sufficiently wide even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount.

  In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48. And the inner space 40a of the outer plate 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, a large space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front plate 42 and the rear plate 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622 The sound that has been output can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (a part of the enclosure 624) behind the main body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made with the outer frame lower assembly 40 through the connection tube portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound outputted from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. The sound can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted low frequency band can be resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47 and can be emitted forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-reversed state, and therefore, it is outputted from the front of the main frame speaker 622 to be a dish unit The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the aperture of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which heavy bass sounds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass. Thus, a sound emitted from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211 b of the dish unit 200 and a sound emitted from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through cylinder 623a which extends in a cylindrical shape and communicates with the through hole 621d is formed. In the assembled state of the speaker unit 620 a, the through hole 621 d and the through cylinder 623 a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620 b of the board unit 620 is attached to the front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620 c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 guiding rightward and a discharge ball receiving portion receiving the gaming ball B which is opened upward on the right side in a front view on the downstream side of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and which is discharged downward from the game board 5 628, and a ball outlet 629 for discharging the gaming ball B which has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharging ball receiver 628 downward.

  The upstream end of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 is opened leftward in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and the downstream end is opened on the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610 The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends in the left and right direction. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 at the left end in a front view, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side.

  The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, Since the sheet is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, the space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction can be easily secured widely in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be enlarged, and the player can hear sounds with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

  The power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply substrate cover attached to the rear base 626 to cover the rear side of the power supply substrate 630. And 631. The power supply substrate cover 631 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the power supply substrate 630 can be viewed through the power supply substrate cover 631 without removing the power supply substrate cover 631 from the rear base 626. There is. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volts (AC 100 V) is stepped down to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC 24 volts (AC 24 V). AC 24 V that is stepped down in the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply substrate 630 via a power supply cord (not shown). The power supply substrate 630 prepares various power supplies (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from AC 24 V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies the various substrates. Also, although the power supply substrate 630 must originally be supplied with a 24 V AC power supply voltage for a gaming machine, there is a possibility that a 100 V AC commercial power supply voltage may be supplied and broken due to an incorrect connection of a power cord (not shown). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c can be replaced using a plus driver, which is a general tool (note that fastening is not performed using a common tool such as a plus driver). The tool can also be configured to be manually operated and detachable.

  The dispensing control unit 620d includes a box-like dispensing control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the rear side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control substrate 633 housed in the dispensing control substrate box 632 (see FIG. And 115). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 according to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Then, the game balls B of the instructed number are to be paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

  The delivery control board box 632 is composed of a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. A payout control board 633 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. By forming the cover body and the beta body transparently by using a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side or the back side of the payout control substrate 633 (whether or not the illegal modification is performed, or the illegal IC is mounted Can be confirmed from the outside of the delivery control board box 632). Further, the dispensing control substrate box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body respectively. When the dispensing control substrate box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the dispensing is performed next. In order to open the control substrate box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the dispensing control substrate box 632. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632 and the deterrence against the fraudulent act on the dispensing control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620 a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to the rearmost portion of the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 on the rear surface of the speaker box 623. The interface board 635 is connected to an end of one (the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface substrate 635 is connected to a power supply substrate 630, a payout control substrate 633, a main control substrate, a peripheral control substrate, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in a front view more than the substrate base 634 (interface substrate 635) so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 92 to 98. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion slot 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball passage unit 600, the back side is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and an abutting portion 640 a which is lowered one step forward on the upper side is formed. In the state assembled in the frame 4, the rear surface is formed to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551 (the back surface of the convex portion 551 da formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d described above) There is. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. , And is covered by a convex portion 551da which is formed to protrude from the back plate upper portion 551d.

  The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally, except for the contact portion 640a. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 projecting forward from the unit base 651. A door frame wedge 652, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and forward projecting from the lower end of the front end of the unit base 651 And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 biases the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward as compared to the lock spring 655 and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. And an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by protruding forward from the upper position and sliding it downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame ridges 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward of the front surface of the main frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame wedges 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) The frame collar 653 is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, inserts a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and when rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 The door frame wedge 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame wedges 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame weirs 653 move downward, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip end sides of the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 124. Fig. 117 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in (a). FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing the upper portion of the main body frame in a rear perspective view. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 121 is an explanatory view showing a region where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame are circulated. FIG. 122 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 is insertable into the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and the rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main frame base 501 A dispensing base 551 and a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container form) extending to the left and right, attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward The tank rail 553 extending to the left in the form of a groove, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554 A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the rail 553; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the lens 553 and a payout device 580 mounted on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 and for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player And.

  The ball tank 552 is formed into a rectangular shape having a plan view shape extending in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the front side and the rear side of the bottom wall 552a which is inclined so that the left side is low in front view. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container whose upper side is open. It is done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552 f is about 3⁄4 the length of the front wall 552 b in the left-right direction from the end side of the left wall 552 d to the end of the opposite side (right wall 552 e side) in the front wall 552 b. It is formed over the ridge.

  The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 at the right end side (upstream side) in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552 . The tank rail 553 extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and has a bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined to be lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view It has a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction and moves parallel to the axis extending from the right end to the left end so as to move backward toward the end .

  In the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a portion extending parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right, extending to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail at the upper end of this portion With the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 attached, the upper side is closed. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the gaming ball B at the downstream end Is formed at a height allowing only one flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in this embodiment, about the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a in a bowl shape and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a in front view) Three rectangular cutouts 553aa each having a length of 30 mm are formed at a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in the present embodiment). Approximately 7 mm obtained by adding a thickness (about 2.5 mm in the present embodiment) to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a from the back wall of the main guiding portion 553a to the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a by the rectangular notch 553aa A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a (in this embodiment) A rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed by adding about 2.5 mm), and these rectangular holes are formed in communication with each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 are dropped by peeling metal powder from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the gaming ball B is in a state of adhering to the main induction portion 553a, the flow of the gaming ball B in the downstream direction is impeded, and the gaming ball B is smoothly directed toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and metal powder generated due to the wear of the gaming ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main induction portion 553a by naturally falling from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Due to the vibration of the gaming ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, metal powder produced by the wear of the gaming ball B adhering to the main guiding portion 553a falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa The metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the notch portion 553aa by a staff member such as a game hall clerk, resulting from wear of the game ball B adhering to the main induction portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a by removing the metal powder.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the plurality of gaming balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the gaming balls B A bulging portion 553b which is bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a There is. The plurality of gaming balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned by the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes to the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower as it goes from the upper end side to the main guiding portion 553a below. Because of this, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of gaming balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. In the bulging portion 553b, the center of the curved curvature is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b is slightly Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curvature thereof is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Because of this, in the gaming ball B that circulates the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts is in accordance with the position of the bulging portion 553b that contacts. It will change in various directions, and can suppress generation | occurrence | production of a ball | bowl on the inside of the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts on the gaming ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction. Because it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, it is difficult for the game ball B to escape by always pressing the internal game ball B in a fixed direction, and it becomes easy to generate a ball clog (ball seam). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b becomes different depending on the position of the game ball B, so the inside is circulated By dispersing the pressed directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to make it difficult to generate a ball clog (ball game).

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured to be able to visually recognize the inside from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball seam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be viewed from the outside, so a ball clogged location can be identified quickly. can do. Therefore, since clogging in the tank rail 553 can be eliminated quickly, interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the game by interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, it is possible to visually recognize the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 through the tank rail 553 from behind. When movement problems occur in various effect units etc., with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, the status of the drive motor, transmission mechanism such as gear or belt, etc. can be checked, and the phase described above The same effect as that of the use effect can be achieved.

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction is outside the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return to the ball tank 552 the gaming ball B which extends to the left (left) and overflows from the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side. And the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is low, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 is A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 out of both the left and right sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter Provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the side opposite to the detour passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 opened at the upper side than the upper portion is open Covers the upper side of an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a which can be connected with electric wiring from the rear, and a plurality of the wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflowing surface portion 501m is a flat plate from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically to the rear from a position low by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B It is extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about 1/2 the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between it and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m; The upper end of the left step 501n and the right step 501o is higher than the left step 501n and the right step 501o in the left and right direction, and the upper end extends in the front and back direction in a band plate shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501 n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501 n is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. A gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the left step coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left wall 552d, and the right wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left from the outside, and is a passage surface 552h inclined such that the front end has the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. And a ridge portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552 d in the passage surface 552 h to the same height as the left side wall 552 d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side (the collar 552i side) of the rear end side It extends diagonally to move forward as it goes from the to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left and right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left and right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the gaming ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552 g changes from the rear end, which is oblique, so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the bypass passage 552 g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553. The game ball B from can be received. In addition, since game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the tank rail by the game balls B from the bypass passage 552 g It is possible to make it difficult to cause ball clogging in 553.

  The detour passage 552 g extends obliquely with respect to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves rearward as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is reached, so the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 side. At the time of discharge, the obliquely extending rear end allows the gaming ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed, and the width It is possible to suppress the generation of the ball seam in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to the wide area of

  Further, in the tank rail 553, a portion for guiding the gaming ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the rear side 552c in a front view. In this part, the gaming ball B which has descended from the inside of the ball tank 552 below the guide surface 552 j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552 k) is distributed. Because of this, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553 in the portion behind the detour passage 552 g in the tank rail 553 Never exceed height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. Thus, the game balls B induced to the rear side can be reliably received by the tank rails 553, and the game balls B will not spill backward from the tank rails 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate extending in the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d so as to be lower from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552 j of The guide surface portion 552 j extends from the front wall 552 b to the rear wall 552 c in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j has a right end side from the left end of the front wall 552 b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552 b in the left and right direction in front view After being obliquely extended to about 1/9 of the total length from the front wall 552b to about one half of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in parallel to the rear wall 552c, extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction.

  The ball tank 552 is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape in plan view and the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed region has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat flange extending in the lateral direction outward and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the flange portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 551l. The ball tank 552 has the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l have the height of the left end wall 552d or the upper end edge of the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501 Of the left step portion 501 n and the right step portion 501 o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552 k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side are positioned behind the ball tank 552 )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge unit 551 j is formed on the top surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551 j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be lowered stepwise backward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552 a of the ball tank 552 when assembled in the main frame 4. A position where the top of the tank rail 553 is higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction) It extends to the near side and then extends backward.

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface with the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal which can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by the operation of the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in an assembled state in the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the top surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, in the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step 501 n is inclined so that the rear right corner is lower, and the right step 501 o is lower so that the rear left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side is lower in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552 a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of gaming balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflowing portion 552 f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges is exceeded It can be made to flow out to the outside (forward) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m and made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 122). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress that the game balls B strongly push each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called, ball seam) due to engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 123, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back pressure from acting strongly on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 by the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 Can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m may spill out on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 can not be opened or closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m is the left side of one side of the ball tank 552 By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the return from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the gaming ball B on the bypass passage 552g side presses the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 to hold the ball It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the gaming ball B rolls on the bypass passage 552g) Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the inflow of gaming balls B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, the flow of the gaming balls B in the bypass passage 552g is behind the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side The flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side can be made, and the pressure of the gaming ball B guided from the bypass passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be made in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the gaming balls B are separated, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming balls B from pushing and biting each other, and the clogging of the gaming balls B is generated. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the gaming balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned since they are lined up, the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided at a portion of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side, the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a Since the change is made to coincide with each other, the plurality of gaming balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the channel through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The number of steps in the height direction is reduced by circulating the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in multiple steps in the height direction in the lower direction through the portion of the tank rail 553 which is closed on the upper side, thereby reducing the number of steps in the height direction Can be aligned to Therefore, the plurality of gaming balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in one row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of gaming balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Thus, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more gaming balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected on the opposite side to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or vigorously supplies in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a etc. There is no occurrence of a short circuit or an electrical wiring disconnection due to the contact of the game ball B.

  The game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552 since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, it is difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is difficult to drop from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such problems.

  Further, the gaming ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guiding surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 122) of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the guiding surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface 552 j can be prevented from pressing in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility bounces on the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n or the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 122, due to their inclination, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and a problem occurs due to the game ball B spilling out of the main body frame 4 Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B circulates from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface 552 j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward. The gaming ball B induced by the bypass passage 552 g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are disposed in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 closed on the upper side, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 to cause a problem.

  The ball tank 552 is molded of a conductive resin, while the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded of a nonconductive resin. In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, the same polarity is obtained. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 is the peripheral control board box of the same polarity. It is repelled so that it can not be drawn to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Configuration of metal powder measures]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main induction portion 553a of the tank rail 553 (short circuit The configuration of the metal powder countermeasure capable of avoiding the) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-C in FIG. 117 (a), and is a schematic view of a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure. In FIG. 125, the outline of the game board 5 is indicated by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for the description is shown as a cross-sectional view.

  When metal powder (foreign substance) of the game ball B falling from the notched portion 553aa formed in a plurality of bowl-shaped main induction portions 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble occurs to cause a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, an SDRAM, etc. described later, and the peripheral data ROM substrate described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, and the spacing between the various connectors becomes narrower. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against the electrical trouble caused by the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 It shifts toward the back compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the gaming ball B It is arranged by the distance dimension of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in which the tank rail 553 is disposed goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a It is formed in the shape of a step bent downwards in a plurality according to the direction. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially coplanar. It is supposed to be deployed. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the contact is such that the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. The contact portion is covered by a convex portion 551da which is formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and attached at the top plate portion 551a or received and attached at the convex portion 551da. It can be done. Furthermore, the contacting portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 are in contact with each other protrudes backward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Because it is covered by the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa abuts. Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 It has become.

  Thus, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back plate upper portion 551d are the metal of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The powder is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It acts as a whistle that can be done. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached is misaligned (in the present embodiment, displaced by a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the gaming ball B) Trouble (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the notch 553aa), the electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 Is effective in preventing metal powder.

  Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), whereas the upper side, left side, and the side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) are provided. The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later) because it is not provided on each side wall of the cover provided on the lower side and the right side. However, it is possible to make it difficult to intrude into the inside of the cover 1501.

  Further, the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed at the center side with a later described fan attachment recess having a square shape for attaching the air cooling fan FAN and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom of the fan attachment recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along the respective lines. Further, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, seven connector holes provided at the peripheral control substrate 1510 attached to the inner side of the cover body 1501, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switches, Volume control holes are respectively formed, and two connector holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state where the peripheral control substrate 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover 1501. While seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 are exposed from seven connector holes, gaps are formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed on the cover 1501, The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. In a state where a liquid crystal output substrate described later is attached to the inside of the cover 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate and the two connector holes formed in the cover 1501, The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output substrate are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wing of the air-cooling fan attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation, thereby performing peripheral control. A plurality of air from the outside of the unit 1500, through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501, and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. , The gap formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes formed on the cover 1501, the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the cover Volume adjustment holes formed in the body 1501 During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The total area of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom of the fan attachment recess of the cover 1501 (total area) is the area of the vent 1501az formed on the cover 1501 and the above Clearance (seven connectors provided on peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on cover 1501; gaps formed on peripheral control board 1510; volume control switch provided on peripheral control board 1510; and formed on cover 1501 Than a volume adjustment hole, a gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate, and an area in two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output substrate and a gap formed in two connector holes formed in the cover 1501) It is getting smaller. Therefore, when the wing of the air cooling fan attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. A plurality of vents 1501az formed in the cover 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of vents 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the vent holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be reduced to a small value when taking in. As a result, it is possible to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B from invading the inner space of the cover 1501 through the vent holes 1501az under the influence of the flow of air.

  Incidentally, when the wing of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked toward the inner space of the cover 1501 through the wing by this rotation. Because the flow velocity of the air by the rotation of the wing of the wing increases, the probability that the heavy powder of metal powder of the game ball B is sucked toward the inner space of the cover 1501 under the influence of the flow of air increases and sucks An electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder causes defects (faults) in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 attached to the inside of the cover 1501 and various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protrusion along the upper side of the cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is air cooled. The game ball can be configured to have a function as a weir to prevent it from being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protrusion along the upper side of the fan attachment recess formed in the cover body 1501, the gaming ball It can be configured to have a function as a weir that prevents heavy powder called metal powder of B from being drawn into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is a thin type Is selected (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess When the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the fan attachment recess formed in the cover 1501 by selecting one having a short distance dimension), the inner wall of the FAN attachment recess allows the heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B to be the air-cooling fan It can be configured to have a function as a weir that prevents it from being sucked into the FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder can be taken such that an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of gaming ball B can be avoided (hereinafter referred to as “metal powder countermeasure according to second to fifth embodiments Will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129). FIG. 126 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 shows the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic view of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment. 126 to 129, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter referred to as the “configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment”) are given the same reference numerals. The outline of the game board 5 is indicated by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for the explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-like main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate 551a and is directed upward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension about one half of the diameter of the gaming ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate 551a is disposed above the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same plane. The rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 disposed substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553 is branched from the portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and extended rearward.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 The contact recess 3010da is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the contacting portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail While the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top panel 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment. The upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553 while the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, and the back box of the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back unit 3000. The difference is that rear surface 3010d of 3010 is disposed substantially on the same plane. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the mounting recess is formed on the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 in the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4. In the state of being in contact with the surface 3010 da, the abutted portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010 da. It is different at the point.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received at the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the contacting portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in contact with each other is the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da Because it is covered, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch 553aa abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010).

  Thus, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the back surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 fall from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Towards the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) It functions as a weir that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch 553aa is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is closer to the back surface of the tank rail 553 The main guiding portion 553a is disposed so as to protrude below the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 And in contact with the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed on the upper surface, and the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank And are arranged in the same plane.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment while the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. The top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially coplanar. It differs in that it is placed in Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553 The contact portion 6 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a and in contact with the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is a bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the contact portion 640 a of the back cover 640 can be received and attached. Furthermore, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. As a result, the gap is not formed, so from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes in contact with the game panel of the game board 5 The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 can not fall It is supposed to be.

  As described above, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It acts as a trap that can be prevented. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  The contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. Therefore, the gap is not formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in close contact with the bottom of the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. In the back cover 640, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is in close contact with the bottom of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. There is no gap formed between the contact portion 640 a and the bent top plate 551 a disposed below the tank rail 553. The rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the gaming ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface).

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is in front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward of the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553 It is arranged to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the gaming ball B).

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a disposed in contact is in contact with a convex portion 551 ab which is formed to project downward and is in contact with the tank rail 553. It is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. The top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly protrude rearward as compared with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is disposed below the tank rail 553. The back surface of the top plate portion 551a is in a state of being in contact with a convex portion 551ab that is formed so as to project downward and is in a state of being in contact with the convex portion 551ab. Disposed below the tank rails 553, it is different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is disposed below the tank rail 553 and is a bent top plate portion It can be received and attached at 551a. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 and a convex portion 551 ab disposed downward of the tank rail 553 and projecting downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a, Since the abutted portion where the surface contacts is in contact is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, it falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the played game ball B abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As described above, the bent top plate 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Metal powder falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) Functions as a pot that can prevent the ball and also functions as a receptacle for metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a that functions as a weir disposed below the tank rail 553 is a separate member (another structural component) and the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to attach to

  When the top plate portion 551a is a separate member (another structural component), it may be removable or may be moved from the mounting position back to the mounting position for the purpose of removing the attached metal powder. In this case, by setting the top plate 551a to a different color from the members around it, the mechanism part that can be moved from the detachable position or attached position back to the attached position can be clarified, and the ease of the work of removing the adhered metal powder Let

  Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate 551a is formed in the shape of a plurality of stairs bent downward from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d And are arranged substantially on the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape bent downward in a plurality according to going from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed on the top plate 551a, and is directed downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension about one half of the diameter of the gaming ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate 551a is arranged to project downward as compared with the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by the upper side of the back cover 640 being largely bent forward when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 The front surface of the 640 a is disposed parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553 a and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551 a which is disposed to project downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553 a. It is in a state of contact.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. Is in contact with the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the back surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 While being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551a disposed parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and projecting downward as compared to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a, The portions in contact with the main guiding portion 553a are disposed largely out in front of the notched portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, while the rear surface of the rear panel 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same surface. Abutment where the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553 and the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent toward the front in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 The difference is that the portion 640a is disposed. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551 d of the dispensing base 551. While in a state of being in contact with the rear surface and in a state of being in contact, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the front wall of the main guide portion 553a having a hook shape. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of top plate 551a which is disposed in parallel and which protrudes downward as compared to the bottom of main guiding portion 553a, and this abuts Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same function and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of gaming balls B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which is formed by being largely bent toward the front side. Furthermore, it is disposed parallel to the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and is disposed so as to project downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the abutted portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a comes in surface contact is disposed largely in front of the notches 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a and also abuts, the gap Is not formed. Therefore, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main induction portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa abuts It can not be dropped toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the 3010).

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. To the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) As well as functioning as a basket that can be prevented from falling toward the head, it also functions as a receptacle for metal powder of the gaming ball B. Therefore, the electrical trouble by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of gaming balls B that has dropped from the main induction portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 ( It can not fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, it is desirable to provide a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a tank rail for guiding gaming balls from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging the foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter dropped from a hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board disposed below the tank rail, an electrical trouble occurs to cause a problem in the control board or cause a malfunction etc. It had become. In recent control boards, the increase in the number of control targets reduces the connector pin spacing, and the increase in the number of connectors reduces the connector spacing and further reduces the IC pin spacing. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical problems caused by foreign matter dropped from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 to 137. FIG. 130 is a front view of the game board in which the game panel is made opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 130 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 135 is a front view of the gaming board in a state where the gaming panel is transparent. FIG. 136 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the gaming panel is made opaque and the inside of the gaming area where the gaming balls circulate and the obstacle nail are shown. FIG. 137 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. General winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B in the game area 5a, first start opening 2002, gate section 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 has the game ball B accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special opening 2005 etc. in the gaming area 5a. In order to play the game, the player is to play a game in which the hitting operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136) which are in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a part of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115 and 185 etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player's side so as to be visible to the player in the upper left corner of the front component 1000; A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed on the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the gaming panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive substrate unit 1700 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 141 etc.) to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The drive board unit 1700 has a panel relay board 1710 relaying connection between the main control board 1310 and various sensors provided on the game board 5, and a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. And a drive substrate box 1730 accommodating the panel relay substrate 1710 and the panel drive substrate 1720. The drive substrate box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 at the left side in rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 at the right side in rear view.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B inserted into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B; The second start opening 2004 and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 can receive the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. A special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be received according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B is provided.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and a front surface of the start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted along the inner rail 1002 in the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200 It is attached to the side slope 2300 and the front view right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which becomes the front view lower right corner in the game area 5a, and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. The game area above the attacking unit 2400 and the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. A frame-shaped center member 2500 which is attached slightly above the center of the front view and has a gate portion 2003 and a center member 2500 so as to close the frame of the center member 2500 And a table rendering unit 2600 attached.

  Attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting gaming balls B received at general winning openings 2001 provided for itself, and a second for detecting gaming balls B received at second starting opening 2004. A starting opening sensor 2402 and a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received by the special winning opening 2005 are provided. The center role 2500 also includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. In addition, back unit 3000, general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 which detects game ball B which is accepted to general winning a prize opening 2001 which is equipped to side unit 2200 of front unit 2000, the game which is accepted to 1st starting opening 2002 A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the ball B and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002 are provided (see FIG. 185).

  In addition, back unit 3000 is a back-down effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of opening 3010 a in back box 3010, and a back-up effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of opening 3010 a in back box 3010. And a back left rendering unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010, and a back right rendering unit 3400 mounted on the right of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. .

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 142. Fig. 138 is a front view of the front component and the game panel in the game board, Fig. 139 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the front, and Fig. 140 is a front component and the game panel as viewed from the back FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and abuts against the game ball B rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (the game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. At each portion, a security concave portion 1009 recessed rearward from the front end is provided. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear projection 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch 1010 matches the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch and the lower full tank path The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 are adapted to face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front. That is, through the front component member 1000, it is possible to visually recognize from the front a portion overlapping the front and back of the decorative pattern 1150 described later (see FIG. 144).

  In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with cylindrical bosses 1020 projecting forward at four corners on the front surface. These four bosses 1020 are used to position the front component members 1000 in a stacked state when transporting only the plurality of front component members 1000 to prevent a load shift.

5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 145 and the like. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the gaming panel shown with the substrate cover removed, and FIG. 143 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the area near the lower panel decoration substrate in FIG. FIG. 144 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration pattern of the game panel and the front component and the front unit. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decoration pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel.

  The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  In addition, the game panel 1100 has a panel decoration substrate 1130 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted, and a substrate on which the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120 And a cover 1135. The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view, and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view. The substrate cover 1135 includes an upper left substrate cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left substrate cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) which can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is assumed. In the present embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge being respectively separated in the left-right direction And a plurality of engagement steps 1114. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engagement claw 1125 and the engagement piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

  In the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 143 (a) etc., the large opening 1112 for attaching the center character 2500 is offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the gaming ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center The ball B has a wide width that can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have narrow widths in which a plurality of game balls B can not be lined up.

  The panel board 1110 is provided with a decorative pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of this embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at a constant interval, a plurality of upper right oblique lines rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, a horizontal line and an upper right oblique line And a plurality of horizontal lines and a plurality of upper left diagonal lines rotated clockwise by 60 degrees at the same intervals as a plurality of horizontal lines. In other words, the decorative pattern 1150 is a geometric pattern in which a plurality of contours of an equilateral triangle formed by horizontal lines, upper right oblique lines and upper left oblique lines are arranged in a constant pattern. The decorative pattern 1150 is, when assembled on the game board 5, the portions of the contours of two equilateral triangles on the left and right sides of the first starting opening 2002 and the portions of the contours of three equilateral triangles near the upper end of the inner rail 1002 And a pattern consisting of outlines of two equilateral triangles of different sizes.

  In addition, the decorative pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves is formed in a V shape having an acute angle in cross section. In this decorative pattern 1150, even when the various LEDs mounted on the game panel 1100 do not emit light (including the state in which the power of the game machine 1 is not turned on), the presence of the linear groove can be played forward The contour of an equilateral triangle is formed by a combination of a plurality of linear grooves which are formed to a depth exceeding a predetermined depth (1 mm in this embodiment) and can be viewed from the user side. The interior of the game area 5a is decorated by making it possible to identify the pattern of the geometrical pattern formed by the above from the player side in front. In addition, when the panel board 1110 causes the LED for panel decoration 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 to emit light and light is made incident on the inside (side surface) of the panel board 1110, a pattern of a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangles is formed. The light is reflected by the plurality of linear grooves (the light is reflected by the surface portion forming an acute angle), and the decoration pattern 1150 can be decorated to emit light. In addition, even if the decorative pattern 1150 is not in a state of emitting light for the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the other light emitted behind the panel plate 1110 is from the back or diagonally back of the linear groove. When it is incident, light is reflected by a plurality of linear grooves constituting a pattern of a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangle contours (light is reflected by an acute angle surface portion), and the light amount according to the light incident amount The decoration pattern 1150 can be lighted and decorated in an aspect (light emission density, reflection density or luminance). Even if other light emitted behind the panel plate 1110 is incident from the back or diagonally back of the linear groove, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 is the player if the amount of light entering is extremely small. It becomes difficult to recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are provided behind the panel plate 1110. In addition, back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311 a on which the LED 3311 aa is mounted, and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is mounted on the rear lower left front step decorative board 3321 a on which the LED 3321 aa is mounted The body 3410 is provided with a back right upper front decoration board 3411 a on which the LED 3411 aa is mounted, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 is provided with a back lower right front decoration board 3421 a on which the LED 3421 aa is mounted.

  Then, when the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa provided on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 respectively emit light, Light is incident on linear grooves positioned forward and diagonally forward, and light is reflected by a plurality of linear grooves constituting a pattern of a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines (in a plane portion forming an acute angle) If light is reflected) and the amount of light received can recognize the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, the decoration pattern 1150 is lighted and decorated in a mode according to the amount of light received. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED 3311 aa provided on each of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310, the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320, the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 behind the panel board 1110. , 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa are provided at positions suitable for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, and can emit and decorate the decoration pattern 1150 by emitting light with a light quantity exceeding a specific luminance. It has become.

  The positions of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided behind the panel plate 1110 and capable of emitting and decorating the decorative pattern 1150, the distance from the panel plate 1110 (the distance from the back surface of the panel plate 1110), etc. It is not limited to the above, and may be appropriately determined in accordance with the brightness of the light emitting means, the distance from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150, or the like. In other words, if the luminance of the light emitting means is too high, the light emission of the light emitting means becomes prominent and the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 becomes inconspicuous. The distance from the back of 1110 becomes long). When it is desired to let the player notice the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, the light emitting means is made to emit light with a light amount or the like which does not exceed a specific brightness, and when the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 The light emitting means may be made to emit light with a light amount or the like exceeding a specific luminance to make the light emission of the light emitting means stand out.

  The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 includes a radiation portion 1151 that mainly reflects forwardly the light irradiated to the inside from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and the light irradiated to the inside from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the front It is comprised from the radiation light guide part 1152 to which it reflects and light-guides along linear form. The radiation guide portion 1152 satisfies at least one of the depth of the groove is deep and the circumferential length is long in the cross section as compared with the radiation portion 1151. The radiation light guide portion 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation portions 1151 and diffusely reflect the light irradiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. The light can be guided in the direction in which the grooves extend. That is, the radiation light guide portion 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiation portions 1151 connected to itself to the other, whereby the arrangement portion and the number of arrangement of the panel decoration LED 1130 a Among other things, the photosensitivity of the entire decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 (proportion of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) is enhanced. Specifically, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 143 (a), the radiation light guide portion 1152 is normally led from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The light is guided to the radiation portion 1151 disposed outside the range of the light region 1103 to cause the radiation portion 1151 to emit light, and the photosensitivity of the entire decoration pattern 1150 is enhanced.

  As a result, the number of the radiation guide portions 1152 is larger than the radiation portions 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in the portion where the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (the portion outside the ordinary light guide region 1103). Light can be delivered to the light emitting portion 1151 to emit light and decorate with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiation portion 1151 and the radiation light guide portion 1152, and the outlines of a plurality of equilateral triangles The decorative pattern 1150 formed in the geometric pattern is light emitting and decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

  The panel board 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. Each of the plurality of obstacle nails N has a specific obstacle nail N1 having an important role in the game. As shown in FIG. 145, the specific obstacle nail N1 is disposed in the vicinity of the warp inlet 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the gate section 2003. The probability that the game ball B will be accepted to the warp entrance 2501 or the general winning hole 2001 changes when the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or bent by the contact of the game ball B, so the game hall side It is an object to be constantly maintained so that there is no distortion or the like.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, a decoration prohibited area 1104 is within a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) centered on the specific obstacle nail N1, and the decoration pattern 1150 is within that range. The radiation portion 1151 and the radiation light guide portion 1152 are not formed. Thereby, when maintaining the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to make the specific obstacle nail N1 easy to see and to easily confirm whether the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or not. In addition, since the grooves of the radiation portion 1151 and the radiation light guide portion 1152 are not formed in the decoration prohibition area 1104 around the specific obstacle nail N1, the identification is performed to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is hit, the force can be transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiation part 1151 and the radiation light guide part 1152 to prevent the panel plate 1110 from being broken or cracked.

  Further, among the nails N other than the specific nail N 1, the nail N planted at a portion overlapping the decorative pattern 1150 is not shown, but the tip embedded in the panel plate 1110 Are projected inside the groove constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light and light is made to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated to the tip of the obstacle nail N projecting inside the groove And the light is reflected at the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be illuminated. This makes it possible to illuminate the obstacle nail N, and to show the player a light emission effect which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N implanted in a special part, and thereby, together with the light emission decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. A special part of the obstacle nail N can be illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special part obstacle nail N, and the game ball B is hit for the special obstacle nail N. The operation can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, a decorative pattern 1150 consisting of linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. Also, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed prior to the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cutting waste discharged by the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 from being clogged in the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be implanted in a good state.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in the present embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1123 having substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and being recessed from the front side toward the rear, and the holding step 1123 substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction It has a through hole 1121 penetrating therethrough.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch 1122 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion to lower The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank passage unit 610 are arranged to face forward.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 is disposed forward of the holding step 1123 and a plurality of protruding pins 1124 protruding forward from the holding step 1123 and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 respectively. The panel has three engagement claws 1125 resiliently engaged with the engagement steps 1114 at the inclined portions on the upper and lower left sides of the panel plate 1110 and the panel projecting upward from the lower outside of the holding step 1123 And a pair of engagement pieces 1126 that respectively engage with the two engagement steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece 1126 from the front upper side, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 backward to move the upper and lower left. By resiliently engaging the engagement step 1114 at the inclined portion with the engagement claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state of being accommodated in the holding step 1123. At this time, the protruding pins 1124 of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel holder 1120 has two substrate mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear in the upper left corner and the upper right corner outside the holding step 1123 in a front view and the rear and on the rear side of each substrate mounting recess 1127 And two connector recesses 1128 recessed from the front to the front. The upper left substrate cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is attached and the lower left substrate cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is attached are respectively attached to the two substrate attachment recesses 1127 from the front. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located at the rear of the function display unit 1400. In addition, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located at the rear of the sticker sheet sticking portion 1012 in the front component member 1000. The lower substrate mounting recess 1127 protrudes from the boundary side with the holding step 1123 with an engagement claw 1125 that engages with the engagement step 1114 at the lower left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110.

  In the connector recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connector 1131a for the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 attached to the substrate attachment recess 1127 and the connection connector 1132a for the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 penetrate the rear wall of the substrate attachment recess 1127 In the state of projecting into the inside, the connector connector 1131a and the connector connector 1132a are formed in a size large enough to allow a finger to enter. Thus, the connection and removal work of the connection cable (not shown) to the connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a can be easily performed.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 are arranged along the diagonal upper left portion of the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side directed to the right and the lower side directed to the lower, It is mounted to emit light, and is mounted to emit light toward the lower right so that the rest is perpendicular to the upper left oblique portion of the panel plate 1110. The upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is provided with a connection connector 1131a that protrudes rearward on the rear surface.

  The lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the front surface. The lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is notched so as to avoid the lower engaging claw 1125 in the panel holder 1120 as shown in FIG. The panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted to emit light upward, rightward, and upward. The lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is provided with a connection connector 1132a that protrudes rearward on the rear surface.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member and is made inconspicuous from the front. In addition, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can emit light forward as well.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged such that the front surface (plate surface) on which the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the side view type is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Thereby, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be made thinner than the panel plate 1110, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be made to emit light and decoration while suppressing the increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction of the above.

  Also, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a size that is more than sufficient for the size of the panel decoration LED 1130 a mounted on the plate surface (front surface) It is a plate of In other words, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is 40 to 100 times wider than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted. Region). As a result, the mounting strength of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be increased, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 may be subjected to vibrations or impacts that occur during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110 by suppressing the displacement of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a.

  Furthermore, since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the substrate attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the substrate cover 1135, vibration or impact generated at the time of installation, installation, maintenance, etc., of the pachinko machine 1 However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, it is possible to reduce vibrations and the like acting on the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a), and to suppress the deterioration of the durability of the panel decoration LED 1130a, and to combine the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110 by suppressing the displacement of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1135. The substrate cover 1135 is formed to be a frosted glass-like translucent so as to make it difficult for the panel decoration substrate 1130 attached to the rear side to be recognized, and is formed to diffuse light from the panel decoration LED 1130a There is. Thereby, it is possible to reduce that the light irradiated (leaked) from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 in the forward direction illuminates the player and causes the player to feel glare. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, a decorative pattern 1150 having a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines is formed on a transparent panel plate 1110, and it is transparent and has a three-dimensional effect as compared with the conventional decoration by a printing sheet The decoration can be shown to the player. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be made to emit light and decoration, and the game ball B in the game area 5a which has not been seen in the past pachinko machine It is possible to show the player the light emission decoration of the circulating area.

  Further, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed only in the decoration pattern formation area 1101 in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate in various flow paths, the decoration pattern 1150 is made in the whole game area 5a The cost of forming the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced as compared to the case of forming it.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 of this embodiment arranges the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is made to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit), which can be illuminated from the rear and is not included in the conventional pachinko machines, is decorated.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the majority (more than half) of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is covered by the function display unit 1400 and is not visible. Then, a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is visible without being covered by the function display unit 1400. That is, not only the upper left substrate cover 1136 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 but also a part of the panel decoration LED 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 at the back of the upper left substrate cover 1136 Are also visible without being obscured by the function display unit 1400. This makes it possible to visually check the panel decoration LED 1130a in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and to prevent installation failure of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131. Further, in the example of FIG. 146 (A), since the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is arranged so as to be visible visually, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is displayed on the panel plate 1110 The light can be viewed through the upper left substrate cover 1136 without the light emission decoration of the pattern 1150, and when adjusting the brightness of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be visually observed through the upper left substrate cover 1136.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the side wall portion of the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the side surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 can be viewed from the side of the game panel 5 in the assembled state of the game board 5. However, the side surface of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is difficult to distinguish because the thickness is thin, and the provision of the side wall portion of the upper left substrate cover 1136 makes it difficult to visually recognize the panel decoration LED 1130a. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm from the side of the game board 5 that the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a are installed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a is visible from the front of the game board 5, so that it can be confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is surely installed, and installation failure of the panel decoration LED 1130a Can be reliably prevented. It should be noted that by not providing a part of the side wall portion of the upper left substrate cover 1136, at least a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5.

  In addition, it is sufficient if at least a part of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is disposed so as not to be covered by the function display unit 1400. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. Only when the door frame 3 is attached to 4 and the door frame 3 is closed, the function display unit 1400 covers only a portion (part of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 on the end (left end in the figure) side of the game board 5) You may not want to Thereby, not only the upper left substrate cover 1136 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 but also the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 can be visually confirmed in the manufacturing process, the installation left of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 In addition to the fact that it is possible to prevent the game board 5 from being attached to the main frame 4 and closing the door frame 3 in the game arcade, that is, in the state where the player can play, upper left substrate cover 1136 and upper left panel decoration Furthermore, the panel decoration LED 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 can also be made less visible.

  In addition, since the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to see from the player, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a from interfering with the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 when the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light. . As described above, in this example, the panel decoration LED 1130a is of the side view type and emits light toward the game area 5a, so that it is possible to prevent the light of the panel decoration LED 1130a from being directed directly to the player. It is possible to prevent misidentification with the LED (status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator). In addition, since the direct light by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is strong against the indirect light by the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is not performed In the state of being visually observed, the strong light from the light for the panel decoration LED 1130a may disturb the light emission decoration effect of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 (noticing the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a itself) . As described above, the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a and the panel decoration LED 1130a is not easily viewed by the player through the upper left substrate cover 1136, whereby the panel is emitted through the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110. The light emission of the decorative LED 1130 a can be visually observed, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be noticed. It should be noted that at least a part of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 should be visible when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, and a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is Even if it is in a visible state, all may be in a non-visible state. That is, at least the surface portion of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 only needs to be visible in a portion to be exposed without mounting any mounted components.

  Further, since the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is disposed behind the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012, the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment causes the paper stamp sticking portion 1012 to emit light when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 emits light. It is possible to illuminate the back of a pasted certificate (not shown) and make it possible to show the player a luminous effect in which a certificate which is not included in conventional pachinko machines is decorated with light.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is formed large (wide range) with respect to the certificate stamp to be attached to the certificate stamp sticking portion 1012, and a part of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is not covered by the certificate sheet. It is visible. That is, not only the lower left substrate cover 1137 attached to the surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 but also a part of the panel decoration LED 1130 a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 and the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 at the back of the lower left substrate cover 1137 It is also visible without being obscured by the certificate. This makes it possible to visually check the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and to prevent installation failure of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is arranged so as to be visible, part of the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light. The light can be viewed through the lower left substrate cover 1137 without the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, and when adjusting the brightness of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be visually observed through the lower left substrate cover 1137.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the side wall portion of the lower left substrate cover 1137 and the side surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 can be viewed from the side of the game board 5 with the gaming board 5 assembled. However, the side surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is difficult to distinguish because the thickness is thin, and the provision of the side wall portion of the lower left substrate cover 1137 makes it difficult to visually recognize the panel decoration LED 1130a. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm from the side of the game board 5 that the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 and the panel decoration LED 1130a are installed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a is visible from the front of the game board 5, so that it can be confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is surely installed, and installation failure of the panel decoration LED 1130a Can be reliably prevented. In addition, by not providing a part of the side wall part of the lower left substrate cover 1137, at least a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5.

  In addition, the lower left portion of the game board 5 where the lower left panel decoration board 1132 is installed is a position where it is difficult to be recognized visually in a game In order to prevent the light emission of the LED for LED 1130a from going directly to the player, the strong light due to the light emission of the LED for panel decoration 1130a is hardly visible to the player, and the LED for panel decoration 1130a The light emission can be visually observed, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be noticed. In addition, when viewing the game board 5 from the front, it is sufficient that at least a part of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 can be seen visually, and a part of the panel decoration LED 1130 a can be seen visually. However, all may not be visible. That is, at least the plate surface portion of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 only needs to be visible in a portion that is exposed without mounting any mounted components.

  Thus, in the present example, at least a portion of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 mounted on the game board 5 and mounted with the panel decoration LED 1130a are visually observed when the game board 5 is viewed from the front. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to visually confirm the panel decoration LED 1130a in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent the installation left of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. That is, even if the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 are forgotten to be installed in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine, the presence or absence of a defect is visually confirmed from the outside. This can be made early and easily, and it is possible to eliminate the cause of decreasing interest, such as that the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is not decorated with light emission during the game progressing process. Further, when the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 are not installed, the space where the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 should be installed is opened, and it is formed of transparent synthetic resin. Through the panel holder 1120, the back is visible. In the installation area of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 in the panel holder 1120, at least a portion which is visible without being covered by the function display unit 1400 or a certificate and is upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and At the time of installation of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132, a seal or drawing in which a character or figure prompting attention is drawn is given to a portion which is obscured by the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 and becomes difficult to view. It is also possible that the left upper panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 may be forgotten at first glance. Also, among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the visible panel decoration LED 1130a may be a top view type. In this case, the front direction of the top view type panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated in the direction of the player. A cover member for relieving may be provided. Thus, when the panel decoration LED 1130 a is made to emit light, it can be suppressed that the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130 a interferes with the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110.

  Although the side view type LED is used as the panel decoration LED 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132, a top view type LED may be used. After the substrate cover 1136 is attached to the surface of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 (the surface on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted), the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is perpendicular to the side surface of the panel board 1110 The upper left substrate cover 1136 may be attached to the panel holder 1120 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a so that the lower left substrate cover 1137 is a surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 (panel decoration Surface on which the LED 1130a for Then, the lower left substrate cover 1137 is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a so that the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 emits light perpendicularly to the side surface of the panel board 1110 It may be attached to the holder 1120.

  Further, in this case, the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the lower left substrate cover 1137 are constituted of a bottom portion attached substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 5a and a side wall portion extending substantially perpendicularly from the end portion of the bottom portion. The bottom may not be provided at a portion through which the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a passes so that the irradiation light of the panel decoration LED 1130a is not blocked by the bottom. In this case, the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the lower left substrate cover 1137 and the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 can be viewed from the front of the game board 5 with the game board 5 assembled. At least a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5 by not providing a part of the side wall portion of the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the lower left substrate cover 1137 . When the upper left substrate cover 1136 and the lower left substrate cover 1137 are attached to the panel holder 1120 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a, the game board 5 is assembled with the game board 5 assembled. Although the back of the panel decoration board 1131 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132 (the face on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is not mounted) can be seen visually and the panel decoration LED 1130a can not be seen visually, Since it can be visually recognized, it can be indirectly confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is installed.

  Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a condenser lens, a diffusion lens or the like is not disposed between the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130 a is directly irradiated to a wide range to the side surface of the panel plate 1110, and the light can be made incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110. It can be beautifully decorated with light emission. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the condenser lens and the diffusion lens are not disposed by using the wide-angle LED, but the condenser lens and the diffusion lens may be disposed. Further, when the diffusion lens is disposed, a narrow angle or medium angle LED may be used without using a wide angle LED. In addition, when a condensing lens or a diffusion lens is not arrange | positioned, the side surface of the part to which the light from LED1130a for panel decoration is irradiated among the side surfaces of the panel board 1110 is formed in the shape similar to a diffusion lens, The light incident on the side surface of the panel board 1110 from the LED 1130 a may be diffused and led to the inside of the panel board 1110. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, the uneven diffusion portion 1110a may be formed on the side of the panel plate 1110 to which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated. In this example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed in a convex shape, and the light irradiated from the panel decoration LED 1130a is guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110 while being diffused. As a result, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided with a smaller number of LEDs over a wider range, and a wide range of light emission decoration of the game panel 1100 is possible.

  The side surface of the portion to which light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated may be formed in the same shape as the condensing lens, for example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed in a concave shape. Then, the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130 a may be condensed and led to the inside of the panel plate 1110. As described above, by condensing the light incident on the side surface of the panel board 1110 from the panel decoration LED 1130a and guiding the light to the inside of the panel board 1110, it is possible to increase the light quantity of the light emission decoration of the object. Further, the side surface of a portion of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated is formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens, and the same as the diffusion lens among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a The side surface of the portion to which light from a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated excluding the panel decoration LED 1130a which emits light to the portion formed in the shape (other than the side surface formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens All the side surfaces may be used, or part of the side surfaces other than the side surfaces formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens may be formed in the same shape as the condensing lens. That is, the same shape as the diffusion lens or the same shape as the condensing lens may be appropriately formed according to the position and the range of the decoration pattern to be lighted and decorated, the light amount when lighted and decorated.

  Further, it is possible to change the degree of diffusion by changing the shape of the same shape as the diffusion lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the degree of diffusion is increased and the amount of protrusion of the convex-shaped portion is reduced by increasing the amount of protrusion of the convex-shaped portion formed with a predetermined amount of protrusion corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decoration LED 1130a. It is possible to reduce the degree of diffusion with As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the degree of diffusion according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be lighted and decorated, the light amount when lighted and decorated, and the like. In other words, although the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided more widely by increasing the diffusion degree, the light amount weakens, and the range from which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided becomes narrow by weakening the diffusion degree. Since the light amount is enhanced, the light emission decoration in a desired mode can be realized by appropriately setting the diffusion degree according to the position and the range of the decoration pattern to be lighted and decorated, the light amount when lighted and decorated. Note that convex portions formed corresponding to the irradiation positions of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be formed with a predetermined amount of projection for each of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a, and thereby the decoration pattern to be lighted and decorated The light emitting decoration can be performed in a mode aiming at the decoration pattern by setting the diffusion degree for each of the panel decoration LEDs 1130 a according to the position, the range, the light amount for making the light emission decoration, and the like.

  Similarly, it is possible to change the degree of light collection by changing the shape of the same shape as the light collecting lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, for the concave portion formed with a predetermined amount of depression corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the degree of light collection is enhanced by increasing the amount of dent and the amount of dent of the concave portion is reduced It is possible to reduce the degree of concentration. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to change the degree of light collection according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be lighted and decorated, the light amount when lighted and decorated, and the like. That is, although the light amount can be further increased by increasing the degree of light collection, the range in which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided is narrowed, and the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is guided by weakening the degree of light collection. The light intensity of the light emission decoration is enhanced by appropriately setting the degree of focusing according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be lighted and decoration, and the light amount when light emission decoration and the like. Becomes possible. The concave portions formed corresponding to the irradiation positions of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be formed with a predetermined depression amount for each of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a. Depending on the position and range, the amount of light for light emission decoration, and the like, the degree of light collection can be set for each of the panel decoration LEDs 1130 a, and light emission decoration can be performed in a mode aiming at the decoration pattern.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the diffusion portion 1110a formed on the panel plate 1110 by the front component 1000 is viewed from the player. It is in a difficult state. As described above, the front component 1000 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of hiding the diffusion portion 1110 a formed on the panel plate 1110 so as to be difficult to see from the player.

  Furthermore, the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for emitting light and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel holder 1120. When changing to a panel board 1110 to which another different decoration pattern has been applied in order to change the model of the game board 5 or to make a minor change of the model, it can be dealt with only by replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decoration substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as a common component. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. be able to.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is mounted in the substrate mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the substrate cover 1135, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 are separately provided. I am trying to attach it. Thereby, the panel holder 1120 which removed the substrate cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 can be used with respect to the pachinko machine (game board) which has the normal panel board 1110 in which the decoration pattern 1150 is not given. 1120 and the front component 1000 can be a common part. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. be able to. A dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 when using the panel board 1110 not having the decorative pattern 1150 applied thereto, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. The substrate cover 1135 and the panel decoration substrate 1130 may be used with being attached.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is formed of a plurality of members of the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120, but the gaming panel 1100 may be formed of one member. In this case As shown in FIG. 147A, a through hole 1110A1 is formed in a part of the outside of the game area 5a divided by the outer rail 1001 of the flat game panel 1100, and a panel decoration board is formed in the through hole 1110A1. Alternatively, light may be emitted to the side surface of the through hole 1110A1 from the LED for panel decoration 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 by arranging 1130 toward the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 147 (B). At least a part of the outside of the game area 5a divided by the outer rails 1001 of the flat game panel 1100. Is made thinner than the other part to form the step part 1110 B 1, and the panel decoration board 1130 is arranged on the part thinner than the other part and mounted on the panel decoration board 1 130 from the panel decoration LED 1130 a The light may be irradiated to the side surface of the step portion 1110B1 toward the inside of 5a. In this way, the game panel 1100 is provided with an arrangement portion for arranging the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) at a position relatively close to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the game panel 1100 without interfering with the game. By doing this, light can be incident on the game panel 1100 at a position close to the decoration pattern 1150, which makes it possible for the player to recognize a sufficient light emission decoration without interfering with the progress of the game.

  Further, the area (the area thinner than the other areas) where the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 are formed is an opening formed at the center of the game area 5a (the panel plate 1110 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example). Is formed in a size smaller than that of the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity of the central portion of the game panel, and is formed in accordance with the range of the decoration pattern formed on the game panel 1100. For example, when the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed at least around the center on the left side of the center character 2500 of the game area 5a or over a wide range up and down, the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 (pachinko machine 1 of this example A through hole 1110A1 and a step 1110B1 are formed in the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the lower left portion (the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment). When the decoration pattern of is formed only on the upper left side of the center character 2500 of the game area 5a, the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 (the portion where the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed) Through holes 1110A1 and stepped portions 1110B1 are formed, and the decoration pattern of game panel 1100 is the center of game area 5a. When it is formed only on the lower left side of the object 2500, a through hole 1110A1 or a step 1110B1 is formed in the lower left portion of the game panel 1100 (the portion where the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed). The panel decoration substrate 1130 may be disposed in the through hole 1110A1 or the step portion 1110B1 and light may be emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 to the inside of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member and is made inconspicuous from the front. The panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 is a side view type wide-angle full-color LED, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light so as to irradiate light to the through holes 1110A1 and the side surfaces (sidewalls) of the step portions 1110B1. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 according to the range of the decoration pattern formed on the game panel 1100 and the degree of the luminance of the light emission decoration. That is, basically, when the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed over a wide range of the game area 5a, more LEDs are mounted as compared to the case where the game area 5a is formed only in the narrow range. In the case of increasing the luminance of the light emitting decoration, the number of mounted LEDs is increased.

  Further, the side surface (side wall) to which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated among the side surface (side wall) of the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 has the same shape as the diffusion portion 1110a having the same shape as the diffusion lens The light collecting portion of may be formed. As a result, it is possible to set the degree of diffusion and the degree of concentration according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be lighted and decorated, the light amount when lighted and decorated, and the like to realize lighted decoration in a desired mode. In addition, the number of LEDs mounted can be suppressed by appropriately setting the diffusion degree and the light collection degree, and it is possible to realize the light emission decoration over a wide range of the game panel 1100 while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. . Alternatively, the front component 1000 may be attached to the front of the through hole 1110A1 and the stepped portion 1110B1, whereby the diffusion portion 1110a formed in the through hole 1110A1 and the stepped portion 1110B1 is hidden by the front component 1000 1110a may be difficult to see from the player.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the panel decoration board 1130 is disposed on the outside of the game area 5a divided by the outer rail 1001 of the flat game panel 1100 as described above, and the panel is mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 Light is emitted from the decorative LED 1130a to the inside of the game area 5a. In addition to or instead of this, a panel decoration board is formed in the opening formed inside the game area 5a. Light may be emitted from the LED for panel decoration mounted on the panel decoration substrate toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a). For example, as shown in FIG. 148, the panel decoration substrate is disposed inside the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity of the center portion of the panel plate 1110, and the panel decoration LED is mounted on the panel decoration substrate Light may be emitted toward the inner wall of the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 of the modification includes a frame-shaped center part 2500 formed along the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity of the central part of the panel plate 1110 and a frame of the center part 2500. And a transparent flat light guide plate 2601 for closing the inside of the frame-like center character 2500, and a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center character 2500 so as to close the inside. Light is incident from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 on which the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 to be lighted and decorated by causing light to be incident from the upper surface of the light plate 2601 The second pattern decorative substrate 2622 on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 to be lighted and decorated is mounted, the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the LED 2621 A plurality of condenser lenses 2623 provided between the plurality of lenses for condensing light from the LED 2621 and a panel decoration substrate 2622A on which a plurality of panel decoration LED 2621A for allowing light to be incident from the side surface of the game panel 1100 are mounted Have.

  In addition, a top view type full color LED is mounted on the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622, and attached to the center character 2500 so that each is approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a. It is done. In addition, the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 are opposite to each other (the LED 2621 mounted on the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 is formed in the center of the opening 1112 formed near the center portion of the panel plate 1110 The panel decoration LED 2621A mounted on the panel decoration substrate 2622A emits light toward the outside of the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity of the central portion of the panel plate 1110). They are placed back to back to illuminate the The panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 are disposed on the back of the frame portion of the center character 2500. In addition, side view type connection connectors are provided on the front surface side (the surface on which the panel decoration LED 2621A and the LED 2621 are mounted) of the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622, respectively. The connection cables electrically connected via the connection are bundled and drawn around along the frame portion of the center work 2500 and bent backward to be connected to the panel drive board 1720.

  As described above, the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 are not arranged so that the mounting surface of the LEDs (panel decoration LED 2621A, LED 2621) is substantially parallel to the game board 5a, but the LED In order to arrange the mounting surface of the panel decoration LED 2621A and the LED 2621 so that the mounting surface is substantially perpendicular to the game board 5a, the side surface of the thin panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 is The panel decoration board 2622A or the second pattern decoration board 2622 will be turned to the front side, compared with the case where the mounting surface of the LED (panel decoration LED 2621A, LED 2621) is directed to the front side of the game machine Panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second decoration substrate 262 for the second pattern since the installation width in the direction can be narrowed. The panel decoration substrate 2622A and the panel decoration LED 2621A, the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be concealed by the frame portion of the center character 2500 provided in front of the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the panel decoration LED 2621A The second pattern decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made difficult to visually recognize from the player.

  A side view type LED may be mounted on one or both of the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622. In this case, the left and right direction of the substrate on which the side view type LED is mounted The width of the board is set to fit in the frame part of the center character 2500 provided in front of it, and the board mounting top view type LED is mounted to the back side of the board mounting side view type LED It may be arranged so as to be substantially vertical. Thus, the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the panel decoration LED 2621A by the frame portion of the center character 2500 provided in front of the panel decoration substrate 2622A and the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 (on the front side of the gaming machine) The decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be hidden, and the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the panel decorative LED 2621A, and the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made less visible from the player.

  Although the panel board 1110 is not shown in FIG. 148, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a part of the frame portion of the center role 2500 is arranged in front of the panel board 1110, The panel decoration LED 2621A mounted on the panel decoration substrate 2622A is provided close to the inner wall of the opening of the panel plate 1110 and emits light toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a) It is supposed to

  In addition, it is not limited to the inside of opening 1112 which is formed near the central part of panel board 1110 and to which center character 2500 is attached, in addition to or in place of this, units such as winning openings arranged in gaming area 5a May be provided with a panel decoration substrate on which a panel decoration LED is mounted. For example, it is attached to the front view right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which becomes the front view lower right corner in the game area 5a, and has one general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005. It is configured (provided as a unit) to include a panel decoration substrate on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs that allow light to be incident from the side surface of the game panel 1100 is mounted on the attacker unit 2400 (unitized), and an inner wall The light may be emitted toward the outside of the game area 5a. Further, in this case, the panel decoration substrate and the panel decoration LED may be disposed on the back of the outer edge portion (the portion where the attachment portion attached to the game panel 1100 is formed) of the attacker unit 2400. The decorative substrate and the panel decorative LED can be hidden by the attacker unit 2400 to make the panel decorative substrate and the panel decorative LED less visible to the player.

  Further, the panel decoration substrate is disposed in the opening formed inside the game area 5a, and the panel decoration LED mounted on the panel decoration substrate is directed toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a Even in the case of irradiating light, the portion of the inner wall of the opening to which the light from the panel decoration LED is irradiated may be formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens or the condensing lens. As a result, it is possible to set the degree of diffusion and the degree of concentration according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be lighted and decorated, the light amount when lighted and decorated, and the like to realize lighted decoration in a desired mode. In addition, the number of LEDs mounted can be suppressed by appropriately setting the diffusion degree and the light collection degree, and it is possible to realize the light emission decoration over a wide range of the game panel 1100 while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. . In addition, the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens and the condensing lens is disposed behind the outer edge portion (the portion where the attachment portion attached to the game panel 1100 is formed) of the attacker unit 2400. By this configuration, the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusing lens and the collecting lens becomes difficult to be recognized by the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back of the panel board 1110 is made visible using a transparent flat panel panel 1110. At least at least the panel board 1110 by attaching a sheet to the surface (the rolling surface of the game ball) or the back of the panel board 1110 or printing a pattern such as a character directly on the surface or the back of the panel board 1110 It may be difficult to view the back of a part.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, a cell sheet in which the design of the sword 1110b is partially drawn may be attached to the surface of the panel board 1110. Further, in this example, a light-transmissive cell sheet is used, and even in the picture portion, although it is difficult to visually recognize the back, the light irradiated from the back is not blocked. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a portion of the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b depicted on the cell sheet can be visually recognized (for example, the target portion is transparent A decorative pattern is formed on a part of the panel board 1110 corresponding to the part, etc.) and is visible through the cell sheet or from the cutout part of the cell sheet. The design (sword 1110b) drawn on the cell sheet and the decoration pattern formed on the panel board 1110 are combined to represent one design.

  Further, the decorative pattern formed on the panel board 1110 was irradiated from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the inside with a radiation portion for mainly reflecting the light irradiated to the inside from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 forward. It is composed of a radiation light guide for reflecting light forward and guiding light along a line, and the decoration pattern formed on a part of the blade 1110ba is in a state where the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitting light, It can be viewed from the front player side. Then, the decoration pattern formed on a part of the blade 1110ba is combined with the pattern (in this example, the sword 1110b) drawn on the cell sheet to decorate the game area 5a. Thereby, a part of the sword 1110b (part of the blade 1110ba in this example) which is drawn on the cell sheet and adorns the game area 5a by emitting light for the panel decoration LED 1130a is lighted and decorated and a part of the blade 1110ba is A luminous decoration can be made to shine, and this can allow the player to guess that something will happen, thereby enhancing the fun of the game. The entire area of the cell sheet does not have to be translucent, so that at least the area overlapping with the decoration pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 (the area to be decorated with light emission) is translucent. As long as it is formed and the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, the light emission decoration by the panel plate 1110 may be visible, and the light non-transmissive area may be partially blocked (light from the rear is blocked Region) may be included.

  In addition, the decoration pattern of the panel board 1110 may be formed in the area other than the blade 1110ba, and in this case, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitting light, the panel board 1110 is decorated from the front player side. Although it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern, emitting the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 causes the light emitting decoration by the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 to come up through the cell sheet. That is, when the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b is decorated to emit light, and the cell sheet is decorated to emit light with a predetermined decoration pattern on the panel plate 1110.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the decoration pattern is formed on the panel plate 1110 so as to constitute a part of the pattern such as the character drawn on the cell sheet, and the cell decoration sheet is emitted. It is possible to emit and decorate a part of a pattern such as a character drawn on the. In addition, as a decoration pattern of panel board 1110 which constitutes a part of pattern such as a character drawn on a cell sheet, a predetermined part of a pattern such as a character drawn on a cell sheet (for example, a blade 1110ba of sword 1110b or an eye of a character) In addition to the above, the outline and shadow of a pattern such as a character drawn on a cell sheet, and a decoration (pattern showing a sense of depth) etc. for displaying a pattern such as a character drawn on a cell sheet in three dimensions It is also good.

  In addition, the decoration pattern of the panel board 1110 is also formed on the rear portion of the center character 2500, in other words, a portion of the panel board 1110 which is disposed forward so as to cover the frame part of the center character 2500. That is, the decorative display is formed up to the vicinity of the opening that is formed on the panel plate 1110 and is disposed behind the effect display device 1600 and is also blocked by the light guide plate 2601 on the front. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130 a is made to emit light, it can be decorated to emit light near the light guide plate 2601 provided in front of the effect display device 1600 and the effect display device 1600 described later, and the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 Perform light emission decoration in such a way as to associate with the effect to be performed (such that the display of the effect display device 1600 and the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 are continuously connected to the light emission decoration outside the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601) be able to. On the other hand, in order to embellish the panel board 1110 provided at a position not covered by the effect display device 1600 to embellish the periphery of the effect display device 1600, the panel decoration LED 1130a does not disturb the display of the effect display device 1600. To emit light and decorate the panel board 1110 with a predetermined decoration pattern.

  Also, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left bottom movable decoration 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, and the back right bottom movable decoration 3420, which will be described later, are arranged on the back side of the panel board 1110 in the standby state. It is difficult to see from. In addition, the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are the back upper left movable decoration It is possible to emit light in the standby state of the body 3310, back lower left movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, and back lower right movable decoration 3420, and by emitting these LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa, the panel board Light is applied from the rear of 1110 to allow the cell sheet to emit light and decorate with the decoration pattern formed on the panel board 1110. Thus, the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are panel plates 1110 In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when used as a backlight of the panel board 1110, the cell sheet can be light-emitting decorated with the decoration pattern formed on the panel board 1110. .

[5-2-1. Second embodiment of a decoration pattern in a game panel]
Subsequently, in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, a decoration different from the decoration pattern 1150 shown in FIG. 143 to FIG. 145 etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the decoration pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment"). The panel board 1110 on which the pattern 1160 (hereinafter, may be described as “decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment”) is described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. Fig.150 (a) is a front view of the panel board in which the decoration pattern different from FIG. 143 was formed, (b) is a front view which shows the panel board of (a) with a surface unit.

  Similar to the decoration pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment, the decoration pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment has a V-shaped cross section on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 as in the decoration pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment. There is. The decoration pattern 1160 can be viewed from the player side in front even in a state where the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not lighted, and decorates the game area 5 a. The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be made to emit light by causing the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 to emit light and causing light to enter the inside of the panel board 1110.

  The decorative pattern 1160 is, as illustrated, on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the first start opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the side slope 2300, and the warp inlet 2501 of the center character 2500. A radiation portion 1161 is formed at a rear portion such as to reflect light incident inside from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 in the forward direction. As a result, when the decoration pattern 1160 (the radiation portion 1161) is made to emit light, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the side slope 2300, the warp inlet 2501 of the center character 2500 etc. It can be decorated to emit light from behind, making them stand out.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in the decoration pattern 1160, you may make it form several radiation light guide parts which guide the light from LED1130a for panel decoration of the panel decoration board | substrate 1130 to the radiation | emission part 1161. In addition, the decorative pattern 1160 may be combined with the decorative pattern 1150.

5-2-2. Adjustment of obstacle nail in game panel]
Subsequently, adjustment of the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view showing a nail adjustment film for adjusting a barrier nail implanted in the game panel. FIG. 152 is a front view of the main unit frame shown with the game board attached. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state before the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board, and FIG. 153 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board is there.

  In the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 136 etc., a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge array in the game area 5a. More specifically, the plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 which is between the inner periphery of the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the frame-shaped center part 2500. It is set up.

  By the way, since a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in the game area 5a is played with a game, the game balls B driven into the game area 5a frequently abut, so the operating time is long. The distortion of the obstacle nail N is increased. And if distortion of obstacle nail N becomes large, the channel of game ball B will change from the state of the beginning of manufacture, and a winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large The game ball B is difficult to be accepted in the winning opening 2005, etc., or it becomes difficult for the game ball B to pass through the gate section 2003, and the player can not enjoy the game, thereby reducing the interest in the game. There was a problem that. Alternatively, the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, so that the game ball B can be easily accepted by the winning opening, and the payout of the game ball B increases, so that the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine is installed Was a problem. In addition, when distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, depending on the player, only by looking at the board surface of the gaming board 5, it is recognized that the gaming ball B is the gaming board 5 which is hard to enter the winning opening, There was a problem that the operation rate of the pachinko machine was reduced by avoiding playing with the pachinko machine.

  To solve this problem, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a hammer that strikes the obstacle nail N and a nail adjustment in which a gauge ball having the same diameter as the gaming ball B is attached to the tip of the elongated rod. The strain gauge of the obstacle nail N is regularly adjusted using a gauge. However, in the adjustment using the nail adjustment gauge, since the distorted obstacle nail N is adjusted according to the intuition and experience, the adjustment of the obstacle nail N is likely to vary. Moreover, since adjustment of the fault nail N may be performed not only by a skilled technician who is said to be a nailer but also by an unskilled engineer, the unskilled engineer performs a larger variation and the time for adjustment The problem was that it took

  With regard to such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a nail adjustment film 1170 as shown in FIG. 151 is prepared. This nail adjustment film 1170 is made of a transparent resin film, a front pattern 1171 which is the same as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000), and Is printed. The nail picture pattern 1172 is drawn in a circle of substantially the same diameter as the head of the obstacle nail N. In addition, the nail adjustment film 1170 has an identification unit 1173 indicating a specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N. The identification portion 1173 is a circle with a diameter larger than that of the nail pattern 1172. As a result, the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn in a double circle with the nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173 so that it can be determined at a glance. In addition, in the identification unit 1173, circles of different line types are drawn according to the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1. Here, the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1 is divided into “most important” and “important”, and “important” is drawn by a dotted line (dotted line) and “important” by a dashed dotted line (See the enlarged view of Figure 151).

  As a resin film which constitutes this nail adjustment film 1170, polyethylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polypropylene film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polycarbonate film, polyimide film, polyphenylene sulfide film, nylon film, aramid film, polyethylene film, celluloid Films, etc. may be mentioned. In the present embodiment, as a resin film constituting the nail adjustment film 1170, a material that easily generates (is charged with) static electricity is used. The nail adjustment film 1170 is only an embodiment, and a front pattern 1171 equivalent to the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) and a nail pattern 1172 same as the obstacle nail N However, as long as it is printed, it may be replaced with a nail adjustment film 1170, and a low flexible sheet-like or plate-like nail adjustment surface material may be applied.

  The nail adjustment film 1170 has a positioning fixing portion 1174 for positioning and fixing the game board 5. The positioning fixing portion 1174 of the present embodiment is a hole into which four bosses 1020 (see FIG. 152) projecting forward from the front surface of the front component 1000 are respectively inserted.

  The positioning fixing portion 1174 is not limited to the hole into which the boss portion 1020 of the front component member 1000 is inserted as long as it can support the nail adjustment film 1170, and the front component member 1000 or the game board is not limited. In the main body frame 4 to which 5 is attached from the front, the game board lock member 505 protruding forward, the payout path opening / closing door 613, the door frame hook 652, the outer frame unlocking lever 656, etc. may be inserted. . Alternatively, the positioning fixing portion 1174 may be used as the upper portion (upper side) of the nail adjusting film 1170 and inserted into the gap between the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 and the upper end of the game board 5 for positioning and fixing Also good. When the positioning fixing portion 1174 is the left side of the nail adjustment film 1170 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted Thus, the insertion is performed by inserting it into the groove 530a (see FIG. 152) of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame 4 for preventing the unauthorized tool from being inserted into the inside from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 It may be fixed.

  Next, a method of adjusting the obstacle nail N using the nail adjustment film 1170 will be described. With the pachinko machine 1 installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4. In this state, the nail adjustment film 1170 is covered on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 from the front, and the boss 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted into the positioning fixing part 1174. The nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned and fixed. In the present embodiment, since the nail adjustment film 1170 is formed of a material that is easily charged, the nail adjustment film 1170 is stuck to the front of the front component 1000 by static electricity when the game board 5 is charged. Therefore, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be positioned and fixed by the static electricity and supported on the front of the game board 5. In addition, the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center character 2500 provided on the game board 5 are substantially the same as the tip (head) of the obstacle nail N on the side not buried. A planar portion having a planar shape of height is provided in the vicinity of the obstacle nail N, and enables positioning and fixing by the boss 1020 while keeping the nail adjustment film 1170 as a straight surface without bending.

  When viewed from the front with the nail adjustment film 1170 positioned and fixed to the front of the game board 5, the front picture 1171 of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned to match the shapes of the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000, The displacement of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be confirmed. In this state, the head of the obstacle nail N can be seen through the transparent nail adjustment film 1170. When the obstacle nail N is distorted, the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N do not become concentric, and the centers of the circles do not match ((1) Refer FIG. 153 (b)). Thereby, the obstacle nail N to be adjusted can be easily determined.

  Then, when adjusting the distorted nail N, after hitting the nail adjustment film 1170 and hitting the corresponding nail N with a hammer, the nail adjustment film 1170 is covered and the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the obstacle Misalignment with the circle of the head of the nail N is confirmed, and this is repeated to adjust the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N to be concentric with the circle of the nail pattern 1172. Further, when adjusting the obstacle nail N, since the identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the adjustment is carefully performed on the specific obstacle nail N1.

  As described above, according to the nail adjustment film 1170 of the present embodiment, the same front pattern 1171 as the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 is drawn, so the front pattern 1171 matches the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000. By doing this, alignment of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 can be easily performed. In addition, since the nail adjustment film 1170 is drawn with the identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 playing an important role in the game, the position of the specific obstacle nail N1 requiring careful adjustment is easily made. It can be determined. Furthermore, since the nail adjustment film 1170 is provided with the positioning fixing portion 1174 into which the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted, the positioning adjustment portion 1174 can be easily positioned and fixed to the game board 5. Therefore, by adjusting the obstacle nail N in accordance with the nail adjustment film 1170, it is possible to reduce the variation in the adjustment of the obstacle nail N, and even an unskilled technician can easily adjust the obstacle nail N. The working time for adjusting the obstacle nail N can be shortened.

  In addition, in the nail adjustment film 1170, although what showed the pattern of the circle whose diameter was larger than the circle of the nail picture 1172 showed the identification part 1173, it does not limit to this and shows specific obstacle nail N1 with an arrow. , Or may be color-coded.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 152, a predetermined member provided on the front side of the game board 5 includes a plurality of reference parts used to further facilitate the alignment of the nail adjustment film 1170 with the front of the game board 5. P1 to P4 are provided. The plurality of reference parts P1 to P4 are drawn such that numbers are given to the insides of the patterns of the star marks, as well as the patterns of the star marks. Also, as shown in FIG. 151, a plurality of reference symbols R1 to R4 imitating each of a plurality of reference parts P1 to P4 are printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 together with the same front pattern 1171 as the front view of the game board 5 It is done. The reference symbols R1 to R4 are printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 so as to match the corresponding reference parts P1 to P4 in a state where the nail adjustment film 1170 is covered from the front to the game board 5. In addition, although all of the patterns drawn in the standard parts P1 to P4 are imitated as the reference pictures R1 to R4, nail adjustment is performed so as to imitate only a part of the pictures drawn in the reference parts P1 to P4. It may be printed on film 1170.

  As described above, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is covered on the game board 5 from the front, the reference symbols R1 to R4 may be made to coincide with the reference parts P1 to P4, respectively. The nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned with respect to it. Further, since the front pattern 1171 has a pattern having the same shape as the member on which the standard parts P1 to P4 are drawn, the standard parts P1 to P4 are drawn with the standard parts P1 to P4 as marks. If the front pattern 1171 matches the member, it can be checked more reliably whether or not the positional deviation of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 has occurred. According to such a method, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is put on the game board 5 from the front, whether the positioning fixing portion 1174 is inserted through the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 or not Regardless, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned with the game board 5.

  Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on members fixed to the front side of the game board 5. As a specific example, a reference part P1 on the lower left side (near the warp entrance 2501) of the center character 2500 frame, a reference part P2 on the first start opening 2002, a reference part P3 on the big winning opening 2005, and the upper right side of the gate part 2003 A reference portion P4 is provided on a member provided on the outside of the game area 4a located at. Since these members are fixed to the front side of the game board 5, the game ball B which has flowed down the game area 5a continued to abut on the center role 2500, the first starting opening 2002, the big winning opening 2005, etc. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the position adjustment of the nail adjustment film 1170 from becoming difficult with respect to the game board 5 without causing a position shift. Further, the members provided outside the game area 4a (the members outside the game area) positioned on the upper right side of the gate section 2003 do not contact the game balls B that flowed down the game area 5a from the beginning, such a situation The reference portion P4 provided at the portion does not shift in position, and by using the reference portion P4, it is possible to prevent the position adjustment of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 becoming difficult. In addition, when providing the reference part on the member provided outside the game area 4a (the game area outside member), the member provided with the reference part (the game area outside member) It may be provided in the portion covered by the decorative portion (except for the glass plate 162) of the door frame 3 when closed. Thereby, an illegal person who obtained the nail adjustment film 1170 illegally during the operation of the game hall (hall) etc. makes the nail adjustment film from above the glass plate 162 in a state where the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. It can be difficult to align 1170, and some fraudulent action (eg, helping to determine if it is in another improperly nailed condition, etc.) can be performed using the fraudulently obtained nail conditioning film 1170 Can be deterred.

  In addition, the reference portions P1 to P4 may be provided on members fixed on the front side of the game board 5, and other than the first start opening 2002 and the big winning opening 2005, for example, other winning openings (second start opening It may be provided in the general prize winning port 2004) or the gate section 2003. In addition, as members fixed to the front side of the game board 5, for example, reference parts P1 to P4 are provided on a decorative body (including a light emitting decorative body lighted and decorated by an LED) to which a predetermined decoration is applied. May be Also, in this example, the flat panel plate 1110 is transparent, but a cell with a predetermined pattern drawn in front of or behind the panel plate 1110 is attached, and an indication is provided at a visible position of the cells. Portions P1 to P4 may be provided. Such a cell is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that no displacement occurs in the position. Further, it is preferable that the reference portions P1 to P4 be provided on at least two or more members fixed to the front side of the game board 5. As described above, by using at least two or more members, it is possible to minimize occurrence of positional deviation in the nail adjustment film 1170 when aligning the nail adjustment film 1170 with the game board 5. it can.

  As described above, the reference portions P1 to P4 may be provided on members fixed on the front side of the game board 5, but for the windmill capable of changing the flowing direction of the game ball B, the game board 5 Is a member fixed to the front side of the ball, but when the game ball B which has flowed down the game area 5a abuts, the nail supporting the windmill may be bent and the alignment of the nail adjustment film 1170 may become difficult. As a result, the reference portions P1 to P4 are not provided.

  In addition, although the reference parts P1 to P4 are drawn so that numbers are attached to the inside of the pattern of the star mark together with the pattern of the star mark, the pattern which is such a vertical asymmetry body or left and right asymmetrical body is It is preferable that it is drawn. Further, as shown in FIG. 152, it is preferable that the reference portions P1 to P4 be drawn in dark color. In such a case, it is easy to easily find the standard parts P1 to P4 and to make the standard symbols R1 to R4 coincide with each of the standard parts P1 to P4. As a result, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned.

  Similarly, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on a member that is a left-right asymmetry body or a top-bottom asymmetry body, like members of the center character 2500, the first start opening 2002, the big winning opening 2005 and the like. In addition, the reference parts P1 to P4 are, for example, a dark color body in comparison with other members by coating the members such as the center character 2500, the first start opening 2002, and the big winning opening 2005 in dark color. Preferably, it is provided on the member. Even in such a case, members provided with the reference portions P1 to P4 can be easily found, and it becomes easy to make the reference symbols R1 to R4 coincide with each of the reference portions P1 to P4, The nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5.

  Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5. For example, when the reference parts P1 to P4 are provided at positions separated from the specific obstacle nail N1, printing is performed on the nail adjustment film 1170 even if the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned using the reference parts P1 to P4 as a mark. The nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173 are easily displaced from the regular position of the specific obstacle nail N1, but the reference parts P1 to P4 are provided so as to be located near the specific obstacle nail N1. By doing this, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of deviation from the regular position of such a specific obstacle nail N1.

  In addition, it is preferable to provide at least two or more reference parts P1 to P4. For example, the nail adjustment to the game board 5 is performed so that two reference symbols R1 to R4 coincide with two reference parts P1 to P4. By aligning the film 1170, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be more reliably aligned with the game board 5. In addition, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned using the two reference parts P1 to P4 as marks, two reference parts P1 to P1 such as the nail pattern 1172 printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 and the picture of the identification unit 1173 The pattern provided between P4 and its periphery is less likely to deviate from the normal position of the obstacle nail N and the specific obstacle nail N1. Therefore, among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5, a large number of specific obstacle nails N1 that play an important role in the game are provided between the two reference parts P1 to P4 and around them. Thus, it is preferable that the reference portions P1 to P4 be provided.

  In addition, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on a member having a flat shape such that the surface is not uneven, like the members such as the center character 2500, the first start opening 2002, and the big winning opening 2005. In addition, the reference parts P1 to P4 are substantially the same surface as the tips of the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5 like the members of the center character 2500, the first start opening 2002, the big winning opening 2005 and the like. It is made to provide in the member in which the surface was formed so that. In such a case, only a part of the nail adjustment film 1170 is not in contact with the game board 5, and it is easy to make the reference symbols R1 to R4 coincide with the reference parts P1 to P4. Thus, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5. The reference parts P1 to P4 are not limited to the start opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center part 2500 provided in the game board 5, but the front component 1000 etc. It may be provided at other parts.

  Also, in this example, substantially the same as the game board 5 so that the front picture 1171 which is the same as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) can be printed as the nail adjustment film 1170. Although a resin film having a size is used, a resin film having a size (for example, an A4 size) smaller than the size of such a game board 5 may be used. For example, in the nail adjustment film 1170 of A4 size, a nail pattern 1172 or an identification unit 1173 corresponding to a specific obstacle nail N1 playing an important role in the game among a plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5 In addition to the symbols of the symbol pattern, the reference symbols R1 to R4 corresponding to the reference portions P1 to P4 located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1 and the symbols corresponding to the members provided with the reference portions P1 to P4 are appropriately You may print it. Also, for example, the nail adjusting film 1170 of A4 size excerpts only the part necessary for nail adjustment so that the member provided with the specific obstacle nail N1 and the reference parts P1 to P4 and the reference parts P1 to P4 is included A plurality of nail adjusting films 1170 may be divided and printed, or a single nail adjusting film 1170 may be appropriately aligned and printed. As described above, when a resin film having substantially the same size as the game board 5 is used as the nail adjustment film 1170, it may be difficult to carry the nail adjustment film 1170 or the nail adjustment film relative to the game board 5. Although positioning of the 1170 may be difficult, for example, by using a compact resin film such as an A4 size nail adjustment film 1170, such difficulty can be prevented from occurring. Moreover, when only the part required for nail adjustment is extracted, it is preferable that the reference part P1-P4 is provided in the extracted part at least 2 or more. Thus, regardless of whether the number of the nail adjustment films 1170 is a plurality or one, for example, the nail adjustment films so that the two reference patterns R1 to R4 coincide with the two reference portions P1 to P4. By aligning the nail adjustment film 1170 with the portion extracted in 1170, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be more reliably aligned with the portion extracted in the nail adjustment film 1170.

  Further, in view of making it difficult to position the nail adjustment film 1170 improperly from above the glass plate 162 in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 as described above, the door window 101a The left upper decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the dish, the upper right decoration 276, the upper decoration on the dish 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the decoration 410b in the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration The body 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 are partially provided with protrusions projecting toward the center side of the game area (the central portion of the glass plate 162), and these protrusions abut on the glass plate 162 Alternatively, they may be provided close to each other. By doing this, even if the nail adjustment film 1170 of a size (for example, A4 size) smaller than the size of the game board 5, the alignment itself by the contact with the projection on the glass plate 162 With the door frame 3 closed against the main body frame 4 and using the nail adjustment film 1170 obtained fraudulently (for example, whether it is a nail condition suitable for other fraudulent cases or not). Can be prevented from being carried out.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 133 and 134 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thus, it is possible to receive all of the gaming balls B discharged to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the gaming balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, It can be made to discharge from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 185) for controlling the game contents and payout of the game ball B, and the main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the substrate holder 1200. And have.

  The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. By forming the cover body and the beta body transparently by using polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not the illegal modification is performed, or the illegal IC is mounted Can be checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, the main control board box 1320 In order to open the control substrate box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2506, a second start port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a start port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a general winning port sensor 2401, a general winning port sensor 3001. , And the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 130, FIG. 132, FIG. 140, FIG. 142 and FIG. FIG. 154 is a schematic explanatory view of routing of wires from the function display unit in the main control board.

  The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 input to the connection connector 1400 a disposed to project rearward from the upper side of the back surface, and thereby play a game (play status) Or, usually, it displays the lottery result, the special lottery result and the like.

[5-5-1. Configuration of Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, has two status indicators consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two regular lottery results for lottery by passing the game ball B against the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display made of LEDs, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball B, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special hold number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It has an indicator.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-5-2. Noise countermeasure]
Here, there are a plurality of wires (hereinafter simply referred to as “wirings”) for electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 and transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 Yes, I will explain in detail.

  The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as described above. Wiring FCBL electrically connected through connector 1400a provided on the back side of function display unit 1400 is pulled from the upper right corner of game board 5 to the upper edge of the rear face of back box 3010 as shown in FIG. 132. When it is turned, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is gathered by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, It is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower side and pulled downward along the right side of the main control substrate box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 It will be turned.

  Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display unit connector MFCN After being drawn down to the lower side, they are electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the upper right corner of the game board 5 and the back box The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back 3010 is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The bottom of the main control board box 1320 is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320, which is the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the bottom rear of the game panel 1100. As described above, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 115 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 Will be placed in

  Further, as described above, the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400. Wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of upper left panel decoration substrate 1131, is bent toward the upper rear side of game panel 1100 as shown in FIGS. 132 and 142. Then, it is bent toward the back surface of back box 3010 at the top side of the front surface of back box 3010, and is routed to the top side of the back surface of back box 3010 in a state of proximity (or contact) with wiring FCBL described above. Then, it is bent downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, under the peripheral control unit 1500. It is routed to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. Then, the wiring UPCBL is bent below the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the left side at the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 and separated along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 apart from the path of the wiring FCBL described above. After being drawn and drawn up to the upper side of the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As such, the wiring UPCBL electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive substrate 1720 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, the upper right of the game board 5 The wiring FCBL routed from the corner to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward of the back surface of the back box 3010 and A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a plurality of directions are gathered together and routed to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. The area in which the wire UPCBL is drawn is attached to the payout base unit 550 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be arrange | positioned ahead of the payout unit 560 being carried out.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes the ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding path for guiding the gaming balls B from the tank rail 553 in a serpentine manner, and the one guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the induced gaming balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 633, and an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming balls B having passed through the payout devices 580 downward; And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball B is polished at the island facility of the game hall, rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to cause electromagnetic wave noise Release. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of retaining the game ball B and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the periphery thereof.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, etc., which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. Have. The main control MPU 1310a incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"), and such internal reset is described. The forced reset by the circuit has a mechanism that can not be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when the main reset MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a check sum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a always occurs as described later, so it is built in the main control MPU 1310 a The contents of the RAM are completely erased (cleared). That is, when the forcible reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310 a is activated again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type is adopted as a package of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control substrate 1310, It protrudes from the soldering surface (surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310. That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a are in a state of projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 are attached and the periphery thereof, and therefore, when electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, it is disposed ahead of the dispensing unit There is a possibility of intruding into the wiring FCBL which electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310, and electrically connects the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. May intrude into the wiring UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL may pop out and intrude into the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring UPCBL may pop out and intrudes into the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 is temporarily formed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 It is drawn on a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (eg, from the upper side of the main control board box 1320 to the right side of the main control board box 1320). The main control board box 1320 is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320) At the stage of passing over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the main control board box 1320 When it is bent toward the side and drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the line FCBL, the line FCBL When routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of main control substrate box 1320, the front of main control substrate 1310 (that is, the main control substrate 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of main control MPU 1310a) When passing through the area of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the wiring FCBL Under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  If the wiring accommodation groove is formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL is The function display is received after being drawn along the wiring receiving groove, not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, and drawn from the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320. Electrically connected to unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and drawn along the wiring receiving groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of FIG. Intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the main control MPU 1310a, there is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the function display unit is a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. Connector MFCN is disposed from the lower center of the main control board 1310 toward the left side and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . That is, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing the middle point of the main control MPU 1310a between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged to be separated on the main control board 1310.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be disposed apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL corresponds to the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control It is possible to prevent the pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from entering the various pins of the main control board box 1320 via a space separating the MPU 1310 a from the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  Also, by arranging main control MPU 1310 a away from function display unit connector MFCN to which wiring FCBL is electrically connected, main control MPU 1310 a is not affected even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL. In the space where the main control substrate 1310 or the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310 a are separated from each other on the main control substrate 1310, electromagnetic noises entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can intrude.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310 a is disposed with the right side of the package separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the line FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is drawn downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so the electromagnetic wave that has entered the line FCBL This is to prevent noise from intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance dimension from the wiring FCBL.

  Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 is in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 without being drawn around (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200) When it is drawn downward along it, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 and is drawn along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL drawn along the lower side and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as “second wiring separation distance dimension”). ) Can be secured. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise which has entered the wiring FCBL penetrates various pins of the main control MPU 1310 a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 through the space having the second wiring distance from the wiring FCBL. Can be prevented. Also in this point, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can intrude.

  In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay substrate 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a straight line. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the above-described wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the wiring FCBL. Thereby, it is possible to make the main control MPU 1310 a not affect the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit is a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass through.

  In addition to resistances, filter circuits, etc., examples of such elements include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). They are inserted so as to be respectively connected in series, and when using a capacitor, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or the bead and the capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  In addition, the panel relay substrate 1710 detects the game ball B received by the gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 provided on the game board 5 and the big winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. Large winning opening sensor 2403, general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, and magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002 provided on the gaming board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the electric field are electrically connected and aggregated. That is, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the panel relay substrate 1710 is electrically connected to the wires FCBL from the function display unit 1400 and aggregated. Note that two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 and a second starting opening for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second starting opening 2004 The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control substrate 1310 without interposing the panel relay substrate 1710, respectively.

  In addition to the two wires from the various sensors, panel relay substrate 1710 is electrically connected to wire FCBL from function display unit 1400 to main control substrate 1310 via connector 1710a shown in FIG. 132. There is. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay substrate 1710, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL in the panel relay substrate 1710 can be reduced or reduced. By providing elements that can be removed (that is, by providing elements capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise to a plurality of wirings FCBL transmitting control signals from main control substrate 1310 to function display unit 1400) And electromagnetic wave noise from the various sensors to the two wires can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the wire UPCBL electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive substrate 1720 has a longer wire length. In particular, the wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper edge of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward of the back surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the upper and lower direction along the right side of the rear surface are respectively gathered and routed under the peripheral control unit 1500 up to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700, thus wiring An electromagnetic wave noise may intrude into the region where the UPCBL is routed, as in the case of the wiring FCBL described above. As described above, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700, and the drive substrate unit After being routed to the upper side of the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in 1700, since it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise due to the wiring UPCBL affects the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a fear.

  Specifically, the lower side of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described in detail later, but connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 182) included in peripheral control board 1510 and connectors included in liquid crystal output board 1530 CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 182). Corresponding various wires are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, the various wires electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL are arranged to cross or contact each other (arrangement arrangement), the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring UPCBL jumps out, and the connectors CN2 to CN9 When entering into various electrically connected wires, disturbance occurs in the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600, for example, under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wire UPCBL (for example, a pattern such as a black screen) Turbulence will occur).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wires electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are separated along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 to be separated from the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. There is. As a result, the wiring UPCBL drawn around along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 does not cross (or cross over) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wires UPCBL drawn along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 do not contact in parallel with various wires electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. Do not make contact with some of the various wires connected to In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the above-described internal reset circuit, various wirings electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310 intersect or contact the wiring UPCBL. It is arranged not to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control substrate 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 The peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the peripheral control board 1510 as a positional relationship with the mounting position of the peripheral control IC 1510a described later (FIG. 154) . That is, in this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged. It is arranged to separate.

  Thus, peripheral control IC 1510 a of peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from wiring UPCBL drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of drive substrate unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a and is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is disposed apart from the wiring UPCBL drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. Thus, even if electromagnetic noise penetrates into the wiring UPCBL, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected by the wiring UPCBL on the peripheral control substrate 1510 or in a space separating the wiring UPCBL from the peripheral control IC 1510a. Electromagnetic wave noise can be attenuated. Also in this point, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Further, the substrates of the peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the substrate of the panel drive substrate 1720 of the drive substrate unit 1700 are electrically connected via a wire not shown, and this wire and wire UPCBL intersect or contact The electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel drive substrate 1720, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 is processed from the panel drive substrate 1720 through the wiring. It becomes extremely difficult to intrude to the peripheral control board 1510 without the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. Also in this point, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  In the present embodiment, in the panel drive substrate 1720, the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the ground (solid earth), but an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise may be further provided. (Ie, an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise from a plurality of wires UPCBL transmitting control signals from panel drive substrate 1720 to upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed behind functional display unit 1400) Preferably provided). Thus, electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring UPCBL can be reliably attenuated or removed in the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit is a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass through.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., examples of such elements include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). They are inserted so as to be connected in series with each other, and when using a capacitor, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wires UPCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wires UPCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a display device (display unit) for performing a common view variation display game, a special view variation display game, a display of a gaming state, etc. Open 2016-154676 gazette (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], Drawing 2, and Drawing 21)). The display device (display unit) is display-controlled by the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the wire electrically connecting the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device is connected via this wire. There was a risk of affecting.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 134 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 or the like that controls effects to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control substrate 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decoration substrates on the door frame 3 side, other substrates (a peripheral data ROM substrate to be described later, a liquid crystal output substrate) ing. The configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface, and lower fixed pieces 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. In the effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward, the two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner circumferential surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 130, 131, 133, 134 and 136. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112 And project rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality of (here four) general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball B The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball B can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, and the first start-up port 2002 or the second start-up port 2004 A special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be received according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the reception of the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are disposed below the vertical center in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right with respect to the horizontal center. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is disposed at the lower part in the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is disposed lower than the center in the vertical direction near the right end in the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the lateral center of the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed near the upper right corner in a front view in the gaming area 5a. The second start opening 2004 is disposed below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side and higher than the first start opening 2002. The big winning opening 2005 is disposed on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004.

  Note that a plurality of general winning openings 2001 (four general winning openings 2001) are winning openings (ball entrances) similar in use, and the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate unit 2003 have applications. It is a similar winning opening (ball entrance). Here, it will be briefly described that the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate unit 2003 have a winning opening (ball entry) similar in use to the game ball B. The first special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of The second special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the control unit 1300, and the gate unit 2003 is configured to execute the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the passage of the game ball B. Usually, the result of the lottery is obtained by executing the lottery by.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and a front view left of the start opening unit 2100 Side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the side and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side slope mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 in a front view 2300 and attached to the right of the front view opening unit 2100 as the front view lower right corner in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 Inside the game area 5a above the attacking unit 2400 and the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. A frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to the center slightly above the center and having a gate part 2003 and attached to the center member 2500 so as to close the frame of the center member 2500 And a table rendering unit 2600.

5-8. Starting port unit]
The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out opening 1008 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 which is always open upward with a width which allows only one gaming ball B to be received. The start opening unit 2100 is entirely transparent, and can visually recognize the rear side (the decoration pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) (see FIG. 144).

  When the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and then is opened upward, and the first starting opening 2002 will be described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the feature 2500. Therefore, when the gaming ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with extremely high probability. The starting opening unit 2100 can guide the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guiding path in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

  In addition, the first starting port sensor 3002 is a first starting port sensor main side (hereinafter, referred to as "first starting port sensor main side 3002a") and a first starting port sensor secondary side (hereinafter, "first starting port sensor And the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor second side 3002b are at least erroneously detected preventing distance (in this embodiment, 14 mm). It has a large distance dimension compared to the diameter (11 mm) of the gaming ball) and is disposed apart from each other in the vertical direction. Since the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor secondary side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port When the sensor slave side 3002b is disposed in a state where the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension or less, the gaming ball B passing through the first start opening sensor main side 3002a and the first start opening sensor main side 3002a are first start opening It may be detected by the sensor slave side 3002b, and the gaming ball B passing through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b is detected by the first start port sensor slave side 3002b together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a. It is because there is a case.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b are spaced apart by a dimensional distance (in the present embodiment, 43 mm) larger than the erroneous detection preventing distance dimension. Thus, when the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection affects the first starting opening sensor secondary side 3002b. By the physical structure that the first starting opening sensor slave 3002b erroneously detects even though the game ball B is not yet passing through the first starting opening sensor slave 3002b. Can be prevented, and when the first start-up sensor slave 3002b detects the game ball B passing through the first start-port sensor slave 3002b, The first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is affected by the electric effect of knowledge, so that the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is in the state of having already passed the first starting opening A physical structure can prevent the mouth sensor main side 3002a from detecting erroneously. Thus, the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is first detected by the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a, and the first starting opening sensor After passing through the side 3002 b, the substrate 300 is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the first start port sensor side 3002 b.

  In the present embodiment, the first start-up sensor 3002 configured by two sensors (double sensors) of the first start-up sensor main side 3002 a and the first start-up sensor secondary side 3002 b performs the first start-up. The game ball B received by the mouth 2002 can be detected reliably. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached. A detailed description of the injustice detecting process capable of detecting and notifying by the first starting opening sensor 3002 configured by two sensors (double sensors) will be described in detail the injustice by the radio wave irradiation using the).

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 in which the game ball B is always open. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the middle horizontal winning combination 2001 is on the right. The top left general winning opening 2001 is opened higher than the middle general winning opening 2001, and the top left general winning opening 2001 is open upward. There is.

  The entire side unit 2200 is formed to be transparent, and can visually recognize the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) (see FIG. 144). By mounting the side unit 2200 on the front surface of the panel board 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward than the front surface of the panel board 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the gaming ball received by the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guiding path of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

5-8. Side slope]
The side slopes 2300 of the front unit 2000 are attached along the inner rail 1002 at the top left of the side unit 2200 in a front view. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lower in front view. The side slopes 2300 are attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf 2301 protrudes more forward than the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The side slope 2300 can guide the gaming ball B, which has flowed down the area on the left side of the center character 2500, to the right. The entire side slope 2300 is formed to be transparent in its entirety, so that the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 at the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, and can visually recognize the rear side (the decoration pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) (see FIG. 144). The attacker unit 2400 is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 out of the four general winning openings 2001 (see FIG. 136 and the like).

  The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 in a front view is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends substantially upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacking unit 2400, a general winning opening 2001, which is always open upward at the upper right corner, is disposed, and the attacking unit 2400 can be opened upward at a position to the left with respect to the bottom of the general winning opening 2001. Two starting ports 2004 are arranged. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 which can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004.

  Attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 opened with a size slightly larger than gaming ball B. In addition, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting opening 2004 is opened upward with a size slightly larger than the gaming ball, and the big winning opening 2005 is approximately three times the outer diameter of the gaming ball in the left-right direction It is open upward with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the second starting opening 2004. And a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B accepted by the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 185).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second start opening 2004 and the second start opening door 2411 in accordance with the result of the normal lottery where the game ball B of the gate unit 2003 passes. The start opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 An attacker solenoid 2414 is opened and closed according to one special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The attacker unit 2400, as shown in FIG. 137, is an upper right / left passage 2421 and an upper right / right passage 2422 where game balls B can flow downward to the left and right of the general winning opening 2001 located at the upper right, and an upper right / right passage 2422 From the downstream end of the general winning hole 2001 to the left and right lower guiding shelf 2423 inclined downward to the left so as to join the upper right and left aisle 2421 and the lower right of the left guiding shelf 2423 And the second start opening upper induction shelf 2424 extending leftward so as to become lower toward the second start opening 2004 from right under the left passage 2421 and the left end from the left end of the second start opening 2004 become lower A space is leftward from the left end of the second starting opening lower side guiding shelf 2425 extending leftward and the left end of the second starting opening lower side guiding shelf 2425 below the second starting opening lower side guiding shelf 2425 A large winning opening upper side guide shelf 2426 extending leftward to lower from the place to the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening extending leftward from the left end of the large winning opening 2005 so that the left end is lower And a lower guiding shelf 2427.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 opens leftward on the right end side of the second start opening upper induction shelf 2424 and guides the gaming ball B downward from the second start opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 center right A central left passage which opens upward between the passage 2428, the second starting opening lower side guiding shelf 2425 and the big winning opening upper side guiding shelf 2426 and guides the gaming ball B downward than the large winning opening 2005 And 2429 are provided.

  The second start opening door 2411 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and the second start opening 2004 opened upward and backward by moving back and forth. Can be opened and closed. The second start opening door 2411 is mounted to be movable forward and backward in the front-rear direction near the upper end of the second start opening 2004. The second starting opening door 2411 closes the second starting opening 2004 by moving forward, and guides the gaming ball B flowing through the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2424 to the left, and then the second starting opening. It can be delivered onto the lower guiding shelf 2425. The second start opening door 2411 can be opened backward by opening the second start opening 2004 by receiving the game ball B flowing down to the second start opening 2004 by moving back to the rear by driving the start opening solenoid 2412. it can. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (during power) Let

  The special winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and rear direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and opens and closes the large winning opening 2005 opened upward by advancing and retracting in the front and rear direction. It is possible. The big winning opening door 2413 closes the big winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the gaming ball B which has circulated the big winning opening upper induction shelf 2426 to the left, and then the big winning opening lower guidance shelf It can be delivered to 2427. Also, the special winning opening door 2413 opens the special winning opening 2005 by moving backward by the attachment solenoid 2414, and the gaming ball B that has flowed through the right guiding passage 2510 of the center character 2500 is made to the special winning opening 2005. It can be accepted. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is ON (during energization).

  In the attached state on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general prize port 2001 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guiding passage 2510 in the center part 2500 described later (slightly leftward from the bottom). The second starting port 2004 is located above the stage 2503 of the center character 2500, and the big winning port 2005 is located below the stage 2503 of the center character 2500. Further, in the state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are present between the lower end of the right guiding passage 2510 of the center work 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

  Subsequently, the flow of the gaming ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 in the state assembled on the game board 5, the gaming ball B starts from the stage 2503. Even if they are released, they are not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2510) of the center product 2500 may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. On the downstream of the right guiding passage 2510 of the center character 2500, the right upper left passage 2421, the general winning opening 2001, and the right upper right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, B will enter any of them.

  After the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the right guiding passage 2510 of the center character 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401 And is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, when game ball B is not received in general winning opening 2001 and enters upper right left passage 2421 on the left of general winning opening 2001 or right upper right passage 2422 on the right, it falls onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2424 And distribute to the second start port 2004 side (left side). In the state where the second start opening 2004 is closed by the second start opening door 2411, the left end side of the second start opening door 2411 is inclined so as to be low. It flows to the second start opening lower guide rack 2425 and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second start opening lower guide rack 2425. When the game ball B passes through the second start opening upper induction shelf 2424, if the second start opening 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted to the second start opening 2004 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. If the game ball B which has flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 is not received by the second start opening 2004, it is released to the left large winning opening 2005 side via the second start opening lower side guide shelf 2425. . When the gaming ball B released from the upper right / left passage 2421 to the second start opening upper guide shelf 2424 enters the central right passage 2428 from the right end side of the second start opening upper guide shelf 2424, the second start opening 2004 The game is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received to the special winning opening 2005 and the first start opening 2002.

  The second starting opening lower side guiding shelf 2425 is disposed above the large winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided on the left side of the second starting opening lower side guiding shelf 2425. Is planted. Then, the gaming ball B released to the left from the second starting opening lower side induction shelf 2425 flows down to any of the first starting opening 2002 side, the large winning opening 2005 side, and the central left passage 2429 side. Become. When the big prize mouth 2005 is closed by the big prize mouth door 2413 when flowing down to the big prize mouth 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the big prize mouth door 2413 and the big prize mouth lower side guiding shelf 2427 It is emitted to the left through When the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005 is retreated and the large winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B which has flowed from the second start opening lower side guiding shelf 2425 to the large winning opening 2005 side However, it is accepted in the big prize mouth 2005. The game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the center left passage 2429 from the second starting opening lower side induction shelf 2425 and the game ball B released to the left from the big winning opening lower side induction shelf 2427 is played through the out port 1008 It is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the panel 1100.

  The gaming ball B that has flowed down from the second starting opening lower side induction shelf 2425 to the first starting opening 2002 side through the obstacle nail N may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002. The gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. On the other hand, the game ball B which has not been received by the first start port 2002 passes through the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center feature]
The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc. in the game area 5a, slightly above the center of the front view, and the panel plate of the game panel 1100 It is attached to the front of 1110. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and can visually recognize from the front the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000, etc. through the frame. it can. In addition, the center character 2500 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, and can visually recognize the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000).

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B inserted into the game area 5a is within the frame. It can not intrude into

  The center character 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view, and a game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released A warp outlet 2502 opened inward and a stage 2503 which can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction are provided.

  The stage 2503 of the center character 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed and corresponds to a position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, that is, the center character 2500 is In the state of being attached to 1110), the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the portion (apex) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and the lowermost portion (valleys) on both the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these portions.

  The center portion 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, and the high portion (top) of the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  In addition, the center role 2500 is located on the right side of the front component 1000 at the part slightly below the upper right corner in the front view (the part immediately below the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000 when assembled on the game board 5). Gate space forming portion 2505 forming a space of a predetermined size through which gaming balls B can flow between rail 1005 and gaming balls B from the downstream end of gate space forming portion 2505 along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view It has a right guide passage 2510 which is allowed to flow down and is guided slightly leftward near the lower end and then discharged downward.

  In the center role 2500, a gate unit 2003 is provided at the center of the gate space forming unit 2505, and a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B having passed through the gate unit 2003 is attached. The gate space forming unit 2505 has such a size that the game ball B can also be distributed to the left and right sides of the gate unit 2003. In the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted above the gate portion 2003.

  The right guiding passage 2510 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guiding passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of immediately above the general winning opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2400 when the center product 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 There is.

  In this center role product 2500, when assembled on the game board 5, the distance between the right of the center of the outer peripheral surface on the upper side and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B It is formed to be widely separated. Thereby, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate the right side of the center character 2500 (so-called, right-handed), the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 and the right guide passage 2510 And must be circulated to flow above the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, in order to pass the game ball B to the gate unit 2003, it is necessary to hit the right, and by hitting the right when the big winning opening 2005 is opened, the gaming ball to the big winning opening 2005 with high probability B can be accepted.

  The center role 2500 also includes a sub-function display unit 2520 in the upper right corner. The sub function display unit 2520 has a plurality of full color LEDs. The sub function display unit 2520 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit by the lighting / blinking of the LED, the light emission color, etc. Display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. It is

  Since the center product 2500 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, a flange-like portion in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also formed transparent. Therefore, in a state where the center character 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 144, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear panel plate 1110 is viewed from the front through the center character 2500. be able to. As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the portion between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 described later is as narrow as possible. Thus, the continuity between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 can be enhanced to give a sense of unity.

5-8. Table production unit]
Next, the table rendering unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 155 to 158 and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the front effect unit. FIG. 156 is a front view showing a light emitting decoration of the first pattern in the table effect unit, and FIG. 157 is a front view showing a light emitting decoration of the second pattern in the table effect unit. FIG. 158 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern of the table rendering unit different from the present embodiment is decorated with light emission.

  The table rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center character 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center character 2500. The table rendering unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center character 2500, and allows light to be incident from the upper surface of the transparent flat light guide plate 2601 that closes the frame of the center character 2500 and the upper surface of the light guide 2601. For the first pattern 2610 on which the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 to be lighted and decorated is mounted, and for the second pattern 2620 to be lighted and decorated by causing light to be incident from the right side of the light guide plate 2601 And a plurality of condenser lenses 2623 provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the LEDs 2621 for condensing light from the LEDs 2621; Is equipped. The LED 2611 and the LED 2621 are full color LEDs.

  The light guide plate 2601 has a first pattern 2610 (see FIG. 156) formed of an uneven number of upper reflecting portions that reflects only light from the upper side forward (see FIG. 156), and moves only light from the right side forward. And a second pattern 2620 (see FIG. 157) formed of an uneven number of right reflecting portions to be reflected. That is, the table effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern 2610 to emit light when the LED of the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 emits light, and the surface effect unit 2600 causes the LED 2621 of the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 to emit light. The second pattern 2620 can be illuminated and displayed.

  In the light guide plate 2601, the asperities of the innumerable upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the innumerable right reflecting portions forming the second image 2620 are finely formed. When the LED 2611 of the decorative substrate 2612 for the design and the LED 2621 of the decorative substrate 2622 for the second design do not emit light, the various decorative bodies and effect display devices 1600 of the back unit 3000 appear on the rear side. The effect image and the like displayed on can be viewed in a good state.

  The plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the right reflecting portion forming the second pattern 2620 are perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding LED 2611 and LED 2621. It has a flat surface extending at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate 2601. The upper reflection portion and the right reflection portion are recessed in a pentroof triangle. The upper reflection portion and the right reflection portion reflect light incident from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, light incident from the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 which is not supported is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 can be made to reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate 2601.

  The plurality of LEDs 2611 mounted on the lower surface of the first design decorative substrate 2612 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and are grouped into four groups of a first LED 2611 a, a second LED 2611 b, a third LED 2611 c, and a fourth LED 2611 d. It is divided. The first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are arranged in a circle so as to make a predetermined number of turns (three in this case) from the left.

  The first pattern 2610 is a pattern associated with the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, as shown in FIG. The first pattern 2610 is a pattern constituted by a plurality of equilateral triangles having extensions of the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 (see FIG. 172). . The first pattern 2610 has a pattern of six large triangles having substantially the same size as an equilateral triangle formed by gathering four equilateral triangle contours in the decorative pattern 1150, and a contour of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern 1150. It is composed of a plurality of small triangles and a size that fits inside. The patterns of the six large triangles are arranged in a circle around the center of the game area 5a so as to be entirely hexagonal, and a plurality of small triangles are arranged to surround the patterns of the six large triangles. It is arranged.

  In the large triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610, a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are superimposed so that the sizes become smaller in order while being eccentric to the vertex side closer to the center of the game area 5a. It is formed in a good pattern. The small triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610 is formed in a pattern in which the outlines of the regular triangle are arranged concentrically.

  The first pattern 2610 includes a first pattern portion 2610a formed of a plurality of upper reflecting portions corresponding to the first LED 2611a, and a second pattern portion 2610b formed of a plurality of upper reflecting portions corresponding to the second LED 2611b. And a third pattern portion 2610c constituted by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the third LED 2611c, and a fourth pattern portion 2610d constituted by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LED 2611d It is configured.

  The first pattern 2610, the second pattern 2610b, and the third pattern 2610c are large triangular patterns in which a plurality of equilateral triangles of different sizes are overlapped in the first pattern 2610 so that the sizes become smaller in order. A fourth pattern portion 2610d, a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, and a third pattern portion 2610c are superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a. Occasionally, the small triangle pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern 2610 has a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, a third pattern portion 2610c, and a second pattern portion so that the sizes become smaller in order The four pattern portions 2610 d are arranged concentrically in this order.

  The second pattern 2620, as shown in FIG. 157, is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player consisting of the characters "CHANCE!".

  In addition, as a second embodiment of the table effect unit 2600, a second pattern 2630 as shown in FIG. The second pattern 2630 is a pattern associated with the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The second pattern 2630 is a geometric pattern obtained by extending the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 with a wide width (see FIG. 176).

  Next, the light emission effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED 2611a of the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 is made to emit light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the first pattern portion 2610a, and the remaining second pattern portion 2610b, third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, so that only the first pattern portion 2610a is seen as shining from the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, when the second LED 2611b of the first design decorative substrate 2612 is made to emit light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second design portion 2610b, and the remaining first design portion 2610a, the third Since the symbol 2610 c, the fourth symbol 2610 d, and the second symbol 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the second symbol 2610 b is seen as shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, when the third LED 2611c of the first design decorative substrate 2612 emits light, the light incident in the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the third design portion 2610c, and the remaining first design portion 2610a, the second Since the symbol 2610 b, the fourth symbol 2610 d, and the second symbol 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the third symbol 2610 c is seen as shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when the fourth LED 2611d of the first design decorative substrate 2612 emits light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the fourth design portion 2610d, and the remaining first design portion 2610a, the second Since the symbol 2610b, the third symbol 2610c, and the second symbol 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth symbol 2610d can be seen as shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Then, in the first pattern 2610, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, and the second pattern portion in the large triangle pattern portion 2610b and the third pattern portion 2610c are superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangle portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. And the fourth pattern portion 2610d are arranged concentrically in the order of the center, so that when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are caused to emit light in the order, the first pattern Part 2610a, the second pattern 2610b, the third pattern 2610c, the fourth pattern 2610d will emit light in the order of the center from the outside Towards a like motion to move it can be performed emission effect, such as animation.

  On the other hand, when the fourth LED 2611 d, the third LED 2611 c, the second LED 2611 b, and the first LED 2611 a are made to emit light in this order, the fourth symbol 2610 d, the third symbol 2610 c, the second symbol 2610 b, and the first symbol 2610 a It is possible to perform light emitting effects such as animation with motion that moves to the outside from the center side.

  Furthermore, when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d emit light in different colors, respectively, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third The light can be emitted in different colors.

  In addition, when the plurality of LEDs 2621 of the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 emit light, the light incident in the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern 2620, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern Since the portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern 2620 appears to be emitted from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the plurality of LEDs 2621 can cause the second symbol 2620 formed of the characters “CHANCE!” To emit light.

  Thus, according to the table effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, a third pattern portion 2610c, Since the four pattern portions 2610d) can be made to emit light, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display animation etc., and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since a large space can be easily secured behind the light guide plate 2601, another effect unit can be arranged in the space, and the appeal of the player can be enhanced. Can be entertained, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the semitransparent first pattern 2610 can be floated up in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 by the light guide plate 2601 so that the light emission decoration moving like an animation can be shown, a conventional light guide plate is used. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is familiar with the luminous effect, and to surprise and entertain the player, and to make the player think that something is good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are patterns associated with the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside and the outside of the center character 2500 are continuous. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of unity, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 by the light guide plate 2601 well, other games separated from the front This makes it difficult for a person to see the luminous display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 and makes it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2601 is being performed. While being able to suppress that another player pays attention, it is possible to play a game without hesitation to another player, and it is possible to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 159 and the like. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive substrate unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. In addition, back unit 3000, general winning opening sensor 3001 which detects the game ball B which is received to general winning a prize opening 2001 which is provided in side unit 2200 of front unit 2000, and the starting opening unit 2100 A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in one starting opening 2002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002 (see FIG. 185) .

  In addition, back unit 3000 is a back-down effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of opening 3010 a in back box 3010, and a back-up effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of opening 3010 a in back box 3010. And a back left rendering unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010, and a back right rendering unit 3400 mounted on the right of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. .

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 receives the game ball B which is received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and is guided to the back of the game panel 1100, respectively. And a guide path for discharging into the substrate holder 1200 of FIG.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixed piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 133 and 134).

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted to the left and right on the left side in a back view of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9-1. Back down production unit]
Next, the under-back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 159 to 162 and the like. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the under-the-back movable decorative member provided in the under-the-back rendering unit in the back unit, as viewed from the front. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the under-the-back movable decorative member provided in the under-the-back effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 162 is a front view showing the movement of the under-back movable ornament. The under-back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

  The rear underside rendering unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction across the effect display device 1600 and a triangular pyramid shaped lower back movable decorative body 3110 whose front face is an equilateral triangle and points forward, and the back side at the center in the lateral direction The lower movable decorative body 3110 is attached, and the lower back moving arm 3130 (see FIG. 165 and the like), both ends in the left and right direction of which are supported so as to be movable in the upper and lower directions, respectively, And a lifting mechanism 3150 for moving.

  The under-back movable decorative body 3110 is a disc-like decorative body base 3111 attached to the under-rear moving arm 3130, and an under-rotary rotation drive motor attached to the back surface of the decorative body base 3111 with the rotation axis projecting forward. 3112, a drive gear 3113 attached to the rotation shaft of the back-rear rotation drive motor 3112, a transmission gear member 3114 rotated by the drive gear 3113 and rotatably attached to the decoration base 3111, and the decoration A rear stage base 3115 rotatably supported by a base 3111 and having a flat plate shape and a substantially equilateral triangle, and a rear stage decoration 3116 attached to the front of the rear stage base 3115 and rotated by a transmission gear member 3114 It is disposed in front of the part 3116 and rotatably supported by the rear part decoration part 3116 A middle stage base 3117 rotated by a cage drive gear 3113, a middle stage decoration 3118 attached to the front surface of the middle stage 3117, and a middle stage decoration 3118, a middle stage 3117, and Backward rotation detection that detects the rotational position of the rear base 3115 attached to the front surface of the front base decoration 3119 and the rear base of the rear base 3111 through the rear base decoration 3116 through the rear end decoration In the front stage decoration portion 3119 between the middle base 3117 and the middle stage decoration portion 3118 attached to the front surface of the sensor 3120 and the decoration base 3111 for emitting and decoration the rear stage decoration portion 3116 Attach the light emitting decoration to the middle decoration 3118 and the front decoration 3119. And back under before decorative substrate 3122 of the eye, it has a.

  The under-back rotational drive motor 3112 is attached to the decoration base 3111 so that the rotation axis projects forward at a position eccentric from the center of the disc-shaped decoration base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 is attached to the decoration base 3111 such that the center of rotation is at a position eccentric to the center of the disc-shaped decoration base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 has a spur gear-shaped first gear portion 3114 a meshing with the drive gear 3113 and a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3114 b integrally rotating on the front side of the first gear portion 3114 a. . The first gear portion 3114 a meshes with the drive gear 3113, and the second gear portion 3114 b meshes with the rear gear portion 3116 d of the rear decorative portion 3116 described later.

  The rear stage base 3115 includes a bearing hole 3115 a into which the outer periphery of the disc-like decorative body base 3111 is slidably inserted, and a detection piece 3115 b which is detected by the under-back rotation detection sensor 3120. The rear stage base 3115 constitutes the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid shaped lower back movable decorative body 3110.

  The external shape of the second-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in the shape of the rear side when the triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and three trapezoidal side-plate-shaped three side plate portions It is comprised by 3116a and the front plate part 3116b of the equilateral triangle flat plate shape which connects the front end sides of the three side plate parts 3116a. The rear stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in a container shape whose rear side is opened by the three side plate portions 3116 a and one front plate portion 3116 b, and the rear stage base 3115 is formed at the rear end so that the open rear side Is attached. Further, the rear stage decorative portion 3116 is formed at the center of the front plate portion 3116 b at the back of the front plate portion 3116 b, a bearing hole 3116 c which is smaller in diameter and penetrates back and forth And a rear gear portion 3116 d in the shape of a penetrating spur gear. An axial cylindrical portion 3117b of a middle stage base 3117, which will be described later, is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c so as to be relatively rotatable. The rear gear portion 3116 d meshes with the second gear portion 3114 b of the transmission gear member 3114. The post-stage decoration portion 3116 is formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The middle base 3117 is an equilateral triangle smaller than the front plate 3116 b of the rear stage decoration 3116 and penetrates the center of the flat main body 3117 a and the main body 3117 a and has a cylindrical shape rearward from the rear surface of the main body 3117 a A protruding shaft cylinder 3117 b and a spur gear-shaped middle gear 3117 c formed at the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft cylinder 3117 b are provided. The axial cylindrical portion 3117 b is inserted into the bearing hole 3116 c of the rear stage decorative portion 3116 so as to be relatively rotatable. The middle gear portion 3117 c meshes with the drive gear 3113.

  The outer decorative portion 3118 has an outer shape formed in an intermediate shape when the triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and three trapezoidal side flat plate portions 3118 a And a front plate portion 3118b in the shape of a regular triangle connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3118a. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in a container shape in which the rear side is opened by the three side plate portions 3118a and one front plate portion 3118b, and the middle base 3117 is formed at the rear end so that the open rear side is closed. The (main body 3117a) is attached. In addition, the middle decorative portion 3118 includes a through hole 3118c which passes through at the center of the front plate portion 3118b. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency.

  The front stage decorative portion 3119 is formed in the shape of a triangular pyramid whose outer shape is narrowed forward. The front decoration 3119 includes a cylindrical front shaft 3119 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the triangular pyramid. The front end shaft portion 3119 a is relatively rotatably inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 3117 b of the middle base 3117, and the rear end is attached to the decorative body base 3111. The front stage decorative portion 3119 is formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The back-bottom back decoration substrate 3121 has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) mounted on the front and back faces for emitting light toward the outside in the normal direction. The back bottom front decoration substrate 3122 has a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) emitting light toward the outside in the normal direction and a plurality of full color LEDs (top view type) emitting the light forward on the front surface And has been implemented. The back bottom front decoration substrate 3122 is attached to the front end shaft portion 3119 a of the front end decoration portion 3119.

  The back bottom movable arm 3130 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010 a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 is attached at the center of the front surface. In addition, a plurality of full color LEDs are mounted in a line on the front surface of the back and down movement arm 3130. In order to increase the rigidity of the back lower moving arm 3130, a metal lower back moving arm reinforcing plate (not shown) is provided so as to cover the back side. Among the both ends in the left and right direction of the back lower moving arm reinforcing plate, one disposed in the vicinity of the back lower raising and lowering drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) is made of metal that can slide by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. A metal cylindrical rod attached to the slide rail 3151 ns for the lower back movement arm (see FIG. 264 (a)) and not arranged in the vicinity of the lower back lift drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) (Not shown) sliding part for the lower back moving arm (not shown) that moves by sliding along the surface (moving while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) And may be made of non-conductive resin). Note that both ends in the left-right direction of the back lower moving arm reinforcing plate may be configured to be attached to metal back lower moving arm slide rails 3151 ns and 3151 ns, respectively.

  The lower back elevating mechanism 3150 is attached to the lower side than the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although the back elevating mechanism 3150 is not shown in detail, it has a rod-like back lower pivoting around one end side by driving the back elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) and the back elevating drive motor 3151. And a lifting arm. The tip of the lower back elevating arm is connected to the lower back moving arm 3130, and the lower back elevating arm is rotated by the lower back elevating drive motor 3151 so that the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved via the lower elevating arm. It can be raised and lowered.

  Subsequently, the operation of the under-back effect unit 3100 will be described. Under the back side rendering unit 3100, in the normal state, the apexes of the respective triangles of the rear stage decoration portion 3116, the middle stage decoration portion 3118, and the front stage decoration portion 3119 of the back side movable decoration 3110 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid. While forming, it is in the state where one vertex of the triangle turned upward. Also, in the normal state, the lower back moving arm 3130 is positioned at the lower moving end by the lower back lifting mechanism 3150. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the back bottom movable decoration 3110 is located at substantially the same height as the stage 2503 in the center character 2500, and most of the back bottom movable decoration 3110 is Are in the state of the standby position located below the effect display device 1600. In this state, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the lower back raising and lowering mechanism 3150 are located behind the lower left lower decoration 3380 of the lower left rendering unit 3300 and the lower lower right decoration 3480 of the lower right rendering unit 3400 described later. , Can not be seen from the front (see FIG. 135 and the like).

  In the normal state, when the back lower moving arm 3130 is moved to the upper moving end via the back lower raising / lowering arm by the back lower raising / lowering drive motor 3151, the upper vertex of the back lower movable decorative body 3110 is the game area It will be in the state of the 1st union position located near the center of 5a (refer FIG. 170).

  The back bottom effect unit 3100 moves the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 to the lowermost standby position (original position) and the top by the back bottom raising and lowering mechanism 3150 via the back bottom moving arm 3130. It can be freely raised and lowered between one combined position. In the present embodiment, a second combined position is set in which a distance of 1/7 of the total movement distance from the standby position to the first combined position is moved from the first combined position to the standby position.

  Under the back side rendering unit 3100, in the normal state, the apexes of the respective triangles of the rear stage decoration portion 3116, the middle stage decoration portion 3118, and the front stage decoration portion 3119 of the back side movable decoration 3110 coincide with each other, While being formed, one vertex of the triangle is in the state of facing upward (see FIG. 162 (a) etc.). In this state, the detection piece 3115b of the rear base 3115 is detected by the back bottom rotation detection sensor 3120, and the original position (standby position) of the rear decoration 3116 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 and the middle decoration 3118 Become.

  Then, when the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the drive motor 3112 under the reverse rotation, the drive gear 3113 is moved to the first gear portion while the back movable movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the first combined position or the second combined position. The transmission gear member 3114 meshing with the 3114a rotates in the opposite direction to the drive gear 3113, and via the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear decoration 3116 meshing with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114 The post-stage decorative portion 3116 rotates in the opposite direction to the transmission gear member 3114. That is, the rear part decorative portion 3116 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3113. On the other hand, the drive gear 3113 is engaged with the middle gear portion 3117c of the middle base 3117 in addition to the first gear portion 3114a of the transmission gear member 3114, and the middle decoration portion 3118 is a drive gear via the middle gear portion 3117c. It rotates in the opposite direction to 3113. Since the front stage decoration portion 3119 is attached to the decoration base 3111, the front stage decoration portion 3119 does not rotate even if the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the back-rear rotation drive motor 3112 (FIG. 162 (b) reference).

  Therefore, when the under-back rotation drive motor 3112 is driven, the rear-stage decoration 3116 and the middle-stage decoration 3118 rotate in opposite directions with the front stage decoration 3119 stopped. In the present embodiment, each gear ratio is set such that the middle decorative portion 3118 rotates twice when the rear decorative portion 3116 rotates once.

  Further, in the back-rear effect unit 3100, the back-bottom movable decoration 3110 is appropriately illuminated by appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the back-bottom back decoration substrate 3121 and the back-bottom front decoration substrate 3122 Light emission decoration can be performed, and light emission decoration can be performed even while the rear stage decoration portion 3116 and the middle stage decoration portion 3118 are rotating.

  Further, in the lower back rendering unit 3100, the plurality of LEDs provided in the lower back moving arm 3130 can be made to emit light, so that the back lower moving arm 3130 can be illuminated and decorated, and a plurality of lower back moving arms 3130 By causing the LEDs to sequentially emit light toward the back bottom movable decoration 3110, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows to the back bottom movable decoration 3110. In addition, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the back bottom movable arm 3130 to emit light in order to move away from the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, light emission can be performed such that light flows from the back bottom movable decorative body 3110.

[5-9-2. Back-up production unit]
Next, the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 159 and the like. The back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back-up rendering unit 3200 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the back-to-back movable decoration 3210 in the shape of a triangular pyramid whose bottom is an equilateral triangle and points forward, While the upper movable decorative body 3210 is attached, the back up moving arm 3230 (see FIG. 165 etc.) whose both left and right direction both ends are supported so as to be movable in the up and down direction respectively, And a back-up lifting mechanism 3250 for moving.

  The back top movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the back bottom movable decoration 3110. Although the back surface movable decorative body 3210 is not shown in detail, it is mounted on the rear surface of the decorative body base with the disc-like decorative body base attached to the back upper moving arm 3230 and the rotation axis projecting forward. It is rotated by a drive gear attached to the rotating shaft of a back-to-back rotational drive motor 3212 (see FIG. 186), a drive gear attached to the rotational shaft of the back-to-back rotational drive motor 3212, and rotatably attached to the decoration base A rear-stage decorative portion 3216 attached to the front surface of a rear-stage base which is rotatably supported by a decorative body base and has a flat plate shape and a substantially equilateral triangle, and a rear-stage base And a middle stage which is disposed in front of the rear stage decoration portion 3216 and is rotatably supported by the rear stage decoration portion 3216 and rotated by the drive gear. And the middle decoration 3218 attached to the front of the middle base, and the middle decoration 3218 disposed in front of the middle decoration 3218 and passing through the middle decoration 3218, middle base, and rear decoration 3216, the rear end The front decoration part 3219 attached to the decoration base, the back rotation detection sensor 3220 (see FIG. 186) attached to the rear surface of the decoration base and detecting the rotational position of the rear base, and the decoration base A middle stage decoration portion 3218 is mounted on the front stage decoration portion 3219 between the middle back base and the middle stage decoration portion 3218 and is mounted on the front side and is mounted on the front stage decoration portion for mounting the rear stage decoration portion 3216. And a back upper front decoration substrate for emitting and decorating the portion 3219.

  The external shape of the rear-end decorative portion 3116 is formed in the shape of the rear side when the triangular pyramid pointed frontward is divided into three in the front-rear direction. The post-stage decoration portion 3116 is formed to have a light transmitting property. The outer decorative portion 3118 has an outer shape formed in an intermediate shape when a triangular pyramid pointed frontward is trisected in the front-rear direction. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency. The front stage decorative portion 3119 is formed in the shape of a triangular pyramid whose outer shape is narrowed forward. The front stage decorative portion 3119 is formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The back-bottom rear decoration substrate has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) mounted on the front and back surfaces to emit light toward the outside in the normal direction. Back bottom front decoration substrate, the front, multiple full color LED (side view type) that emits light toward the normal direction outward, and multiple full color LED (top view type) that emits light toward the front And have been implemented.

  The back-up movable arm 3230 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010 a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and a back-up movable decorative body 3210 is attached at the center of the front. Also, the back-up moving arm 3230 has a plurality of full color LEDs mounted in a line on the front side. In order to enhance the rigidity of the back up moving arm 3230, a metal back up moving arm reinforcing plate (not shown) is provided so as to cover the back side. Of the both ends in the left and right direction of the back up moving arm reinforcing plate, one disposed in the vicinity of the up and down raising and lowering drive motor 325 (see FIG. 186) A metal cylindrical rod attached to the slide rail 3251 ns for the back-up moving arm (see FIG. 264 (a)) and not disposed in the vicinity of the back-up lift drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) Sliding movement (moving while sliding the surface of a metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) (not shown in the drawings), even though it is molded by a conductive resin (not shown) And may be made of non-conductive resin). Note that both ends in the left-right direction of the back up moving arm reinforcing plate may be configured to be attached to metal back up moving arm slide rails 3251 ns and 3251 ns, respectively.

  The back elevation mechanism 3250 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although the back elevation mechanism 3250 is not shown in detail, it is a rod-shaped back elevation that is pivoted around one end by driving the back elevation drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) and the back elevation drive motor 3251. And a lifting arm. The tip of the back raising and lowering arm is connected to the back raising and lowering movement arm 3230, and the back raising and lowering raising and lowering arm is rotated by the back raising and lowering driving motor 3251, thereby moving the back raising movement arm 3230 through the back raising and lowering arm. It can be raised and lowered.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. In the back-up effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the apexes of the respective triangles of the rear-end decoration 3216, the middle-end decoration 3218 and the front-end decoration 3219 of the back-rear movable decoration 3210 coincide with each other, While forming it, it is in the state where one vertex of the triangle turned downward. In this state, since the back up movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the back down movable decorative body 3110, a detection piece (not shown) corresponding to the detection piece 3115b of the rear stage base 3115 of the back down movable decorative body 3110 It is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3220, and becomes the original position (standby position) of the rear decoration 3216 of the back-up movable decoration 3210 and the middle decoration 3218. Also, in the normal state, the back-up moving arm 3230 is positioned at the upper moving end by the back-up lifting mechanism 3250. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the back-up movable decorative body 3210 is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and the back-up movable decoration 3210 Most of the image display unit is in the state of the standby position located above the effect display device 1600. In this state, the back up moving arm 3230 and the back up lifting mechanism 3250 are located behind the back upper left decoration 3370 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back upper right decoration 3470 of the back right rendering unit 3400, which will be described later. It can not be seen from the front (see FIG. 135 etc.).

  When the back up moving arm 3230 is moved to the lower moving end through the back up lifting arm by the back up lifting drive motor 3251 in a normal state, the lower vertex of the back up movable decoration 3210 is a game in front view It will be in the state of the 1st union position located near the center of field 5a (refer to figure 170).

  The back-up effect unit 3200 moves the back-up movable decorative body 3210 by the back-up elevating mechanism 3250 via the back-up moving arm 3230 to the standby position (original position) at the uppermost position and the lowermost position. It can be freely raised and lowered between one combined position. In the present embodiment, a second combined position is set in which a distance of 1/7 of the total movement distance from the standby position to the first combined position is moved from the first combined position to the standby position.

  When the back-up rotation drive motor 3212 is driven while the back-up effect unit 3200 moves the back-up movable decoration 3210 to the first uniting position or the second uniting position, etc., the front stage decoration unit 3219 is stopped. As it is, the rear decoration 3216 and the middle decoration 3218 rotate in opposite directions. In this embodiment, each gear ratio is set such that the middle decorative portion 3218 rotates twice when the rear decorative portion 3216 rotates once.

  In the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-mounted movable decoration 3210 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the back-up back decoration substrate and the back-up front decoration board, and Even when the decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 are rotating, light emission can be performed.

  Further, in the back-up effect unit 3200, the plurality of LEDs provided to the back-up moving arm 3230 can be made to emit light, so that the back-up moving arm 3230 can be illuminated and decorated, and a plurality of back-up moving arms 3230 By causing the LEDs to sequentially emit light toward the back movable decoration 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows to the back movable movable decoration 3210. Further, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the back-up moving arm 3230 to emit light in order to move away from the back-up movable decorative body 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows from the back-up movable decorative body 3210.

[5-9-3. Back left production unit]
Next, the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 159, 163, and 164. FIG. 163 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the back left movable decoration etc. FIG. 164 is a front view showing the movement of the back left movable decoration of the back left rendering unit in the back unit. In FIG. 163, some members are represented as a wire frame so that the internal structure can be easily understood, and reference numerals relating to the internal structures of a plurality of movable decorations other than the back left movable decoration are shown in parentheses, respectively. .

  The back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the left of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

  The back left rendering unit 3300 extends in the vertical direction across the effect display device 1600, with a triangular pyramid shaped back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 whose tip is directed to the right, and back left upper movable The decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are attached so as to be movable respectively, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back left moving arm 3330 are supported so that both ends in the vertical direction are respectively movable in the left and right direction. And a back left traversing mechanism 3350 for moving in the direction. The outer shapes of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are formed in an equilateral triangle in a front view. In addition, the triangular pyramid shaped back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are inclined such that the tip is positioned forward with respect to the left-right direction.

  In addition, the back left rendering unit 3300 extends in the left and right direction on the lower back side of the flat back left back decorative plate 3360 extending in the left and right direction in the front near the upper end of the back left moving arm 3330 A back upper left decorative body 3370 in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and a lower left back extending near the lower end of the back left moving arm 3330, in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed And a decorative body 3380.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotatably mounted on the right side surface of the trapezoidal base decorative portion 3311 whose shape in front view narrows to the right and the base decorative portion 3311, and the tip is directed to the right A triangular pyramid-shaped front-end decorative portion 3312, a back left upper rotational drive motor 3313 (see FIG. 186) attached to the inside of the base-end decorative portion 3311 for rotating the front-end decorative portion 3312; A back upper left base decoration substrate for emitting light decoration of the base decoration part 3311 attached to the inside of the decoration part 3311, and a right side surface of the base decoration part 3311 is mounted for the light emission decoration of the front stage decoration part 3312 And a back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a for making it possible. The base decorative portion 3311 and the front decorative portion 3312 are formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The back upper left base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which it is attached. In the upper left front end decorative substrate 3311 a, a plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa (in the present embodiment, eight full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8)) for emitting light toward the left side of the previous decorative portion 3312 are mounted. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the back upper left rotational drive motor 3313 is performed by rotating the front gear decorative portion 3312 with a main gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the back upper left rotational drive motor 3313 The front stage decoration portion 3312 is rotated via a back left upper rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) engaged with a follower gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3312 on the left side surface of the front stage decorative portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base stage decorative portion 3311. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3312 and on the left side of the front stage decorative portion 3312 so that the axial center is parallel to the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3312 It is disposed in the inner space of the front step decorative portion 3312 so that the left surface thereof does not protrude toward the right side surface of the base step decorative portion 3311 from the left side surface of the front step decorative portion 3312. It is fixed. The magnet 3312 a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312, but this is because the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312 is resonant due to the rotation of the front stage decoration portion 3312 by the back upper left rotational drive motor 3313 The position does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotational axis) of the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 is made through the back upper left rotation transmission mechanism not shown When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration portion 3312 and the front step decoration portion 3312 starts to rotate, the locus thereof becomes a circular path.

  Therefore, in the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a, a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on this circular orbit (opposite to the magnetically charged surface of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab is implemented which is configured from a peripheral circuit and can detect a change in magnetic pole. The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab is a circuit used to specify the rotational position of the previous stage decorative portion 3312 by setting the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312 a fixed to the previous stage decorative portion 3312. And its detailed description will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the front stage decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 159, and FIG. 164 (a) etc. A state can be mentioned in which the apexes of the respective triangles of the decorative portion 3312 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid.

  Although the base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is not shown in detail, in the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding in a cylindrical shape from the center near the bottom side (left side) and It has a second mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape rearward from a portion rightward than the boss, and a third mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape rearward from a portion above the first mounting boss. . A back left upper movable decorative body 3310 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The lower left movable decorative body 3320 is rotatably mounted on the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3321 having a trapezoidal shape in which the shape in front view narrows to the right, and the base decorative portion 3321, and the tip is directed to the right A triangular pyramid-shaped front-end decoration portion 3322, a back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 (see FIG. 186) attached to the inside of the base-end decoration portion 3321 for rotating the front-end decoration portion 3322; A lower left base decorative substrate attached to the inside of the decorative part 3321 for emitting light decoration of the base decorative part 3321 and a right side surface of the base decoration part 3321 is attached to the light emitting decoration of the front stage decorative part 3322 And a back lower left first stage decorative substrate 3321a for making it possible. The base decorative portion 3321 and the front end decorative portion 3322 are formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The back left lower base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3321 to which it is attached. On the lower left front end decorative substrate 3321a, a plurality of full color LEDs 3321aa (in the present embodiment, eight full color LEDs 3321aa (1) to 3321aa (8)) for emitting light toward the left surface side of the previous decorative portion 3322 are mounted. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the lower left lower rotation drive motor 3323 is performed by rotating the front stage decorative portion 3322 with a main gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the lower left lower rotation drive motor 3323 The front stage decoration portion 3322 is rotated via a rear lower left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) engaged with a slave gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3322a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3322 on the left side surface of the front stage decorative portion 3322 facing the right side surface of the base stage decorative portion 3321. Specifically, the magnet 3322a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front end decorative portion 3322 and on the left side of the front end decorative portion 3322 so that the axial center is parallel to the rotation axis of the front end decorative portion 3322 It is arranged to be perpendicular to the housing, and is accommodated in the inner space of the front decoration 3332 so that the left surface does not protrude from the left side of the front decoration 3322 toward the right side of the base decoration 3311. It is fixed. The magnet 3322a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3322. This is because the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3322 resonates due to the rotation of the front stage decoration portion 3322 by the back lower left rotation drive motor 3323. The position does not occur.

  The magnet 3322a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front stage decoration portion 3322. Therefore, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back lower left rotation drive motor 3323 is made through the back lower left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration portion 3322 and the front step decoration portion 3322 starts to rotate, the locus thereof becomes a circular track.

  Therefore, on the lower left front end decorative substrate 3321a, a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on this circular orbit (opposite to the magnetically charged surface of the magnet 3322a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321 ab configured from peripheral circuits and capable of detecting a change in magnetic pole is mounted. The back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321 ab is a circuit used to specify the rotational position of the front stage decoration portion 3322 by setting the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3322 a fixed to the front stage decoration portion 3322. And its detailed description will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the front decoration 3332 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 159, and FIG. 164 (a) etc. A state can be mentioned in which the apexes of the respective triangles of the decorative portion 3322 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid.

  Although the base decorative portion 3321 of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 is not shown in detail, it has a first mounting boss projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the center near the bottom side (left side) on the rear surface It has a second mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape rearward from a portion rightward than the boss, and a third mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape rearward from a portion below the first mounting boss. . The back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back left moving arm 3330 extends vertically and is mounted at the center in the up and down direction of the moving arm base 3331 to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are movably attached. A back left moving drive motor 3332 for moving the back rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is provided.

  Further, although the back left moving arm 3330 is not shown in detail, the spur gear shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back left moving drive motor 3332 and the up and down direction above the center in the up and down direction of the moving arm base 3331 And an upper slider having an upper rack gear engaged with the pinion gear, and slidably mounted vertically below the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction. And a lower slider having a lower rack gear engaged with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  In the movable arm base 3331, the first mounting slit of the base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is slidably inserted, and the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 slides An upper second slit which can be inserted and a third upper slit which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit linearly extends in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward around the upper end side of the upper first slit and then linearly extends downward. The upper third slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward around the upper end side of the upper first slit and then linearly extends downward.

  The movable arm base 3331 has a lower first slit into which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321 in the lower left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321 The lower second slit slidably inserted, and the lower third slit slidably inserted the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321. The lower first slit linearly extends in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward around the upper end side of the lower first slit and then linearly extends upward. The lower third slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward around the upper end side of the lower first slit and then linearly extends upward. The lower first slit, lower second slit, and lower third slit are upper first slit, upper second slit, and upper third slit with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back left moving drive motor 3332. And, it is formed in line symmetry.

  In the upper slider, the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is attached near the upper end. In the lower slider, the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321 in the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is attached near the lower end.

  The movable arm base 3331 is disposed in the vicinity of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 provided in the back left traverse mechanism 3350 to be described later among the both ends in the up and down direction. The other slide lever 3351 ns (see FIG. 264 (b)) attached to the metal back left moving arm (see FIG. 264 (b)) and not disposed near the back left traverse drive motor 3351 is along the metal cylindrical rod not shown. Back sliding movement (moving while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) (not shown) may be molded by a sliding portion for the back left moving arm (conductive resin) , Which may be molded of non-conductive resin). Note that both ends in the vertical direction of the movable arm base 3331 may be configured to be attached to metal back left movable arm slide rails 3351 ns and 3351 ns, respectively.

  The back left traversing mechanism 3350 is attached on the left side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although the back left traversing mechanism 3350 is not shown in detail, it comprises a back left traversing drive motor 3351 and a rod-shaped back left traversing arm which is pivoted around one end by driving the back left traversing drive motor 3351. ing. The tip of the back left traversing arm is connected to the back left moving arm 3330, and the back left traversing arm is rotated by the back left traversing drive motor 3351 to allow the back left moving arm 3330 via the back left traversing arm. It can be rampant.

  In the back left rear decorative plate 3360, a hologram seal is attached to the front. The bottom left of the back upper left decorative body 3370 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back lower left decoration 3380 is attached at the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back left rear decoration board 3360, the back upper left decoration 3370, and the back lower left decoration 3380 have their front ends attached at substantially the same positions as the front end of the back box 3010, and are arranged at the back. The back-down moving arm 3130 of 3100, the back-up moving arm 3230 of the back-up effect unit 3200, and the like can be hidden unnoticeably from the front.

  In addition, the back left back decoration board 3360 is located on the rear side of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the assembled state to the game board 5, and cooperates with the back right back decoration board 3460 which will be described later. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the board 1110 is easily visible from the player side (front side).

  Subsequently, the operation of the back left rendering unit 3300 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 will be described. In a normal state, the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are positive with respect to the respective base stage decorative portion 3311 and the base stage decorative portion 3321 It is in the state of the rotational position which forms a triangle. In this state, when the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left rotation drive motor 3323 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 are respectively driven, the front end decorative portion 3312 and the front end decoration portion The 3322 can be rotated (see Figure 166).

  Next, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 with respect to the back left moving arm 3330 will be described. In the upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3331. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are horizontally aligned, the base side (left side) of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends vertically, and the tip is rightward Facing (see Figure 164 (a)). From the initial state, the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left moving drive motor 3332, and the upper slider is moved downward through the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the upper left movable decorative body 3310 rotates clockwise about the first mounting boss. It will be done.

  At this time, the second attachment boss and the third attachment boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 lower the arc extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3331. Slide into Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion of the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. In this state, the tip is turned to the lower right (second state) (see FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends horizontally.

  When the upper slider is further moved downward by the driving of the back left moving drive motor 3332 while the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotated 30 degrees clockwise in the clockwise direction by the downward movement of the upper slider, the back upper left movable decoration The body 3310 moves downward with the posture as it is turned. At this time, the first attachment boss, the second attachment boss, and the third attachment boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3331. The respective interiors slide to the respective lower ends, and the downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is in a state (first state) approaching the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 164 (c)).

  From this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the reverse direction to move the upper slider upward through the pinion gear, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 in the first state moves in the reverse direction And return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the lower left movable decorative body 3320, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are lower first slit, lower second slit and lower third of the movable arm base 3331. Located at the lower end of each of the slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are horizontally aligned, the base side (left side) of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 extends vertically and the tip is rightward Facing (see Figure 164 (a)). From the initial state, the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left moving drive motor 3332, and the lower slider is moved upward through the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. Since the second mounting boss is attached to the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 rotates in the counterclockwise direction centering on the first mounting boss. It will move.

  At this time, the second attachment boss and the third attachment boss of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are the upper parts of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the movable arm base 3331 extending in the arc shape. Slide into Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arc-shaped portion of the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It will be in the state rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and it will be in the state (the 2nd state) which the tip turned to the upper right (refer to Drawing 164 (b)). In this state, the upper side of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 extends horizontally.

  When the lower slider is further moved upward by the drive of the back left moving drive motor 3332 while the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction by the upward movement of the lower slider, the back lower left movable The decorative body 3320 moves upward with the posture as it is rotated. At this time, the first attachment boss, the second attachment boss, and the third attachment boss of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 have the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the movable arm base 3331. The inside of each is slid to the upper end of each, and the upward movement is stopped. In this state, the upper side of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 approaches the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (a first state) (see FIG. 164C).

  From this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the reverse direction to move the lower slider downward through the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the first state moves in the reverse direction And return to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider mesh with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back left movement drive motor 3332 between them, the pinion by the back left movement drive motor 3332 When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions up and down. As a result, the movement of the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 by the back left moving drive motor 3332 is simultaneously performed. Therefore, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven from the initial state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 whose tops are separated up and down and whose front end faces rightward In the second direction, it moves in the direction in which the whole approaches one another to move to the first state.

  Next, the movement of the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left rendering unit 3300 will be described. In the initial state of the back left moving arm 3330, the portion to which the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is located at the left moving end. In this state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. In this state, when the back left traversing arm is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back left traversing drive motor 3351 of the back left traversing mechanism 3350, the back left traversing arm 3330 is moved to the right by the back left traversing arm. It can be moved to the moving end. In the state (first state) in which the back left moving arm 3330 is positioned to the right moving end, the portion where the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is the left and right of the effect display device 1600 It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the left end side to the right side with respect to the width of the direction (see FIG. 170).

  As shown in FIG. 164, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the right, and in the first state in which the right end is positioned at the right moving end, the back lower rendering unit 3100 Also, it is located at the center in the left-right direction of the back-down movable decoration 3110 of the back-up rendering unit 3200 and the back-up movable decoration 3210.

  The back left moving arm 3330 can be moved by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 between the position in the initial state, which is the left moving end, and the position in the first state, which is the right moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state in which the distance of about 2/3 from the position of the initial state is moved to the entire moving distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 169).

  In the back left rendering unit 3300, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are in the initial state, and are lined up at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, respectively. The base sides of the base decorative portion 3311 and the base decorative portion 3321 extend vertically, and their respective tips face the right. In the normal state, the back left moving mechanism 3350 positions the back left moving arm 3330 at the left moving end in the initial state.

  In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state are located near the left end in the back box 3010, and the base decorative portions 3311 and the base The step decoration portion 3321 is located near the left end of the effect display device 1600, and the previous step decoration portion 3312 and the previous step decoration portion 3322 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are in the state of the standby position in the initial state (FIG. 135 etc. See).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 164, since the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the right, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved from the second state position to the right When it is moved to the position of one state, it abuts on the back movable decoration 3210 in the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back left moving arm 3330 to the right moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back up movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. When the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right moving end with the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 directed to the right (initial state), the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 The tip end of the rear end abuts on the back movable decorative body 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the front end faces the lower right.

  In addition, when the back left moving arm 3330 is in the initial position, the base sides of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are located near the left end in the back box 3010, so the back left movement When each of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state is turned to the second state by the drive motor 3332, the respective base sides contact the left side surface in the back box 3010. Contact. Therefore, when rotating the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state side by the back left movement drive motor 3332, the back left moving arm 3330 is right from the position of the initial state You need to move it to the other side.

  In the back left rendering unit 3300, the back top left base decorative substrate and back top left front end decorative substrate of the back top left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left bottom base decoration substrate and back bottom left front step decorative board of the back bottom left movable decoration 3320 By appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted respectively, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 can be made to emit light and decorate.

  In this embodiment, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left movable arm 3330 are located in the initial state, respectively, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the back lower left movable decoration 3320. The position of is the standby position. In addition, when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are respectively in the first state, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 Is the first combined position. Furthermore, when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are respectively in the second state, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 As the second combined position.

[5-9-4. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 159 and 163 and the like. The back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the right of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

  The back right rendering unit 3400 extends in the upper and lower direction across the effect display device 1600, with the triangular pyramid shaped back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 whose tip is directed to the left, The movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are movably mounted, and both ends in the vertical direction are supported so as to be movable in the left and right directions, respectively, a back right moving arm 3430 and a back right moving arm 3430 And a back right traversing mechanism 3450 for moving the head in the left and right direction (see FIG. 167). The outer shapes of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are formed in an equilateral triangle in a front view. Further, the triangular pyramid shaped back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are inclined such that the tip is positioned forward with respect to the left-right direction.

  In addition, the back right rendering unit 3400 extends in the left and right direction on the lower back side of the flat back right back decorative plate 3460 extending in the left and right direction in the front near the upper end of the back right moving arm 3430 A back upper right decoration 3470 in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed and a back right extending in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower end of the back-right moving arm 3430 and a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed A lower decorative body 3480 is provided.

  The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is rotatably mounted on the right side surface of the trapezoidal base decorative portion 3411 whose shape in front view narrows to the left and the base decorative portion 3411 so that the tip is directed left A triangular pyramid-shaped front-end decoration 3412, and a rear upper right rotation drive motor 3413 (see FIG. 187) attached to the inside of the base-end decoration 3411 for rotating the front-end decoration 3412; A back upper right base decoration substrate for emitting light decoration of the base decoration part 3411 attached to the inside of the decoration part 3411, and a left side surface of the base decoration part 3411 is mounted for the light emission decoration of the front stage decoration part 3412 And a back right upper end decoration substrate 3411 a for making it possible. The base decorative portion 3411 and the front decorative portion 3412 are formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The back upper right basic decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the basic decorative portion 3411 to which it is attached. On the upper right front end decorative substrate 3411 a, a plurality of full color LEDs 3411 aa (in the present embodiment, eight full color LEDs 3411 aa (1) to 3411 aa (8)) for emitting light toward the right surface side of the previous decorative portion 3412 are mounted. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is performed by rotating the front gear decoration 3412 with a main gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back right rotation drive motor 3413 The front stage decoration portion 3412 is rotated via a rear upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) engaged with a slave gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3412 a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decorative portion 3412 on the right side surface of the front stage decorative portion 3412 facing the left side surface of the base stage decorative portion 3411. Specifically, the magnet 3412 a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3412 and on the right side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3412 so that the axial center is parallel to the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3412 It is arranged perpendicular to the housing, and is housed in the inner space of the front decoration 3412 so that its right side does not protrude from the right side of the front decoration 3412 to the left side of the base decoration 3411. It is fixed. The magnet 3412 a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3412, but this is because the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3412 resonates due to the rotation of the front stage decoration portion 3412 by the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413. The position does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3412a is fixed near the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3412, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is the tip via the above-mentioned back upper right rotation transmission mechanism not shown. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration portion 3412 and the front step decoration portion 3412 starts to rotate, the locus thereof becomes a circular path.

  Therefore, on the back upper right first stage decorative substrate 3411a, a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on this circular orbit (opposite to the magnetized surface of the magnet 3412a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411 ab, which is constituted by a peripheral circuit and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411 ab is a circuit used to specify the rotational position of the front stage decorative portion 3412 by setting the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3412 a fixed to the front stage decorative portion 3412. And its detailed description will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the front-end decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145 and 159, etc., and each of the base-end decorative portion 3411 and the front-end decorative portion 3412 A state in which the apexes of triangles coincide to form one triangular pyramid can be mentioned.

  Although the base decorative portion 3411 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 is not shown in detail, in the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding in a cylindrical shape rearward from the center near the bottom side (right side) and a first mounting boss It has a second mounting boss projecting cylindrically from the left side of the boss to the rear and a third mounting boss projecting cylindrically from the upper side to the rear than the first mounting boss. . The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is rotatably mounted on the left side surface of the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3421 whose shape in front view narrows to the left and the base stage decoration portion 3421 so that the front end is left A triangular pyramid-shaped front step decoration portion 3422, and a back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 (see FIG. 187) attached to the inside of the base step decoration portion 3421 for rotating the front step decoration portion 3422; It is attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3421 and is attached to the back lower right base decoration substrate for making the base decoration part 3421 emit light and is attached to the left side of the base decoration part 3421 and the front decoration part 3422 And a lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421a for emitting and decorating the light. The base decoration portion 3421 and the front decoration portion 3422 are formed to have a light transmitting property.

  The back lower right basic decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the basic decorative portion 3421 to which it is attached. In the lower right front end decorative board 3421a, a plurality of full color LEDs 3421 aa (in the present embodiment, eight full color LEDs 3421 aa (1) to 3421 aa (8)) for emitting light toward the right side of the previous decorative part 3422 It is done.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the lower right lower rotation drive motor 3423 is performed by a main gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the lower right lower rotation drive motor 3423; The front stage decoration portion 3422 is rotated via a back lower right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) which is engaged with a follower gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the rotary shaft of the above. A magnet 3422a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3422 on the right side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3422 facing the left side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3421. Specifically, the magnet 3422a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 and on the right side surface of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 so that the axial center is parallel to the rotation axis of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 It is arranged perpendicular to the housing, and is housed in the inner space of the front decoration 3422 so that the right side does not protrude from the right side of the front decoration 3422 toward the left side of the base decoration 3421. It is fixed. The magnet 3422a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3422. However, the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3422 is resonated by the rotation of the front stage decoration portion 3422 by the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423. It is a position where the phenomenon does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3422a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3422, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 is through the above-mentioned back lower right rotation transmission mechanism not shown. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the first-stage decoration portion 3422 and the first-stage decoration portion 3422 starts to rotate, the locus becomes a circular track.

  Therefore, on the lower right front end decorative substrate 3421a, a Hall element is provided at a position corresponding to one position on this circular orbit (opposite to the magnetically charged surface of the magnet 3422a having a small cylindrical shape), And a lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab configured from the peripheral circuit and capable of detecting a change in magnetic pole. The back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab is used to specify the rotational position of the front stage decoration portion 3422 by setting the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a fixed to the front stage decoration portion 3422. It is a circuit, The detailed description is mentioned later. The original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the front stage decorative portion 3422 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145 and 159, etc., and each of the base stage decorative portion 3421 and the front stage decorative portion 3422 A state in which the apexes of triangles coincide to form one triangular pyramid can be mentioned.

  Although the base decorative portion 3421 of the lower right movable decorative body 3420 is not shown in detail, in the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape from the center near the bottom side (right side); A second mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape from the left side of the mounting boss to the rear in a cylindrical shape, and a third mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape from the lower part of the first mounting boss to the rear in the rear There is. The back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back right moving arm 3430 extends in the vertical direction and is mounted at the center in the up and down direction of the moving arm base 3431 to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are movably attached. And a back right moving drive motor 3432 for moving the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420.

  Although the back right moving arm 3430 is not shown in detail, the spur gear shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back right moving drive motor 3432 and the up and down direction above the center in the up and down direction of the moving arm base 3431 And an upper slider having an upper rack gear engaged with the pinion gear, and slidably mounted vertically below the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction. And a lower slider having a lower rack gear engaged with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  In the movable arm base 3431, the first mounting slit of the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is slidably inserted, and the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 slides An upper second slit which can be inserted and an upper third slit which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit linearly extends in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward around the upper end side of the upper first slit and then linearly extends downward. The upper third slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward around the upper end side of the upper first slit and then linearly extends downward.

  In addition, the movable arm base 3431 is a lower first slit into which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is slidably inserted, and the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 , And a lower third slit in which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 is slidably inserted. The lower first slit linearly extends in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward around the upper end side of the lower first slit and then linearly extends upward. The lower third slit extends in an arc at a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward around the upper end side of the lower first slit and then linearly extends upward. The lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit are upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back right moving drive motor 3432 And, it is formed in line symmetry.

  The upper slider has the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 attached near the upper end. In the lower slider, the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 in the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is attached near the lower end.

  The movable arm base 3431 is disposed in the vicinity of the back right traverse drive motor 3451 provided in the back right traverse mechanism 3450 described later among both ends in the up and down direction, and can slide in the lateral direction by a predetermined distance dimension. Slide rail 3451ns for metal back right moving arm (see FIG. 264 (b)), and the other not disposed in the vicinity of this back right traversing drive motor 3451 is along a metal cylindrical rod not shown Back sliding movement (moving while sliding the surface of a metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) (not shown) may be molded by a sliding portion for the back right moving arm (conductive resin) , Which may be molded of non-conductive resin). Note that both ends in the vertical direction of the movable arm base 3431 may be configured to be attached to metal back right moving arm slide rails 3451 ns and 3451 ns, respectively.

  The back right crossing mechanism 3450 is attached to the right of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back right traversing mechanism 3450 includes a back right traversing drive motor 3451 and a rod-shaped back right traversing arm pivoted around one end by driving the back right traversing drive motor 3451 although detailed illustration is omitted. ing. The tip of the back right traversing arm is connected to the back right traversing arm 3430, and by rotating the back right traversing arm by the back right traversing drive motor 3451, the back right traversing arm 3430 is moved via the back right traversing arm. It can be rampant.

  A hologram seal is attached to the front of the back right rear decorative plate 3460. The bottom right corner of the back upper right decoration 3470 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back lower right decoration 3480 is attached at the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 at the upper side. The back right rear decoration board 3460, the back upper right decoration 3470, and the back lower right decoration 3480 are attached at substantially the same positions as the front end of the back box 3010, and the rear lower stage decoration disposed at the rear It is possible to hide the lower back moving arm 3130 of the unit 3100, the lower back moving arm 3230 of the upper back rendering unit 3200, and the like from the front so as not to be visible.

  In addition, the back right back decoration board 3460 is located on the rear side of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the assembled state on the game board 5 and cooperates with the back left back decoration board 3360 to make the panel board 1110 The decorative pattern 1150 formed in the above is easily visible from the player side (forward).

  Subsequently, the operation of the back right rendering unit 3400 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 will be described. In a normal state, the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front stage decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are viewed from the front view It is in the state of the rotational position which forms an equilateral triangle. In this state, when the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 of the back upper right movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are respectively driven, the respective front decoration 3412 and the front steps The decor 3422 can be rotated (see FIG. 166).

  Next, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 with respect to the back right moving arm 3430 will be described. In the upper right movable decorative body 3410, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3431. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 are horizontally aligned, the base side (right side) of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends vertically and the tip is left I'm facing. From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 and the upper slider is moved downward through the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction centering on the first mounting boss. It will move.

  At this time, the second attachment boss and the third attachment boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 lower the arc extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3431. Slide into Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion in the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It will be in the state rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and it will be in the state (the 2nd state) which the tip turned to the lower left (refer to Drawing 168). In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends horizontally.

  When the upper slider is further moved downward by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 while the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction by the downward movement of the upper slider, the back upper right movable The decorative body 3410 moves downward with the posture as it is rotated. At this time, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3431. The respective interiors slide to the respective lower ends, and the downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a state (first state) approaching the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 170).

  From this state, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 is driven in the reverse direction to move the upper slider upward through the pinion gear, the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 in the first state moves in the reverse direction And return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are lower first slit, lower second slit, and lower second of the movable arm base 3431. Located at the lower end of each of the three slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are horizontally aligned, the base side (right side) of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 extends vertically and the tip is left I'm looking towards you. From the initial state, when the lower right movement drive motor 3432 is driven to rotate the pinion gear in a predetermined direction and the lower slider is moved upward through the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the lower right lower movable decorative body Since the 3420 second mounting boss is mounted on the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 is turned clockwise around the first mounting boss. It will rotate.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 correspond to the portions of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the movable arm base 3431 extending in the arc shape Slide upwards. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arc-like portion of the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is clockwise around the first mounting boss. It will be in the state rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and it will be in the state (the 2nd state) which the tip turned to the upper left (refer to Drawing 168). In this state, the upper side of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 extends horizontally.

  If the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is rotated 30 degrees clockwise in the clockwise direction by the upward movement of the lower slider, and the lower slider moves further upward by the driving of the back right movement drive motor 3432, the back lower right The movable decorative body 3420 moves upward with the posture as it is rotated. At this time, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 have the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the movable arm base 3431. The inside of each is slid to the respective top end, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 approaches the center in the vertical direction of the movable arm base 3431 (first state) (see FIG. 170).

  From this state, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 is driven in the reverse direction to move the lower slider downward through the pinion gear, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the first state is reverse to the above-described movement. It moves and returns to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider mesh with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back right movement drive motor 3432 between them, the pinion by the back right movement drive motor 3432 When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions up and down. As a result, the movement of the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 by the back right movement drive motor 3432 is simultaneously performed. Therefore, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven from the initial state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 with their tips separated upward and downward facing the left side have their respective tips mutually different After being rotated in the approaching direction to be in the second state, they move in the direction in which the whole approaches each other to be in the first state.

  Next, the movement of the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right rendering unit 3400 will be described. In the initial state, the back right moving arm 3430 has a portion to which the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are attached is located at the moving end to the right. In this state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located on the right side of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. In this state, when the back right traversing arm is rotated clockwise in a front view by the back right traversing drive motor 3451 of the back right traversing mechanism 3450, the back right traversing arm 3430 is moved leftward by the back right traversing arm It can be moved to the end. In the state (first state) in which the back right moving arm 3430 is positioned to the left moving end, the part to which the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are attached corresponds to that of the effect display device 1600. The distance from the right end to the left is about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction (see FIG. 170).

  Although the back right moving arm 3430 is not shown in detail, the upper end is formed in a shape extending leftward, and in the first state where the left end is located at the left moving end, the back lower effect unit It is located at the center in the left-right direction of the back movable decorative body 3110 of the back surface rendering unit 3200 and the back movable movable body 3210.

  The back right moving arm 3430 can be moved by the back right traversing mechanism 3450 between the position in the initial state, which is the right moving end, and the position in the first state, which is the left moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state in which the distance of about 2/3 from the position of the initial state is moved to the left with respect to the total movement distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 169).

  In the back right rendering unit 3400, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in the initial state, and are lined up at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, The base sides of the base decorative portions 3411 and the base decorative portions 3421 extend vertically, and the tips of the base decorative portions 3411 and the base decorative portion 3421 are directed to the left. In the normal state, the back right moving mechanism 3450 positions the back right moving arm 3430 at the right moving end in the initial state.

  In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the initial state are located near the right end in the back box 3010, and the respective base decorative portions 3411 and The base decorative portion 3421 is located near the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the front end decorative portion 3412 and the front end decorative portion 3422 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are in the state of the standby position in the initial state (FIG. 135). See etc.).

  In addition, since the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the left, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the position of the second state to the left moving end (the position of the first state) Then, it abuts on the back movable decorative body 3210 in the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back right moving arm 3430 to the left moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back up movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. When the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left moving end with the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 facing left (initial state), the back right upper moveable decoration The tip of 3410 abuts on the back movable decoration 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the front end faces the lower left.

  In addition, when the back right moving arm 3430 is in the initial position, the base sides of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are located near the right end in the back box 3010. When each of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the initial state is turned to the second state by the movement drive motor 3432, each base side is the right side in the back box 3010. Abut on. Therefore, when the back right moving movable body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are rotated from the initial state to the second state side by the back right moving drive motor 3432, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the initial state position. You need to move it to the left.

  In the back right rendering unit 3400, the back upper right base decoration board and back upper right front end decoration board of the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right base decoration board and back lower right front end of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 By appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made to emit light and decorate.

  In this embodiment, when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the initial state, respectively, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration The position of the body 3420 is the standby position. In addition, when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the first state, respectively, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 Position is the first combined position. Furthermore, when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the second state, respectively, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 Position is the second combined position.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 165 to 171 and the like. In FIG. 165, the back movable movable body of the back lower effect unit is raised from the standby position from the normal state, and the back lower moving arm is back lower left movable decoration of the back left effect unit and back lower right of the back right effect unit Make the same height as the decoration, lower the back movable decoration of the back up production unit from the standby position, and move the back up moving arm to the back upper left movable decoration of the back left production unit and the back upper right of the back right production unit It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made the same height as a decoration. In FIG. 166, in the state of FIG. 165, the back bottom movable decoration, back top movable decoration, back top left movable decoration, back bottom left movable decoration, back top right movable decoration, and back bottom right movable decoration are rotated. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board showing a playing state.

  FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left moving arm of the back left rendering unit and the back right moving arm of the back right rendering unit are moved from the normal state to the second state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are moved to the second state from the state of FIG. FIG. In FIG. 169, the back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and the back upper left movable decoration and the back lower right movable decoration, and the back lower left movable decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which displayed the effect image on the effect display apparatus, after rotating the back upper right movable decoration so that it might face each other. FIG. 170 shows the second combined position of the back combined movable decoration, the back movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back lower left movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back lower right movable decoration from a normal state It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to. In the state of FIG. 170, the first combination of the back down movable decoration, the back up movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back lower left movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back lower right movable decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to the position.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a, a start opening unit 2100, a side unit, 2200, a side slope 2300, an attacker unit 2400, a center character 2500, etc. Since it is formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 etc., an effect image being displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through them The back movable movable body 3110 of the back unit 3000 in the back unit 3000, the back movable movable body 3210 of the back higher effect unit 3200, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the back left effect unit 3300, the back lower left movable decoration 3320 , Back left back decoration board 3360, back left top decoration 3370, back left bottom decoration 3380, The back right upper movable decoration 3410, the back right lower movable decoration 3420, the back right back decorative board 3460, the back right upper decoration 3470, the back right lower decoration 3480, etc. of the right rendering unit 3400 can be visually recognized well .

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 of the back bottom rendering unit 3100 is in the standby position, and the back left bottom decoration 3380 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back side. It is facing forward from the rear lower right decoration 3480 of the right rendering unit 3400 and between. In the normal state, the back movable decorative body 3210 of the back side rendering unit 3200 is in the standby position, and the back left upper decoration 3370 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back side of the back right rendering unit 3400 It is facing forward from between the upper right decoration 3470. In the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300 are in the standby position, and are lined up with their tips directed to the right. It is. Furthermore, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are in the standby position, and the tips are vertically separated with the tip facing left. Lined up.

  In this normal state, the back down movable decorative body 3110 and the back up movable decorative body 3210 are disposed symmetrically in the vertical direction at the upper and lower end sides of the effect display device 1600 at a position closer to the left with respect to the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a. And a position where the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are closer to the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a , And are arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state from the player side (forward).

  According to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the back of the back unit 3000 is produced by the game board 5 The back rear movable decoration 3110 of the unit 3100, the back rear movable decoration 3210 of the back top rendering unit 3200, the back left top movable decoration 3310 and the back left bottom movable decoration 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300, the back rear right rendering unit 3400 The upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 perform predetermined movable effects.

  Specifically, as movable effects using the under-back effect unit 3100 and the over-back effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the under-back moving arm 3130 is moved by the under-back elevation mechanism 3150 from the normal state. The back upper elevating mechanism 3250 is moved by the same back elevation mechanism 3250 as it moves to the same height as the tip (apex) of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 respectively facing the center in the left and right direction. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are moved to the same height as the tip (apex) facing the center side in the left-right direction. As a result, the back down movable decoration 3110 and the back up movable decoration 3210 are positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 by blocking the effect image of the effect display device 1600, so the player can move the back under movable decoration 3110 and The movement of the back movable movable decoration 3210 can be noticed. Also, the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 are moved by the lower back moving arm 3130, the upper left movable decoration 3310, the upper right upper movable decoration 3410, and the upper movable decoration The back-up moving arm 3230 makes it possible for the body 3210 and the back-moving arm 3230 to appear connected, and to remind the player of a feeling that something fun will happen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 166, the rear decoration section 3116 and the middle decoration 3118 of the rear rear movable decoration 3110 are driven by the rear lower rotational drive motor 3112 and the rear rear movable decoration 3210 is produced by the rear upper rotational drive motor 3212 The front part decorative part 3312 of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the front stage decorative part 3322 of the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 by the rear upper left rotary drive motor 3313 and the rear lower left rotary drive motor 3323 The front stage decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front stage decorative portion 3422 of the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 are respectively rotated by the rear upper right rotary drive motor 3413 and the rear lower right rotary drive motor 3423. Thereby, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to be lively, and the player can be entertained.

  At this time, when the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row in the back lower moving arm 3130 and the back upper moving arm 3230 are turned on / off / off to flow to the center side in the left / right direction, the left / right back left movable decorative body As energy is injected from the back 3130 and back lower left movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410 and back lower right movable decoration 3420 to the back upper movable decoration 3210 and back lower movable decoration 3110 and rotated. It is possible to show the player the effect. On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs arranged in the back down moving arm 3130 and the back up moving arm 3230 are lighted / flickered / extinguished so as to flow outward in the left-right direction, the back up movable decorative body 3210 or the back down movable The energy is released from the decorative body 3110, and the effect that the left and right back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are rotated is played Can be shown to With such an effect, the player can be made to feel as if the expectation value is increasing, and the sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  Further, as movable effects using the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right rendering unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, from the normal state, the back left moving arm 3330 is in the second state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350. The back right traversing mechanism 3450 moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the position of the second state. Thereby, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decoration 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 move to the center side in the left and right direction while facing each other. And move to the front, and in order to block the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and to be located in front of the effect display device 1600, the player is allowed to move back to the upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and back upper right movable decoration. The movement of the body 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 can be noticed, and their movement can be enjoyed.

  Then, from the state of FIG. 167, as shown in FIG. 168, the back left movable drive 3332 moves the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state and The drive motor 3432 moves the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 from the initial state to the second state. Thus, the end of the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the end of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are in a state where the end of the back lower left movable decoration 3320 and the end of the back upper right movable decoration 3410 face each other. As a result, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the sense of expectation for the game can be heightened. At this time, the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 The front stage decoration portion 3422 may be rotated, or an effect image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to connect the respective tips.

  Also, as movable effects using the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right rendering unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 169, from the normal state, the back left moving arm 3330 to the right and the back right moving arm 3430 to the left The upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320 and the lower upper right movable decorative body 3410 are rotated so as to face each other from the initial state. Then, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image connecting the respective tips. Thereby, an “X” -shaped effect image is displayed so as to connect the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 facing each other, and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 As a result, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the sense of expectation for the game can be heightened. At this time, the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 The front stage decoration portion 3422 may be rotated.

  Furthermore, as a movable effect using the under-back effect unit 3100, the over-back effect unit 3200, the back-left effect unit 3300, and the back-right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. The movable decorative body 3110, the back movable movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the second combined position. . Thereby, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are constant. The state of being lined up so that it gathers on the circumference of a hexagon at intervals, an impact can be given to the player, and an advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit game") that the player is advantageous Can be thought to occur.

  When the second uniting position is as shown in FIG. 170 from the normal state, the back rear movable decoration 3110, the back top movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, and the back left bottom movable decoration 3320 The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be simultaneously moved to the second combined position. Alternatively, the player may be moved to the second combined position in an appropriate order, and by sequentially moving to the second combined position, the player may be moved depending on whether to move to the second combined position in each movement. As well as being able to excite and excite, it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  From the state of FIG. 170, as shown in FIG. 171, the back movable movable body 3110, the back movable movable body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, The back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is moved to the first combined position. As a result, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are densely Since a large decoration of one hexagon can be formed together, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn are "big hit". It can be convinced that there is an interest in the game.

  When the first united position is as shown in FIG. 171, the back movable decoration 3110, the back movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration The body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be simultaneously moved from the second combined position or the normal standby position to the first combined position. Alternatively, the player may be moved to the first combined position in an appropriate order, and by sequentially moving to the first combined position, the player may be moved depending on whether to move to the first combined position in each movement. As well as being able to excite and excite, it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Subsequently, main light emission effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 172 to FIG. 176 and the like. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the first pattern is lighted and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 173 is a timing chart showing an example of effect that causes the decoration pattern of the game panel and the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit to emit light. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second pattern is lighted and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 175 is a timing chart showing an example of effect that causes the decoration pattern of the game panel and the second pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit to emit light. FIG. 176 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second pattern of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIGS. 172 and 174 is decorated with light emission. According to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, the game board 5 is selected according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. A table effect unit 2600 of 2000 performs a predetermined light emission effect.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is lighted and decorated by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130. As a result, since a pattern of a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines is lit and decorated on the rear side of the area in which the gaming ball B circulates in the gaming area 5a, it has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines The luminous effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, as a light emission effect using the surface effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. 172, a plurality of first pattern decorative substrates 2612 disposed on the upper side of the light guide plate 2601 are mounted. Among the LEDs 2611, the first LED 2611 a is made to emit light, and only the first pattern portion 2610 a which constitutes a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light and decorated. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, so something does not occur to the player. It can make you think. In addition, the second LED 2611b of the first design decorative substrate 2612 emits light, and only the second design portion 2610b constituting a part of the first design 2610 emits light and decorates. Thereby, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns having a size different from that of the first pattern portion 2610a are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It can make the player think that something is happening.

  In addition, the third LED 2611c of the first design decorative substrate 2612 emits light, and only the third design portion 2610c constituting a part of the first design 2610 emits light. Thereby, in front of effect display device 1600, it is similar to decoration pattern 1150 of game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns different in size from first pattern portion 2610a and second pattern portion 2610b. Is displayed, which makes it possible for the player to think that something should happen. Furthermore, the fourth LED 2611 d of the first design decorative substrate 2612 emits light, and only the fourth design portion 2610 d constituting a part of the first design 2610 emits light and is decorated. Accordingly, the size is different from the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c in the front of the effect display device 1600, like the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). Since a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns are displayed, the player can be made to think that something should happen.

  Furthermore, in the decoration substrate 2612 for the first pattern, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are caused to emit light repeatedly in the order of The light emission decoration is repeated in the order of the portion 2610 c and the fourth pattern portion 2610 d. As a result, in the first pattern 2610, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, and the second pattern in the large triangle pattern portion The portion 2610b and the third pattern portion 2610c are superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangle portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c and the fourth design portion 2610d are arranged concentrically in the order of the center, so that it is possible to show a light-emitting effect such as animation with movement from the outside to the center, As well as being able to surprise and entertain the player, it can also make the player think that something good may have happened, and the player's It is possible to heighten a sense of waiting.

  In addition, the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are repeatedly emitted in the order of the fourth symbol 2610d, the third symbol 2610c, the second symbol 2610b, and the first symbol 2610a. Make the light emission decoration repeatedly in order. As a result, since it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect such as an animation having a movement moving from the center side to the outside, it is possible to surprise and entertain the player and to the player. It can be made to think that there is something good, and it can make the player's sense of expectation for the game higher.

  When the first LED 2611 a, the second LED 2611 b, the third LED 2611 c, and the fourth LED 2611 d are made to emit light, they may be caused to emit light in different colors. This makes it possible to show the player the light emission decoration that changes to iridescent, and can entertain the player, and at the same time, the first symbol portion 2610a, the second symbol portion 2610b, the third symbol portion 2610c, the fourth symbol The switching of the portion 2610d can be easily understood, and the animation effect can be more strongly exhibited.

  In the first pattern 2610, the first pattern 2610a, the second pattern 2610b, the third pattern 2610c, and the fourth pattern 2610d are lit and decorated at the same time. 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d may be illuminated and decorated in order. By this, initially, the stationary first pattern 2610 is displayed by light emission, so that the player can be considered to be the light emission decoration by the conventional light guide plate, and then the first pattern 2610 By moving like an animation, the player can be greatly surprised, and the rendering effect by the light guide plate 2601 can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 173 shows a timing chart of an effect example of executing the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601. In this example, after the variable display such as changing the symbol (decorative design) is started by the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative board 3311a at timing t1 and back upper left A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa for emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the movable decorative body 3310 and a front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left front stage decorative substrate 3321 a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa for light emission decoration and a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type light emission decoration for light emission decoration of front step decoration portion 3412 of back right upper movable decoration 3410) ) 3411 aaa, mounted on the back lower right front end decoration board 3421 a, back lower right movable decoration A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa for emitting and decorating the first-stage decorative portion 3422 of 3420 have the same emission color (for example, red. Note that the emission color may be different according to the big hit expectation When the light emission is performed with the red light emission color more than the case where the light emission is performed with the blue light emission color, the probability that the jackpot result is derived and displayed may be increased.

  At this time, a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left front end decorative substrate 3311 a to emit light and decorate the front end decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left front end decorative substrate 3321 a Mounted on a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa that light emitting and decorate the front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411 a and front of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa for emitting and decorating the step decoration portion 3412 and a plurality for emitting and decorating the front step decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 mounted on the back lower right front end decoration substrate 3421 a The game panel by the luminescence of the full color LED (side view type) 3421 aa 100 decorative pattern 1150 is a light-emitting decoration.

  Then, at timing t2, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is mounted on the back upper left front end decorative substrate 3311a to illuminate and decorate the front end decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310; A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa mounted on the lower left front end decorative board 3321 a and emitting light on the front decorative portion 3322 of the back lower movable movable body 3320 mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411 a Mounted on multiple full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa that light emitting decorate the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421 a and front end of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) emitting and decorating the decorative portion 3422 All turn off and 3421aa, the.

  After that, at timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 emits a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative board 3311 a to emit light and decorate the first stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 At timing t4, while turning off a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a and emitting and decorating the first stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa mounted on the front stage decorative substrate 3321 a and emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are made to emit light. The back of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 is mounted on A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa emitting and decorating the step decoration portion 3322 are turned off, while being mounted on the back lower right front end decoration substrate 3421 a and emitting the front step decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa to be decorated are made to emit light, and at timing t6, a plurality of light emitting ornaments mounted on the back lower right front end decoration substrate 3421 a to emit light the front end decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 Of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa, while a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) mounted on the back upper right front end decorative substrate 3411 a to emit light and decorate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 Turn on the light of 3411aa, and at the timing t7, the back right upper tip gear Mounted on the substrate 3411a and turning off the plurality of full color LED (side view type) 3411Aa for emitting decorating Sakidan decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control similar to the timing t3 to t7 at timing t7 to t11. As a result, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a and emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 Is mounted on a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa that light emittingly decorate the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the lower left rear movable decoration 3320, and mounted on the lower right front lower decoration base 3421 a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa for emitting and decorating a step decoration portion 3422, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on a back right upper end step decoration substrate 3411 a (Side view type) 3411 aa, rotation to move the light emitting state in order So light control is performed twice.

  That is, the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the front stage decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 The mode in which the light rotates in the order of the first-stage decorative portion 3412 is performed twice. An area corresponding to the light emission state is decorated in the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 in synchronization with the movement of the light emission state (the LED being lighted out of the LEDs 3311 aa, 3321 aa, 3411 aa, 3421 aa). The light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 moves in the order of upper left, lower left, lower right, upper right, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is rotated.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 comes to the timing t11, that is, when the rotational light emission control of the LEDs 3311 aa, 3321 aa, 3411 aa and 3421 aa is executed twice, all of them are extinguished to make the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 disappear It is mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 at timing t12 based on the operation of the rendering operation unit 301 within the effective period, and light is directed toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be irradiated and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 to irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 And, while emitting light, back upper right ahead A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3411 a and emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 and a rear lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421 a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa for emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3422 of the movable decorative body 3420 and a predetermined emission color (for example, red. Note that the emission color is made different according to the big hit expectation. When the light emission is performed in the red emission color more than in the blue emission color, the probability that the jackpot result is derived may be increased. After displaying the result of the fluctuation effect in (The display of all the decoration symbols is stopped (it is not limited to the fixed stop but may be a temporary stop)) and it is turned off.

  Thus, the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is decorated to emit light. Further, in this example, when the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light with a predetermined light emission color, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are emitted with a predetermined light emission color In addition, a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa mounted on the back upper right front end decorative substrate 3411 a to emit light and decorate the front end decorative portion 3412 of the back upper movable movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right front end decorative substrate A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa mounted on 3421 a and emitting and decorating the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in synchronization with light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a The game panel is made to emit light with the same emission color as the emission color of the decorative LED 1130a Auxiliary light is incident on a portion where the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are distant from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a or light emission from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is difficult to reach, and a position distant from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a The position where it is difficult for light emissions from to reach (in this example, the right area of the center character 2500, and notches and through holes between the panel decoration LED 1130a and the panel decoration LED 1130a even at positions close to the panel decoration LED 1130a. Assists the light emission decoration by the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a (including those at positions where the light emission is difficult to reach), and makes the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 emit light substantially uniformly It can be done.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411 a used for other light emission effects (such as the light emission effect when the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 move) A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa mounted and emitting light on and decorating the front stage decoration portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and a back lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421 a and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa for emitting and decorating the previous stage decoration portion 3422 as auxiliary light emitting means for assisting the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. The multiple panels mounted in synchronization with the light emission of the multiple panel decoration LED 1130a dedicated to light emission decoration And emit light in the same emission color and emission color of use LED1130a. Therefore, when making the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a emit light to make the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 emit light, the same emission color as the emission color of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa mounted on the back right upper front decoration board 3411 a in color to emit light and decorate the front decoration part 3412 of the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right front decoration board 3421 a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa mounted and lighted up and decorated the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 and a portion behind the portion supporting the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 Emitting light at the standby position, LED1 for multiple panel decoration In order to assist the light emission of the 30a, while reducing the number of installed a plurality of panel decoration LED 1130a which is a dedicated light emitting means for light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine A substantially uniform light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the present invention can be realized.

  When the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light in a specific manner, the same light emission color as the light emission color of the light emitting means is synchronized with the light emission of the light emitting means dedicated to make the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 emit light. The auxiliary light emitting means may emit light in color. The specific mode may be a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) or a predetermined lighting pattern. Also, in this example, the tip of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411 a used in the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 and the light emission effect etc. of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa for emitting and decorating the step decoration portion 3412 and a plurality for emitting and decorating the front step decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 mounted on the back lower right front end decoration substrate 3421 a A plurality of light emitting means of the full color LED (side view type) 3421 aa is used as the auxiliary light emitting means, but the distance from the dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 The number of auxiliary light emitting means is appropriately determined in accordance with the difficulty of light emission from the light emitting means, the range of irradiation of the auxiliary light, and the like. For example, when the range to which the auxiliary light is irradiated is narrow, one light emitting means among the light emitting means used in the other effects may be set as the auxiliary light emitting means. In the example described above, the LED is used as the light emitting member provided to the movable member, but the light emitting member provided to the member fixed at a predetermined position and not movable is not limited thereto (the auxiliary light may be The decorative pattern 1150 may be used as a light emitting member for partially emphasizing. In this case, since the position does not change, it is possible to always irradiate a fixed light to the game panel 1100, and it becomes possible to perform the light emission decoration with stable luminance. In addition, these light emitting members (light emitting members for irradiating auxiliary light or for partially emphasizing the decorative pattern 1150) may be capable of irradiating light to at least a region where the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is formed. Any type of LED may be used, such as the side view type and the top view type.

  The dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may use an LED of higher luminance than the auxiliary light emitting means. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the light emission of the auxiliary light emitting means is more prominent than the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 because the luminance of the auxiliary light emitting means is too high.

  In addition, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d, which are mounted on the first design decorative substrate 2612 based on the effect operation unit 301 being operated within the predetermined effective period, The first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion in the first pattern 2610 emit light with the same emission color as the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a and the LEDs 3411aa and 3421aa for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel 1100 2610 c and the fourth picture portion 2610 d are lit and decorated at the same time. Thus, the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 has a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and the first pattern portion 2610a have different sizes. A plurality of equilateral triangle patterns and a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar in size to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and different from the first picture portion 2610a and the second picture portion 2610b, It is similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and has a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. Because it is displayed, the game panel 1100 around the effect display device 1600 and the wide light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration associated with over the circumference, it is possible to think that it would be happen something to the player.

  In addition, the first LED 2611 a, the second LED 2611 b, the third LED 2611 c, and the fourth LED 2611 d which are mounted on the first design decorative substrate 2612 and light emittingly decorate the first design 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 display the result of the fluctuation effect It is extinguished before (before displaying all the decorative symbols in a stop display (not only in a fixed stop but also in a temporary stop)). As described above, when displaying the result of the fluctuation effect that the player pays most attention to, the first LED 2611 a, the second LED 2611 b, the second LED 2611 b, which is mounted on the first design decorative substrate 2612 and emits the first design 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 Since the three LEDs 2611 c and the fourth LED 2611 d are turned off, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the effect display device 1600 from being difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission decoration of the first pattern 2610 in the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, LEDs 1130a, 3411aa, and 3421aa for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 display the result of the fluctuation effect (after displaying all the decoration symbols as stop display (after not only confirmation stop but also temporary stop)) Even if the light emission decoration of the first pattern 2610 in the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider range than the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 is continued. It is possible to suppress the reduction of the rendering effect and the reduction of the amusement interest.

  A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the front upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and a front view of the panel holder 1120 A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 and a back upper right front stage decoration substrate 3411a mounted on the back upper right movable A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa for emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the decorative body 3410 and a front stage decorative portion 3422 mounted on the back lower right front end decorative substrate 3421 a Turn off multiple full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421 aa to illuminate and decorate The timing is not limited to the one described above, and is a timing after the turn-off of the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 and before the next change effect is performed (for example, a predetermined result after displaying the result of the change effect) A command from the main control board 1310 after a period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, and after derivation display of a presentation result of the fluctuation production (after a decision stop) (a fluctuation pattern command instructing start of the next fluctuation production, wait for customers, It may be made to light-extinguish out at the timing which received the command etc. which instruct | indicate execution of a demonstration. Alternatively, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before reaching the reach effect in the fluctuation effect performed by the effect display device 1600, and in this case, the light effect of the light guide plate 2601 causes the reach effect. While the light emission decoration of the game panel 1100 is continued even after the reach, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the rendering effect and the decrease of the game entertainment.

  In addition, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at least in the front left upper corner of the panel holder 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel holder 1120 The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are emitted over a plurality of fluctuation effects You may do so. For example, in the normal state, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110; A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are made to emit blue light to decorate the game panel 1100 The game area 5a is illuminated and decorated in blue by illuminating the pattern 1150 in blue, and it is mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 in the short time state and the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 And a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a for emitting light toward the A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are made to emit red light and the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 The game area 5a may be decorated to emit light in red by decorating the light 1150 to emit light in red. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the player is in the advantageous state by the light emission decoration of the game panel 1100, and it is possible to improve the fun of the player who recognizes that the advantageous state is being executed.

  In addition, in a state where a left-handed game is recommended, a plurality of panel decorations mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 LEDs 1130a and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 in blue The game area 5a is decorated by emitting light in blue by decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 in blue, and is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a right-handed game is recommended. A plurality of panel decorations mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 The LEDs 1130a and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are emitted in red The game area 5a may be decorated to emit light in red by emitting the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 to emit light in red. As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether the right-handed game is recommended or the left-handed game is recommended, and the player is not disadvantaged.

  In addition, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view for each variation effect and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110; A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the front view 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 may be switched For example, the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light in blue emission color in the fluctuation effect, and the emission color of the panel decoration LED 1130a is switched to green when the fluctuation effect is finished and the next fluctuation effect is started. It is also good. As a result, it can be easily recognized that switching of the variable effects has been performed. It should be noted that the switching timing of the luminescent color is at least the timing before the next variation effect is performed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the result of the variation effect was displayed) It may be set as a timing (a timing at which a change pattern command instructing start of the next change effect, a command instructing execution of a customer waiting demonstration, etc.) is received from the main control board 1310 after the derivation display (after confirmation stop) .

  Further, in this example, since the game panel 1100 for emitting and decorating the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 for emitting and decorating the front of the effect display device 1600 are formed as separate members, the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 It is possible to suppress the light emission decoration of the other by the light incident on one side, and not only the light emission decoration of both the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 simultaneously but also the light emission decoration of each of them alone. Therefore, it is possible to perform various light emission effects such as emitting and decorating the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 at the same time, and emitting and decorating only one of them.

  In addition, the light emission effect described above is an example, and the light emission modes such as the light emission color, the light emission timing, the light emission period, and the light emission pattern (flashing interval) are not limited to those described above. That is, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311 a and emitting and decoration the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and mounted on the back lower left front stage decorative substrate 3321 a Is mounted on a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa for emitting and embellishing the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and mounted on the back upper right front end decorative board 3411 a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa for emitting and decorating the decorative portion 3412 and a plurality of light emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back lower right and front end decorative substrate 3421 a Light from the top surface of the full-color LED (side view type) 3421 aa and the light guide plate 2601 By appropriately combining the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 which are lighted and decorated by emitting light, various light emission effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Since it is possible to entertain the player, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game entertainment.

  Further, as a light emission effect using the table effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 174, the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second design decorative substrate 2622 disposed on the right side of the light guide plate 2601 The second pattern 2620 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, a guidance (message) for the player consisting of the characters "CHANCE!" Is displayed as the second pattern 2620 in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the guidance gives the player a chance It is possible to suggest the arrival of the game and to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  FIG. 175 shows a timing chart of an effect example for executing the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 different from that of FIG. 173 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601. In this example, after a variable effect such as displaying a symbol (decorative symbol) in a variable manner is started by the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 is disposed at the top left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view at timing t1 ′. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are given a predetermined light emission color (for example, red. Note that the light emission color is made different according to the big hit expectation It is possible to increase the probability that the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed when the light emission is performed in the red emission color more than when the light emission is performed in the blue emission color. At timing t 2 ′, it is mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the front surface view of the panel holder 1120 and directed to the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Is mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view, and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 while turning off the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for emitting light. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may emit light of a predetermined emission color (for example, red. Note that the emission color may be different according to the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the emission color of red is more than that of blue emission. You may increase the probability that the presentation result of the big hit will be derived and displayed when the light is emitted by the light emitting device 1. Also, the light emission color may be the same as that of the panel decoration LED 1130a or a different light emission color. The panel board 1110 is mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view at t3 ′. Toward the periphery turns off the LED1130a for multiple panels decorative irradiating light.

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs the same control as the timings t1 'to t3' at the timings t3 'to t5'. Thus, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in a front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 have a predetermined emission color The alternate light emission control to emit light alternately is performed twice.

  In addition, when alternating light emission control is performed, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 And a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the front view 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 in synchronization with the game panel An area corresponding to the light emitting state is decorated with light emission among the decoration patterns 1150 of 1100, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is alternately moved to the upper left and the lower left. That is, the upper left of the game panel 1100 is emitted by the light emission of the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130 a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 Part of the decorative pattern 1150 is light emitting decorated, mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the front view 1120, and emitting light of a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 The light emitting decoration is performed on the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 by this.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 is mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the front surface of the panel holder 1120 at timing t5 ′, that is, a plurality of panel decoratives emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 Executes alternate light emission control of the multiple LED 1130a and a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the front view of the panel 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 Then, all of them are turned off to make the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 disappear, and the front left upper view of the panel holder 1120 is performed at timing t6 ′ based on the operation of the rendering operation unit 301 within a predetermined effective period. The peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 arranged at the corner A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) mounted on a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for emitting light and a light emission decoration of a front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a 3311 aa, a predetermined light emission color (for example, red. Note that the light emission color may be made different depending on the degree of expectation for big hit, and the light emission color is red light than when light emission is performed with blue light color In this case, the probability that the jackpot result will be derived and displayed may be increased, and the light emission color may be different from the light emission color before the operation of the effect operation unit 301). After displaying the result of (after displaying all the decoration symbols in the stop display (not only the final stop but also the temporary stop)) it is extinguished.

  As a result, the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 is decorated to emit light. In this example, when the decorative pattern 1150 at the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light with a predetermined light emission color, it is mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view. The plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a for emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the light emitting device with a predetermined light emission color, as well as being mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a, the front stage decorative portion of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa emitting and decorating 3312 are mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 as a promoting light emitting means and directed toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 The plurality of panels in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130 a emitting light By emitting light with the same light emission color as the light emission color of the LED 1130a for decoration, it is mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 Promote the light emission decoration by the decoration pattern 1150 applied to the upper left portion of the game panel 1100, which is lighted and decorated by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, and make the light emission decoration of the upper left portion It can be done. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 in this manner to emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110; A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on a substrate 3311 a and emitting / decorating the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 have the same light emission mode (lighting / flashing period or interval, light emitting color The light emission decoration is performed in coordination with the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 by emitting light, etc., and the light amount of the decoration pattern 1150 to be light emission decoration is increased. It is possible to realize clear luminescent decoration on the part.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second design decorative substrate 2622 based on the operation of the rendering operation unit 301 within a predetermined effective period, and a plurality of panels emitting and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 It emits light with the same emission color as the decorative LED 1130 a and the LEDs 3411 aa and 3421 aa to emit and decorate the second pattern. As a result, the guidance (message) for the player consisting of the characters “CHANCE!” Is displayed on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 by light emission. In combination, the light emitting display can be performed by the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600, and it can be made to think that something may occur to the player.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second design decorative substrate 2622 to light emittingly decorate the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed before displaying the result of the fluctuation effect (all decorative symbols are displayed stopped It is turned off (before the temporary stop). As described above, when displaying the result of the fluctuation effect that the player pays most attention to, the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second design decorative substrate 2622 to light emitting decorate the second design 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 is turned off. With the light emission decoration of the second pattern 2630 on the light plate 2601, it is possible to prevent the display content of the effect display device 1600 from being difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the LEDs 1130a and 3311aa for emitting and embellishing the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 are turned off (after displaying all the decoration symbols stop display (not only the fixed stop but also the temporary stop)). Therefore, even if the light emission decoration of the second pattern 2630 in the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider range than the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be continued. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the rendering effect and the decrease in the game entertainment.

  A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110; The timing for turning off the plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on 3311 a and emitting / decorating the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is not limited to the above. What is necessary is to turn off the light after turning-off of the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 and before the next variation presentation is performed. Alternatively, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before reaching the reach effect in the fluctuation effect performed by the effect display device 1600, and in this case, the light effect of the light guide plate 2601 causes the reach effect. While the light emission decoration of the game panel 1100 is continued even after the reach, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the rendering effect and the decrease of the game entertainment.

  Further, in this example, since the game panel 1100 for emitting and decorating the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 for emitting and decorating the front of the effect display device 1600 are formed as separate members, the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 It is possible to suppress the light emission decoration of the other by the light incident on one side, and not only the light emission decoration of both the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 simultaneously but also the light emission decoration of each of them alone. Therefore, it is possible to perform various light emission effects such as emitting and decorating the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 at the same time, and emitting and decorating only one of them.

  In addition, when the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100 is lighted and decorated in a specific mode, it is promoted in synchronization with the light emitting means dedicated to lightening the predetermined area of the game panel 1100 with the same light emission color as the light emission means. The light emitting means may emit light. Further, the specific correspondence may be a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) or may be a predetermined lighting pattern. Also, in this example, it is mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a as a light emitting means for promoting the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 and emits the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 It is mounted on the back lower left front stage decoration substrate 3321a as a promoting light emitting means to promote the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 at the lower left part of the game panel 1100 using a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa to be decorated and the back lower left movable decoration Although it is configured to use a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa for emitting and embellishing the front end decorative portion 3322 of the body 3320, the range of the area promoting light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 in the game panel 1100 and the light emission decoration Depending on the amount of light, etc.For example, when promoting the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern on the left side of the game panel 1100, a plurality of full colors mounted on the back upper left front end decorative substrate 3311a to emit light and decorate the front end decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 A plurality of light emission with a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa mounted on an LED (side view type) 3311 aa and mounted on a back lower left front stage decorative substrate 3321 a to emit and decorate a front stage decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 The means may be set as the facilitating light emitting means.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is mounted on the back left upper stage decorative substrate 3311 a used for other light emission effects (such as light emission effects when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 move) Is mounted on a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa for emitting and embellishing the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and mounted on the back lower left front stage decorative substrate 3321 a and front of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa emitting and decorating the decorative portion 3322 are used as a promoting light emitting means for promoting the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100. LED1130 for decoration of a plurality of panels dedicated to light emission decoration of decoration pattern 1150 Synchronization of the emission is made to emit light at the same light emission color and emission color of LED1130a for multiple panels decoration. Therefore, when making the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a emit light to make the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100 emit light and ornament, the emission colors of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a with the same luminescent color to emit light and decorate the first stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 or back lower left first stage decorative substrate 3321 a The full-color LED (side view type) 3321 aa mounted on the rear bottom left movable decorative body 3320 to emit light and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3321 aa is a standby position behind the portion promoting the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 Make it light up and play the game panel 110 In order to promote the light emission decoration of the predetermined area in the above, while reducing the number of installed a plurality of panel decoration LED 1130a which is a dedicated light emitting means for light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is suppressed. A light emitting decoration that emphasizes the decoration pattern 1150 in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100 can be realized.

  The dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may use an LED of higher luminance than the promotion light emitting means. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the light emission of the promoting light emitting means is more noticeable than the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 because the luminance of the promoting light emitting means is too high.

  Further, in addition to the light emission of the light emitting means dedicated to light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, the auxiliary light emitting means and the promotion light emitting means may be made to cooperate with each other to emit light. For example, when the entire decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is to be lighted and decorated, a special light emitting means for lighting and decoration the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light with a predetermined light color. In the case where only the decoration pattern 1150 on the left side of the game panel 1100 is to be lighted and decorated by emitting the same color as the light emission color of the special light emitting means for making the light decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 The special light emitting means for light emission decoration is made to emit light with a predetermined light emission color, and the promotion light emitting means is made to emit light with the same light emission color as the light emission color of the special light emission means for emitting light decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 It is also good. Thus, in addition to the fact that the entire area of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 can be lighted and decorated substantially uniformly, it is possible to realize a light emission decoration that emphasizes only the decoration pattern in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the light emission effect described above is an example, and the light emission modes such as the light emission color, the light emission timing, the light emission period, and the light emission pattern (flashing interval) are not limited to those described above. That is, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311 a and emitting and decoration the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and mounted on the back lower left front stage decorative substrate 3321 a Is mounted on a plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3321 aa for emitting and embellishing the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and mounted on the back upper right front end decorative board 3411 a A plurality of full color LEDs (side view type) 3411 aa for emitting and decorating the decorative portion 3412 and a plurality of light emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back lower right and front end decorative substrate 3421 a The full color LED (side view type) 3421 aaa and the right side of the light guide plate 2601 By combining the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 as appropriate, it is possible to show the player various colorful effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Since it is possible to entertain the player, it is possible to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game.

  Furthermore, as a light emission effect using a table effect unit 2600 different from those in FIGS. 172 and 174, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 2621 emits light to decorate the second pattern 2630. As a result, the second pattern 2630 of the geometric pattern is formed by extending the horizontal line, the upper right oblique line and the upper left oblique line forming the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 by a wide width However, since the light emission decoration is performed, the decoration having a sense of unity can be shown to the player on the outside and the inside of the center character 2500, and the player can be entertained.

  Note that the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the light emission decoration of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 may be performed simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to show the player a luminous decoration having a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center character 2500, and the player can be entertained.

  Subsequently, an effect obtained by combining the movable effect and the light-emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 177 to FIG. FIG. 177 shows the light emitting decoration of the first pattern in the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back movable movable decoration, the back movable movable decoration, the back left upper movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows a state where the back lower right movable decorative body is moved to the second combined position. FIG. 178 shows that the first pattern is emitted and decorated in the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back movable movable decoration, the back movable movable decoration, the back left upper movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows a state where the back lower right movable decorative body is moved to the first combined position. FIG. 179 shows that the second pattern is illuminated and decorated in the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIG. 178, and the back down movable decoration, the back up movable decoration, the back left top movable decoration, the back left bottom movable decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the body, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back lower right movable decoration to the first combined position.

  According to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, the game board 5 has the above-described movable effect and light emission effect And a suitable combination of Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 177, while making the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 emit light and decorate the first pattern 2610, the back down movable decorative body 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable The decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are moved to the second combined position.

  Thereby, the front of the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back movable movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, and the back bottom right movable decoration 3420 Since the parts of the pattern of the six large triangles in the one pattern 2610 are located, the parts of the large triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610 allow the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back movable movable decoration 3210, and the back left upper movable decoration 3310 The lower back movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 can be decorated, and the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 The appearance of the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 can be changed. Therefore, since a different impression can be given to the player with the state of FIG. 170, more colorful effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the state of FIG. 170. As compared with the above, it can be made to think that a better thing will occur, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  In addition, as an effect combining the above-described movable effect and light emission effect as appropriate, for example, as shown in FIG. 178, while making the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 emit light and decorate the first pattern 2610, 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the first combined position. Thereby, the large triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610, the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back movable movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, Since the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 overlaps the front and back, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable The decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 can be decorated to change their appearance. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a distinctly different impression from the state shown in FIG. 171, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which have been drawn are obtained. Can be convinced that the "big hit" to enhance the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, as an effect combining the above-described movable effect and light emission effect as appropriate, for example, as shown in FIG. 179, the second pattern 2630 is made to emit light and decorate the light guide plate 2601 of the table effect unit 2600 of the embodiment different from the above Together with the lower back movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 Move to the position. Thereby, in front view, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, and the back bottom right movable decoration 3420 A second pattern 2630 of a thick line geometrical pattern extending the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 while being adjacent to each other. Since the light emitting decoration is performed, the second pattern 2630 can make it difficult to see between them, and the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back movable movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, and the back left lower movable decoration 3320 It becomes possible to enhance the sense of unity of the decoration form formed by the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and it is possible to assimilate the movable effect More dramatic effect and can give enhanced.

  In the state where the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 (the second pattern 2630) of the light guide plate 2601 are decorated with light emission, the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be made to emit light as appropriate. Thus, the light emitting decorated back bottom movable decorative body 3110, back top movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 Since light from light etc. will reach the player's eyes through the light guide plate 2601, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration with high luminance which can not be achieved by the light guide plate 2601 alone, and to entertain the player it can.

  In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light emission effect can be appropriately combined, and may be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. it can. As a result, by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the movable effect, the display effect, etc., effects of various patterns can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and by various effects. The player can be entertained, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is. For example, as in the invention in which at least a part of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 or the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is visibly arranged so as to prevent the installation left of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 or the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 At least a part of the first design decorative substrate 2612 and the second design decorative substrate 2622 may be visibly arranged so as to prevent the installation substrate 2612 and the second design decorative substrate 2622 from being forgotten .

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side (rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000) provided on game board 5 shown in FIG. The entire configuration of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. FIG. 180 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 181 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 182 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. FIG. 184 is a view on arrow A of FIG. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover 1501 which is open at the rear and has a box shape longer in the left-right direction compared to the vertical direction, and main control for controlling the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progression of effects based on a command from main control board 1310 of unit 1300, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 And a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise entering the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530. , Conductive (attached) to a predetermined place on a metal shield plate 1540 A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. By mounting various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with metallic shield plate 1540 in the inner space of cover body 1501, shield plate 1540 is mounted. The peripheral control substrate box 1505 (sealing substrate box) is constituted by the cover 1501 and the base 1502 by being sandwiched by the cover 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover 1501 by the base 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by peripheral control board 1510 in addition to peripheral control board 1510 on various boards mounted in the internal space of cover body 1501 There are a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. When the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, the peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two thirds, and is disposed on the left side of the cover 1501. In the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a square shape in the remaining about one third of the remaining area when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right of the cover 1501 is While being disposed on the side, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501 having a square shape that is two turns larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  The substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-substrate connector described later, and the inter-substrate connectors described later between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of peripheral control substrate 1510, the ground (GND) line of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the ground (GND) line of liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 and the electrical of the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and viewed from the front, covers the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The side walls 1501 b to 1501 e are formed in the shape of a box having an opening by protruding toward the rear (the front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 which is on the center slightly upper right side of the cover flat plate 1501a and which is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The fan mounting recess 1501 aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose centers are in the top, bottom, left, and right directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, a cylindrical predetermined shape is inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide projections 1501 aab 1 to 150 1 aab 4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the opposite side to the opening side of the cover 1501. By forming the slit holes 1501 aaa in the shape of a circular arc, it is possible to prevent an unfair act of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, in the cover flat plate 1501a, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into and attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, the front-side surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front-side surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal seat-backed nabe screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated) not shown is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the air-cooling fan FAN pops out of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa by the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seat-in-place nabe screw, coming into contact with the front of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover flat plate 1501 a Can be prevented.

  When peripheral control board 1510 is fixed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of FAN attachment recess 1501aa In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan attachment recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa (the distance from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom dimension of the fan attachment recess 1501aa is shorter In the position where the wiring extraction recess 1501 ab is formed to project toward the opening of the cover 1501. When the air cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa, a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wire drawing recess 1501 ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side as viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501 ac is a fan attachment recess 1501 aa as two closed, substantially horizontally elongated rectangular regions (more precisely, convex regions with the volume adjustment switch 1510 d and the connector CN 1 at the top and the connectors CN 2 to CN 7 at the bottom) The cover body 1501 is formed to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a lower position (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa) compared to the bottom surface There is. Connector holes 1501 ac1 to 1501 ac7 and volume control holes 1501 ac8 are formed on the bottom of the connector recess 1501 ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510 d. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501 ac generally occupies the lower right area when the cover plate 1501 a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure for insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two reinforcing ribs 1510 aci 1 and 1510 aci 2 which are long in the vertical direction and which do not interfere with the holes 1501 ac 8 are formed to project forward at predetermined intervals.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, And the volume adjustment holes 1501 ac 8 are exposed. At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted, the plug is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover flat 1501a above the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac. It can not project from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and can not protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thereby, dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d even if they fall from the cover side wall 1501b. Can be prevented.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has one closed rectangular area whose position corresponds to that of the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side as viewed from the front. The opening of the cover body 1501 at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a long distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) The bottom of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac are disposed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501 ac 9 and 150 1 ac 10 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN 8 and CN 9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the bottom surface of the connector recess 150 1 ad.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501 ac, even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN 8 and CN 9 is inserted, the plug is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover plate 1501 a on the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 150 1 ac. It can not project from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thereby, even if dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity, etc. falls from the cover side wall 1501b, adhesion to the connectors CN8 and CN9 can be prevented. It is supposed to be.

  Further, as seen from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a, a wire lead-out opening 1501ae is formed along the left side of the cover flat plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A mounting recess 1501 af for communicating with the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae and for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae compared to the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting concave 1501 aa It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN attachment recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501 af has a cylindrical shape which is inserted into the through hole 1503 a at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503 a formed in the wiring cover 1503 (a distance shorter than the distance in the depth direction of the wiring cover 1503) And a protrusion 1501 afa having a dimension) is formed to protrude toward the opposite side to the opening side of the cover 1501, and at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503 b 1, 1503 b 2 formed in the wiring cover 150 3, mounting holes 1501 afb 1 , 1501 afb 2 are respectively formed.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501 af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal nabe screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in wiring cover 1503, and screwed from the front to the rear of wiring cover 1503 into mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively. The wiring cover 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af, the wiring lead-out opening 1501 ae is closed and a plurality of wirings connected to the connector CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wiring lines of (1) from being touched. The wiring cover 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded to be transparent.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501 ca and 1501 cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501 c on the left side and having a predetermined distance between the centers. In addition, a hinge hook 1501 cc disposed above the guide 1501 ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hook 1501 cd disposed below the guide 1501 cb and projecting outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501 ca and 1501 cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd. In addition, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral control substrate 1510 is disposed on the left side of the rear surface of the cover 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and peripheral control A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are peripheral control boards, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed on an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat 1501a. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540, which will be described later, are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed into the L-shaped through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged to match the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510. The mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged to match. A peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal respectively correspond to each other. The lands 1510 rf 2, 1510 rf 3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 150 1 ag 2, 150 1 a 3 3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 150 1 a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510 rb 1 to 1510 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control substrate 15 10 and the seat surface of the metal flat screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively, whereby the metal shield plate is formed. The circuit 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit ground to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to provide the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Because the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into the through hole 1510r1 to 1510r4 is an opening of the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501. It is arranged inside the end face of the side (that is, it does not protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  Cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as viewed from the rear surface so that peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the back surface of cover body 1501. At a position where the pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed in a diagonal shape, they are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 It is done. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively formed A wiring pattern is formed on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may correspond to mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540 b 1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, among the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 contact each other. It will be in the state of contact. In addition, lands 1520 rb 1 to 1520 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a seat surface of a metal nabe screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that the shield plate 1540 made of metal becomes peripheral data. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit ground to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. And the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Become.

  When peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 is the one of cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501. It is disposed on the inner side of the end face on the opening side (that is, not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back side of cover flat 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501 a corresponds to four through holes 1530 r 1 to 1530 r 4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as viewed from the rear surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover 1501. At the positions, the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed in a diagonal shape by being projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a liquid crystal output A copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape is formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1530, and the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 15530rb4 are respectively liquid crystal output substrates A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1530.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed on an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat 1501a It arrange | positions so that it may correspond to boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, among the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1530 rf 2 to 15 30 rf 4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501 n 1 and 150 1 n 2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat 1501 a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501 am 2 respectively abut In this state, the lands 1530 rb 1 to 1530 r b formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 abut on the seat surface of the metal nabe screw, respectively. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal nabe screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that the metal shield plate 1540 is a liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, whereby the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM are obtained. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Because the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal nabe screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 is the opening of the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501. It is disposed inside the end face of the side (that is, not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501 And the various substrates in the state of being held and fixed, a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the fan attachment recess 1501aa (In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are respectively formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan attachment recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa rotates, peripheral control is performed by causing air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wing by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through the vent holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover 1501 (especially, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of cover flat plate 1501 a, seven connectors CN 1 to CN 7 provided on peripheral control substrate 15 10 and seven connector holes 150 1 ac 1 to 150 1 ac 7 formed on cover body 150 1. A space is formed, and a space is formed between the volume control switch 1510 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the volume control hole 1501 ac8 formed on the cover 1501. In addition, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501 a, the two connectors CN 8 and CN 9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 15 30 and the two connector holes 150 1 ac 9 and 150 1 ac 10 formed in the cover 1501. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501aa rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. The air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the vent holes 1501az described above, and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and seven formed on the cover body 1501 The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the gaps formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed on the cover 1501, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Two connectors CN8 equipped And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa formed on the bottom surface of the fan attachment recess 1501 aa is the area of the ventilation holes 1501 az formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 The above-described gap (the volume formed by the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the cover 1501 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 And a gap formed in the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, and two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501aa rotates, air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. A plurality of air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of vent holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of shield plates 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in a plurality of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed small.

6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded transparent, and viewed from the front, on the upper side, the left side, the lower side and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502 b to 1502 e of the base body 1502 is formed to be somewhat larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501 b to 1501 e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state in which the opening of the cover 1501 is closed by the base 1502 by covering the cover 1501 with the base 1502, the cover side 1501 b1 501 e of the cover 1501 is provided on the inside of the base side 1502 b-1502 e of the base 1502. And fit in (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a has predetermined intervals along the lower side as viewed from the front, and wires for these connectors CN2 to CN7 are located at positions not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. Elongated in the vertical direction long and thin break prevention rib parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 being broken by the force when inserting the connector for connection And a force for inserting a connector for connecting a wire to the connector CN1 at a position not interfering with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 or a force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d Causes the peripheral control board 1510 to warp and the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  In addition, the base flat plate 1502a is an L-shaped circuit at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d which is formed on a right side and is bent on a metal shield plate 1540 described later, as viewed from the front. A rectangular through hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is a shape that is slightly larger than the back surface shape of the ground piece 1540d.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side, an engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed. In the engaging portion 1502ca, guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab are provided at positions corresponding to the plate-like guiding portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad are respectively formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped sack portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf.

  While inserting the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, the U-shaped groove shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. The L-shaped hooks 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state in which the L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae and 1502 caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502 cac and 1502 cad. By turning the hook receiving portion 1502cac, 1502cad of the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portion 1502cae, 1502caf, the hook portion 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 is hooked with the L-shaped collar portion 1501cca, 1501cda. It can be engaged.

  Further, at the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are respectively formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side.

6-3. Shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise entering the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield as viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the present embodiment) on the upper left side center and lower left side center of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) Are formed respectively.

  Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment) on the upper side and lower side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) as viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward only 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) An L-shaped circuit earth piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 and bent backward by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, 25 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

  The shield plate 1540a is formed with a notch around the periphery thereof so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and substantially at a position corresponding to the fan attachment recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and the wiring extraction recess 1501ab. A square opening 1540 aa is formed. Thereby, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state in which the cover 1501 and various substrates hold and fix, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover 1501 do not respectively interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat 1540a, and the fan attachment concave 1501aa of the cover flat 1501a and The wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab is inserted without being in contact with the opening 1540aa of the shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are disposed in the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540 b 1, 1540 b 2, 1540 c 1, and 1540 c 2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540 a are formed to be parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance from the surface of the shield plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is projected from the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is a mounting boss hole of one of the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501 ai 1, 1501 ai 2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is a mounting boss hole of one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed in the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are directed from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the opening side of the cover 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510. It is two mounting boss holes among four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to be protruded.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, the distance dimension (the actual implementation) of a predetermined height between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form two spaces.

  These two spaces are a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface (surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) of various substrates and the back surface of the shield flat surface 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (see FIG. 183) (in the present embodiment, 12 mm) and a second space between the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a described later. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of the predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e described later, power generation circuit not shown, Resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), LEDs ML1 to ML4 to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 to be described later, various electronic components etc. provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown, While a special connector SCN3 or the like to be described later and various electronic components etc. (not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN4 to be described later, etc.) provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. The reason is that heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not housing the first space 1505a. That is, in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise, the metal shield plate 1540 also has a function as a heat sink.

  In the shield flat plate 1540 a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540 az of the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501 az formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501. That is, similar to the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the wing of the air-cooling fan attached to the fan attachment recess 1501 aa of the cover 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing by this rotation. Thus, the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air cooled.

6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 1545c stuck to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester woven fabric in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, a polyimide film in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed, and the like. As a foam 1545b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be mentioned. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape in which an acrylic adhesive is used can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and peels off the peel paper when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (bonded) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover 1501 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / I. Perform various programs and effects that can control peripheral control IC 1510a where O interface etc. are accumulated on one semiconductor chip, and progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effect to be performed while waiting for players) Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510 b for storing various schedule data to be prescribed and the peripheral data ROM 1520 a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be transferred and stored. DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic
A random access memory (SD) 1510c consisting of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a backup power supply that can supply power even when the power is shut off to a real time clock IC (not shown) A power supply generation circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages and various connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, which are provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, have various IC connectors and the various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. The pin spacing between ~ CN7 and special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on peripheral control board 1510 is increased, so the spacing between connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the spacing between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 is also narrowed. ing.

  The control ROM 1510 b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  As various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510, there are various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, and the like.

  In this embodiment, UART communication is used as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communicate via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, various boards provided on the door frame side There is also a communication method in which SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the above (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

  In this embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors provided in various effect units, and communicating via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7) And an electric drive source (for example, the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 side, and communicate via the connector CN3. Drive data to drive control IC for driving, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided for various effect units, and communicate via the connector CN6) Signals from the vehicle are received as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300) , And the and receives signals from communicating through the connector CN3.) As the detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, General Purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to GPIO (via the connector CN1) or The signals from various sensors that check the operation of the control target and the origin position are not input to GPIO (via connector CN6) or the control signal for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side from GPIO (connector CN6 And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Moreover, in the present embodiment, GPIO is used to function as serial communication. For example, in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), while generating a clock signal from GPIO, based on this clock signal, output data one bit at a time from GPIO It can produce serial data. By using such GPIOs to function as serial communication, for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)) Light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems to (communicated via connector CN1), and communicated via a plurality of LEDs (connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. Light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1 and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist) The connector CN5 is assigned to UART communication, the connector CN6 is assigned to SPI communication and GPIO (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a SPI communication and GPIO co-resident connector), and the connector CN7 is assigned to SPI communication Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and realizes a high transfer speed of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 at high speed to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a according to an instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , And can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520 a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510 a.

  Peripheral control substrate 1510 further includes special connector SCN1 for connecting peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 with the substrate, and special connector SCN2 for connecting liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with the substrate. Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is equipped with special connector SCN 3 for connecting peripheral control substrate 1510 to the substrate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 includes a peripheral control substrate 1510 and a special connector SCN 4 for connecting the substrates.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a system of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal types include RGB type, LVDS type, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) type, eDP (Embedded Display Port) type, clockless type, and the like. In the system, four systems (four systems in total) of one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as a system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, an eDP method is adopted, and a peripheral control board is one system of RGB method, two systems of LVDS method (first LVDS method, second LVDS method) and one system of eDP method 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LED ML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LED ML2 near the SDRAM 1510 c, an LED ML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LED ML4 near the special connector SCN2. As described later, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35 V, DC + 12 V, and DC + 5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current +5 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 confirms (monitors) a state in which +12 V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state in which +12 V DC is supplied. The LED ML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current +35 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current +35 V is supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is in operation.

  Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form a two space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of the cover flat 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat 1501a And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of two predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, as described above, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and various electronic components and the like provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. ing. The inside of the first space 1505 a formed in this manner can be brightly illuminated by lighting up the LEDs ML 1 to LED ML 4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 15 10.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the socket and the plug are fitted. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which there is no amount of movement of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front when fitting.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are plugs, and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are sockets.

  By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-rear direction (back and front of the pachinko machine 1) The floating mechanism is provided to be able to absorb an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the direction. The socket of the special connector SCN 3 provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 in a state where peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of cover flat 1501 a of cover 1501. The front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 3 is not in contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 even if the peripheral control substrate 1510 is moved forward as viewed from the front A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the special connector SCN 4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (directions between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) A floating mechanism is provided to be able to absorb an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (peripheral control in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. Even if the substrate 1510 is moved forward as viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN 4 does not contact the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501 even if it moves the maximum A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN 4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is to be controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), background images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, character images, image data such as symbol images, various decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 To the light emission data (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the various LEDs mounted in plural, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. can be mentioned for carrying out drive control of the various movable performance bodies provided.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can reduce power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a realizes cost reduction and contributes to suppression of power consumption, and reading of various data stored at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in peripheral data ROM 1520 a from peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to peripheral control substrate 1510 accurately and surely. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected to each other through the wiring (harness) is not employed, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control substrate 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-substrate connector, the influence of noise intruding into the inter-substrate transmission path is reduced.

  The mounting procedure of various substrates in the internal space of cover 1501 will be described later, but peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 inserts the socket of special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of special connector SCN1 provided in peripheral control substrate 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being pressed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Thus, a plurality of connection terminals are formed in the plug and the socket by absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. To prevent damage to the surroundings The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back surface side of the curved cover plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above. By absorbing the errors in the front and back direction that occur during operation, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is obtained. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 outputs the rendering data of the image to be rendered on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby advancing the effect on the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player An image telling that a big hit gaming state occurs that is advantageous compared to the normal state, an image telling that a big hit gaming state does not occur, a big hit gaming state occurs compared to the normal state although a big hit gaming state does not occur It is an important substrate which draws an image etc. which conveys that it is approaching as an image. Therefore, drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control substrate 1510 needs to be transmitted to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 accurately and surely. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate are not electrically connected via the wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the connector 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-substrate connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-substrate transmission path is reduced.

  The mounting procedure of various substrates in the inner space of the cover 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 Since it is necessary to fix peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a after pressing, the socket of special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Accordingly, by absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510, a plurality of connection terminals are formed in the plug and the socket. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat 1501 a of the cover 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. By absorbing the errors in the front and back direction that occur in the process, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be assured. It can be formed.

  When peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back of peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. As compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced, so, for example, a large effect unit (operating a movable effect body on the game board 5) Drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the home position and working position) It can contribute to ensuring the depth direction of the distance dimension of fit.

6-6. Method of assembling peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. And the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting bosses are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so that the through holes 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the side. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes formed in liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged corresponding to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back side of the cover flat 1501a. The mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the above are arranged corresponding to each other.

  Subsequently, a metal nabe screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. Fix peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back side of cover plate 1501a, insert a metal nabe screw (not shown) into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back side of cover plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is It will be in the state clamped by the cover body 1501 and the liquid-crystal output board | substrate 1530. FIG.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes are formed. The peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held by the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a. It will be in the state clamped by the body 1501 and various substrates, and being fixed.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501 ai 1 1501 a 2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 150 1 a to restrict movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 15 30 is of the cover flat plate 150 1 a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side, the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting the vertical and horizontal directions The protrusion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is achieved by fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a by restraining the upper, lower, left, and right directions, and measuring dimensional errors due to such restraints. When fixed to the back side of 1501a, it is absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover 1501 are The L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502 caa and 1502 cab formed on the engaging portion 1502 ca of the base body 1502. The hinge receiving portions 1502 cac of the engaging portions 1502 ca 1502 and the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae of the 1502 cad are inserted into the bag portions 1502 cae 1502 caf.

  Subsequently, a state in which the L-shaped flanges 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hooks 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 abut the U-shaped groove shaped bags 1502 cae and 1502 caf of the hinge receiving parts 1502 cac and 1502 cad The L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540 d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502 ab of the base body 1502 to cover the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Metal one way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 by entering. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the front end surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 The base-side sealing unit 1502ea is sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted into and inscribed in (surface contact with) the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Further, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540 d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540 d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface of the lens is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterrent against the fraudulent act on the peripheral control board box 1505 Is elevated.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan attachment recess 1501 aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are formed from the wiring drawing out recess 1501 ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a From the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the rear, a metal seat-backed nabe screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) not shown is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2, respectively.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN 10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 through the wire lead-out opening 1501 ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover 1501. The connector of (1) is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted in the mounting recess 1501 af formed in the cover flat plate 1501 a of the cover body 1501. A metal cover screw (not shown) is inserted in the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503 in the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501 af. Thus, the plurality of wires can be covered by the wire cover 1503 and can not be touched.

  Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 made of metal protruding from the back surface Attach (adhere) 1545 adhesive tape 1545c.

  In the case where the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that accommodates the effect display device 1600 and is behind the gaming panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 The peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the side of the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. And insert a metal nabe screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to insert it into the mounting groove forming the mounting portion formed in the transparent synthetic resin box It fixes by screwing toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side of.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-like metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit and the like are accommodated in a frame-like metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-like metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 etc. accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Are connected to the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit ground piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502 The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is hit via the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box 1540 d as shown in FIG. 184. It will be in the state of contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapsed in the height direction (in the present embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerance or assembly error. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thereby, the peripheral control board housed in peripheral control unit 1500 is brought into a state where the metal shield plate 1540 of peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 and can be made the same ground (GND), so that a strong environment against electromagnetic wave noise is constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can.

  In the attachment procedure of various substrates in the inner space of the cover 1501 among the assembling methods described above, for example, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 made of metal is disposed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a is formed on the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed. Of the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged at the above-described predetermined position on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501 a of peripheral control substrate 1510 (peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of cover 1501 when cover 1501 is viewed from the back The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a cover when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back And the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and pushed in. The source of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is in the above-described predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 sees the cover 1501 from the back and It can also be fixed to the left side). Also in the attachment procedure of such various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN 3 and SCN 4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing an error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in, the plug and socket Thus, it is possible to reliably form the transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 by preventing damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plurality, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control substrate 1510 and the substrate can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of gaming boards mounted on pachinko machines having different gaming specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be commonly used independently of the gaming specifications of the gaming board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is used for each gaming specification of the gaming board in the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a substrate depending on the gaming specification of the gaming board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board which is not dependent on the game specification of the game board and is not a board of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Can be reused (used over). In addition, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 having peripheral data ROM 1520a storing peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board and peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specification of the game board.

  For example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of methods such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method as the methods of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 corresponding to the plurality of types of systems are electrically connected by the inter-substrate connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily exchanged according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) of the two LVDS system systems is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 according to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 by the inter-substrate connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and are formed in the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is held and fixed by the cover 1501 and various substrates. Then, a metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Also, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. Connected. For this reason, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 is guided to the circuit ground (the ground (GND of various substrates) serving as the circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to the cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can.

  Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of As described above, the vent holes 1501az and 1540az having the plurality of circular shapes can also cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function capable of confirming the presence or absence of a fraud.

  Specifically, when peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 182, ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes disposed on the right side of FAN mounting recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510 b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510 b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the IC direction, part number , Pin numbers etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510 b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. Distributed in such a way that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510 b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510 b and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, modification of the control ROM 1510 b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501 az and 1540 az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, since the LED ML1 disposed in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +5 V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, the direct current +5 V is originally supplied Improves the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins by additionally having the function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b, although it has the function of confirming (monitoring) the current state. This can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the above and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can check the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A region larger than the shape of the inter-substrate connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520), and further provided on peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (for example , Connector pin count, IC Orientation, part number, pin number etc.), that is, it is silk-printed on the surface of peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of IC pins, and peripheral control substrate 1510 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. The contents are distributed and arranged so as to be large areas where it is possible to confirm substantially from multiple angles. Thus, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence with the above, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are It can confirm via the ventilation hole 1501az which has several circular shape. Also, since the LED ML3 disposed in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is designed to maintain the lighting state in the state where the direct current +35 V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, the direct current +35 V is originally Although it has a function to confirm (monitor) the supplied state, as a spotlight that illuminates the inter-board connector brightly by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 By further having the following functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 silk-printed respectively Improved the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  In addition, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az disposed on the lower left side of the fan attachment recess 1501aa can check the connection state of the inter-substrate connector between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. And a region larger than the shape of the inter-substrate connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530), and further, the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate In order to be able to visually recognize the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on each of 1530 and 1530, respectively, they are distributed. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-substrate connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is confirmed through the vent holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Also, since the LED ML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is designed to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is in operation, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is basically checked (monitored) Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the inter-substrate connector with the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a bright light. The improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the improvement of the visibility of the inter-substrate connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the part numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, In order to be able to visually recognize the state of the IC pins 1510c2 and the contents (for example, the orientation of the IC, part numbers, pin numbers, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 To be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. It is arranged. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, the modifications of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c configured from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is configured to maintain the lighting state in a state where +12 V DC is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, Although it originally has a function to confirm (monitor) the state where DC +12 V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510 c brightly, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510 c (that is, SDRAM 1510 c1, 1510 c2) This can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the above, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Further, among a plurality of blades constituting the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blade and the blade (specifically, a gap between the blade and the blade by rotating the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN by an examiner) The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from the above. Thereby, it can be confirmed via the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an illegal substrate is disposed around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, as the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 included in the peripheral control substrate 1510, which are surface-mounted and have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, a type of weak directivity is adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. Various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with metallic shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of cover plate 1501a, so that shield plate 1540 is covered by cover 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form a two space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (surface facing the back surface of the cover flat 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat 1501a And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of two predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment). In the first space 1505a, as described above, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and various electronic components and the like provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this manner can be brightly illuminated by lighting up the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a luster, and the area of the back surface of shield flat plate 1540 a of shield plate 1540 made of metal facing the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 respectively. The light emitting diode also has a function as a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light back to the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the periphery thereof. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a colored paint having gloss.

  Further, near the gaming board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the gaming board 5 and the payout is made to the side of the gaming board 5 Since the unit 560 is disposed, the gaming balls rub against each other in the ball path configured by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball. The pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment which is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a nonconductive resin, and are formed in the inner space of the cover body 1501. Then, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is held between the cover 1501 and various substrates. By adopting the structure described above, a configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates to provide a circuit ground. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the grounds of the power supply substrate 630 in the substrate unit 620 of the main frame 4. By electrically connecting to the (GND) line, the same ground (GND) was adopted.

  Thus, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) Lead the electromagnetic wave noise that has invaded from the body 1502 to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, which become the circuit earth, through the metal shield plate 1540 Can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The electromagnetic wave noise intruding from the body 1502 can be guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as a circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

  In the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 as shown in FIG. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data provided on the peripheral control board 1510 An inter-board connector with a special connector SCN3 provided on a ROM board 1520, an inter-board connector with a special connector SCN2 provided on a peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on a liquid crystal output board 1530 To be placed away from the tank rail 553 by It has become possible way. As described above, since the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, the substrate described above By arranging the space connector apart from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the gaming ball B in the space between the above-mentioned connectors.

  Also, an inter-board connector by special connector SCN1 provided in peripheral control board 1510 and special connector SCN3 provided in peripheral data ROM board 1520, special connector SCN2 provided in peripheral control board 1510, and special connector SCN4 provided in liquid crystal output board 1530 A state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) In the above, as shown in FIG. 182, the arrangement can be made long in the vertical direction, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres can be minimized. In the case where the above-described inter-board connector is disposed long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallicity or the like adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 182, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction, and dust and some metal As described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the connector has a projecting wall whose upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac is a cover plate 1501a. Even if a plug corresponding to CN1 to CN9 is inserted, the plug is hidden and can not protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a Dust attached to the metal, powder with some metallicity, etc. It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is arranged, and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, so that dust, powder having some metallic property and the like can be prevented from adhering to the respective electric terminals. Is selected.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine is provided with an effect control board and the like on which a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc. is stored, a CPU for controlling display devices for displaying various images, etc. It is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to manufacture by modifying the effect control substrate according to the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control substrate there were.

  Also, conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board (effect control means), etc. on which a CPU for controlling display devices for displaying various images is mounted A game machine having the following is proposed (e.g., JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island facilities of the game hall have static electricity as the game balls rub against each other when circulating the island facilities of the game hall and the game machine, so the game ball is a game ball It is necessary to take measures for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the

[7. Control configuration]
Next, control configurations for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 187. FIG. FIG. 185 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine, FIG. 186 is a block diagram schematically showing a connection relationship with a panel drive substrate, and FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. As shown in FIG. 115, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4. And their control is shared. The main control board 1310 can control the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progression of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a capable of controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b capable of controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182. There is.

7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 185, the main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game controls the processing at the time of power-on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that incorporates various processing programs such as the main control program that controls the operation, ROM that stores various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data, and detection signals from various sensors are input Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a power failure of a predetermined voltage or Built in the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors the indication of a momentary power failure and the main control MPU 1310a A RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM that is provided with a. The main control MPU 1310 a operates with a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control substrate 1310.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310 a In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and forcibly forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to inconsistent contents. It is a circuit to reset. Such forced reset by the built-in reset circuit can not be disabled by control by the user program. Therefore, when the main reset MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a check sum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM always occurs as described later, so the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased ( It will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “the main control built-in hardware that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate the jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming It is described as “random number circuit”. The main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value of 0 to a value of 535 as a minimum and a value of 65535 as a minimum is preset) The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as the value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with the one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and within a predetermined numerical range Once all the values in the above have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without overlapping. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a obtains a value extracted from the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit 1310 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, when the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset function-free main control output circuit not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal; It consists of The main control output circuit with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that is not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board etc. by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is It is comprised as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  The first starting opening sensor 3002 (the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor trailing side 3002b described above, which detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002), the second starting opening 2004 The second starting opening sensor 2402 which detects the game ball B which is accepted to, the general winning opening sensor 2401 and 3001 which detects the game ball B which is accepted to the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B which has passed the gate part 2003 is detected The detection signals from the gate sensor 2506, the large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005, and the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, etc. It is inputted to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  The detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through the other substrate, that is, the main control input circuit 1310 b It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001, the gate sensor 2506, the special winning opening sensor 2403, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are main control via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. The signal is input to the substrate 1310 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals, thereby the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with reset function. By outputting a control signal to drive circuit 1310 d, drive signals are output from main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d to start port solenoid 2412 and attacker solenoid 2414 via panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Or, by outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main control output circuit with a reset function from the status display of the function display unit 1400, ordinary symbol display, ordinary Hold display, 1st special symbol display, 1st special Pending number indicator, the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number indicator, the respective drive signals to the round indicator, without passing through the other substrate, that is directly or outputs.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310 a outputs various information (game information) regarding the game to the main control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby a payout control board 633 is outputted from the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control with reset function is output by outputting various information (gaming information) about the game to the player, or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002 (first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b), second starting opening sensor 2402, gate sensor 2506, and winning opening While non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used as the sensor 2403, contact type ON / OFF mechanical switches are used as the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also frequently occurs. Therefore, for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the gaming ball B enters frequently, so the gaming ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, also for the special winning opening sensor 2403, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switches are used as the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout to the main control output circuit without reset function as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port, thereby a payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. Sends various commands as serial data. The payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data is completed. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310 a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control output with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) to that effect. The signal is output to the circuit, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function. No reset function The main control output circuit transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. Describe) BC0 (see FIG. 189 etc.). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f when the RAM clear switch 1310 f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 1310a is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. There is. The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is also output from the main control output circuit without reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is supplied with DC +12 V and DC +35 V from the power supply substrate 630, and monitors the DC +12 V and DC +35 V for signs of power failure or short interruption. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notification when detecting a DC +12 V and DC +35 V power failure or an indication of a momentary power failure. The input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa through the payout control input circuit 633ab of the main control board 1310 (output through the main control output circuit 1310c) and the payout control board 4110 while being input to the input terminal Is input to In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The blackout notice signal may be input to a board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power supply lines: a power supply line (+12 V power supply line) to which DC +12 V is supplied and a power supply line (+35 V power supply line) to which DC +35 V is supplied. Monitoring the voltage more accurately than in the case of monitoring the voltage applied to one of the +12 V power supply line or the +35 V power supply line by monitoring the voltage more precisely It is possible to

7-2. Disbursement control board]
In addition to the payout control of the gaming ball B, the payout control board 633 which performs the firing control of the gaming ball B, the ball feeding control, etc. performs the firing control by the payout control portion 633a which performs various control regarding the payout and the firing solenoid 542 The ball control unit 633b performs ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 633c. And an error release switch 633d.

7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 185, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to the payout in the payout control board 633 controls the process at the time of power-on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor incorporating various processing programs including a payout control program for controlling the payout operation of the game media and ROM storing various commands, RAM temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control input circuit 633ab to which a detection signal from a sensor is input, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a drive signal to a payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 And a payout motor drive circuit 633ad.

  The payout control MPU 633 aa has its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), its operation (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”). A watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the system) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, since the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The payout control output circuit 633 ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A reset function dispensing control output circuit having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit not having a reset terminal and not having a reset function; It consists of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by the payout control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that is not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 4120 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a non-illustrated dispensing control system reset is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the payment control system reset, the signal based on the information does not have to be reset. It is comprised as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the full detection sensor 154 of the false cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, a payout detection of the payout device 580 The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via the payout control input circuit 633 ab.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 are payout control input circuits. It is inputted to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via 633 ab.

  Further, various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via the payout control input circuit 633 ab. Further, an operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310 f from the main control board 1310 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via the payout control input circuit 633 ab.

  Upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 633 aa outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect, and a payout control output with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit, the payout control output circuit with reset function outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633 aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout control output without reset function is output. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310. When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 633 is completed as serial data, the main control substrate 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via the payout control input circuit 633 ab.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633 aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with the reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout control output circuit with the reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output to the error LED indicator 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for displaying to the payout control output circuit with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED indicator 633c.

  The error LED display 633c is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633c include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 633, and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates "ball gummy" (specific Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the gaming ball B are engaged to notify that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the numeral "3" is displayed. When the counting switch (In detail, a message indicating that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number “5” is displayed, “retry” It reports that it is an error (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit) and that it is "full" when the number "6" is displayed. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored reports that it is full, and when the number "7" is displayed, "CR Notifies that it is “not connected” (ie, indicates that the electrical connection has been disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the numeral “9” When displayed Is informed that it is "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, it is informed that the number of balls of the game ball B not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls) There is.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633 aa outputs the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a winning ball to the payout control output circuit with the reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby providing the payout control with the reset function. The number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out as a winning ball or the like is output from the output circuit to the external terminal board 558 through a resistor (not shown).

  Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built-in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The ball number etc. of the game ball B and various information (game information, an error content or an error relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed on the). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause a hole. The main control board 1310 which can progress the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the computer does not malfunction or break down, and the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 which can be processed and the peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progression of the effect, thereby causing malfunction or failure. The hole computer determines the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a winning ball by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called , Ball exit information) and the player's game.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1 . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial method, and this signal is sent out via the CR unit input / output circuit (not shown) Input is made to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent gaming balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball It is input and displayed on the ball lending display unit of the lending operation unit 220.

  Note that various voltages (DC + 35 V, DC + 12 V, and DC + 5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control substrate 633. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 633 is, as described above, a capacitor BC0 (see FIG. 189, etc.) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. See). Due to the capacitor BC0, the payout control MPU 633aa can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. As various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the RAM clear switch 1310 f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is a payout control input circuit It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633 aa via 633 ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633 aa is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control internal RAM.

7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633b is based on an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing reference control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a; a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. And generating a ball-sending reference pulse by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputting the generated pulse to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects the signal is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit is a game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progression of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a whose interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b for storing various programs and various schedule data which prescribes the progression of effects in advance, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 Control information (peripheral data) can be transferred and stored, an SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a realator (not shown) And backup power source 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the time clock IC, and includes a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Examples of various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports and various parallel I / O ports.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as one processing of initial setting processing at the time of power on (including the case of recovery from power failure). Control to transfer data) to the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2. Between the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, as described above, the transfer rate of 2 Gbps is provided, so the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is sent to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is transferred at high speed. As control information (peripheral data), as described above, the background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, character images, image data such as symbol images, etc., the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 or game It is drive data or the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided on the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a to temporarily store information or delete the information associated with processing. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system, it reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and proceeds with rendering. .

  Further, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from main control board 1310, it reads and reads various schedule data stored in control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. According to the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, or the light emission mode of various LEDs matched to various effects As described above, various effects are advanced by performing control or performing control such that sounds such as music and sound effects flow according to various effects.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a Then, control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is performed. The drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a becomes ready to receive screen data defining the configuration of the screen, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to convey that effect.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like by reading, generating and outputting sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a Control is performed such that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. When the slide type volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume control operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker Outputs audio signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to 464 and the body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the body frame 4 By doing this, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than ever before.

  When the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from main control board 1310, it reads out various schedule data stored in control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads out the schedule data From the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to full color LEDs or single color LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 along the Read out and send to various decoration boards of the game board 5 from various serial I / O ports via the panel drive board 1720 as a command or drive to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting the signal SDRAM Read out from 510c1 and 1510c2 and transmit to the panel drive board 1720 from various serial I / O ports as commands, or drive to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 etc. provided in the door frame Door side drive data for outputting a signal, and a door side for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 Door side drive light emission data composed of light emission data is read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands to the door frame 3 from various serial I / O ports. The panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board drive data (that is, command) when the game board drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) is received. A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units is provided.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby positions (original positions), combined positions) provided in various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are the panel drive board 1720 and the periphery It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510 a through the control input circuit. Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348 The detection signal from is received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a through the peripheral control input circuit. In addition, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Among the various voltages from the power supply substrate 630, the power supply generation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 has a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC +12 V) The type is created and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a diagnoses whether or not its own system is runaway using the external WDT.

[7-3-1. Panel drive board]
Here, the panel drive substrate 1720 which is a subordinate substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be briefly described. Here, the relationship between the game board 5 and each decoration substrate will be described, and subsequently, the relationship between the various rendering units and the various drive motors and the relationship between the various detection sensors will be described.

[7-3-1a. Relationship with each decoration board of the game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. The game board side light emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from the various serial I / O ports to the decoration boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided with one or more LED constant current drive circuits capable of supplying a predetermined constant current to the LEDs.

  A plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 to be decorated by emitting light by causing light to be incident from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 of the front unit 2000 as the respective decoration substrates of the game board 5 A second pattern on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 to be illuminated and decorated by causing light to be incident from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 in the table rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 And a decorative substrate 2622.

  In addition, an upper left panel decoration on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130 a are disposed as the respective decorative substrates of the game board 5 and disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 There is a substrate 1131, and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a which are disposed at the lower left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and which emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted.

  In addition, as the respective decoration substrates of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back-side movable decoration 3110 in the back-side rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted respectively There is a decorative substrate 3122 and a not-shown back-to-back moving decoration substrate on which a plurality of full color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back-to-back moving arm 3130 of the back unit 3000 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  In addition, a plurality of full color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back movable decorative body 3210 in the back rear effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted as the respective decoration substrates of the game board 5 respectively on the back rear decoration substrate and back not shown. There is a front decoration board, and a back up movement decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of full color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back up moving arm 3230 in the back up rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  In addition, a plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa are mounted on the back left upper movable movable body 3310 of the back left presentation unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 as the respective decoration substrates of the game board 5. There is a substrate 3311 a and a back left lower first decoration substrate 3321 a on which a plurality of full color LEDs 3321 aa for emitting and decorating the front decoration 3332 of the back lower left movable unit 3300 in the back left rendering unit 3300 are mounted.

  In addition, as each decoration substrate of game board 5, as shown in FIG. 187, a plurality of full color LEDs 3411 aa for emitting and embellishing the front stage decoration portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right rendering unit 3400 Back right upper front decoration substrate 3411a, and a plurality of full color LEDs 3421 aa for emitting and decoration a front decoration part 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 There is a stepped decorative substrate 3421a.

7-3-1 b. Relationship with various drive motors of various rendering units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The command is transmitted from the various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720 as a command. As described above, when the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by the drive motor control circuit (not shown), the drive motor control circuit (not shown) receives the game A drive signal is output to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on the board side drive data (that is, a command).

  Referring back to FIG. 186, as various driving motors provided in various rendering units, a reverse rotating driving motor that rotates the rear decoration 3116 and the middle decoration 3118 of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 in the rear rear rendering unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. 3112 and a back-and-bottom elevating drive motor 3151 that raises and lowers the back-bottom movable decorative body 3110 by pivoting the back-bottom elevating arm in the back-bottom rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to lift the back-bottom moving arm 3130 is there.

  In addition, a back top rotation drive motor 3212 that rotates the rear stage decoration portion 3216 and the middle stage decoration portion 3218 of the back top movable decorative body 3210 in the back top effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 as various drive motors included in the various effect units. Back up raising and lowering drive motor 3251, which raises and lowers the back up movable decorative body 3210 by rotating the back up raising and lowering arm in the back up rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 and raising and lowering the back up moving arm 3130 There is.

  In addition, as various drive motors included in various rendering units, there is a back left upper rotational driving motor 3313 that rotates the front stage decoration portion 3312 of the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000; Back lower left rotary drive motor 3323 for rotating front step decoration 3332 of back lower left movable decorative body 3320 in left rendering unit 3300, and back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body in back left rendering unit 3300 of back unit 3000 A back left moving drive motor 3332 for moving 3320, and a back left crossing driving motor 3351 which rotates the back left traversing arm in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 to traverse the back left moving arm 3330 is there.

  In addition, as various drive motors provided in various rendering units, as shown in FIG. 187, a back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 that rotates the front stage decoration portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. The back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 for rotating the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 and the back upper right movable in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 The back right movement drive motor 3432 for moving the decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 and the back right movement arm in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are turned to traverse the back right movement arm 3430 There is a back right traverse drive motor 3451.

[7-3-1 c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
As described above, detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby positions (original positions), combined positions) provided in various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are panel driven as described above. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510 a through the substrate 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510 a in the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  As various detection sensors for detecting the position (standby position (original position), combined position) provided in various rendering units, as shown in FIG. 186, the movable decoration under the back of the rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 Optical back-to-back rotation detection sensor 3120 for detecting the standby position (original position) of rear-end decorative portion 3116 and middle-end decorative portion 3118 of 3110 An optical unshown back-to-back standby position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a standby position (original position) where the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the lowermost position by moving the back-to-back moving arm The back down movable arm is turned by rotating the back down lift arm in the back down rendering unit 3100 to move the back down moving arm 3130 up and down. And back under the moving position detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the body 3110 to the most upward, there is.

  In addition, the standby position (original position), the first combining position, and the second combining position of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 described above are detection signals from the back-back standby position detection sensor and the back-upper upper moving position detection sensor. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on this.

  As the various detection sensors for detecting the position (standby position (original position), combined position) provided in various rendering units, the rear decoration portion 3216 of the back movable decorative body 3210 in the back rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 An optical back-up rotation detection sensor 3220 for detecting a standby position (original position) with the middle decorative portion 3218 and a back up-lifting arm in the back up rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are pivoted to move the back down moving arm 3130 An optical back upper standby position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a standby position (original position) in which the back up movable decorative body 3210 is moved upward by moving the back up moving arm 3230 up and down, and the back of the back unit 3000 Up and down movement arm 3130 is turned up and back up movement arm 3230 is turned by rotating the back up and down raising and lowering arm in the upper effect unit 3200 And back vertical movement position detection sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the back on a movable decorative body 3210 to the most downward by, there is.

  In addition, the standby position (original position), the first combining position, and the second combining position of the back-up movable decorative body 3210 described above are based on detection signals from the back-up waiting position detection sensor and the back up-down movement position detection sensor. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 as various detection sensors for detecting the position (standby position (original position), combined position) provided in the various rendering units. The magnetic back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab mounted on the back left top first stage decorative substrate 3311 a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the back, and the back left bottom movable in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 The magnetic back left lower pole change detection circuit 3321 ab mounted on the back left bottom front decoration plate 3321 a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front decoration 3332 of the decoration 3320 and the back unit 3000 Light for detecting an initial state in which the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left rendering unit 3300 is located at the left moving end Optical left back movement not shown which detects a state where the back left initial state detection sensor (not shown) of the formula and the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 are positioned to the right moving end State that the base side (left side) of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 extends vertically and the front end is facing right and the base of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 Optical (not shown) back left upper and lower initial state detection sensor and back unit 3000 for detecting a state in which the side (left side) extends vertically and the tip is facing right (see VR creation drawing V135 (a)) A state in which the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 approaches the center in the vertical direction of the movable arm base 3331 and the back lower left movable And back left vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type upper side of Kazaritai 3320 detects a state close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3331, there is.

  The standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is based on a detection signal from the magnetic back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311 ab mounted on the back upper left front end decorative substrate 3311 a. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3322 of the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 is magnetic back left lower magnetic pole change detection mounted on the rear lower left front stage decorative substrate 3321a It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on the detection signal from the circuit 3321 ab.

  Further, the initial state, first state, and second state of the back left moving arm 3330 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on detection signals from the back left initial state detection sensor and the back left movement state detection sensor. The initial state, first state, and second state of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 described above are from the back left upper and lower initial state detecting sensor and the back left upper and lower approaching state detecting sensor Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on the detection signal of Thereby, the standby position (original position), the first combining position, and the second combining position of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 described above are back left initial state detection It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on detection signals from the sensor, the back left movement state detection sensor, the back left upper and lower initial state detection sensor, and the back left upper and lower approach state detection sensor.

  As various detection sensors for detecting positions (standby positions (original positions), combined positions) provided in various rendering units, as shown in FIG. 187, the back upper right movable decorative body in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 A magnetic back right upper pole change detection circuit 3411 ab mounted on the back right upper end decoration substrate 3411 a for detecting a standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front end decoration 3412 and a back right of the back unit 3000 A magnetic back right lower magnetic pole mounted on the back lower right front step decorative substrate 3421a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the rendering unit 3400 The change detection circuit 3421 ab and the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are positioned at the right moving end. Optical type not-shown back right initial state detection sensor for detecting the initial state, and optical type for detecting a state where the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is positioned to the left moving end The base (right side) of the back right moving state detection sensor (not shown) and the back right upper movable decoration 3410 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 extend vertically and the tip is facing left, and the back right Optical type not-shown back right upper and lower initial state detection sensor for detecting a state where the base side (right side) of the lower movable decorative body 3420 extends vertically and the front end is facing left, and the back right rendering unit of the back unit 3000 A state in which the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in 3400 approaches the vertical center of the movable arm base 3431 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 And back right vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the state in which the lateral sides close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3431, there is.

  The standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 is based on the detection signal from the magnetic rear upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411 ab mounted on the rear upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411 a. The standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a and is mounted on the back lower right front end decorative board 3421 a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on the detection signal from the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421 ab.

  Further, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back right moving arm 3430 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on detection signals from the back right initial state detection sensor and the back right movement state detection sensor. The first state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 described above are the back right upper and lower initial state detection sensor, and the back right upper and lower approach state detection sensor Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on the detection signal from Thereby, the standby position (original position), the first combining position, and the second combining position of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 described above are in the back right initial state It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510 a based on detection signals from the detection sensor, the back right movement state detection sensor, the back right upper and lower initial state detection sensor, and the back right upper and lower approach state detection sensor.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame earth substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (earth ground). Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 shows the structure of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 188 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 188 (b) is the mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 188 (d) is a table showing a description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the frame ground board 559 has its mounting surface facing downward (that is, in a state where the connector receptacles of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 face downward). It is accommodated and attached to the inside of board | substrate accommodating part 551aa formed in the top-plate part 551a of the delivery base 551 shown to FIG. 102 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line from the right to the left along the upper side, and the center of the left side A lower ground terminal ECN3 is disposed. To briefly describe the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 188 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided on the interface substrate 635 in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal and the interface ground wire are electrically connected via the ground terminal ECN2. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected via the ground connection terminal at the island facility of the game hall and the island equipment ground wire as an island facility ground. The earth terminal ECN3 is illustrated as a ball tank ground in the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102 (b) (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodation portion 551aa). The ball tank ground wire is attached with one end by a metal screw that does not The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected, and the earth terminal ECN 4 is a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 as the body frame metal ground. (Specifically, one end of the main frame metal ground wire is attached to the upper side of the main frame reinforcement frame 530 by a metal screw not shown, and the other end of the main frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal provided on the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 113 as a power supply ground via the power supply ground wire.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (c), the circuit of the frame earth substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground electrically connected to one end of a resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is a power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In the present embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  Electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN1 as interface ground is led to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and removed as a ball tank earth The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN3 is led to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed through the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and the earth terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal earth The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground is removed to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and the electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN5 as the power earth is , Via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, the island equipment earth wire It is guided to the earth ground of the island capital of the gaming hall is adapted to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a dispensing unit 560, and the like are attached to the dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished at the island facility of the game hall, rub against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to release electromagnetic wave noise. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 capable of retaining the game ball B and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the periphery thereof.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to collect, and as a result of the static electricity easily accumulating, the ball tank 552 and the payout are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground, and a main frame metal, as opposed to the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the unit 560. Electromagnetic wave noise is gradually flowed and attenuated through the resistors ER1 and ER2 as the earth terminal ECN4 as the ground to suppress instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth It can be led to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the earth wire That. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated is from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground of a frame ground. By guiding to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground are strongly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise as described above. As it corresponds to (the surroundings), a large-sized ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is, as described above, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 into the game hall A large-sized earth terminal is adopted because it leads to the earth ground of the island equipment and removes it. Ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting this large-sized ground terminal are square with a cross-sectional shape of one side of 1.14 mm, rated current: 7A (when using AC · DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 188 (a) (earth terminals ECN2 to When the housing corresponding to ECN 4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 and the current is smaller. For the earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small earth terminals are adopted. Earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small ground terminal are square with a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on each side, rated current: 3 A (when using AC · DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and its height is 7 mm as shown in FIG. 188 (a) (earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5 The mounting height is 9.8 mm when the corresponding housing is inserted).

  In the present embodiment, respective ground wires (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic wave noise is large compared to the respective ground wires (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the respective ground wires (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire and the body frame ground wire is thicker than the thickness of each of the ground wires (interface ground wire and power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In the present embodiment, 1.6 mm is adopted as the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 as shown in FIG. 188 (a).

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places can be collected on the frame earth substrate 559 temporarily and then guided from the frame earth substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed, the frame The ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination function.

  In addition, it is configured so that electromagnetic noises generated at various places can be collected on the frame ground substrate 559 temporarily and led from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed around the power supply substrate 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 to temporarily collect electromagnetic noises on the power As compared with the configuration in which the lead is removed to the earth ground, the wiring of the earth wire (wiring) is extremely easy.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodation portion 551aa of the dispensing base 551 in a state where they are close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 Terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from the left to the right when viewed from the rear side from the dispensing base unit 550)) And electrically connecting the hall computer provided in the game hall with a wire, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground in the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility in the game hall , Electrically connected with the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of work Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  Further, since the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodation portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game, such as the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game) Peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the peripheral control board, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like). It is possible to eliminate the adverse effect on electronic parts (including connectors) provided in

  Also, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the body tank 4 is in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground in the frame ground board 559, respectively. Reduce the length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main frame metal ground wire) to be connected electrically by guiding the electromagnetic wave noise from the frame ground board 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall be able to.

  Also, by arranging the frame ground board 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the ball tank 552 where static electricity is easily accumulated and the frame ground board 559 which exerts a diselectrifying action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main frame metal ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 which exerts the charge removing function, and the power source An interface electrically connecting a length of a power supply ground wire (wiring) electrically connecting the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 which exerts a static elimination function, and an interface electrically connecting the interface substrate 635 and a frame ground substrate 559 It can be configured to be shortest as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  Also, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is easily accumulated, the body tank 4 is in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are used for the metal frame main frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500. Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, and the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 Lead to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the earth wire and remove it It is possible.

Incidentally, conventionally, in order to easily supply 24 V AC power of the CR unit, each ground is once concentrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main frame, and connected to the earth ground of the island facility via the power supply board. Has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply substrate is generally heavy, it is often disposed below in the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to collect the ground on the power supply substrate, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the ball device on the upper side of the gaming machine to the lower power supply substrate. By routing the earth wire in this manner, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing along the way and have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs in the power supply board, the earth may be affected, or the current may flow to the ground line, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the ground taking place of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, etc., it may be complicated because it is necessary to extend and connect the earth wires collected by the power supply board from the lower side to the upper side again.
[8-1. Conductor floated to the earth]
Next, a member provided on the game board as a treatment of a conductor floating on the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a schematic view of the handling of the conductor floating on the ground provided in various effect units provided on the game board.

  In the vicinity of the game board 5, as described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5, and the payout unit 560 is disposed to the side of the game board 5. The game balls rub against each other in the traveling ball path, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball. The pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment which is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

  On the game board 5, various effect units are provided in the back unit 3000. In these various rendering units, conductive plating applied to structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including housings of electric parts) and decorative structures And a plurality of conductors such as a structure (including a decorative structure) molded by a conductive resin. In addition, the game board 5 is provided with various substrates, and these various substrates and various effect units are arranged close to each other. In addition, these conductors affect the electric circuit in the case of electrostatic discharge depending on the size of their surface area. In the case where the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of charge storage is small and the influence of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit can be ignored, and it is not necessary to remove the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, if the surface area of the conductor is large, the amount of accumulated charge is large and the influence on the electric circuit by electrostatic discharge can not be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove the electromagnetic wave noise by electrostatic discharge. .

  When these conductors float above the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment very susceptible to the influence of the above-mentioned electromagnetic wave noise, and therefore, electrostatic induction occurs in the conductor under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise. Then, when electrostatic discharge is caused from the conductor floating on the ground, various substrates provided on the game board 5 may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors of various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, it affects various boards provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. We adopted a configuration that does not float on the ground for those that may or may be damaged.

[8-1-1. Treatment of conductor for back-down production unit and back-up production unit]
The lower back effect unit 3100 (upper back effect unit 3200) will be described. As described above, the lower back movement arm 3130 (upper back movement arm 3230) is illustrated to cover the back side in order to enhance its rigidity. A metal reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm is provided, and one of both ends of the reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm, which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower raising and lowering driving motor 3151, is predetermined in the vertical direction. It is attached to the metal back slide arm 3151 ns (slide back slide arm slide rail 3251 ns) made of metal that can slide and move by the distance dimension, and the other not shown in the vicinity of the back lift driving motor 3151 is not shown Slide along the metal cylindrical rod (slide the surface of the metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod Reluctant moving) back under the moving arm sliding unit (not shown) (which may be molded of a conductive resin, a non-conductive resin may be molded.) It is attached.

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the under-back effect unit 3100 (up-back effect unit 3200), at least when electrostatically discharged, it affects various substrates provided on the game board 5 and malfunctions. It is selected as a target that does not float with respect to the ground, but that the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared to the surface area determined in advance as the one having a fear or the possibility of damage. It is in a state where it is in contact, fixed and conductive. For example, attach a metal back lower moving arm reinforcing plate and a metal back lower moving arm slide rail 3151 ns (a metal back lower moving arm reinforcing plate and a back upper moving arm slide rail 3251 ns) They are structurally brought into contact to establish an electrically connected state.

  The lower back moving arm 3130 (upper back moving arm 3230) is disposed in the vicinity of the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 (back up raising / lowering drive motor 3251) as shown in FIG. Metal case of metal back slide arm 3151 ns (slide rail 3251 ns for back up movement arm) and metal of back up lift drive motor 3151 (back up lift drive motor 3251) Mounting hole 3151n (3252n) of the pair of mounting holes 3151n, 3151f (3251n, 3251f) provided in the housing made in the one closer to the slide rail 3151ns for the lower back movement arm And the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc for the lower back effect unit (reverse upper effect unit And the mounting hole 3151f (3251f) and the panel which are electrically connected via the first conductor electric potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251nc) and remote from the back bottom moving arm slide rail 3151ns (back up moving arm slide rail 3251ns) The drive substrate 1720 is electrically connected via the back-side effect unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151 fc (the back-side effect unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3251 fc).

  Wiring terminals are crimped on both ends of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc for the back-side effect unit (first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251nc for the back-side effect unit), and the wiring terminal at one end is moved under the back The arm slide rail 3151 ns (back up moving arm slide rail 3251 ns) is screwed and fixed to a metal casing, and the other end of the wiring terminal is the back up and down drive motor 3151 (back up and down drive motor It is screwed and fixed to the attachment hole 3151 n (3251 n) provided in the metal casing of 3251). At this time, the metal casing of the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 (back up raising / lowering drive motor 3251) forming the mounting hole 3151 n (3251 n) is fixed to the lower back effect unit 3100 (back up effect unit 3200).

  The back side rendering unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc (the back upper rendering unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc) has a terminal for wiring crimped to one end and a connector provided at the other end, the one end The wiring terminals are screwed and fixed to the mounting holes 3151f (3251f) provided in the metal casing of the back-bottom lift drive motor 3151 (back-up lift drive motor 3251), and the connector at the other end is a panel It is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector in drive substrate 1720. At this time, the metal housing of the lower lifting drive motor 3151 (back up lifting drive motor 3251) forming the mounting hole 3151 f (3251 f) is fixed to the back down rendering unit 3100 (back up rendering unit 3200). When the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the lower back rendering unit (second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc for the upper back rendering unit) is electrically connected to the panel drive substrate 1720, the resistance Rs0 (resistance It is grounded to ground (GND) via Rs1). The ground (GND) line of the panel drive substrate 1720 is a ground of various substrates such as a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, various relay substrates and various decorative substrates. It is electrically connected to the (GND) line.

  A plurality of electric wires (harnesses) for driving the lower elevation drive motor 3151 (back and upper elevation drive motor 3251) is provided with a connector, and the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing line 3151 fc for the lower reverse effect unit A connector of two-conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251 fc is inserted into a corresponding connector in panel drive substrate 1720 different from the connector into which the connector is inserted.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the reverse-back effect unit 3100 (back-up effect unit 3200), at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. For example, when the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared with the surface area of a predetermined one as having or may be damaged, each is structurally brought into contact, fixed, and conducted, for example, metal Mounting the reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm and the slide rail 3151ns for the back lower moving arm made of metal (the reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm for metal and the slide rail 3251ns for the upper back moving arm) These conductors are electrically connected to each other, and these conductors are connected to the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc for the lower back rendering unit and the lower back rising. The metal casing of the drive motor 3151, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the lower back effect unit, and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720 are grounded to the ground (GND) (these conductors are The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251nc for the back-side effect unit, the metal casing of the back-up lifting drive motor 3251, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing line 3251fc for the back-side effect unit, and the resistance Rs1 of the panel drive board 1720 Through to ground (GND)).

  As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the underside rendering unit 3100 (backside rendering unit 3200), at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. Since these conductors are constructed so as not to float from the ground while the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared with the surface area of a single conductor which is considered to be damaged or possibly damaged, temporarily, Even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors, the intruded electromagnetic wave noise can be safely led to the circuit ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) which becomes the circuit ground through the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. It can be removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction or damage of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors, the electric circuit portion on various substrates provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure, etc. Can be removed safely, so that the pachinko machine 1 can continue its normal operation, as well as the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the generation state of the positive variation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

[8-1-2. Treatment to the conductor of the back left rendering unit and the back right rendering unit]
Of the back left rendering unit 3300 (back right rendering unit 3400), the moving arm base 3331 of the back left rendering unit 3300 (moving arm base 3431 of the back right rendering unit 3400) A metal back left that is disposed in the vicinity of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) included in the traverse mechanism 3350 (back right traverse mechanism 3450) and is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction It is attached to the slide rail 3351 ns for the movable arm (slide rail 3451 ns for the back right movement arm), and the other not disposed near the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (the back right traverse drive motor 3451) is a metal not shown. Slide along the cylindrical rod (surface of metal cylindrical rod, cylindrical rod Slider for back left moving arm (not shown) which moves while sliding along the longitudinal direction (may be molded of conductive resin or may be molded of nonconductive resin). It is attached.

  In the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 (back right rendering unit 3400), at least electrostatic discharge causes various substrates provided on the game board 5 to malfunction. A target that does not float on the ground is selected as a target that has a surface area larger than a predetermined surface area as a substance having a fear or a possibility of damage. For example, slide rail 3351 ns for metal back left moving arm (slide rail 3451 ns for back right moving arm).

  The movable arm base 3331 of the back left rendering unit 3300 (the moving arm base 3431 of the back right rendering unit 3400) is in the vicinity of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) as shown in FIG. And a metal housing of slide rail 3351 ns (back slide arm for moving slide arm 3451 ns) made of metal and slideable back and forth by a predetermined distance dimension in the left and right direction, and back left traverse drive motor 3351 (Slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm, of the pair of mounting holes 3351 n, 3351 f (3451 n, 3451 f) provided in the metal housing of the back right traversing drive motor 3451) (slide rail 3451 ns for the back right moving arm) Back mounting unit 3351n (3452n), which is closer to the While electrically connected via first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc (back right rendering unit first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451 nc), slide rail for back left moving arm 3351 ns (slide rail for back right moving arm) Backside left production unit second conductor potential fluctuation prevention for back left presentation unit 2351f (3451 ns) and relay board 3351a (relay board 3451a provided for back right presentation unit 3400) provided for back left presentation unit 3300 Electrical connection is made via a wire 3351 fc (a second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3451 fc for the back right rendering unit).

  Wiring terminals are crimped on both ends of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351nc for the back left rendering unit (first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451nc for the back right rendering unit), and the wiring terminal at one end is moved to the back left The arm slide rail 3351 ns (back right movement arm slide rail 3451 ns) is screwed and fixed to the metal housing, and the other end of the wiring terminal is the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor It is screwed and fixed to the attachment hole 3351 n (3451 n) provided in the metal casing of 3451). At this time, the metal housing of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) forming the mounting hole 3351 n (3451 n) is fixed to the back left rendering unit 3300 (back right rendering unit 3400).

  The back left rendering unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 fc (the back right rendering unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451 fc) has a wiring terminal crimped to one end and a connector provided at the other end, the one end The wiring terminal is screwed and fixed to the mounting hole 3351f (3451f) provided in the metal casing of the back left crossing drive motor 3351 (back right crossing drive motor 3451), and the other end connector is back It is inserted and fixed to the corresponding connector in relay board 3351a (relay board 3451a provided in back right rendering unit 3400) provided in left rendering unit 3300. At this time, the metal housing of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) forming the mounting hole 3351f (3451 f) is fixed to the back left rendering unit 3300 (back right rendering unit 3400). The back left rendering unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 fc (the back right rendering unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451 fc) is provided on the relay board 3351 a (the back right rendering unit 3400 provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 When electrically connected to the relay substrate 3451a), it is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2 (via the resistor Rs3). The ground (GND) lines of the relay board 3351a (relay board 3451a provided in the back right rendering unit 3400) provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 are the panel drive board 1720, the power supply board 630, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510. It is electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, various relay substrates, and various decoration substrates.

  A plurality of electrical wiring (harness) for driving the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) is provided with a connector, and a second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3351 fc for back left rendering unit (back right rendering unit The connector of the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451 fc) is inserted into the corresponding connector in the relay board 3351a (relay board 3451a provided in the back right rendering unit 3400) provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 different from the connector into which the connector is inserted . The relay substrate 3351a provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 (the relay substrate 3451a provided in the back right rendering unit 3400) is electrically connected to the panel drive substrate 1720 via the electrical wiring (harness). The electrical wiring (harness) is provided with connectors at both ends, and is inserted into and fixed to a corresponding connector in the panel drive board 1720.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 (back right rendering unit 3400), at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. The conductor of the slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm made of metal is, for example, the back left effect, while the surface area of the conductor alone is increased as compared with the surface area of the predetermined conductor as having a possibility of being damaged or being damaged. Unit first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc, metal casing of back left lateral driving motor 3351, back left rendering unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 fc, and relay board 3351 a provided in back left rendering unit 3300 Is grounded to the ground (GND) through the resistor Rs2 of (The metal of the slide rail 3451ns for the back right moving arm made of metal is a metal case for the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451 nc for the back right rendering unit, the back right traversing drive motor 3451, the second for the back right rendering unit It is grounded to the ground (GND) through the conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451 fc and the resistor Rs3 of the relay substrate 3451 a provided in the back right rendering unit 3400).

  Thereby, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left rendering unit 3300 (back right rendering unit 3400), at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. Since these conductors are constructed so as not to float from the ground while the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared with the surface area of a single conductor which is considered to be damaged or possibly damaged, temporarily, Even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding is transmitted through resistance Rs2 of relay board 3351a provided in back left rendering unit 3300 (resistance of relay board 3451 a provided in back right rendering unit 3400 Lead to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various boards) which becomes the circuit ground It can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction or damage of various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors, the electric circuit portion on various substrates provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure, etc. Can be removed safely, so that the pachinko machine 1 can continue its normal operation, as well as the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the generation state of the positive variation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

  In addition, as described above, the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 is temporarily collected on the frame earth substrate 559 and led from the frame earth substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. The frame ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination function. That is, a path for guiding electromagnetic noise generated at various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removing it safely is formed. On the other hand, among the plurality of conductors of various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various boards provided in the game board 5 and cause malfunction. Lead to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to be a circuit ground so that it does not float on the ground when there is a problem or something that might be damaged. it can. That is, among the plurality of conductors of the various effect units in the game board 5, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various boards provided in the game board 5 and may cause malfunction or damage. A path is formed which can safely remove electromagnetic noise by guiding it to a circuit ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) which becomes a circuit ground. In this way, independent paths for safely removing electromagnetic wave noise are formed in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, respectively, and they are not influenced mutually. Therefore, also in this point, it is possible to prevent a malfunction or damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  The conductor, as described above, affects the electric circuit in the case of electrostatic discharge depending on the size of the surface area. In addition, the conductor changes the ease of electrostatic discharge depending on the distance from the electrical circuit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, taking into consideration the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance dimension between the conductor and the electric circuit, the electromagnetic wave noise of the plurality of conductors is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety The conductor that needs to be removed is individually selected (it is individually distinguished whether the conductor is dropped to the earth ground) and the circuit ground (circuit ground (GND The conductor which needs to be led to) and removed safely is selected individually (it distinguishes individually whether it is the conductor dropped to the circuit earth).

[9. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply substrate 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 189 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate, FIG. 190 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply substrate, FIG. Fig. 193 shows silk printing of electronic parts printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate (part 2), and Fig. 194 shows discontinued electronic parts. It is a perspective view explaining an outline of. Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate will be described, and subsequently, a method of identifying electronic components of the same shape, confirmation of fuse blowout, capacity of capacitors, and measures for discontinuing production of electronic components will be described.

  As described above, there is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V is stepped down to the power supply voltage of the gaming machine AC 24 V. When the plug of the power cord (not shown) is inserted into the AC 24 V power outlet which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island facility of the game hall, AC 24 V is supplied to the power supply substrate 630. The power supply substrate 630 creates various power supplies (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from AC 24 V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them from the power substrate 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1 doing.

9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 189, the circuit of the power supply substrate 630 is a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power supply cord (not shown). When AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power supply line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube of 5 mm in diameter and 20 mm in length) (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630 a via the type B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act). Specifically, the line 24 of AC 24 V (hereinafter referred to as “AC 24 V 1” (may be described as “L side”) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630 a, and the power switch An AC 24 V line 2 (hereinafter referred to as “AC 24 V 2” (sometimes referred to as “N side”)) is input to the input side terminal 1 of 630 a. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise reduction circuit 630b.

  When a staff member of a game hall or the like turns on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V1 goes to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise reduction circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply start, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 is supplied to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise reduction circuit 630b. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by the ON operation of the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member of a game hall or the like turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected from each other, and the AC 24V1 becomes to the various circuits of the power supply board 630. While the supply is cut off, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of 24V AC to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 is cut off. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In the state where the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned ON, the attendant of the game hall clerk etc. turns ON the breaker of the game hall to set up the pachinko machine in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, and by turning off the breaker of the game hall, the power shutoff of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be performed all at once.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise reduction circuit 630b includes a common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise reduction, a normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, which is a circuit for normal mode noise reduction, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and their varistor voltages are the same. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that could not be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via power switch 630a, the other end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor C2, and the other end of capacitor C2 is AC24V2 via power switch 630a It is electrically connected. Further, one end of varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC 24 V1 through power switch 630a, the other end of varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of varistor ZNR2, and the other end of varistor ZNR2 is It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, the one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 188 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 is for removing normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that can not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 through the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 through the power switch 630a.

  AC 24 V 1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630 a is input to the choke coil L 1 through the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC and the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC and is input to the power supply line connector DCN 2 as AC 24 VA, AC 24 V 2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630 a is input to the choke coil L 1 through the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC and the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC and is input to the power supply line connector DCN 2 as AC 24 V . The choke coil L1 is a component for preventing common mode noise of 24 V AC and 24 V AC, and prevents noise interference. The power supply line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power supply line for the interface board not shown, an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and a power supply line for the CR unit not shown. The unit is electrically connected to a non-CR unit and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the not-shown CR unit.

  AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630 c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a zener diode.

  The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L 1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D 2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q 2 via the peripheral circuit 630 ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2 And 2 respectively. The package types of the FET Q1, FET Q2, Schottky barrier diode D1 and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 190). ing. The heat dissipating fins HS1 are soldered to and fixed to the power supply substrate 630 and are thereby grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630.

  As described above, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D 5 and D 6 in addition to the rectifier circuit 630 c, and cathode terminals of the diodes D 5 and D 6. Are respectively output to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630 d includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q 3 and Q 4 and a peripheral circuit 630 da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly output without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Are input to The gate terminals of the power factor improvement circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit are input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is switched by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of harmonics and improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 Each is output from. The package types of FETs Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of FETs Q1 and Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above) It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 190). The heat dissipating fins HS2 are connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply substrate 630.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminal of each of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor receives a direct current whose power factor is improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d. Smoothing circuit 630e smoothes (smoothens) the pulse current from direct current whose power factor is improved by power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, as well as fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment). In form, it is the same shape as fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2, diameter: 5mm, length: through transparent glass tube (support terminals of both ends are metal made, B class melting specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act) Then, the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 as direct current + 35V. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE 3 is a +35 V power supply line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generation circuit 630f generates DC +12 V and DC +5 V from the input DC. The power supply generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC +12 V from the +12 V terminal and supplies it from the power supply substrate 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated DC +5 V from the +5 V terminal to output pachinko machine from the power substrate 630 1 Supply to each substrate inside. The power supply line supplied from the +12 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f becomes the +12 V power supply line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is +5 V of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1 It becomes a power supply line.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f controls switching of the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor correction circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by performing control to output a gate signal for power factor correction from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power supply generation circuit 630 f, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the AC-DET terminal through the diodes D 5 and D 6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether to output a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than +35 V DC is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generation circuit 630 f has a value at which the magnitude of the power supply voltage is predetermined based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L 1 input to the AC-DET terminal (threshold: present embodiment) Then, when the voltage reaches approximately 50 V), it is possible to output the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power supply generation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit 630g to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By rapidly flowing toward the CGND terminal of the formation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted.

  The GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded is the ground (GND) line of each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 have one end electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the.

  In the power supply destruction circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to drain to source terminals As a large current flows toward it (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 conduct is maintained. Be done. The FET Q5 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above), but the FET Q1 is Unlike Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10, they are disposed at positions not in contact with the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is disposed between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and is not fixed at all to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 (see FIGS. 190 and 191). This is intended to absorb and cool the heat through the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not broken by heat generation. In contrast to this, FET Q5 is short-circuited by heat generation when FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 become an overcurrent) It is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  That is, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet for the gaming machine of the island equipment of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet for the commercial power source voltage higher than AC 24V for the gaming machine. When inserted, power supply generation circuit 630 f sets the value of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value based on the power supply voltage of which common mode noise is reduced by choke coil L 1 input to the AC-DET terminal. In this embodiment, when the voltage reaches approximately 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to be self-destructed. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the ON operation is performed, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied with the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short mode in the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By rapidly flowing toward the CGND terminal, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, only the power supply substrate 630 is broken, and the plug of the power cord is commercial Power supply voltage A Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. When it is inserted and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed, replace the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 with ones that are not fused, and connect the plug of the power cord to AC24V that is the power supply voltage of the gaming machine island facility Even if it is plugged into the power supply outlet, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already broken and the short mode is maintained, so the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the rectifier circuit 630c , And in the power destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode, a large current flows in the replaced fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will melt again. In other words, if you do not replace the power supply substrate 630 where the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed with a normal power supply substrate 630 where the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not broken, the plug of the power cord is the island facility of the game hall Even if it is plugged into the AC 24V power supply outlet, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, it is impossible to start playing a game.

[9-1-7. Backup power circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is a capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the positive (+) terminal. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main power source serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 to the positive (+) terminal of capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310a provided on main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. A circuit is formed to have a wiring pattern for taking out VBB and a payment VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the payout control substrate 633 shown in FIG. There is.

  That is, the negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). Main VBB serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 to the positive (+) terminal of capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310a provided on main control substrate 1310 and payout control The circuit is divided into two systems: a payment VBB serving as a backup power supply line to a payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the substrate 633.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or a power failure or momentary interruption occurs to restore the power, the power supply line (that is, +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is a Schottky barrier diode D20. The voltage is supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the capacitor to charge the capacitor BC0, and is also supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM Then, the information is supplied to the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB and holds various information stored in the payout control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are shut off at the same time by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. If this happens, +5 V DC from the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. While this discharge is prevented from being supplied to the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f by the Schottky barrier diode D20, the discharge is provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. And holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  That is, the pachinko machine 1 is shut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are shut off at the same time by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs. Then, even if DC +5 V by the power supply line (that is, +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0, the main control board 1310 serves as the main VBB by discharging the capacitor BC0 A variety of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored, and stored as a payout VBB in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Information is stored.

9-2. Method of identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method of identifying an electronic component having the same shape and mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky of the power factor improvement circuit 630d. The package types in the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g are the same type (TO-220F), and the shapes of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are also the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal)).

  Although FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that can not be destroyed, and FET Q5 is the only electronic component that can be destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, electrons which are the only one of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are broken. In order to facilitate identification of the components, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 is adopted which has features different from those of the other.

  Specifically, for FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components not to be destroyed, a white outline is shown as shown in FIG. 192 (a). Lines and thick white lines indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged, as silk printing, for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, for silk printing TSL K 1 to 4 and FETs Q1, Q 2, Q 3 and Q 4 The TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. White thick lines are fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 190, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. HS2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so as to be in an arrangement in which the silk printing of the white outline and the white thick line part of the silk printing TSLK1 to 8 are arranged.

  On the other hand, for FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), white outlines and white hatched lines arranged at equal intervals within the outlines. Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, and ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 have the same shape, silk printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 Of the TSLKs 1 to 9, by visually observing the white hatched ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern, an electronic component of the different types of electronic components having the same shape is focused on compared with other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component to be. Thus, it is possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only one to be destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs FETQ 5 to a clerk in the game hall by telephone, a silk-printed TSLK 9 having a white hatched ad 1 represented as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for a person in charge at the game hall, the person in charge at the game hall can grasp the position of the FET Q 5 properly, so it is easy to communicate between the person in charge at the service center and the person in charge at the game hall. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs FETQ 5 by telephone to the clerk of the game hall or the like, the clerk of the game hall or the like is as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. Of the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, the target FET Q5 can be identified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the FET Q5 to be noted can be identified from the other electronic components FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, as described above, are completely different electronic parts, while the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are identical. Although it is a kind of electronic component, AC100V is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V which is a power supply voltage for game machines, because the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power supply outlet which is a power supply voltage for game machines in the game hall If it is accidentally inserted into the power supply outlet, as described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed to maintain the short mode, and a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2 to cause one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Will melt. That is, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed after the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electronic component having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the electronic component to be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 can be easily identified. The adopted silk printing has features different from other ones.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not broken even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage, is white. The silk-screened FSLK 1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk-screened outlines.

  On the other hand, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are accidentally destroyed as a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally plugged into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, with the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly coated in white. That is, the area ad2 solidly painted in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply substrate 630 with a support bracket (not shown) respectively, they are solidly painted in white in the region between the inner area of the white outline and the periphery of the support bracket. The area ad2 can be viewed visually, and the area ad2 which is the inside area of the white outline and which is transparent to the transparent glass tube except the ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and which is solidly coated in white ad2 is transparent It is possible to be reliably observed through a transparent glass tube.

  Thus, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLKs 1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 By visually observing the solidly coated area ad2, among electronic components of the same type having the same shape, it is possible to identify which electronic component is an electronic component to be watched in comparison with other electronic components It has become. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which electronic component of the same type of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component showing a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be identified.

  In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall clerk or the like to use the fuse FUSE 1 or FUSE 2, the area painted solid white is displayed as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search silk printing FSLK 2 and 3 having ad 2, it is possible for a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like to accurately grasp the positions of fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2. It becomes easy to communicate with the clerks and other staff.

  Thus, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1 instructs Hughes FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 by phone to the clerk of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall clerk is the person in charge of the service center Among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, it is possible to specify the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted, as instructed by the above. Therefore, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noticed among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

9-3. Confirmation of melting of fuse]
Next, confirmation of melting of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 of the same type and mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals of both ends are made of metal), and when melted, the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tube are disconnected and the transparent glass tube is disconnected Soot adheres to the inside of Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components capable of showing a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage. If the plug of the power cord is accidentally plugged into a 100 V AC power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 described above are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing on the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the fused fuse lines can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to the transparent glass tubes except for the fuse FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 except that the white solid area ad 2 is expressed as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the area ad2 solidly coated in white through a transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  As a result, a staff of a game hall clerk or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) operates the plug of the power cord for supplying the pachinko machine 1 with the power supply voltage. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply substrate 630 by plugging in the AC 100 V power outlet, which is not a commercial power supply voltage, accidentally, the fuse FUSE1, FUSE2 Among them, the fuse wire stored in one or both of the transparent glass tubes is broken, and the soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube, so a staff member such as a game clerk or a worker etc. Even if the plug is plugged into a power outlet, the power can not be turned on, so it may not be the initial failure. " Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green is employed as the resist of the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk-printed FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. The wiring pattern is not laid out at all in the area of the solid-painted green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid-painted green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3) Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of (1), no wiring pattern is formed at all in this area). This is a fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE 3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE 3 through the transparent glass tube The visibility of the state is improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be confirmed.

  Also, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, the fuse FUSE3 is transparent as in the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out even when all the wiring patterns are laid out. The visibility of the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE 3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube through the transparent glass tube Thus, it is possible to easily check the presence or absence of the disconnection of the fuse line.

  As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is provided via the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, in addition to the function as means for relaying various signals, the interface board 635 also has a function as means for supplying power to the CR unit (not shown). The interface substrate 635 is a fuse FUSE (in the present embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (the support terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B melting specified by the Electrical Appliances and Materials Safety Act) The silkscreen shown in FIG. 193 (a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply substrate 630 described above is printed on the mounting surface. A green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown). The wiring pattern is not laid out at all in the area of the solid glass coated with the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown (that is, the solid glass corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown) No wiring pattern is formed at all in this area because the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown and the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube. By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse line, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface substrate 635 can be configured to be provided on one of AC 24 VA and AC 24 V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN 2 of the power supply substrate 630, and configured to be provided on both of them. It can also be done.

  Also, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown, it is not shown as in the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out even if all the wiring patterns are laid out. The fuse FUSE transparent glass tube and the corresponding solid-painted green resist area are visually observed through the transparent glass tube to show the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the fuse FUSE transparent glass tube By improving the visibility, it is possible to easily check the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line.

9-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or a power failure or momentary interruption occurs to return the power to the capacitor BC0, the power supply line supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, +5 V power supply) The pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (a break in the game hall) while charging can be performed by supplying +5 V DC to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20. Power off of pachinko machines installed in the game hall at the same time by performing the OFF operation)), when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, the power supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power generation circuit 630 f Discharge in response to the fact that +5 V DC by the line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  The pachinko machine 1 is powered off due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0 (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are simultaneously shut off by turning off the breaker of the gaming hall), a power failure or the like. In the state where a momentary power failure occurs, various information stored in the main control internal RAM is held by supplying the backup power supply as the main VBB to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 At the same time, various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held by supplying the backup power as a payment VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 It is supposed to be.

  When the operation of the game hall is finished, the clerks of the game hall and the like turn off the breaker of the game hall to simultaneously shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Then, when starting the next sales (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state). The clerk of the game hall clerk etc. breaks the game hall By turning ON the power of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned on at the same time. At this time, if the capacity of capacitor BC0 is small, discharge of capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the business hall operation to the start of the next business, and thus the main control board 1310 is provided with the main control circuit. Various information of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 can not be held. As a result, when the salesperson or other clerk of the game hall turns on the breaker of the game hall at the start of sales, if the power on of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is simultaneously turned on, the RAM clear switch Regardless of whether the main control board is operated or not, the main control MPU included in the main control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in power-on processing and erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM completely Since all pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification to notify that they have been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines will be sounded in the game hall. In this case, in all the pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided on the payout control board determines a checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM in the power-on process, and the contents of the payout control built-in RAM are completely Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so as not to execute the RAM clear notification even when the sales of the gaming hall is ended and the next sales is started. Specifically, to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about 3 days (about 72 hours) after the end of the game hall business as the capacity of the capacitor BC0 While being able to supply and hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control portion 633a of the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB and built-in payout control A storage capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. The selection of the capacity is performed by the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633 aa provided in the payout control portion 633 a of the payout control substrate 633 and the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310 a included in the main control substrate 1310. Compared with the power consumption of the paid VBB supplied to the, it is also taken into consideration that it may be about 10 times larger. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310 a provided on the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633 aa provided in the payout control unit 633 a of the payout control board 633 Compared to the power consumption of

9-5. Discontinuation of manufacturing electronic parts]
Next, the measures for discontinuing production will be described. First, with regard to a board treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, a payout control board, etc. due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, lead type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface which is the front side. It is necessary to solder on the side that is the soldering surface. However, although lead type electronic components are important among manufacturers that manufacture game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines, other general electric machine manufacturers are able to reduce the size of the surface mount type ( The so-called SMD type is used. For this reason, the production number of lead type electronic components may be reduced and the production may be discontinued. Even if the lead type electronic components obtained from one electronic component manufacturer are discontinued and they are searched for substitutes, there is a high probability that other electronic component manufacturers will also be discontinued. Therefore, it becomes difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on the substrate to be treated as the main substrate in the end.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mount a lead-typed electronic component that can be configured as an electronic component of a lead type as an electronic component of a lead type on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 has positions corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb, which are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b, on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a. The land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD are formed, and the land patterns D20fa and D20fb for leads are formed at positions where the ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD are disposed, and the land patterns D20da for SMD , D20db and wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb for electrically connecting the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb are formed.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are arranged and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and cathode side D20cb, which are terminals of the Schottky barrier diode D20b of SMD type. The anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb are soldered to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db, and one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb are respectively soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by being covered with an epoxy resin to form an electronic component body D20h covering one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-typed electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. As shown in FIG. 194 (b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h. Further, although not shown, the manufacturing company name and the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  As described above, since SMD type electronic components can be configured as lead type electronic components, the number of lead type electronic components can be reduced, and even if it becomes difficult to obtain due to production discontinuation, It can respond using the electronic component of SMD type which an electric machine maker uses.

  Although the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described in the above-described embodiment, the present invention can also be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, or the like. Alternatively, the same SMD type electronic components may be arranged in a line in an array to form a lead-typed electronic component.

  Next, measures are taken against the commercial power supply voltage when the plug of the power cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally inserted into the commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V) power outlet Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 shows the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 195, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 189 (hereinafter referred to as “the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment”) are given the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and power is destroyed from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 through the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to flow a large current from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are excessive The FET Q5 is destroyed by becoming a current, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, CMC, and a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, the normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC 24 V 1 and AC 24 V 2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L 1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630 c as described above. The signal is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, when supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power supply cord (not shown), the fuse FUSE1 , And FUSE 2 are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630 a. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly coated in white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 mount the power supply substrate 630 It is printed on the surface. That is, the area ad2 solidly painted in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply substrate 630, as described above, support brackets (not shown) are respectively white, in the region between the inside area of the white outline and the periphery of the support brackets. The solid-painted area ad2 can be visually recognized, and the solid-white coated area corresponding to the transparent glass tube except the both ends of the fuse FUSE1 and FUSE2 is the inner area of the white outline. It is designed to be able to reliably see ad2 through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power supply cord not shown. Then, the L side (AC 24 V 1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630 a through the fuse FUSE 1, and the N side (AC 24 V 2) is directly input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630 a Be done. For fuse FUSE 1, as described above, silk-printed FSLK 2 is printed on the mounting surface of power supply substrate 630 as silk printing, with a white outline and an area ad 2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly coated in white. ing. That is, the area ad2 solidly painted in white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuse FUSE 1 are soldered to the power supply substrate 630 as described above, support brackets (not shown) are solidly coated in white in the area inside the white outline and around the support brackets. The area ad2 can be viewed visually, and the area ad2 which is the area inside the white outline and which is transparent to the transparent glass tube except for the ends of the fuse FUSE1 and is solidly coated in white is transparent It can be reliably viewed through a glass tube.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the fuse 24 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment omits the fuse 24 from the island facility of the game hall. To explain this briefly, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall has fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 both power cords (L side (AC 24 V1) and N side ( Although it had been input to AC24V2), no problem occurred even if one side (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted according to a test conducted by the applicant. Thereby, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, one side (N side (AC 24 V 2)) of AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is input side terminal 1 of power switch 630 a. The cost reduction is realized by inputting into as it is.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same one as the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment is employed. This will be briefly described because, with regard to the power switch 630a, it is necessary to reliably turn on / off both the L side and the N side of the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. Thus, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is the same as the power supply switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / connected simultaneously.

  Moreover, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to one of the micro gap type arresters AL1. The other end of the micro gap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. When a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters the AC 24 V from the facility in the game hall due to lightning strike, the micro gap type arrester AL1 surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing as a current to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a, or the high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a as the ground connection terminal DCN5. By flowing a surge current to the frame ground FG2, the surge voltage is limited to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a. In addition, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall, the micro gap type arrester AL1 causes the worker to pass, and the earth terminal ECN2 (island equipment earth) of the frame earth substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b). When you forgot to electrically connect with the ground connection terminal on the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, as a security, the electromagnetic noise is from the island facility of the game hall on the N side of AC24V (AC24V2 The noise immunity can be enhanced by leading to and removing.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, a choke coil In addition to L1, a surge absorber SA1 constituting a power supply destruction circuit 630g ', the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a are a common mode noise reduction circuit CMC, a normal mode noise reduction circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit 630 g 'and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ has a faster reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1 Silicon surge absorber can be mentioned, one end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24 V (AC 24 V 1) via power switch 630 a, and the other end is the N side of AC 24 V via power switch 630 a The circuit is electrically connected to AC 24 V 2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows to be broken and short circuited to be a short mode.

  Although a varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD or the like) is used here. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a sharp rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber is characterized by very quick response to a surge, very excellent control voltage characteristics, and very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an alternating current circuit, a bidirectional type may be used, and the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) may be selected to be 47 V, which is about twice the input voltage.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c are electrically connected to the second (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , And is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). Thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases when the temperature rises. As its characteristic, assuming that the vertical axis is the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis is the AC voltage, the value of the AC voltage increases as the value increases. It has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacity is reduced, and one which is not broken even if AC 100 V which is a commercial power supply voltage is applied is selected.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, and is input to the power supply generation circuit 630f and also to the relay drive circuit 630i. When a direct current from smoothing circuit 630e is input, relay drive circuit 630i creates an operating voltage (+24 V) capable of operating the coil of relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of relay RL1.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c is not supplied by the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive circuit The relay RL1 can not be turned ON (in other words, the relay RL1 remains OFF) because the coil of the relay RL1 is not operating because the power supply at +24 V from the 630i is insufficient. , Without passing through the relay RL1 while the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conductive state, they are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d through the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2. Ru. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c flows toward only the thermistor TH1, and when this direct current starts to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value Is high, and a weak current flows to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1, but when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly. Send a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on and the power from the relay drive circuit 630i switches power from the inoperative state of the coil of the relay RL1 (by power supply by +24 V from the relay drive circuit 630i), the relay RL1 is activated. To turn on the 2nd (COM) terminal and 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 by turning ON, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c is In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is divided between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts) and passed respectively, and input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Be done. Thereby, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectification circuit 630c is between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ) Reduces the current to the thermistor TH1 to lower the temperature of the thermistor TH1, and the resistance of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, and the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals of (ie, between the contacts) will increase.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified DC outputted from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is a thermistor When the current flows to TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases, and the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 becomes strong. In other words, the current flowing to the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the gaming machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall, and AC 100V power that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than 24V AC If it is accidentally inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 greatly exceeds the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, and a large current flows in the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 can be broken to be in the short mode.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned ON, a large current flows in the fuse FUSE1 through the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode state in the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 It will melt. In addition, since fuse FUSE1 is melted and cut in a state where surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow in surge absorber SA1, and the elements of surge absorber SA1 are scattered to cause surge absorber SA1 to It can be prevented from being broken in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply substrate 630 is destroyed, and each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply substrate 630 is destroyed even if the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage. Can be reliably prevented.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, an AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for supplying a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet that is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines on the island facilities of the game hall, and erroneously into the AC 100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC 24V that is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. In the state where the surge absorber SA1 which is inserted and which constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is broken, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with one which is not melted and the power cord plug is supplied to the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island facility of the game hall Even if it is plugged into a 24V AC power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 that constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows to FUSE1 and fuse FUSE1 So that the blown. That is, unless the power supply substrate 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply substrate 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed. Even if the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the AC 24 V power supply outlet which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island facility of the game hall, the game can not be started.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with power supply means capable of creating various power supplies necessary for the gaming apparatus based on an external power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine (e.g., JP-A-2014-008221) Gazette (Fig. 2) By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine directs a particular part of the power supply means to a staff member such as a salesperson in the game hall by telephone, There is a problem that it is difficult to identify a component to be noted among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with power supply means for creating various power supplies based on the power supply from the game island facility and supplying the substrates to the substrate has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014-083337 (paragraph [0038] )). The game island facility converts the commercial alternating current power supply (AC 100 V) into an AC power supply (AC 24 V) for gaming machines obtained by reducing the voltage. However, if the power cord for supplying the power from the island facility to the gaming machine is plugged into the power outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the power outlet of the AC power supply for the gaming machine, the commercial AC power will be from the AC power supply for the gaming machine Because of the high voltage, there is a possibility that the abnormal power supply is output from the power supply means and the various substrates in the gaming machine are destroyed.

[10. Circuit of main control board, circuit of payout control board]
Next, circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 196 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 197 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. 198 is a perspective view for explaining the outline of wiring to the board treated as the main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633, and wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

10-1. Power supply and input signal in main control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC +5 V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, and to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 as the main VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 196, the DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630 f (630 f ′) of the power supply substrate 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310 h. The main control filter circuit 1310 h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V DC from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply substrate 630, and its second terminal is grounded to ground (GND) DC +5 V from which the noise component is removed is output from the terminal. The direct current +5 V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected at one end to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0 so that the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) is removed first Being smoothed out.

  The direct current +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being connected in series, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a. It should be noted that, when a momentary interruption occurs and the power from the game hall is cut off at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is generated after the momentary interruption occurs. It is adapted to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded, and the direct current +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC4 connected to ground, and via the resistor MR0 It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the substrate 630. Thereby, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the power supply terminal VBB of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a detection from the general winning opening sensor 2401 A signal, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f, and the like are respectively input to the main control input circuit 1310 b via the panel relay board 1710, and the first start The detection signal from the port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b without the intervention of the panel relay board 1710.

  A detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input port PA is constituted by 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an idle terminal. The input terminal PA7 which is a vacant terminal is grounded to ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, there are four general winning openings 2001, and the general winning opening sensor 3001 detects the gaming balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, respectively. The detection signal from each is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the game ball B received in one general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is detected A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal PB5 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first starting opening sensor 3002 is configured of two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b. There is. While the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), the first starting opening sensor The detection signal from the slave side 3002 b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is inputted to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is input to the input terminal PB 0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Like the input port PA, the input port PB is configured by 8 bits. Although a power failure notification signal from power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is not shown, it is inputted to input terminal PB 1 of input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are respectively inputted to input port PB via main control input circuit 13 10 b. The input terminals that are respectively input to predetermined input terminals and become vacant terminals are grounded to ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

10-2. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board]
Among the power sources in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power source of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with DC +5 V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power source board 630 and to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 as a payment VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 197, the direct current +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630 f (630 f ′) of the power supply substrate 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633 h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to its first terminal, and its second terminal is grounded to ground (GND). DC +5 V from which the noise component is removed is output from the terminal. The direct current +5 V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected at one end to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC0 so that the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) is removed first Being smoothed out.

  The direct current +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being connected in series, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633 aa. It should be noted that when a momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633 aa, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is generated after the momentary interruption occurs. It is adapted to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310 a provided on the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC +5 V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633 aa provided in the payout control unit 633 a of the payout control board 633 Because the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control substrate 1310 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is larger than the power consumption of the main control substrate 1310, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control substrate 633 is actually implemented. In terms of form, a larger one is selected as compared to capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF). As a result, the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 are exposed to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control substrate 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control substrate 633 when an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall is cut off. The charged charges are respectively applied as direct current +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after occurrence of the momentary power failure.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 which is grounded. The DC +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing the ripple. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633 aa is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633 aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC4 grounded, It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the substrate 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0.

  Among input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the off-ball detection sensor 574, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a payout detection sensor 591 The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 The respective input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa are inputted through the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is constituted by 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7 which are vacant terminals are respectively grounded to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing.

  Although a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is inputted to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB via a payout control input circuit 633ab, although not shown, detection signals from other sensors are The input terminals that are respectively input to predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633 ab and become empty terminals are ground as empty terminal processing in the same manner as the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA. It is grounded to GND).

10-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
As a substrate handled as a main substrate, a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310, a payout control substrate 633, and the like can be given. If the wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate is tampered with illegally, the behavior of the substrate treated as the main substrate is anxious, the gaming balls are paid out in large quantities as prize balls, and the illegal gaming balls are fraudulent Since there is a possibility that an actor may obtain the wiring, it is necessary to detect the modified wiring at an early stage when the wiring to each of these substrates is tampered with.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as for the wiring to the power supply substrate 630, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), the connector SHG (not shown, but for the connector SHG, the name of the manufacturing company and the product number In the covering portion of each wiring connected to), the manufacturing company name and the product number of the wiring (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as fraudulent identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the first pin to the 22nd pin, and the manufacturer's name: XXX, as the fraudulent identifier SLAB in the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 in the first pin. And part number: ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer's name: XXX, and part number: ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) as the illegal identifier SLAB in the cover of the wiring SCBL2 Is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the power supply substrate 630 is at least the covering of the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the illegal identifier SLAB in the covering of the wiring. The illegal identifier SLAB has a length twice printed twice.

  Note that the cover of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, a color (for example, black) that is easy to visually recognize the color of the cover, and the manufacturing company name: XXX as the fraudulent identifier SLAB, and part number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portion of the wires SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to the other pins may be another color (for example, red or gray) different from white, or plural (Eg, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easily visible to the color of the covering (eg, single color or multiple colors) Manufacturing name: XXX and part number: ABC123 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier SLAB.

  For wiring to the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the connector MHG (not shown, but connected to the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog) for the connector MHG) is connected In the covering portion of each wiring, the manufacturing company name and the product number of the wiring (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as fraudulent identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the manufacturer's name: YYYYY, as the fraudulent identifier MLAB in the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 for the first pin. And part number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer's name: YYYYY, and part number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog as illegal identifier MLAB in the cover of wiring MCBL2 Number is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 should be at least the wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an illegal identifier MLAB in the wiring covering portion The fraudulent identifier MLAB has a length twice printed repeatedly in the covering portion of.

  The cover of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, has a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the cover, and as the fraudulent identifier MLAB, the manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and the product number: Covers of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30, which are repeatedly printed by DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) and connected to other pins, may be another color (for example, red or gray) different from white, Or a plurality of colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or colors readily visible to the color of the covering (eg, single color or plural colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier MLAB.

  As for the wiring to the delivery control substrate 633, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the connector HHG (not shown, but connected to the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog) for the connector HHG) is connected In the covering portion of each wiring, the manufacturing company name and the product number of the wiring (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as fraudulent identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 as a fraudulent identifier HLAB as a manufacturer identifier: YYYYY, And part number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer's name: YYYYY, and part number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog, as the illegal identifier HLAB in the cover of the wiring HCBL2 Number is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the delivery control substrate 633 is at least the wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the illegal identifier HLAB in the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier HLAB has a length twice printed repeatedly in the covering portion of.

  The covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, a color (for example, black) which is easy to visually recognize the color of the covering portion, and the manufacturing company name: YYYYY as the illegal identifier HLAB, and the product number: Covers of the wires HCBL2 to HCBL30, which are repeatedly printed by DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) and connected to other pins, may be another color (for example, red or gray) different from white, Or a plurality of colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or colors readily visible to the color of the covering (eg, single color or plural colors) The manufacturer's name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier HLAB.

  Thus, even if the wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate is tampered with, the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. As such, it can contribute to early detection of the modified wiring. In addition, as wiring to the board | substrate handled as a main board | substrate, even if it publishes in a catalog, wiring which is hard to obtain is preferable.

  In the present embodiment, two from the first start opening sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first start opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. The main control board via a connector (not shown) and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 provided in the game board 5 It is electrically connected directly to 1310. On the other hand, the game board 5 is provided on the first start port sensor slave side 3002 b constituting the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. A gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received at the big winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5, a general winning provided for the game board 5 Two from general sensors such as general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2001 and magnetic sensors 3003 for detecting magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5 The wiring of each is electrically connected and aggregated at panel relay substrate 1710 through each connector, and through one connector. , It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, the two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first start hole sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start hole sensor 2402 are erroneously sent to the main control board 1310. It may be connected electrically. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the color of the cover of the two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002, one is yellow and the other is pink, and the cover of each wire is a wire as an illegal identifier. The manufacturer's name and part number (number listed in the catalog) are printed repeatedly. As the color of the cover of the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black, and in the cover of each wire, the manufacturer name and part number of the wire as a fraudulent identifier (catalog The numbers listed in are printed repeatedly. This allows the manufacturer to distinguish between the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 at the manufacturer. In the gaming hall, a clerk such as a salesperson in the gaming hall identifies the two wires from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2402, respectively. It can be done.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the connector having the 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002 a of the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 Is selected, and a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. As a result, the two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first start hole sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start hole sensor 2402 correspond to itself. Since the physical structure can be made such that electrical connection can be made, at the manufacturer, the worker of the line is required to make the first starting opening sensor main side that constitutes the first starting opening sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. While being able to reliably prevent a work error (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) such as miswiring between two wires from the 3002a and two wires from the second starting opening sensor 2402, in the game hall, When a clerk in the game hall or the like checks the presence or absence of fraud, the first starting opening sensor 3002 in the case where the wiring is temporarily disconnected and restored due to maintenance. Work mistake (wire mistake called insertion mistake) of miswiring of two wires from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a which constitutes and two wires from the second starting hole sensor 2402 is surely prevented. be able to.

  In this embodiment, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and one general winning opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2400 are received. The same shape of connector is selected to electrically connect two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay substrate 1710. This is because, in the present embodiment, although there are four general winning openings 2001, regardless of which general winning opening 2001 the game ball enters the ball, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as a winning ball along with the entering ball. It is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game and the change of the effect. Further, even in the case of adopting a configuration in which the two wirings from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and 3001 are electrically connected directly to the main control substrate 1310 without interposing the panel relay substrate 1710, the general winning Connectors having the same shape are selected as connectors for electrically connecting the two wires from the mouth sensors 2401 and 3001 to the main control board 1310. This is, as described above, although there are four general winning openings 2001, regardless of which general winning opening 2001 the game ball enters the ball, the game ball of a predetermined number of balls along with entering the ball is paid out as a winning ball It is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game and the change of the effect.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there have been proposed game machines provided with various ball entrances in an advantageous area of a game board, and provided with sensors (detection means) for detecting passage of game balls in each ball entrance ( For example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4)). However, if the wiring from the detection means passing through the ball entrance similar to that of the application is erroneously connected electrically, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage is avoided but the detection signal of the ball entrance is erroneously received And affect the progress of the game. However, there is a problem that, in particular, there is a possibility that the wrong connection may not immediately be noticed in some cases because the application is particularly similar.

[11. Each decoration board provided in the door frame]
Next, the decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 199 to 203. FIG. 199 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decoration substrate provided in the door frame, FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 201 is an LED FIG. 202 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. It is the enlarged view seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decoration substrate and the frame door sub relay substrate provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decoration substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current An arrangement method of the drive circuit will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 encloses the outer periphery of the door window 101a as described above, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side The in-window decoration 410b of the in-window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are disposed, and the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish The dish lower left decoration 281, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish center lower decoration 312 b are disposed below the upper center decoration 312 a.

  Behind the upper left decorative body 271, the upper left decorative substrate 273 formed in a strip shape extending in the left and right direction along the upper left decorative body 271 is disposed, and a plurality of the upper left decorative substrates 273 are mounted The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right decoration 276, a plurality of upper right decoration boards 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the upper right decoration 276 are disposed, and a plurality of the upper right The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (five in the present embodiment). The dish center upper decoration body 314a is disposed behind the dish center upper decoration board 314 which is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center upper decoration board A plurality of full color LEDs (10 in the present embodiment) mounted on a plurality of LEDs 314 are used to emit light.

  The left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the left side lower decoration substrate 402b are formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending upward and downward along the door frame left side decoration 404 at the rear thereof. A full-color LED (in the present embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is disposed on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). 5) and 10 on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b). A plurality of side window inner decoration portions 410b are arranged in a row in the vertical direction of the side window inner decoration members 412, and formed in the back thereof in the form of an elongated strip extending vertically along the side window inner decoration members 412. The in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 is disposed, and light emission decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (12 in the present embodiment) mounted in plurality on the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the upper and lower direction along the door frame right side decorative body 419 behind the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a is disposed on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b). 4) and 10 on the lower right side decoration substrate 418b).

  Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 is disposed. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending right and left along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 A door frame top right decorative substrate 457 formed in a long narrow strip shape is disposed, and a plurality of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are mounted. Light emitting decoration by full color LEDs (in the present embodiment, 11 in the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, 7 in the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, 6 in the door frame top right decoration substrate 457) It is.

  On the back of the lower left decorative body 281, a lower left decorative substrate 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending along the lower left decorative body 281 is disposed, and a plurality of the lower left decorative substrates 283 are mounted The light emitting decoration is performed by the full color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish lower right decoration 286 is disposed behind the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 which is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending along the dish lower right decoration 286. The light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on a plurality of light emitting diodes. The dish center lower decoration body 312b is disposed behind the dish center lower decoration board 316 which is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decoration body 312b. A plurality of full color LEDs (10 in the present embodiment) mounted on a plurality of LEDs 316 are used to emit light.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 formed in such a form that the ring is divided in the front and back as described above The rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 is a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a rear decoration substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip plate having a semicircular arc shape on the rear side. , Is composed of. A plurality of rotary operation units 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 are full color LEDs (nine in the present embodiment) mounted on the front decoration substrate 352a and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration substrate 352b. In the present embodiment, the light emission decoration is performed by 9).

  Thus, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thus, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body or a large display device can also be provided.

[11. Electrical connection between each decoration board and frame door sub relay board]
Top left decoration board 273, dish top right decoration board 278, dish top center decoration board 314, left side top decoration board 402a, left side bottom decoration board 402b, side arranged in various decorations and decoration parts provided in the door frame 3. Interior decoration in the window decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, dish lower left decoration board The door frame side decoration substrate such as 283, dish lower right decoration board 288, dish center lower decoration board 316, front decoration board 352 a, and back decoration board 352 b, and door frame base unit 100 of door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 199.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is provided with the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 180 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the door frame side first serial system and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which is the door frame side second serial system which are serially output from There is. In addition, door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 189 through interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[11-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are relays of the tray unit 200 shown in FIG. While being input to the substrate 214, it is also input to the handle decoration substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, 70 and the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the lower left decoration substrate 283 are input to the upper left decoration substrate 273. That is, the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a beaded manner. Illustration where door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input to the dish lower left decoration board 283 which becomes the bridge board Not shown for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, respectively. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper left decorative substrate 283 is connected to the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 electrically (in other words, it is the latter stage of the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 and becomes the final stage). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to be output respectively from the non-output connectors are provided .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decoration substrate 288, are input to the upper right decoration substrate 278. That is, the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 is a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a beaded manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay substrate 214 are input to the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 serving as a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) is provided, as well as an illustration for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 electrically connected with the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 (that is, the final stage of the plate lower right decoration substrate 288) is the plate lower right decoration substrate Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V and ground (GND) to be outputted respectively from the output connectors (not shown) of 288 are provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the operation part relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are the dish center upper decoration board 314, the dish The lower central decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352 a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are respectively input.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration substrate 352a are input to the rear decoration substrate 352b. That is, the front decoration substrate 352a is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration substrate 352b. And the rear decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a beaded manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay substrate 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are provided on the front decoration substrate 352a which is a bridge substrate. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided and for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration substrate 352b. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) for the front decoration substrate 352a is connected to the rear decoration substrate 352b electrically connected with the front decoration substrate 352a (that is, the rear stage of the front decoration substrate 352a and the final stage). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1), the direct current +12 V, and the ground (GND) to be output respectively are input is provided.

  Here, for example, a brief description of the lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input Then, the lower left decoration substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dispersion circuit 283c, and six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to sdLED1 to sdLED6 And the circuit 283 y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay substrate 214. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 283 x is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing to the sdLED 1 to sdLED 6. Therefore, the heat distribution of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed by receiving a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat dispersion circuit 283c.

  Also, for example, a brief description will be given of the upper left decorative substrate 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative substrate 283. The upper left decoration substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dispersion circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 and is of sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decoration substrate 283. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed by receiving a part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat dispersion circuit 273c.

[11-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub relay board 105 are the lower left decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402 While being input to the substrate 402b, the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right-side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Each has been entered.

  The direct current +12 V and the ground (GND) input to the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the upper left decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 has been entered.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a bead. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground from the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 serving as a bridge substrate An input connector (not shown) to which (GND) is input is provided, and a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are provided at the top center of the door frame An output connector (not shown) for outputting each to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. In addition, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, which is electrically connected with the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, follows the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), is an illustration of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) output respectively from output connectors not provided are provided, and input connectors (not shown) are provided. An output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 is provided. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. Thus, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a bead. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 which is electrically connected in a row with the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455) Door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) output respectively from the output connector (not shown) of the frame top central decoration substrate 455 (not shown) Only connectors are provided.

  Here, for example, of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are input. Briefly describing the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402 ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273 a of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8 And a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decoration substrate 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273, hdLED9, A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to hLED1 and huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left The maximum current setting circuit 402 bby is capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to the huLED 1 to huLED 5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402 a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is a substrate (left side lower decoration substrate 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. The constant current is controlled to flow to the hLED1 9, the hdLED 10, and the huLED 1 to huLED 5 of the decoration substrate 402 a on the left side.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, so it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing in the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bb generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the hdLED 9, hdLED 10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed by receiving a part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. Further, part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left upper side decoration substrate 402a. ing.

  As described above, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can disperse the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax only by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the substrate (the lower left decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. On the other hand, part of heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the substrate (the lower left decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted Heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left upper side decoration substrate 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to supply a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a which will be a subsequent substrate across the substrate (left side lower decoration substrate 402b) on which it is mounted It is done. For this reason, the work of electrically connecting the substrates of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402 a is necessarily involved. The worker performing this work is that the finger is the connector of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the connector of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a. In order to touch the distributed circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent damage due to static electricity on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a. Therefore, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, as well as electrostatics. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to

  As described above, the left upper side decoration substrate 402 a receives the direct current +12 V from the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b and the ground (GND), and is fixed to five full color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5. Lines through which current flows are input respectively. As described above, the left upper side decoration substrate 402a includes the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in addition to the five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402 ac has a function capable of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity, in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402 bbx.

[11-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and ID information and the floor It is composed of key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

11-2. Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are the same circuit, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the lower left decorative substrate 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current of the current to be supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283 y capable of

[11-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, an output channel LR is configured for an LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It is possible to

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. Mainly composed.

[11-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V in this embodiment) used in the constant current drive circuit 283x when DC +12 V from the +12 V power supply line is input. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit. 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283x. Is able to operate.

  Constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line of power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. There is. This is because if the +5 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 is used, this +5 V power supply line will be routed around the electrical wiring, so the length of the +5 V power supply line supplying DC +5 V becomes longer and noise is generated. It becomes easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the +5 V power supply line and the DC +5 V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the external noise may cause the flickering of the LED. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by making the +5 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 unnecessary for the constant current drive circuit 283 x, the noise resistance of the +12 V power supply line is extremely high compared to the +5 V power supply line. In the linear power supply 283xa, a configuration is adopted in which DC +5 V is uniquely generated as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the constant current drive circuit 283x only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since this can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. Thereby, by stabilizing the internal power supply Vreg, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of flickering of the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs due to the external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise. Further, the input electrical wiring for the +5 V power supply line and the external transmission electrical wiring are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1 b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb generates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are initialized to generate the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi start operation.

  For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 180, and independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, when using a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as “reset signal transmission line”), the reset signal transmission line may be routed around electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal is increased, and noise is likely to intrude. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset due to the influence of the external noise to turn off the LED. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the constant current drive circuit 283x does not output the internal reset signal RST from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate, but only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. Since external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST by utilizing it, the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to the prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise. In addition, the need for the input electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line and the external transmission electrical wiring is eliminated, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1 c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283 x c is a line (hereinafter referred to as “data line”) for transmitting serial data from outside of the constant current drive circuit 283 x (here, light emission data SDAT 1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side). Serial data is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the signal for transmitting the serial data is shaped, and can be output to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line for transmitting a clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter referred to as "clock line"). The clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  The data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards as described above. For this reason, the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both increased, so that noise can easily enter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. Are arranged in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both long, the data line and the clock line can be formed that are resistant to noise. Thus, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against extraneous noise.

[11-2-1 d. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 kinds of addresses as an ID (ID capable of identifying an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistances (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. It can be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not necessary to receive data from software and set it appropriately.

[11-2-1 e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial frame on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. At this time, control is performed such that the gradation information in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the gradation information is taken from the serial data and becomes the taken-in gradation information. If the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 on the door frame side first serial system) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not fetched and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents of the

[11-2-1 f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 from light off to lighting (maximum luminance) The gradation control is performed by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh is provided with PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradations are set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current driving unit 283 xi so that the current having the set gradations flows.

[11-2-1 g. Constant current driver]
The constant current drive unit 283 xi is a constant not shown for one output channel so as to have the gradation set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283 xh described above. A constant current is supplied to the LED elements constituting the full color LED by the current driver. That is, the constant current driving unit 283 xi includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

  In the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8, one end of a resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the LED element emitting red (R) constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LR1 to LR8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). In the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16, one end of a resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the green (G) emitting LED element constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LG1 to LG8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). In the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, one end of a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the blue (B) emitting LED element constituting the full color LED in eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8 It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element which constitute a full color LED respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 The anode terminal is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and receives +12 V DC.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively correspond to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) 1 to constant current driver 8) electrically connected to each other, and capable of absorbing constant current flowing to a red (R) LED element constituting a full color LED to the side of constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively correspond to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) It is electrically connected to 9 to constant current driver 16), and constant current flowing to the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be absorbed to the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively correspond to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 24), and can sink the constant current flowing to the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb constant current flowing to the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED set individually, thereby constituting the red (R) LED element constituting the full color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 absorb the constant current flowing to the green (G) LED elements configuring the full color LED set individually, thereby absorbing the constant current flowing through the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 absorb the constant current flowing to the blue (B) LED elements configuring the full color LED set individually, thereby absorbing the constant current flowing through the full color LED. Can emit light.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full color LEDs, with the individually set constant current, such dimming lighting is possible. Thus, it is possible to perform turn-off, lighting by one gradation, blinking by one gradation, and the like.

11-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the red (R) emitting LED elements constituting the full color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LR1 to LR8 described above, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Configure a full-color LED in eight output channels up to output channels LB1 to LB8, and set a resistance Rg to set the maximum current to flow to the green (G) emitting LED elements that constitute a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8 It is comprised from resistance Rb which sets the largest electric current sent through to the LED element which light-emits blue (B).

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND) There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND) There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current driver 283 xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND) There is.

11-3. Decorative substrate provided with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decoration substrate provided with the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 200 and FIG. Here, a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit mentioned above with which each decoration board of door frame 3 is provided is constituted as the same circuit. Therefore, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 200 and 201 for convenience of explanation.

[11-3-1. Decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distributed circuit 283c is provided.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the door frame side first serial system are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 via the interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of the power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the lower left decoration board 283 for the lower left frame of the door frame secondary relay substrate 105 (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) It is input via the tray unit relay board 214. The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and constitutes the full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRr1 to sdRr6 It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRg1 to sdRg6 (the The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistances sdRb1 to sdRb6 It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are individually controlled to perform dimming control so as to be the captured gradation information.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  In addition, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub relay board 105 is a dish upper left decoration via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) While being input to the substrate 273, DC +12 V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decoration substrate 273 via the lower left decoration substrate 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x) is not transmitted to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 The waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6 (the constant currents described above It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRg1 to suRg6 (the constant currents described above The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistances suRb1 to suRb6, respectively It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled to perform dimming control so as to be the captured gradation information.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink (suction) type, the LED constant current drive circuit 273a generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 273c, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x). Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

  In addition to the dish lower left decoration board 283 and the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish lower right decoration board 288, the dish upper right decoration board 278, and the door frame top left decoration board 456 as a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. , And a door frame top right decoration substrate 457.

[11-3-2. Decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decoration substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the left side lower decoration substrate 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 that is ten full color LEDs. ~ HdLED 10, a heat distribution circuit 402bc is provided.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510 a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the door frame side second serial system are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub relay substrate 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 via the interface substrate 635 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground of the power supply substrate 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decoration substrate 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105. There is. The direct current +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb and constitutes the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element , And blue (B) are also input to the anode terminals of the LED elements, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission aspect is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba for the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two full color LEDs are controlled. The light emission mode of the full color LEDs hdLED 9 and hdLED 10 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a to be a subsequent substrate, straddling the substrate (that is, the lower left side decoration substrate 402b) on which the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is mounted. The light emission aspect of huLED1-huLED5 is controlled.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 respectively The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (the constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements to be configured are output channels LG1 to LG8 (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are connected to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. It is electrically connected to the above-described constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24).

  Among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 for the two full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are respectively The full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements to be configured are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10 (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 1 described above). Cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to each other and that constitute the full color LEDs hdLED 9 and hdLED 10 are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipating resistors hdRb 9 and hdRb 10, respectively. It is electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (the constant current driver 17 and the constant current driver 18 described above).

  In addition, red LEDs (huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs) are configured for huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left-side upper decoration substrate 402a that is a subsequent substrate to the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the LED element R) are LED constant current drive circuits 402bb via heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b in the upper left side decoration substrate 402a and heat distribution resistances huRr1a to huRr5a in the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current driver 3 to the constant current driver 7 described above) and that constitute the full-color LEDs huLED Decoration on the left side The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current drivers 11 to constant current) The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements electrically connected to the driver 15) and constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the heat dispersion resistance huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, and the left side, respectively. It is electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the constant current driver 19 to the constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. The output channels LR8, LG8 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts from the light emission data SDAT2 Gradation information is controlled, and eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled so as to become the acquired gradation information, and dimming is performed. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, the gradation information is taken in from the light emission data SDAT2, and the acquired gradation information is obtained. The remaining two full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled to perform dimming and the left side to be a subsequent substrate of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b Upper decoration board 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402 ba is a sink (suction) type, it generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing to eight hdLED 1 to hdLED 8 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 Do. Therefore, heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc, are responsible for part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, it sinks constant current flowing to two hdLEDs 9 and hdLEDs 10 out of 10 full color LEDs hdLED 1 to hdLED 10, and Heat is generated by absorbing a constant current flowing to huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full color LEDs mounted on the left upper side decoration substrate 402a which is a substrate subsequent to the lower side decoration substrate 402b. Therefore, part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) for two hdLEDs 9 and hdLEDs 10 among the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat dispersive circuit 402bc is composed of five elements mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a which is a heat dispersion resistance hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 and is a subsequent substrate of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. For the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and the left side on the left side, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc in the lower left decoration substrate 402b The heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in the decoration substrate 402a, enable the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, constant current drive circuit 402bbx) It is possible to disperse the heat.

  Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generation of the above, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b as the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, the upper central dish decoration substrate 314, the lower central dish decoration substrate 316, the in-side window decorative portion decoration substrate 413, the right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418 b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the decoration board 402a on the left side, there is a decoration board 418a on the right side as a decoration board which is not provided with the LED constant current drive circuit at all.

11-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Here, the constant current drive circuit that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. Surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) as the type of IC package of the constant current drive circuit And so-called VQFN. Among the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 203, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit in each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the upper and lower direction provided with two LED constant current drive circuits The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[11-4-1. Left side lower decoration board]
As shown in FIG. 202 (a), the left side lower decoration substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the like. The ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb , It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and the LED non-mounting of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub relay board 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is uniformly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b has a reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Can be raised.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, a part number corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing It has not been. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the substrate management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is reduced by the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. To prevent that. Therefore, it can prevent that the reflectance in LED mounting surface 402bx of lower left side decoration board 402b by light emission of full color LED hdLED1-hdLED10 falls.

  In addition, although the door frame left side decoration 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed to be milky white having translucency as described above, the game is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 When the person moves the head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), temporarily, the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decoration 404 Even if it is possible, in the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and corresponding part numbers, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged Since the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing, a full color LE having no relation with the game for the player at all Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Therefore, a number identifying the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10).

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is disposed are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN have no relation to the game at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the substrate management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer without foil (that is, a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) It is formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil around it by making a letter with a pattern, and the blank character is formed by a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It is covered. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. In addition, the board management number of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b is replaced by the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, and foil-removed characters (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. In a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and may be formed as a cutout character formed by removing the copper foil around it. Make a letter with the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (Copper plane) on which the foil mounting pattern (that is, the wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b It may be formed as a drawn character formed by pulling out the copper foil, respectively. Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a foil-removed character (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) Not formed as a stamped character formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx or a solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by, it is formed as a stamped character on one or both surfaces It may be

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Areas showing positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk printing by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. They are printed in yellow (or black) respectively. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 203A) as silk printing and the left side lower decoration substrate The IC1 (see FIG. 203A), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and near the region LSLKa and above, and is silk-screened. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Then, a region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer to FIG. 203A) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. And the corresponding part numbers R1, R2 and R3 (see FIG. 203 (a)) are printed as yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b There is.

  In addition, in the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b, a region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower lower decoration substrate 402b (Or, black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (only full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 respectively correspond to dashed-dotted lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to each other are shown in FIG. 203 (a)) and printed in these areas Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 and corresponding to the upper or lower part (in FIG. 203 (a) are LED4, LED4 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b, a yellow dashed line (not shown) indicating a region where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402 bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402 b is arranged While printed with (or black dashed line), the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Furthermore, on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED 10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402 bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b (for example, The LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED A plurality of check pins (not shown) can be formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are not illustrated as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor which does not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED, and a connector which does not have a white color Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the area corresponding to the member disposed forward is the LED mounting surface If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor not having white and a connector not having white may be arranged in the region. In this case, an area indicating the position where an electronic component or connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk-screened yellow dotted line (or a black dotted line) not shown on the LED non-mounting surface. Parts and connectors and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid ground in which a region other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors is grounded to ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes not shown. There is.

  As described above, since the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b becomes extremely short, let's take out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge Even in this case, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance dimension, it becomes difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged at the end .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower end side of the right of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. By arranging the terminal on the input side closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be the terminal on the side, the second frame on the door frame side shown in FIG. 201 (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2 ), DC (+12 V), ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left end, upper left end and upper right end are mainly output terminal 1 to output side. The terminals of output side 1 to the terminals of output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. The terminal 1 on the output side has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output 2 and the output 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. While being able to arrange as a state, it is possible to arrange so that the remaining two end sides are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Thus, from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are restricted by the minimum distance dimension. You can even pull out all the wiring patterns. Therefore, in the left side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, there are four full color LEDs consisting of group 1 consisting of four full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 and four full color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the groups 1 and 2 can be extended. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in any one of the group 1 and the group 2, and therefore, the art It is possible to increase the efficiency of the arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern in the work.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be reduced by using the hdLED 6 which is the full-color LED (Fig. 202 (a)) in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be disposed closer to the lower side compared to the disposed portion), and the central portion in the vertical direction of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b (FIG. 202 (a) (The part where the hdLED 6 which is the full color LED is arranged) is located closer to the upper side, and can be arranged above the hdLED 8 which is the full color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax . Thus, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 in the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx The area for wiring the wiring pattern to the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the two left full color LEDs hdLED9, hdLED10 and five left upper side decoration substrates 402a shown in FIG. 201 is the left side lower decoration substrate It can be secured at 402b.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay, 402bby, capacitors not shown are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length Length: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are compared with the sizes (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Capacitors arranged in parallel with 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 and not shown are such that one end side in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to left end side 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 of lower left side decorative substrate 402b It is arranged as. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged with the end of the land pattern inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b and the resistance They are respectively disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel.

  In addition, as described above, in the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are substantially identical although they are arranged as inclined. Unlike the other decoration substrates of Frame 3, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are disposed on the door frame top decoration 453 of the decoration substrate Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit can be obtained by using the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the end of the decoration substrate, and the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is not parallel to the end of the decoration substrate. There is a mixture of In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is provided with the other central decorative substrate on which five full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, in addition to the eleven full color LEDs (not shown). Two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, In the second maximum current setting circuit)), an LED constant current drive circuit (here, a second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit))) Two heat dispersion circuits (the first constant current drive circuit is a first heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is a second heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) Control the light emission directly through the The left decorative substrate 456 is provided with one LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) (not shown) with the other left decorative substrate on which one full color LED not shown is mounted in addition to the seven full color LEDs with which it is provided. The light emission control is directly controlled via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself (not shown) by the current drive circuit and the maximum current setting circuit, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 has six full color LEDs provided for itself. In addition to the above, another right decoration substrate on which two full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is provided with itself by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) not shown. Direct light emission control is performed via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance). The other central decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is a left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decoration substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending leftward and rightward along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide heat dissipating circuits (heat dissipating resistors) on each of the other central decorative substrates, the other left decorative substrates, and the other right decorative substrates. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit (here, the second heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) provided on the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other central decoration substrate are the door frame top In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generation of the second LED constant current drive circuit (precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative substrate 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic parts due to static electricity It also has features that can be done. Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other left decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit, the function of preventing damage to the electronic component due to static electricity is also included. Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided on the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other right decoration substrate are the LED constant current drive circuits provided on the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 (correctly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit, the function of preventing damage to the electronic component due to static electricity is also included.

  Also, ten full color LEDs are arranged with the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. The hdLED1 to hdLED10 are viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b and closer to the right end 402beg2 of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b. And the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. L of left side lower decoration board 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are sink (suction) types, and generate heat by absorbing a constant current flowing to each LED element. For this reason, even in the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx and the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Also, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit The end of the land pattern of 402bax and 402bbx is disposed parallel to the left and right sides of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457), the one which arranges the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx nonparallel to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate is the decoration substrate The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the game board 5.

11-4-2. Dish center top decoration board]
The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like, as shown in FIG. 202 (b). While ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate decorative plate 314 on the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300, the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314 b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 on the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300. Incidentally, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 202 (b) is viewed rotated 90 degrees to the left (in other words, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually disposed along the dish center upper decoration 312a. Connector HCN is mounted on the right side along the upper edge 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314, for connecting the operation part relay substrate 392 and the electrical wiring.

  A white resist is uniformly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration substrate 314. In this embodiment, a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 causes the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the reflectance of the

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing It has not been. In addition, the substrate management number of the upper center dish decoration board 314 is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper dish base decoration board 314 as a white letter with a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 at the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 decreases due to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314 from being lowered by the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, although the dish upper center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed to be milky white having translucency as described above, the front of the pachinko machine 1 is When the player sitting on the head moves the head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), temporarily, the dish center upper decoration board 314 provided on the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 Even when the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 originally has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED The area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is completely printed as silk printing, so the game has nothing to do with the game. It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, a number specifying the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10) or an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, full color LED It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area where the certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

  A part number corresponding to the connector HCN and a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be arranged are not printed at all on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the area indicating the connector HCN and the part number corresponding to the player and the position where the connector HCN is to be arranged, which has no relation to the game at all.

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the decoration board 314 on the upper center of the dish. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration board 314, the board management number of the dish upper center decoration board 314 is a wire with a foil-free character (that is, copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) The character is formed in a pattern and is formed as a blank character formed by removing the copper foil around it, and the white font is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish It is covered. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. In addition, the board management number of the dish center upper decoration board 314 is replaced by the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration board 314, and the foil-free character (that is, the wiring pattern) In a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and may be formed as a cut-out character formed by removing the copper foil around it. Make a letter with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which a foil pattern is formed (that is, a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 It may be formed as a drawn character formed by pulling out the copper foil, respectively. In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decoration base 314 on the upper center of the plate is made by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a foil-removed character (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) Not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x or on the LED non-mounting surface 314y on one or both sides. It may be

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314 ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314 a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314 ay, and various dispersions Regions showing positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk near these areas. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown for printing.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is not illustrated as silk printing. The yellow dots (or the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10) , Black) are printed respectively.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a yellow dashed line (not shown) indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is disposed as silk printing. While printed with (or black dashed line), a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in the vicinity of this area in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

  Also, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Furthermore, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is individually subjected to lighting inspection on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, The LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED A plurality of check pins (not shown) can be formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are not illustrated as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground in which a region other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic parts and connectors is grounded to ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes not shown. There is.

  In the present embodiment, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED and a connector that does not have a white color Although the LED mounting surface is not mounted at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is lowered, the area corresponding to the member disposed forward in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED is the LED mounting If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor not having white and a connector not having white may be disposed in the region. In this case, an area indicating the position where an electronic component or connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk-screened yellow dotted line (or a black dotted line) not shown on the LED non-mounting surface. Parts and connectors and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

  Since the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a long strip shape having a semicircular arc shape as described above, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 202 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left When viewed (that is, in a state where the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is actually disposed along the dish center upper decoration 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The width dimension to the maximum is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration substrate 314, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged. Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper center decoration board 314 becomes extremely short, let's draw the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge Even in this case, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance dimension, it becomes difficult to extract all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged at the end .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the left lower end side of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is an input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration plate 314. The terminal on the input side is arranged on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1 shown in FIG. ), DC (+12 V), ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, upper right end side and lower right end side are mainly output terminal 1 to output side And the terminals of the output side 1 to the terminals of the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal 1 on the output side has terminals to which the resistors Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314 ay and 314 by are input, and the output 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper center decoration substrate 314. While being able to arrange as a state, it is possible to arrange as the state which inclined the remaining 2 edge sides 45 degree vis-a-vis lower edge side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decoration baseplate 314. Thus, from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are restricted by the minimum distance dimension. You can even pull out all the wiring patterns. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 formed in a thin strip shape having a semicircular arc shape.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 including four full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the groups 1 and 2 can be extended. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring pattern to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened in any one of the group 1 and the group 2, and therefore, the art It is possible to increase the efficiency of the arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern in the work.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 shown in FIG. 202 (b) is viewed rotated 90 degrees to the left (in other words, the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is on the dish center). The constant current driving circuit 314 ax is a full-color LED in a semicircular arc central portion (FIG. 202 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. The constant current drive circuit 314bx can be disposed closer to the right as compared to the portion where the hLED 6 is disposed, and the semicircular arc central portion (FIG. 202 (b Group which is controlled to emit light by the constant current drive circuit 314 It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thus, it is possible to secure an area for drawing wiring patterns from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 in the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx It is possible to secure on the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 a region for drawing a wiring pattern to the two full color LEDs hLED 9 and hLED 10.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, capacitors (not shown) are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and so-called EIA type 0805 (designated 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length Length: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors not shown are compared with the sizes (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx. Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and capacitors not shown are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the upper edge side of the upper center decoration board 314 The capacitor is disposed parallel to 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2. One end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor not shown is perpendicular to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration substrate 314. It is arranged as. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged with the end of the land pattern inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 and the resistance They are disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314 so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one longitudinal end of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

  Further, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314, and ten full color LEDs HLED1 to hLED10 as viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 toward the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 and in a semicircular arc shape of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper edge 314eg1 of the upper center decoration substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper upper decoration substrate 314 while being arranged with a predetermined distance along the side. A configuration is adopted in which the LED is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center decoration board 314 of the dish. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink type as described above, similarly to the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, by absorbing constant current flowing in each LED element. Heat up. For this reason, also in the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 formed in a strip shape having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx and the ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less likely to be affected by the ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper center decoration plate 314, the constant current drive circuit The end of the land pattern of 314ax and 314bx is disposed parallel to the left end and the right end of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457), the one where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged nonparallel to the left end side and the right end side of the decoration substrate is the decoration substrate The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of can be further shortened. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the rendering operation unit 300, so that the large-scale rendering operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3, and the rendering operation unit A light emission effect can be performed by 300.

[11-4-3. Genus pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
The types of IC packages of constant current drive circuits that are the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the upper center plate decoration substrate 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mounting type having a square shape and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  The metal pad FP is exposed at the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called exposed pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. The IC package can be soldered to a substrate to enhance heat dissipation and bonding.

  The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with a square-shaped land pattern EP for EPad in addition to each lead pad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b. Nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation grid form in the area of the land pattern EP for ePad. By these thermal vias TV, the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decoration substrate 402b are electrically connected. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad can not be drawn out in the region of the land pattern EP for EPad.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink type, and generates heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is generated from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b through the land pattern EP for EPad. By diffusing, it is possible to dissipate heat all over the lower left side decoration substrate 402b.

  A brief description will be given of the relationship between the land pattern EP for EPad and the nine thermal vias TV. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad is constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered does not become too large and generation of voids is prevented, and this junction area becomes too small and stable. It is possible to obtain a good bonding strength. Although the land pattern EP for EPad can be divided into a grid and formed, also in this case, as described above, the constant current drive circuit as described above in order to prevent the occurrence of the void and obtain the stable bonding strength. It is necessary to make the junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx When the end of the land pattern is arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect to the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the land pattern EP for EPad is similarly left When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so as to be arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower side decorative substrate 402b and inclined 45 degrees. The land pattern EP for EPad is also arranged in a state of being inclined 45 degrees. When the land pattern EP edge for EPad is disposed parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decoration substrate 402b, the land pattern EP edge for EPad and lower left decoration substrate 402b The fact that the distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 of is shorter and the distance dimension to the end of the substrate is shorter means that the room for heat dissipation on the substrate is smaller. . On the other hand, the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b in the case where the end pattern of the land pattern EP for EPad is arranged to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance between the right end side 402beg2 and the top end of the land pattern EP for EPad is a portion where the distance between the top and the substrate edge becomes short, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are not parallel to the substrate edge. Since the room for heat radiation on the substrate is wide, it can be said that the heat radiation effect is high as compared with the case where the edge pattern of the land pattern EP for EPad is parallel to the substrate edge.

  As described above, each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as described above, as described above, the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically and including two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle An LED according to the light emission from the full color LED is described according to the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, the full color LED and the corresponding part number, and the area showing the position of the full color LED It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered, and for the player, the part number corresponding to the full color LED which has no relationship with the game at all And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, FIG. 204 to FIG. 204 are used to describe another configuration of the present invention in which measures such as reflectance reduction are taken (hereinafter referred to as “configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the second to fourth embodiments”). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 shows the configuration of measures to reduce reflectance etc. according to the second embodiment, FIG. 205 shows the configuration of measures to reduce reflectance etc. according to the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 207 is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ′ ′ portion of FIG. 205, FIG. 207 is a configuration of measures such as reflectance decrease according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a part. In addition, in FIG. 204 thru | or 208, with respect to what plays the same function as embodiment (Hereafter, it is described as the structure of measures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 1st Embodiment.) Shown in FIG. The same symbol is attached and shown. Further, in FIG. 206, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing. In FIG. 208, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of easy viewing of the drawing.

[Comparison of the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color An area indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas showing positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are silk near these areas. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, as described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is silk on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. While printed as yellow dotted lines (or black dashed lines) for printing, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas It is done.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate is a full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding component numbers And a region indicating the positions where the hLEDs 1 to hLEDs 10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, as described above, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or solid black lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 has a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being printed by yellow dashed and dotted lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown for printing. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b is a full color LED hdLED1. The part number corresponding to the ~ hdLED 10 and the region indicating the position where the hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 which is the full color LED is arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b with yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as silk printing and The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is yellow as silk printing, in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and in the left or upper part the LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full color LED Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be disposed is printed as a yellow solid line not shown as silk printing and corresponds to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this region Part numbers are printed in yellow, not shown, as silk printing.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) not having white color and connectors not having white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and yellow parts (not shown) corresponding to the plurality of check pins are shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb, and the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components in the vicinity of these areas Are each printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206A) as silk printing and the left side lower decoration substrate The IC1 (see FIG. 206A), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and is in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and above. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Then, a region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 206A) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. And the corresponding part numbers R1, R2 and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) are printed as yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b. There is.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Also in the configuration of measures for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Thus, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b enhances the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 It can be done.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish with solid yellow lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 as yellow and In the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, the LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the corresponding part numbers are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 for silk printing as silk printing. It is done.

  In addition, while the area which shows the position which arranges connector HCN is printed as a yellow solid line which is not illustrated as silk printing on LED mounting surface 314x of plate center upper decoration board 314, it corresponds with connector HCN near this area Part numbers are printed in yellow, not shown, as silk printing.

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the dish It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and yellow parts (not shown) corresponding to the plurality of check pins are shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay Areas indicating positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are indicated as silk print in the vicinity of these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  In the second embodiment, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and constant current drive circuit 314ax (also 314bx) is made of black resin in its package. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Also in the configuration of measures to reduce the reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 are coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color LEDs HdLED1 to hddLED10 are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 of the dish is a full color LED corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 While the number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decoration board 402b -The part numbers (yellow letters and numbers) corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing respectively The LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 includes full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding part numbers (yellow letters and numbers) and full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is different in that the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position to be arranged is printed as silk printing.

  The reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be enhanced by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It is supposed to be. In addition, the white resist coated solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 allows the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the rendering operation unit 300) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Can be raised. For this reason, when the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position where the full color LED is to be disposed is printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED by silk printing printed in black. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorative bodies provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, the door frame top decoration 453) are described above Because the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), although the light-colored milky white is formed, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the above. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the full color LED and the corresponding part number having no relation to the game at all, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the second embodiment, silk printing is performed on a region indicating a full color LED and a corresponding part number having no relation with a game for the player and a position where the full color LED is arranged. Unlike black, by printing in bright yellow color, on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be disposed) ) Or it may be difficult to find a number that identifies a full color LED (ie, a full color LED and the corresponding part number).

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position indicating the position for the full color LED is silk printing different from black and bright yellow By printing with the above, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full color LED.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the full color LED identification number (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the full color LED mounting position (that is, the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged). While being able to do, it can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by light emission of a full color LED falls.

  In addition, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance and the like according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed is When printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full color LED may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full color LED.

  Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor which do not have a white color and a connector which does not have a white color which decreases the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the LED is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member placed forward is the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor having no white color and a connector having no white color may be disposed in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component and the connector are arranged is printed as a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the electronic component and the connector in the vicinity of this region Is printed in yellow not shown as silk printing.

[Comparison of the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color An area indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas showing positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are silk near these areas. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, as described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is silk on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. While printed as yellow dotted lines (or black dashed lines) for printing, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas It is done.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate is a full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding component numbers And a region indicating the positions where the hLEDs 1 to hLEDs 10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, as described above, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or solid black lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 has a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being printed by yellow dashed and dotted lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown for printing. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a full color LED hdLED1. The part number corresponding to ~ hd LED 10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed In FIG. 205 (c), only the foil-cut letters 7 are shown as part numbers corresponding to the full color LED hdLED 7)), and the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED 10 are arranged is Foil removal area excluding each terminal not shown and wiring pattern not shown (ie, wiring pattern is formed In (Copper plane), except for each terminal and the wiring pattern, in the area formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 205 (c), only the foil removal area LSLK7 is shown as an area corresponding to hdLED 7 which is a full color LED). ), And the foil-removing area and the foil-removing character are respectively covered with a white resist which is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, regions indicating positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 respectively on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and these foil removal LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on the left or above The white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b covers the foil removal area and the foil removal character. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be disposed is a foil removing area (that is, a wiring pattern is not shown) except each terminal not shown and the wiring pattern not shown. Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil, and a foil whose part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed and pulling out a copper foil around it).

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) not having white color and connectors not having white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins not shown are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and delineated letters (the part numbers corresponding to the respective check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins) That is, in the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb, and the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components in the vicinity of these areas Are each printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206A) as silk printing and the left side lower decoration substrate The IC1 (see FIG. 206A), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and is in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and above. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. Then, a region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 206A) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. And the corresponding part numbers R1, R2 and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) are printed as yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b. There is.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Also in the configuration of measures for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the third embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Thus, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b enhances the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 It can be done.

  Further, in the configuration for measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil-free character (ie, a character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it) And the terminals showing the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED 10 are arranged are not shown, and the terminals (not shown) except the wiring pattern not shown (i.e., the layer on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) And the wiring pattern, except for the area formed by removing the copper foil, and the L WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, areas indicating the positions at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as the foil removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 respectively on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decorative substrate 314, and these foil removal areas LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration board 314 as cut-out characters, The white resist coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the center upper decorative substrate 314 covers the defoliated area and the deoxidized character. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-removed characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be disposed is not shown foil forming regions (that is, wiring patterns are formed excluding the terminals and wiring patterns not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which a wiring pattern is formed and pulling out a copper foil around it).

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the dish It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins not shown are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and delineated letters (the part numbers corresponding to the respective check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins) That is, in the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are made with the wiring pattern which is copper foil, and the periphery thereof It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay Areas indicating positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are indicated as silk print in the vicinity of these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  In the third embodiment, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (also integrated on one semiconductor chip) 314bx) is made of black resin in its package. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Also in the configuration of measures to reduce the reflectance and the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 are coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color LEDs HdLED1 to hddLED10 are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 of the dish is a full color LED corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 While the number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 being the full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decoration board 402b The LED is hedLED1 to hdLED10, and the part number corresponding to it is a foiled character (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) is made by forming a character with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil The region which indicates the position where the hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 which is a full color LED is arranged is formed as a blank character to be removed, and each foil not shown is a foil removed region except the terminals not shown and the wiring pattern not shown (Copper plane) is a white resist which is formed as an area formed by removing a copper foil except for each terminal and a wiring pattern, and applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Cover the foiled area and the foiled character, respectively, On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are foil-removed characters (that is, the wiring pattern is a copper foil in the layer on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) The area which shows the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is shown as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil around it and is not a foil cutting area except each terminal and wiring pattern not shown. (In other words, in the layer in which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), it is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil except each terminal and the wiring pattern) The white resist that is solidly coated on the surface 314x has its foiled area and its foiled character respectively It differs in that it is covered.

  The reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be enhanced by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It is supposed to be. In addition, the white resist coated solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 allows the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the rendering operation unit 300) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Can be raised. For this reason, when the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position where the full color LED is to be disposed is printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED by silk printing printed in black. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorative bodies provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, the door frame top decoration 453) are described above Because the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), although the light-colored milky white is formed, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the above. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the full color LED and the corresponding part number having no relation to the game at all, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and for the player at all A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating the position where a full color LED is not related as a foil removal region and covering the foil removal characters and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. An LED wiring pattern, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed), and a number identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED); Is made of copper foil to make the same color, and white formed on the LED mounting surface By covering with a mist, a foil removal area (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged) indicating the mounting position of the full color LED can be found out or a number identifying the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) ) Can be difficult to find out.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and for the player at all A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating the position where a full color LED is not related as a foil removal region and covering the foil removal characters and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. It can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by light emission of LED falls.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment can be achieved. In other words, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the full color LED identification number (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the foil removing area that indicates the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged). While being able to do, it can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by light emission of a full color LED falls.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment, since the process of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface, the substrate by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing processes of the substrate The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against the reflectance fall etc. which concern on 3rd Embodiment, in the foil removal area | region (In other words, when forming the area | region which shows the position which arranges full color LED as a foil removal area | region) which shows the mounting position of full color LED. The polarity mark of the full color LED may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color in which the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the light emission of a full color LED Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the LED is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member placed forward is the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor having no white color and a connector having no white color may be disposed in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component and the connector are arranged is not shown, except for the terminals not shown and the wiring pattern not shown (i.e. the layer on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as an area formed by pulling out the copper foil), and an open part (not shown) corresponding to the electronic part or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this area. That is, in the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with the wiring pattern which is copper foil, and they are formed as blank characters formed by removing the copper foil around the characters.

[Comparison of the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color An area indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas showing positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are silk near these areas. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, as described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is silk on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. While printed as yellow dotted lines (or black dashed lines) for printing, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas It is done.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the plate is a full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding component numbers And a region indicating the positions where the hLEDs 1 to hLEDs 10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, as described above, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistances are arranged are printed as silk lines with yellow solid lines (or solid black lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas Are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 has a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being printed by yellow dashed and dotted lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown for printing. They are respectively printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance decrease and the like according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a full color LED hdLED1. A white resist-removed character (FIG. 207C) using a white resist with a part number of twice corresponding to hdLED 10 is shown as a part number corresponding to hdLED 7 that is a full-color LED. A white resist removed area (FIG. 207 (c)), the area showing the position for arranging hdLED1 to hdLED10 being full color LEDs is a full color LED hdLED7 And only the white resist removed area LSLK7 is shown as the corresponding area. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is the first of the twice-coated white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist. The white resist is covered (in other words, the white LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decoration substrate 402b as the first of the twice-painted white resist). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b is a second area of the double-painted white resist, showing an area (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged. As shown in FIG. 207 (c), the white resist removal region LSLK7 includes the fifth pin of the hdLED7, which is a full color LED, as the region corresponding to the hdLED7, which is a full color LED. Notches are formed at the positions corresponding to the indicated notch marks) are masked as white resist extraction areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and left near these white resist extraction areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 and left Or hdLED1 to hd which are full color LEDs on the top In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the whole is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the second layer of white is formed. By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the resist, the area masked by the area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is white resist removed area LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed as white resist-extracted characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first white resist and the transmittance of the second white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are used, light and shade are generated, and the second layer white resist passes through the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. When the base (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b is seen through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify white resist-extracted characters in the first layer white resist. ing.

  In addition, while the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions connector LDLCN is formed as a white resist extraction area which is not shown in figure in LED mounting surface 402bx of lower side decoration board 402b, components corresponding to connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this area The number is formed as a white resist-free character not shown. In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist are the same. When the layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist become dark and light passes through the second layer of white resist, the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first layer. The white resist of the eyes will look pale. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decorative substrate 402b through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist extraction region in the first layer white resist. It has become.

  In addition, since a white resist is applied twice on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and the second The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b through the second layer white resist, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED, hdLED1 to hdLED10, and a connector LDUCN having a white resist and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) not having white color and connectors not having white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and white resist-extracted characters whose part numbers corresponding to the plurality of check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. Note that among the plurality of check pins, there are some that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 208, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb, of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. An area indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors not shown are arranged is formed as a white resist extraction area using a twice-coated white resist like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. And the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-extracted characters using twice-painted white resist like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b is the first of the twice-painted white resist, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b is white. The resist is covered (in other words, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left-side decoration substrate 402b as the first of the twice-painted white resists). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b is, for example, a region (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating a position where the constant current drive circuit 402 bax is to be disposed as the second of the twice painted white resist. The white resist removal region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 208 includes the first and third pins of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark instructing placement) is masked as a white resist removed area LSLKa, and a constant current is formed in the vicinity of and above the white resist removed area LSLKa. The part number IC1 (see FIG. 208A) corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. Thereby, although the white resist of 2 layers is formed similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decoration substrate 402b, the first layer The entire area is covered by the white resist and the entire area except the area masked by the second layer white resist, whereby the masked area is recessed as a recess and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. The white resist removed area LSLKa is formed as the area to be formed, and the IC1 which is the part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as the white resist removed character.

  Note that the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b is a white resist whose area where the electronic components such as resistances Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged is shown. White resist-removed characters R1, R2, and the like corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower-side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a removal region. A part number corresponding to an electronic component such as various distributed resistors such as various resistors and capacitors (not shown) is formed as a white resist blank character (not shown). Further, the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b is formed as an unshown white resist-extracted area in which an area indicating the position for arranging the connector LDLCN is not shown. In the vicinity of this area, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is It is formed as a white resist removing character not shown.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first white resist and the transmittance of the second white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402 b are the same. In the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist, light and shade are generated, and the second layer white resist passes through the LED non-mounting surface of the lower left decoration substrate 402b. When the base of 402 by (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies to the following), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. Thus, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify white resist-extracted characters formed in the first layer white resist. In addition, it is possible to identify the white resist removed area.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402 b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402 bax (402 bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has a color of black, brown or blue. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor, a capacitor, and an IC that do not have white color, and a connector that does not have white color have a reduced reflectance due to the light emission of a full color LED. Has been implemented.

  Also in the configuration of measures for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Thus, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b enhances the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 It can be done.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207 (b), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using double-painted white resist, and the area indicating the position for arranging hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, uses double-painted white resist It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 is the first of the twice-painted white resists, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is a white resist The white resist is covered (that is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 is solidly coated as the first of the twice-painted white resists). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is a second area of the double-painted white resist, indicating an area where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) For example, the white resist removal region HSLK 7 as a region corresponding to the full-color LED hLED 7 includes a cut-out mark for instructing the arrangement of the fifth pin of the full-color LED hLED 7 HLED1 which is a full-color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removed areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 while being masked as white resist removed areas HSLK1 to HSLK10) in which notches are formed at corresponding positions. LED which is the part number corresponding to ~ hLED 10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the whole is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the second layer of white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the resist, the area masked by the area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged is white resist removed area HSLK1 to HSLK10 While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed as white resist-extracted characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer white resist and the transmittance of the second layer white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 are the same. Since the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are used, the second layer white resist passes through the second layer white resist to form the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish. Looking at the substrate, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. In other words, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, it becomes possible to identify white resist-extracted characters in the first layer white resist. ing.

  In addition, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be disposed is formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN in the vicinity of this region The number is formed as a white resist-free character not shown. In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist are the same. When the layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist become dark and light passes through the second layer of white resist, the ground of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate is observed. The white resist of the eyes will look pale. This makes it possible to identify the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist. It has become.

  In addition, since a white resist is applied twice on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and the second resist The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  In addition, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are made of resin of white (the color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called natural color, white (natural color) Color) It is made of resin recognized as the same color. That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decoration substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as the white resist covered (solidly coated) on the whole. A full color LED hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a white resist covered with the whole (solid color) and a housing of the same color (color recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the upper center decoration plate 314 of the dish It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 (for example, 1 LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green light (G), and LED elements that emit blue light (B) that constitute two full-color LEDs) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and white resist-extracted characters whose part numbers corresponding to the plurality of check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with a white resist. As a result, when a worker performing an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to be in a conductive state, and various inspections can be performed. There are also a plurality of check pins that can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314 ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314 a, the resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314 ay, and various distributed resistors not shown And the like are formed as a white resist-extracted area using a twice-painted white resist as in the case of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center of the plate An electronic component and a part number corresponding to the electronic component are formed in the vicinity as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-painted white resist as in the case of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer white resist and the transmittance of the second layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the dish upper center decorative substrate 314 are the same. In the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist, shading occurs, and the second layer white resist passes through the second layer white resist and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate 314 on the upper center of the dish Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer will look pale. Thus, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, it is possible to identify white resist-extracted characters formed in the first layer white resist. In addition, it is possible to identify the white resist removed area.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decoration substrate 314, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the first layer white resist, and The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer white resist are identified. It can be done.

  Also, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full color LED decreases.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure for lowering the reflectance and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light forward (that is, the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300) It is possible to increase the rate.

  As described above, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full color LEDs HdLED1 to hddLED10 are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center plate 314 of the dish is a full color LED corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 While the number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side decoration board 402b While the LED is formed as a white-resist-free character using a white resist that has the part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that is an LED, the area indicating the position where hdLED1 to hdLED10 that is a full color LED is arranged is twice It is formed as a white resist removal area using a coated white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center dish decoration board 314 has a part number twice corresponding to the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10. An area showing the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED 10 are arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area using double-coated white resist while being formed as a white resist-extracted character using the white resist of Difference in that .

  The reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be enhanced by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. It is supposed to be. In addition, the white resist coated solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 allows the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the rendering operation unit 300) by the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. Can be raised. For this reason, when the area indicating the full color LED and the corresponding part number and the position where the full color LED is to be disposed is printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED by silk printing printed in black. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorative bodies provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, the door frame top decoration 453) are described above Because the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face), although the light-colored milky white is formed, the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the above. Then, there arises a problem that the player visually recognizes the full color LED and the corresponding part number having no relation to the game at all, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-removed character using a white resist twice coated with a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player The full color LED mounting position is formed by forming an area indicating the position where the full color LED is to be arranged for the player and having nothing to do with the game as a white resist extraction area using twice coated white resist. Making it difficult to find out the white resist removal area (ie, the area that indicates the position where the full color LED is to be placed) indicating the symbol or the number identifying the full color LED (ie, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) Can.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-removed character using a white resist twice coated with a part number corresponding to a full color LED having no relation to a game at all for the player The light emitting area of the full color LED is formed by forming the area showing the position for arranging the full color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player as a white resist removing area using the twice coated white resist. It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance decrease according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance decrease according to the first embodiment can be achieved. In other words, a white resist removal area using a white resist that indicates the full color LED identification number (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the full color LED mounting position (that is, the position where the full color LED is disposed) Can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED can be prevented.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against the reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, since the process of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively, the plate cost of silk printing and production of the substrate The reduction of the number of processes can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full color LED, and a connector that does not have a white color Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the LED is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but in the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member placed forward is the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor having no white color and a connector having no white color may be disposed in the region. In this case, an area indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged is formed as each terminal (not shown) and a white resist extraction area (not shown). In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic components and connectors such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate, the whole is covered with the first layer white resist, and By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the second layer white resist, the area masked is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LED and the connector are arranged is formed as a white resist extraction area And the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the connector is formed as the white resist-extracted character, but the white resist-extracted area and the white resist-extracted character may be formed using other methods. . For example, after solidly coating a white resist one or more times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, a region indicating the position where the full color LED or connector is to be disposed before the white resist dries. Forming a white resist-extracted area by pressing the plate, and forming a white resist-extracted character by pressing a plate showing the part number corresponding to a full color LED or connector, an LED mounting surface of a decorative substrate, A white resist is applied on the LED non-mounting surface once or multiple times, and then the white resist is dried, and then the area showing the position where a full color LED or a connector is to be arranged is set as a white resist removed area by laser irradiation. Part number corresponding to a full color LED or connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various substrates which can be supplied from a power supply from a power supply substrate and can control electric decoration (for example, JP-A-2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, inside the gaming machine, lines for transmitting power to various boards and lines for transmitting control signals are drawn, and the length of the lines becomes longer, which may cause various boards to be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window that opens the gaming board with a transparent protective plate at the front and back is proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014] , And Figure 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides in the front frame is reduced, and the decorative substrate housed in the left and right sides is also in the form of a band plate. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, and the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes like a band plate. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-like decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure the area for drawing out the wiring to the light emission means from the light emission control means.

  Also, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed which is provided with a movable combination device which is arranged to stand by below the front of the display screen of the effect display device and which operates at the time of effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064) Publication (paragraphs [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). A decoration substrate on which light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is mounted in the movable part device. However, for the player, there is a possibility that the player may visually recognize the number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate having no relation to the game at all, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a decorative substrate on which light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with an effect having a variation using the light emission effect by such light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is lowered due to the number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[12. Each decoration board to prepare for the game board]
Next, among the decorative substrates included in the game board 5, particularly, the decorative substrate on which the magnetic type pole change detection circuit of the magnetic type is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with a magnetic type pole change detection circuit and the like.

  First, among the decorative substrates included in the game board 5, as a decorative substrate mounted with a magnetic type pole change detection circuit, as described above, the back upper left movable decorative body in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 Back top left top decoration board 3311a on which the magnetic back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting the waiting position (original position) of the rotational position of the front stage decoration portion 3312 of 3310 is mounted, and back left effect of the back unit 3000 Back left bottom first stage decoration substrate 3321a on which a magnetic back left pole change detection circuit 3321ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320 in the unit 3300 is mounted , The rotational position of the front stage decoration portion 3412 of the back right upper movable decoration 3410 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 The back right upper front stage decorative substrate 3411 a on which the magnetic back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411 ab for detecting the standby position (original position) is mounted, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 There is a back lower right front end decoration substrate 3421 a on which a magnetic back lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421 ab for detecting a standby position (original position) of a rotational position of the front end decoration portion 3422 is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the back upper left front end decorative substrate 3311a, the back lower left front end decorative substrate 3321a, the back upper right front end decorative substrate 3411a, and the back lower right front end decorative substrate 3421a have the same circuit configuration, and the LED mounting surface Because the configuration where the LED non-mounting surface is arranged is the same (the type of electronic The upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a will be described.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 which is a door frame side serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the panel drive substrate 1720 is input with the clock signal PSCLK1 via the panel drive substrate 1720 via the panel drive substrate 1720. ing. Also, the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 through the panel drive substrate 1720 and receives +12 V DC, and the ground (GND of the peripheral control substrate 1510 ) Electrically connected to the line and grounded to ground (GND). The back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a may be configured to be electrically connected directly to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. It may be configured to be electrically connected directly to the ground (GND) line and to be grounded to the ground (GND).

  The back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a includes a back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat dispersion circuit 3311ad, and eight full color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab can detect a change in magnetic pole, and mainly includes a linear power supply 3311aba, a Hall element 3311abb, an amplification circuit 3311abc, a Schmitt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. It is configured as an open drain output.

  The linear power supply 3311 aba is a circuit for generating and supplying an internal power supply to which DC +12 V from the +12 V power supply line is input and used in the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab. The internal power supply is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd so as to operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to the ground (GND) line.

  The Hall element 3311 abb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311 abc. The amplification circuit 3311 abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311 abb and outputs the amplified signal to the Schmitt circuit 3311 abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311 abd arranges the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplification circuit 3311 abc and outputs it to the gate terminal of the FET 3311 abf which is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal in response to the signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abe.

  The back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the vertical direction becomes larger than the operation point (Bop) When the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311 abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

  Incidentally, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged such that its Hall element 3311abb is positioned just below the track of the small-columnar magnet 3312a near the rotation axis of the previous stage decoration 3312 shown in FIG. It is done.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and the type of the IC package has a rectangular planar shape (horizontal length: 2 Surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a length of 1.6 mm and a so-called SOT. Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a of the previous stage decoration portion 3312 attached to the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311 shown in FIG. The distance dimension between this magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and the left surface side of the front step decorative portion 3312 which is the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid shaped front step decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it has about 1.5 mm.) Can be made small.

  In addition, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are also small movable decorative bodies), for example, in FIG. An optical back rotation detection sensor 3120, etc. for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rear stage decoration portion 3116 and the middle stage decoration portion 3118 of the back rear movable decoration 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 shown. As described above, the sensor is disposed as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3312 (the same as the front stage decorative portions 3322, 3412 and 3422) which is a movable body using a large optical sensor. Is structurally difficult.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a small electronic component (back left bottom magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back bottom left front end decoration substrate 3321a, back right top end front decoration substrate 3411a, and back bottom right end front decoration substrate 3421a) is also small. The sensor is employed as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3312 (the same as the front stage decorative portions 3322, 3412 and 3422) which is a movable body by using a magnetic sensor. Although this magnetic sensor has a large variation in detection as compared to the above-described optical sensor, in the present embodiment, the previous stage decorative portion 3312 (the previous stage decorative portions 3322, 3412, and 342 which are movable bodies are the same). Even if the standby position (original position) is deviated and deviated, the deviation is small, and the probability of giving a sense of discomfort to the player is low.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the same applies to the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420) moves in the lateral direction, moves in the vertical direction, or Such a back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right lower movable part 3312 (first upper decorative part 3312) The same applies to the movable decorative body 3420.) The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the lower left lower end decorative board 3321a, the upper right upper end decorative board 3411a, and the lower right lower end decorative board 3421a). The light from various light emission sources (a plurality of light emission sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident from multiple directions on the LED mounting surface of the LED.

  For this reason, the above-described optical is mounted on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the back lower left front end decorative substrate 3321a, the back upper right front end decorative substrate 3411a, and the back lower right front end decorative substrate 3421a). If a sensor of the formula is mounted, light from various light sources (plural light sources) provided on the game board 5 may be erroneously detected as disturbance light (light damage).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described magnetic sensor is employed also for this reason. Therefore, the erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the preceding decoration portion 3312 (preceding decoration portions 3322, 3412 and 3422) by the light emitted from the various light emission sources (plural light emission sources) provided on the game board 5 It can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the optical sensors provided in the various effect units described above are such that light from various light sources (plural light sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light) (Because it is weakened to the extent that it does not become (light pollution)), there is no risk of false detection due to the light.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 3311 ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 200 and supplies a constant current to the full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) And a maximum current setting circuit 3311 ac capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to full-color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311 acx is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283 x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the lower left decoration board 283 shown in FIG. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, the constant current is controlled to flow to the full color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac is a sink (suction) type, the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing to the full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8). Therefore, the heat distribution of the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac can be dispersed by receiving a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 3311 ac by the heat distribution circuit 3311 ad. The heat dispersion circuit 3311 ad is the same circuit as the heat dispersion circuit 283 c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the lower left decoration substrate 283 shown in FIG.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for specifying a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 3311 ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283 a of the lower left decoration substrate 283 shown in FIG. 200 as described above, the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, while the back left upper first stage decorative substrate 3311 a has eight full color LEDs 3311 aa (1) to 3311 aa (8), and a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311 ab, etc. mounted on its LED mounting surface The LED constant current drive circuit 3311 ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a has the above-described configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment, the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, and reflectance according to the third embodiment. One of the configurations of the countermeasure for the reduction and the like and the configuration of the countermeasure for the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine in which the rendering operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by a presentation control device (control means) has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraph Figure 3 and Figure 22)). By the way, in the game board, there is an environment under strong influence of electromagnetic wave noise, and in the structure of the game board, the environment under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise among various wirings connected with the effect control device (control means) When electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into another wiring through the drawn wiring, there is a possibility that the effect control device (control means) may malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise from the other wiring.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a movable body on a gaming board has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraphs [0067], FIG. 18 and FIG. 19)). The movable body has a detection piece projecting, and the position of the movable body is specified by detecting the detection piece by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body. By the way, when the movable body is provided with an optical detection switch to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light is generated by the light emitted from a plurality of light emitters provided on the game board while the movable body is in operation. It becomes disturbance light and is incident on the optical detection switch, which may cause erroneous detection.

[13. Brightness setting of indirect light and direct light]
A light guide plate such as the light guide plate 2601 of the panel plate 1110 of FIG. 143 and the surface rendering unit 2600 of FIG. 155 is directed to a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line from the end face (a circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110 of FIG. Light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 shown in FIG. 155, and light from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601; The light from a plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620, which is decorated by emitting light, is incident on the light from the inner surface of the light guide plate when light from the following is described as “LED used as indirect light”. Is irradiated.

  The various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units such as the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. Other LEDs not used for various light guiding plates such as various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side such as the back down rendering unit 3100, the back up rendering unit 3200, the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back right rendering unit 3400 included in the board 5 (Hereinafter, it may be described as "LED used as direct light.") Is irradiated as direct light. Therefore, when the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are the same, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. The player wants to adjust to dark when the current luminance of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is too bright, and to adjust it brightly if it is not too dark.

  By the way, various LEDs are mounted on various decoration boards provided on the game board side and various decoration boards provided on the door frame side, and one or more LED constant current drive circuits are mounted. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 from light off to lighting (maximum luminance) It is something that can be done.

  Further, as described above, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and are composed of ID information and gradation information There is. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

  Further, as described above, the light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control substrate 1510 The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for specifying a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which one of the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127 is to be designated.

  The gradation designated by the gradation information described above is performed by the display control unit monitoring processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing and the lamp pallet setting processing in the received command analysis processing in the peripheral control unit power on processing described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is set. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. ,, Respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp pallet setting process Then, the gradation information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during a demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in the player waiting state) or in progress For example, within a predetermined period of a specific effect, the lamp palette setting process can be executed to update the gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Here, the luminance designation values, the normal pallet values, and the special pallet values that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. The designated luminance value may be set to one designated luminance value within a range of 32 steps ranging from the zeroth designated luminance value which is the minimum luminance (turned off) to the 31st designated luminance value which is the maximum luminance. It is possible values, and a normal pallet value and a special pallet value which will be described later in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value are respectively set in advance. The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated, and the 31st brightness from the first brightness designated value to the maximum brightness One designated brightness value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) is the case where the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, and the current brightness is temporarily set to the minimum brightness (turns off). When the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the value is set, a predetermined equation (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance designation value toward the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance. While changing the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light along the tone curve or spline curve tone curve, the rotation operation unit 302 is reversed In the case of rotating clockwise, when the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined equation (for example, the first brightness specified value) from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set. Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and press the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) can set the luminance while a demonstration (demonstration effect in a player waiting state) or a presentation is in progress. At this time, the player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) can set the desired luminance by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 while a demonstration or effect is in progress, the first designated luminance value A bar-like indicator indicating the position up to the designated luminance value 31 is displayed to visually indicate as an image how much the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) is. It can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, a fourteenth designated luminance value is set as an initial value (default).

  The normal pallet value is set as the gradation information described above for the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. is there. For the normal pallet values, one of 17 steps in 5% steps from the minimum pallet value (20%) which is the minimum value to the maximum pallet value (100%) which is the maximum value is selected, and the luminance described above A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is a designated value Or spline curve-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which are the luminance specification values described above It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and the other pallet values are similarly the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the luminance designation value described above (%) described in parentheses Of the 32 levels ranging up to the 31st luminance designation value, this is the value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side. Among various decoration boards provided on the game board side, which are set as the gradation information described above and which are irradiated as direct light, a pallet (not shown) for a specific decoration board (an LED that feels dazzling to the player) The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information as to the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates used for a light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal pallet value, the special pallet value is present in only one step, and is one of 32 steps ranging from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which are the luminance designation values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  If the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light as described above, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special pallet value instead of the normal pallet value set for the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. To visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the minimum luminance (turned off). As the lowest possible luminance, the normal pallet value is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value One of the designated luminance values and the corresponding pallet value are set along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of each of The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light while being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value The designated luminance value and the corresponding special palette value are set according to the operation 303. Thereby, when the brightness of the LED used as direct light is felt to be dazzling, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used as the light. Set the luminance of the LED to be used to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is at a stage where the luminance is higher next to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the minimum luminance (turned off)) The brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is higher than the 0th (zero) brightness specification value at which the minimum Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is normally set to a value substantially equal to the 18th luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side separately from the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it does not set, the flow of the effect by the light emission aspect of the various LEDs mounted on the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side by setting the light emission aspect according to the flow of the effect After setting the palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) usually for a particular decoration substrate that is too dazzled (or a slightly darker luminance can exhibit more rendering effects), By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission aspect can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a clerk in the game hall or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designated value 31st Even if one luminance designation value ranging up to the luminance designation value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one luminance designation value is set for a specific decoration substrate. For the other decorative substrates, one luminance specification value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set respectively, so that the relationship between the light emission modes set mutually (bright or dark) It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the indirect light by the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the luminance as compared to the direct light, it is different from the normal pallet value for the LED used as the indirect light (that is, a special pallet value different from the ordinary pallet value) The brightness can be set by the Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the luminance of the LED used as direct light is normally managed by the pallet value, so the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a light emitting means is provided on a rendering member provided on a game board and light emission decoration can be performed using light of the light emitting means as direct light (e.g., JP-A-2016-154676) (Paragraphs [0021], FIG. 2 and FIG. 5)). However, when the light of the light emitting means provided in the effect member is used as indirect light, the light used in the indirect light is darker than in the case where the light of the light emitting means provided in the effect member is used as direct light. There has been a problem that it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the means and the light emitting means used as direct light.

[14. Game content]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hit strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B in one minute continuously. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N Thus, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the gaming ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at a suitable position in the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it abuts on a plurality of obstacle nails N, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage 2503 roll on the stage 2503 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the gaming ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the gaming area 5a, the portion is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, so it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  The game balls B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left and right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B struck into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side (so-called right-handed) than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 , And enters the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 of the center part 2500 and passes through the gate portion 2003 disposed in this space with a certain probability. The gaming ball B circulated in the space where the gate unit 2003 is disposed is discharged from the right guiding passage 2510 to the top of the attacker unit 2400.

  Below the downstream end of the right guiding passage 2510, a general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is disposed, and when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has been hit to the right passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery result is “normal hit”. The second start port 2004 closed in the attacker unit 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004. . Then, when the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are placed on the upper tray 201. Be paid out.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0) .01 to 60 seconds, commonly referred to as fluctuating time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 or the sub function display unit 2520 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result can not be started, The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is held until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”) advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 A lottery of a special lottery result is generated to generate “perform probability fluctuation (certain variation)” and “time reduction (time reduction) per unit time.” (Also referred to as a special fluctuation time) to suggest to the player that the special lottery result drawn by the game ball B being accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 There are "4R big hit", "16R big hit", "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per hit", "probability change short time hit", and so on.

  The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 generate the advantageous gaming state In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the gaming ball B, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the gaming ball B, many gaming balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

  When the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of receiving the game ball B, or a predetermined high winning opening 2005 If any one of the conditions (eg, ten pieces of game balls B) is received, an open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state is Repeat a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "4R big hit" is repeated for four rounds and if "16R big hit" for 16 rounds, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated repeatedly.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  If the special lottery result is "big hit", it is possible to generate ST (special time) as an advantageous gaming state after the big winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern. This ST is to maintain a definite change or a short time during a predetermined number of predetermined changes.

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 indicate the reception of the game ball B from the start of the special drawing until the special lottery result drawn is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be put on hold. The number of pending special lottery results pending is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter, suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 are set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by effect display device 1600, peripheral control board 1510 performs the rendering operation in effect operation unit 300 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the back effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, the back side It is possible to perform luminous effects, movable effects and the like by appropriately using the rendering unit 3200, the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back right rendering unit 3400, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

  Further, in peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by effect display device 1600, according to the special lottery result drawn, the front effect unit of front unit 2000 in game board 5 It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the back-down rendering unit 3100, the back-up rendering unit 3200, the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back right rendering unit 3400 etc. This is possible, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[15. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 185 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, and FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process of FIG. Is a flowchart showing First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

[15-1. Various random numbers]
As random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in deciding whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not reach is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated For a variation display pattern for use in determining a variation display pattern of a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and a random number for reach determination for use in determination A random number and a random number for a jackpot symbol for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot gaming state, and this jackpot A random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, a function display unit when generating a small hit gaming state A random number for the small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol displayed and derived by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of 400, for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol A random number for determining the initial value for small hit symbols etc. are prepared. Also, in addition to these random numbers, a random number per standard symbol determination used for determining whether to open or close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to receive the gaming ball, and this standard symbol per round determination Normal for determination of initial value per symbol for use in determination of initial value for random number Random for determination of variation display pattern of normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 A random number etc. for the symbol variation display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, while the jackpot determination random number is updated by hardware, other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit makes high speed presetting based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a, using one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. After extracting other values within the defined numerical range one after another and extracting all the values within the predetermined numerical range, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a obtains a value extracted from the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit It is supposed to be set as.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. The counter counts up from the random value for determining the initial value per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value per symbol for normal. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 14 when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated at the time of power on or in the main control side power on process described later. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the unit as a numerical value and the value of the checksum stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, for example, when it does not match (Sum value), the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. The same fixed value is always taken from the fixed numerical range of the counter which takes out the ID code and updates the random number for judgment per normal pattern based on the taken out ID code Perform initial value derivation to output a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is designed to always overwrite and update the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310 a The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM The second security measure that derives the same fixed value on the basis of and the two-step security measure by the second security measure is prevented from being analyzed by being taken.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the initial value per ordinary symbol. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is acquired illegally and the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normal determination and the judgment value per regular symbol coincide can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. A momentary stop is generated at every predetermined interval obtained, and even if the game ball is allowed to pass through the gate section 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece can be opened and closed so that the gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 Can not be generated.

[15-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310 a is configured to set a stack pointer at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 210 and FIG. 211, processing at the time of main control side power on is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

  Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register” which is incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a to set an initial value to the main control built-in WDT which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register to start the main control built-in WDT and start timing until the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is started until the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). It is done.

  Following step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the determination of step S16, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when determining in step S16 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear process of initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after power-on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, game information related to games such as probability fluctuation, unpaid award balls, and other information (for example, main award balls number) This flag is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including the information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), etc. It is set to 1 when deleting various information, and 0 when not deleting various information. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting for activation (booting). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot.

  Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on the power failure advance signal. If it is determined in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU 1310 returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to start counting again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310 a performs the main control side power-on process again. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure notification signal, the main control MPU 1310 determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information, and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the various information is not erased, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the value of the calculated checksum (sum value) with the value (sum value) of the checksum stored in the main control-side power failure process (during power failure) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S30). If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in main control internal RAM in main control side power off processing described later It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection. Detailed explanation about, is mentioned below.

  In the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power is restored. A work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where the power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary interruption, illegal means (for example A high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310 a itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, since various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to delete various information, or in the determination of step S30. If the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in the determination of step S32. That is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f instructs the RAM clear, the main control MPU 1310 a instructs to clear the various information, when the sum values do not match, or the main control side When the power-off process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the random symbol determination per normal symbol is updated based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process is always performed to derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned standard symbol determination random number for the initial pattern. Set to a decision random number.

  Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value of 0, for example.

  Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel) incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. In the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to (1), setting of the communication speed and setting of presence / absence of parity etc. are performed, and in the transmission serial port control register, setting of initialization of the transmission circuit and setting of transmission permission are made.

  Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs start setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310 a for updating by the hardware the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate the big hit gaming state or not The setting for latching and acquiring the random number is performed, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Once all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another without duplicating other values inside. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control internal hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control internal hard random number circuit, and the main control internal hardware when the latch signal is input The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310 a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to indicate that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created to be transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM Remember to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various kinds of information are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description of the point at which reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described later.

  Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). When shutting down the power supply of pachinko machine 1 or when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when the voltage falls below the power failure notification voltage. Be done. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure notification signal, the main control MPU 1310 performs non-coincidence random number update processing (step S56). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-falling random number updating process.

  After step S56, the main control MPU 1310a returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of the power failure notification signal, and if there is no input of the power failure notification signal, the non-falling random number update process is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that there has been an input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU 1310 performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

  Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414 and the like (step S62).

  Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the main control internal RAM can not be accessed by the setting of the RAM access prohibition, updating of the contents of the main control internal RAM can be prevented.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310 a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  As described above, when the main control MPU 1310 a is affected by electrical noise, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can not perform the determination of step S54 and can not perform the main control side power-off process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and executes the main control side power-on process again. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the value (sum value) of the checksum in the main control-side power-off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. When the power is shut off, the value (sum value) of the checksum stored when the main control side power-off process is executed, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit and restarted The value (sum value) can not match, and a check sum (sum value) error occurs in the main control internal RAM without fail, and the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

  Here, the point which performs determination of the presence or absence of the power failure alerting | reporting signal of step S24 following the wait time waiting | standby process of step S22 is demonstrated. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 Explain the problems in

  As described above, when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off as described above, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 196 is generated at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The charged charge is applied as direct current +5 V for about 7 milliseconds (ms) after occurrence of a power failure or a momentary stop. That is, even if the power from the island facility of the game hall is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the island charged with the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as direct current +5 V to make the island of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and an island facility of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed when the power supply from the above is shut off.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the standby time until the system performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment) 2.5 seconds has been set), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Charge is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control internal RAM are updated, the main control side power It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM, the value at which the checksum is calculated is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again at power recovery.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated by a staff such as a game hall at the time of power recovery, and it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if there is no intention indication by a staff such as a game hall staff called RAM clear. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the input of the power failure notification signal continues. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to start counting again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly As stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is made in step S10.

  Thus, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be Since it is possible to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restart the main control board 1310 by repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, it is possible to proceed with the game It can not, game information, and other information (for example, the value of the counter for main prize ball number information output judgment is shown Various information including the information) can be prevented from being updated, so as never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure advance signal is not input (that is, step S22 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process, pachinko machine Even if the power supply to 1 is shut off, the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, causes the game to be played according to the progress of this game and other information Backup for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off process composed of the processes of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop which is the process, the main control MPU 1310a When the main control MPU 1310 is restarted, the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculation result of the checksum in backup processing (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the "temporary power failure securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the “instant interruption or power supply securing period” of approximately 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is input, the determination in step S24 is performed. As long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to set the timer clear in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by setting the value, clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT and not starting the time counting again.

  Since the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and thereafter, in step S52) Contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number) by stopping the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later A mechanism was adopted in which it is possible to prevent the update of various information (including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter). In this way, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination To ensure that the main control side power-off process is completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and so on) By dividing the information into two parts, a part to be covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) is not changed at all , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.)) are surely prevented from being changed So that the can.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) To communicate, create a power on state command classified as power on, a power on main control return destination command, and a power on main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command and send it as main information with built-in main control It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, the problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the information for instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, A problem will be described in the case where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when power is turned on at the time of power on at the time of power on is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, a big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 performs main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored to start driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will shift to the state open from the state closed by the member.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the big hit gaming state I can not show at all which round of. That is, for example, a game winning ball 1 enters a large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning opening 1 count display command for conveying the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005 is a main control board Even if the peripheral control board 1510 transmits and transmits to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the effect that the number of balls of the game ball entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Although it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 ends, for example, the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral winning control board 1510 from the main control board 1310 a large winning opening 1 closing display command instructing to shift to the closed state (that is, start closing the round between the big winning port 2005 of the attack unit 2400). When the main control board 1310 starts five rounds (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, it starts to drive the attacher solenoid 2414 and opens the big winning opening 2005 from being closed by the opening / closing member. To shift to the state where the game is being played (that is, the fifth round of To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that informs the player that the game state is advantageous (for example, the player that the movable piece is open The main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece and causes the second starting port to open when the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the screen to be transmitted to the display area of the effect display device 1600. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the status 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, thereby starting the drive of the starting port solenoid 2412 and closing the movable piece So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the gaming state and the gaming ball is in the gaming state in which the game ball can be received to the second start port 2004 and the gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return, it is a gaming state where the gaming ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is realized. The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen to be transmitted on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and the gaming ball receives the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or a power failure occurs at the time of power recovery. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible gaming state, and in such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. In spite of that, the screen for instructing a game in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen for instructing a game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not understand what kind of game they played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power on state command classified as power on in step S50, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts being driven by the attachment solenoid 2414 as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from being closed by the opening / closing member The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it should shift to the state, so the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit gaming state and the A screen (for example, "It is a big hit. A big winning opening is opened. A game winning ball is put in the big winning opening. For example, the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. The game of “Please play the game so that the ball is played.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600) to the player and the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine has a big winning opening 2005 Can be instructed to enter a game ball into the game ball, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game state becomes an acceptable game state in which the game ball can be received to the second starting port 2004 and a game state advantageous to the player In this state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power returns, the drive of the start port solenoid 2412 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310 to open the movable piece. (Eg, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening.") The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the effect display device 1600 a screen to transmit a message to the player, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine receives the game ball in the second starting opening 2004 after power recovery. It is possible to instruct the game of making a ball.

  As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, it is possible to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28. The calculation and the determination of step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off process at one time, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the checksum values should match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared in step S38.

  As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at the time of power on is performed in step S50, the power on state command classified as power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power on status command, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball Only three commands, ie, the number information output judgment counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt process described later, these commands are first sent a power on status command, then a power on primary control return destination command is sent, and then the power on main notification ball number An information output determination counter notification command is to be transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, in the power-on state command, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated when the power is turned on (in addition to power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information to instruct that when performing RAM clear and the above mentioned at power on (In addition to power on, it also includes power recovery when power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to recover from among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, and high probability non-time saving state, and model code of pachinko machine And information to be shown. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type as a pachinko machine 1 (precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, In addition to the game specification that the game specification is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of

  In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs).

  As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on state in step S50, the power-on state command divided into the power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line, and the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine that is included in the power-on state command received from the device, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is configured. And the sweet digital type, the serial code for specifying which type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state is In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation is in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited The main control board 1310 is for the copyright of any work by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) It is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which type) the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine in which, when probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of multiple types of works coexists, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually distinguish the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work by being able to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually observing the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not compatible with the game board 5 for the copyright of the work It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[15-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lighted in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process. The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmitted in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric symbol control process to be described later When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has properly received various commands is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310 a detects, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002. A signal, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002 b constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 2401 That the payout control board 633 has normally received a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. Read out the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys Is stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM. Also, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are read respectively, the starting opening winning command divided into the other corresponding to this is used as the transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. It stores in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting opening sensor 2402 When there is a detection signal of (1), the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in the state (including the case where the vacant terminal process is performed) being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a. First, each reading is performed as a first reading, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, reading is performed again as a second reading. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. We treat the same result and the one that there is no game ball entering.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the states (including those subjected to the idle terminal process) input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are repeated from the first time to the third time. Therefore, false reading due to the influence of chattering or noise can be avoided by performing two readings, ie, two readings to compare and two readings comparing to the second to fourth times. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002, the first A detection signal from the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002 b constituting the starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a winning prize opening set A detection signal from the server 2403, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, a prize ball transmitted in the prize ball control process described later It is possible to enhance the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has received the command normally.

  Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a, the status of the terminal subjected to idle terminal processing is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as free terminal processing, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is whether the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the vacant terminal process among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW or not. Do based on When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the free terminal processing is not LOW, it is classified into a notification display notifying that a fault is occurring in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. The trouble command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a true random number update process (step S106). In this success random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for big hit symbols and the random number for small hit symbols are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-falling random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only when the hit random number update processing is performed. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And as a mechanism to update the random number for the initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out gaming balls is created based on the input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633. Create a self-check command to check the connection between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and the self check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball When a dispenser ACK signal notifying that the dispensing control board 633 has received the command normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is used. It is created and sent to the payout control board 633 or the like.

  In the prize ball control process of step S108, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the input information. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified as other to indicate that, is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter reads out the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, that is, the first starting opening 2002 Based on the game balls entered in the various winning openings (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5") such as the second starting opening 2004 and the large winning opening 2005 etc. It counts the number of game balls scheduled to be played, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determining counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determining counter The input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is added to the value of. When it is over (ie, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls has reached 10 balls), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that effect, and as transmission information The value indicating the number of balls exceeded as well as the value stored in the output information storage area is used as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, the prize ball scheduled information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above It is adapted to store update.

  Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error cancellation navi command, and a frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as the payee serial data, information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1310 a shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command divided into status display, And frame status 2 command)), and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. In the case where the logic is different, an incorrect ball (a game ball or a metal ball of almost the same diameter as that of the game ball or almost the same as that of the game ball or the like) It is judged that fraudulent action (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation got") by radio wave irradiation using synthetic resin spheres of a diameter is performed, and the value of the radio wave irradiation got counter is incremented by 1 (increment) Do. The value of the radio wave got counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation got is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation lot counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the cheating detection process is performed on the main control side timer interrupt process). And a radio wave irradiation goto notification command divided into a notification display that tells that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and stores it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Here, the radio wave irradiation goto will be briefly described as follows. A ball with a flexible string (a wire, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter or the like) attached (a game ball or a metal of about the same diameter) The ball or synthetic resin ball of approximately the same diameter is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and enters the first starting opening 2002 and the first starting Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the gaming ball is stopped in an area (a ball passing detection area of the first starting opening sensor) for detecting the gaming ball passing through the mouth sensor. Thereby, when radio wave irradiation is performed (that is, when radio wave irradiation is turned on) in a state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first starting opening sensor, the logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor is It becomes a logic that it does not detect the game ball, but it becomes a logic that the logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor detects the game ball when the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned off) . That is, the ball passing detection of the first starting opening sensor is repeated by repeatedly turning on or off the electric wave irradiation in the state where the gaming ball is stopped in the ball passing detection area of the first starting opening sensor. A signal indicating that a plurality of gaming balls have passed through the area can be created in a pseudo manner and output from the first starting opening sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to be able to discover such radio wave irradiation goto, a dimension larger than the erroneous detection preventing distance dimension between the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor slave side 3002b. They were spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). Thereby, temporarily, an irregular ball attached with a flexible string-like operation line is driven from the upper plate 201 through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 and intrudes into the first starting opening 2002 The game ball passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a (the ball passing detection area of the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a) or the game ball passing through the first starting opening sensor secondary side 3002b Even if the parked state can be formed in the area (the ball passing detection area of the first start port sensor slave side 3002b) that detects the The logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a are necessarily different by repeating turning off or repeating When the value of the radio wave irradiation got counter reaches the upper limit value, it generates a radio wave irradiation goth notification command that is divided into a notification display that tells that radio wave irradiation got is being performed, and it is used as transmission information. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In this embodiment, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a salesclerk of a game hall can find radio wave irradiation got at an early stage by reliably detecting and reporting radio wave irradiation goto by such a mechanism. It is supposed to be.

  Further, in the injustice detecting process in step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not the big hit gaming state (big winning opening In the case where the game ball enters the ball in 2005), etc., a prize-abnormality display command to be classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It acquires from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control internal ROM. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as "special lottery".)), Or take out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number, determine the probability variation hit stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches the value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation).

  Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) with low probability and are read from the normal determination table, while value 31768 with the high probability 32767 is set and read out from the probability variation judgment table. As described above, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM When it is determined whether or not the stored big hit determination value matches, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the big hit determination range Do it depending on whether it is

  When these determination results (lottery results) are from the first starting opening sensor 3002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting opening sensor 2402 If it is based on the special figure 2 create various commands related to the tuning effect, store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and determine the variation display pattern of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned random number for variation display pattern First special symbol display or second special symbol of function display unit 1400 to light the first special symbol display or second special symbol display of function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol The output of the lighting signal to the display is set, and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, large win) A winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times that the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 Of the lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp to light the round indicator lamp A lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp to light up the 15-round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 when the power is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information or when the round is 15 times Setting the output of the lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 so as to set the output of the function display unit as the output information and store the presence or absence of occurrence of probability fluctuation in a predetermined color, It is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric combination control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter etc. for updating the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol determination is extracted and the gate of the main control internal RAM is extracted as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the 3rd gate information storage Store in compartments.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned normal lighting indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the gate information, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed in this determination, the movable piece is in the open state, and the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, and the game state becomes advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into a common figure synchronization effect relationship are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal symbol while storing in the area, and the output information Are stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the ordinary electric part production are created and transmitted. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece as information and stored in the transmission information storage area, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. If the value of the random number per symbol judgment does not match the normal symbol judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random symbol display pattern random number pattern , While creating various commands classified in relation to a common figure tuning effect, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to illuminate the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the decided ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember to

  Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control substrate 633 when reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 633 is normally completed from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information Output a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005 when it is in a big hit gaming state, and outputs a drive signal to a start opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes a movable piece Besides, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability variation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, starting opening winning Various information (gaming information) signals relating to the game such as information output signals to the payout control board 633 A force to or.

  Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various commands classified in special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified in special figure 2 synchronous effect related, big hit related Various commands (for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power on, various commands classified as related to common drawing tuning effect, various commands classified as related to regular electric circuit production, various commands classified as notification display, various types classified as status display Commands, various commands classified as test related and other various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 The main prize ball number information output signal is used as the main prize ball number information whenever the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls based on the game balls entered into the various winning openings to be A main prize ball number information output command or the like for instructing transmission to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 is stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the various commands are configured as main cycle serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main transmission serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission as main transmission serial data from the transmission shift register It is possible to When power is turned on to pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after power on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. The power on state command divided into power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information output judgment counter in order to convey that power recovery is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be executed A notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, as the main cycle serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Send to peripheral control board 1510 and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, status, mode, and sum value Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timing by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 or the adder solenoid 2414 which is an electric drive source by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be done. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. The power-on state command divided into power-on to indicate that power has been turned on (power-return) based on the power-on time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area. The main control return destination command at power on and the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command at power on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine. In peripheral control board command transmission processing, a power on state command is configured as main cycle serial data, Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value to configure the power-on main control return destination command. Subsequently, when the power is turned on, the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output determination is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery as the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be displayed on the screen. By this, when the player is playing a game, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power loss or power failure is restored promptly after power recovery. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for being seen and broken down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  Also, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power of the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thus, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 211, the power on state command classified as power on when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power on is performed. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output judgment at power on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information. A state in which only three commands, status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the peripheral serial data, configure the power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in this order, and then, when the power is turned on, the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is configured. Status, mode, and sum value It transmits to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process constructs information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 The above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs when the probability change occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited Machine) and display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying It has become.

[16. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on, and FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on of FIG. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[16-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
First, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 213 to 215, under the control of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control portion 633a of the payout control board 633, the processing at the power on of the payout control portion is performed. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 633aa. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output setting (input / output setting of I / O) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633 aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure advance signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power interruption occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), when the voltage decreases and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure notification. Ru. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Following step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is HI based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f While it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not operated, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is LOW. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633 aa can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control internal RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120 a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633 aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the CR communication information storage area is set. This flag is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. is to be erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (power-off) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPU 633aa matches, it is determined whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is equal to 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process ends normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally.

  When it is determined in step S528 that the payout control MPU 633aa that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, The work area of is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 633 aa (that is, the ROM for payout control) and at the time of this power recovery. Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes the state where power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, when it is determined to clear the payout information, or in the determination of step S526. When the payout control MPU 633 aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout control MPU 633 aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 in the determination of step S 528 (value 0), that is, If it is determined that the processing at the time of power-off of the payout control unit is not normally ended, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is notified as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. It is input. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that there is no input of the power failure advance signal, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 1 and 2 ms have not elapsed. It is set.

  In the determination of step S 542, when the payout control MPU 633 aa determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S 540, and the payout control MPU 633 aa receives a power failure notification signal It is judged whether it is done or not.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544). ).

  Following step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command) are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as drive information, ball number information on the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 actually paid out the game balls, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and payout is made based on this output information. When various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 633 aa, the payout ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 Or the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 actually paid out the game balls is out as a prize ball number information output signal. And outputs to the terminal plate 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a counter for judging the number-of-balls information output judgment for judging whether or not to output the number-of-balls information is provided. The ball number of the game balls paid out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the ball number of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. It is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the value of the ball number of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeded) The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED indicator 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310 f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit , BRDY signal and CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, etc. Store in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not the ball arm state is generated by the discharge blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584 is transmitted, the ball arm judgment time set as the judgment condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, the lower plate 202 is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game balls stored in the full is full When it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 that is full. Besides performing time management such as the out-of-ball judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of balls of the game ball paid out by being received by the ball accommodating portion 589 b of the distraction blade 589 It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the game ball which is inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeated. At this time, time management of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time set as the judgment condition is performed. For example, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms when the ball set determination time is set to 5005 ms, the ball set determination time is reduced by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result is a value By becoming 0, it is measuring the ball gambling judgment time correctly. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input or not judge. The payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure. Thereby, even when the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation can not be continued due to a momentary stop or power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Since it is possible, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, while the payout control MPU 633 aa is exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU 633 aa causes a momentary power loss or a power failure while paying out the gaming ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it is not possible to continue the payout of the game balls, the number of ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to a value such as a prize ball stock number PBS, a real ball count PB, a drive command number DRV, an inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (delivery control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit just before stopping or power failure is restored. It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop upon power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. The various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of a momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Also, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power returns, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH based on and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation operates abnormally. If it is determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is abnormal, that is, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1, and in the payout ball game operation determination setting process, As setting of the error status to CR unit, for example, when not communicating with CR unit The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after power recovery, and the PRDY signal is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633 aa. Output to the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, since the state is restored at the time of power recovery, it is extremely early after power recovery. At the stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633 aa to the CR unit, and a payout device 580 can be delivered to the CR unit. Can be informed that the game ball payout operation by the player is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  Also, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko machine When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to indicate that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible. While the logic state of the signal is HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. When the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The state of the logic of the EXS signal that indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Following step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs full tank and out-of-balls check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the gaming ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 The number of gaming balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the above-mentioned ball guiding unit 570 is determined by the detection signal from the ball breakage detecting sensor 574 or more by the detection signal from the ball breakage detecting sensor 574 or more. It is determined whether or not the For example, the determination as to whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the gaming balls stored therein uses the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to check from the full detection sensor 154 in the current full / full out check process. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and out-of-ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns from OFF to ON When transition is made, counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower plate 202 stores the full game information in the above-described state information storage area, which indicates that the game ball is full and it is full. Do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full information is transmitted to the state information storage area to indicate that the lower tray 202 is not full with gaming balls stored therein.

  It is also determined whether the number of gaming balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to check whether the current tank is full or not. When the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball breakage check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is When transitioning from OFF to ON, clocking of the ball out determination time described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started. Then, when the ball out determination time has become 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time has come, whether the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out of ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When information is stored in the state information storage area while the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of gaming balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is reported to indicate that the connection between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operations such as winning balls, lending balls, dropping balls, and ball gloves are set, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of winning balls stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read out from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 633c of the payout control board 633 is created and output information storage area mentioned above as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command and frame state 2 command) to be classified into the state display based on the various information are created. Then, it transmits to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of balls of the gaming ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 or the like.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the payout control MPU 633aa returns the process to step S539 again, sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, and port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. Perform timer update processing, and step S5 At step S556, the CR communication process is performed, at step S556 a full tank and ball out check process is performed, at step S558 a command reception process is performed, at step S560 a command analysis process is performed, and at step S562 a main operation setting process is performed. The LED display data creation process is performed in S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa will vary. Therefore, the payout control MPU 633 aa preferentially outputs to the main control substrate 1310 a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payment from the main control substrate 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 633 aa secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that there has been an input of a power failure advance signal, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Following step S 574, the payout control MPU 633 aa performs setting for clearing the watchdog timer (step S 576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Following step S 580, the payout control MPU 633 aa prohibits access to the payout control internal RAM (step S 582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S 582, the payout control MPU 633 aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 633 aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633 aa) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the payout control unit is turned on when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, whether or not the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit has been normally completed Is examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[16-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to be inhibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 216 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[17. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU, the RAM, the VDP, the VRAM, the sound source, the SATA controller, various I / O interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[17-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the power-on process of the peripheral control unit is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs processing for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, but the time taken for the processing for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, a command related to control of a game effect, which is output from the main control board 1310 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command regarding the state of pachinko machine 1, or.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour, minute, and second are acquired from a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. The current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM.

  In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once at the time of power on. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs this current time information acquisition processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a to indicate that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a can be received. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be executed, which will be described later, which is triggered by the event. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. After the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, it outputs a clear signal to external WDT so that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, that is, it is determined that peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, etc., the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300, and pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and the like) Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in which the operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set. Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode according to the adjusted brightness Rewrite generation schedule data. Thereby, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect is advanced by the volume and the brightness after the adjustment.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs lamp pallet setting processing as one processing of the rendering operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table configured from the above-described designated luminance value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value And, respectively. During the demonstration (demonstrating demonstration in a player waiting state) and effects, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation) When one luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance is set by operating the portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303), the set luminance The gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so as to be a designated value.

  Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thus, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, outputting of the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. Although this can prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropouts may occur, but the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame by sound data output processing described later. From the various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to effects by music or sound effects adapted to various effects.

  Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and sets the output channels to various speakers Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from the head screen data among the screen data arranged in time series that configures the screen generation schedule data To update the pointer.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate which light emission data is to be output starting from the light emission data at the top among the light emission data arranged in time series that configures the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, the sound at the top of the sound command data instructing sound data such as music and sound effects and sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in time series that make up the sound generation schedule data The pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is to be output from the command data to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, it is assumed that the drive data of the first one is output target Update the pointer to indicate what to do. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the data is forcibly updated so as to designate the driving data to be originally designated in the scheduler updating process.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, and the various commands received are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for the play-ahead-related effect). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a Analyze the various commands The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands ( Extract) and set in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs lamp pallet setting processing as one processing of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table configured from the above-described designated luminance value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value And, respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp pallet setting process. And the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the above-mentioned first brightness designated value to the maximum brightness. When one luminance designation value ranging up to 31 luminance designation values is set, the gradation information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to become the set luminance designation value. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, start opening winning command for instructing the start of starting opening winning effect, a normal symbol of Normal symbol memory command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, symbol memory command which is output when the number of start suspension changes, a special winning opening Whether or not it is a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in 2005 is analyzed, and it is recognized which gaming state is currently.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyze various commands. The various commands include various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effects, various commands classified into big hit relation, various commands classified into power on, Figure: Various commands classified into a related to the tuning effect, Various commands classified into the common electric wave production related, Various commands classified into the notification display, Various commands classified into the status display, Various commands classified into the test related, There are various commands divided into others. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing for notice etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The driving source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification display, they are set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510 b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, hour, minute, and second which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated, and calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the updated time information The date is updated.

  Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed from the control ROM 1510b among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data. It reads out (extracts) and outputs it to VDP of peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, among the sound command data arranged in time series that the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and that is the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It reads out (extracts) from the control ROM 1510 b and sets it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a. When sound command data is input from the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and performs sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers defined in the sound command data. In addition, set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the volume adjustment switch 1510d is selected based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and is set in this sound data creation processing in the sound data output processing of step S1018. Output sound data from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are made to flow from various speakers according to various effects.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without being totally dependent on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is surrounded by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is designed to be able to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume small, the pachinko machine 1 reduces the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the various speakers. The notification sound set to the large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow when the problem occurs in the above or when the player is performing a wrongdoing. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for a clerk such as a salesperson in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act. Also, based on the current volume set by volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent it from interfering with music or sound effects. There is a possibility that the screen (image) developed in the effect display device 1600 may be rendered more powerful as the sound volume is increased to add music and sound effects, or the game state may be shifted to the player's advantageous gaming state. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 are stored in SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1, Copy to the regular process backup area provided in 1510 c 2 and back it up.

  Following step S1034, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a sets the flag SP-FLG to 0 during steady processing as completion of peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value V is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to S1008 are performed. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The process of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, starting from setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing, and in step S1010 the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing , And step S1036 and finally, in step S1038, when the value in the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as the completion of the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG can receive screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510 a to the peripheral control IC 1510 a. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[17-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when a V blank signal is transmitted from the VDP of peripheral control IC 1510 a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 a. Will be explained. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0, as shown in FIG. 218 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 217 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is a value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not change End the routine On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the stationary processing in progress flag SP-FLG has the value 0, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been completed. -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being performed. If V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, peripheral control unit steady processing is currently executed, assuming that peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1006 in peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 217 is for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 in step S1008 in the source activation process (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to V blank signal interrupt processing, in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the present routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is determined by the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the present routine. It is determined whether the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. To have. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1006 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

17-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power on processing in FIG. 217 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. 219 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. If it is determined, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1100 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment; step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power on process in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a, the pointer indicates Drive an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, update the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and update the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed Do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) ) Are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to determine history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, the original Position history information, movable position history information, etc. are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various rendering units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a By grasping the movable position by setting or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs rendering operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors is determined by determining whether detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 are input (for example, a rotation operation unit The rotation (rotation direction) history information 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 by operating the effect operation unit 301. It becomes possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs (LED 1130a, 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa, etc.) which are mounted in plural on various decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 There is.

  Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are stored. The data is copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510 c 1 and 1510 c 2. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510 a are set to different areas, and the SDRAM 1510 c 1 , And 1510 c 2 are set in different areas from the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in 1510 c 2 and the backup area for steady processing provided in the SDRAMs 15 10 c 1 and 15 10 c 2.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effect of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as progress of effect within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 217, various processing relating to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also produced in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

17-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and as a trigger, the main peripheral serial data is 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a The information in (1) is taken into the receiving buffer, and when the taking-in is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 220 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When it is determined in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a has 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the time that can be received, 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3, that is, the mode which is still the second byte of main cycle serial data following the status which is the first byte of main cycle serial data. If it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1 byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a sets the reception counter SRXC to the value 3, that is, the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data. If it is determined that a sum value, which is a third mode of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode and the main cycle serial data, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should be consistent with the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the island facility of the game hall, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise It is under the environment of accepting files.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is judged whether or not. Thereby, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data changes to main peripheral serial data different from normal under the influence of noise between the main control substrate 1310 and peripheral control substrate 1510. It can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212 If it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), End this routine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1200 that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a does not time out the 1 byte reception period timer, that is, 1 byte (8 bits) of the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 When it is determined that the period for which information can be received is exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine ends.

17-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing that is executed when the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control substrate 1310 is input from the main control substrate 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a first starts a 2 microsecond timer as shown in FIG. It is determined (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1302 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, the routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has input a power failure advance signal, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a does not pass 2 macro seconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure notification signal is input, and the power failure notification signal is not input When it is determined, while this routine is ended as it is, when it is determined that a power failure advance signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues to input the power failure notification signal for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is this routine is started, the power saving processing is performed. The operation is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the effect display device 1600, the turning off of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, the turning off of various LEDs, etc. By restraining, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate.

  Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to a steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Following step S1310, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S1312). If it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has received a power failure advance signal, the CPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a from being reset.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again, and whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. Determine if That is, it will be judged infinitely whether the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing determination in this manner, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can not output a clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined in step S1312 that the power failure notification signal is not input. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, while the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal is input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314 to select the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 217 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure notification signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It is supposed not to catch it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[18. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2610, the second pattern 2630, etc. of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 are not displayed in a luminous manner. In a state (normal state) where the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is not light-emitting and decorative by the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is always visible from the front Since the visibility is assisted by the back left back decoration board 3360 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right back decoration board 3460 of the back right rendering unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 disposed behind the panel board 1110 , For the player in the game area 5a While being able to recognize that the decoration pattern 1150 is formed in the site | part of the outer side of the frame-shaped center character 2500, since the light-guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state, the frame of the center character 2500 is It is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect display device 1600 or the like capable of displaying the effect image arranged behind the inside in a good state. At this time, since the frame-shaped center character 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 is made transparent to allow the decorative pattern 1150 to be visible from the front, the center character 2500 can be seen through the center character 2500 in the decoration pattern 1150. The part located behind the center character 2500 can also be visually recognized, and the whole of the decoration pattern 1150 can be visually recognized.

  The decoration pattern 1150 is emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and can be emitted and decorated by the light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110, so the light from other than the side surface is appropriately directed Because it is possible to reflect, the light from the LED such as the decorative body and the movable decorative body provided in the present pachinko machine 1, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. A decoration is made by making appropriate parts of the decoration pattern 1150 appear to light by the light from the other pachinko machine being installed, the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, etc. The appearance of the pattern 1150 changes in various ways, and it is clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine in which the decoration sheet is attached to the game panel (panel board). It becomes possible to show the player the inside of the game area 5a of the elephant (atmosphere), and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player. The player can enjoy the decoration of the board 1110 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  In this normal state, light is made incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided at the corners (upper left corner and lower left corner) of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape. When the decoration pattern 1150 is made to emit light, the whole decoration pattern 1150 looks bright, so that the decoration pattern 1150 can be made to stand out, and the appearance of the portion outside the center character 2500 in the game area 5a can be improved. As well as being able to attract the attention of the player, the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, by making the decoration pattern 1150 emit light and decoration, the appearance of the decoration pattern 1150 can be different from when it is not light emission decoration, so the decoration of the panel board 1110 which could not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine It is possible to make the player think that something is good for the player, such as the arrival of a chance, etc., by having the decoration pattern 1150 be lighted and decorated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, when the decoration pattern 1150 is made to emit light and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 is made to emit light, outside the frame-shaped center character 2500 in the game area 5a. The light emission decoration is performed on the portion by the decoration pattern 1150, and the light emission display (light emission decoration) of the portion in the frame of the center character 2500 is performed by the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601. And because the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are design patterns continuous with each other, the entire inside of the game area 5a is a single pattern (here, a geometry consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines To create a light emitting decoration by the decoration of the design pattern), the entire appearance of the game area 5a It is possible to improve, it is possible to entertain the decoration in the game area 5a to the player. At this time, since the portion of the center character 2500 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed transparent, in the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110, the center character 2500 is formed. Since the portion positioned behind the portion in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 can be viewed from the front through the center character 2500, the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 or the second pattern It is possible to make the interruption between the pattern 2630 as small as possible, and for the player to be an integrated decoration in which the decoration pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are continuous. It can be made easy to recognize. Therefore, a large light emission decoration can be shown to the player by the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, thus giving a strong impact to the player. As a result, it is possible to convince the player that something good will occur, and to further increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is disposed at the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape, and an LED as a back light emission means is mounted at a position behind the panel plate 1110 and far from the panel decoration substrate 1130 Since the back right upper base decoration board and the back lower right base decoration board of the back right rendering unit 3400 are arranged, in the decoration pattern 1150, from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 to the side of the panel board 1110 Since it is possible to make the entire area of the decorative pattern 1150 emit light and decorate with uniform brightness, it is possible to make the entire area of the decorative pattern 1150 emit light and decorate, so that the pachinko machine exerts the above-mentioned effects. One can be embodied reliably.

  In addition, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are emitted to the center character 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 with respect to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110. Since the displayable transparent light guide plate 2601 is provided, the positions of the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be approached as close as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity when the light emission decoration is performed along with the decoration pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the above-described effects can be more easily exhibited. .

  Furthermore, since the transparent light guide plate 2601 capable of emitting and displaying the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 is provided in the frame of the frame-shaped center character 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. When the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 is displayed by light emission, a member (for example, displayed on the effect display device 1600) disposed in the frame of the center character 2500 (rear of the opening 1112) The effect image, the back movable decorative body 3110 of the back lower effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back movable movable body 3210 of the back upper effect unit 3200, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the back lower left The movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are The first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the plate 2601 makes it difficult to see, and the player can be made to notice the light emission display of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601. The first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be attracted to enjoy the decoration of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630.

  Further, as described above, the inside of the frame of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission by the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the center character in the game area 5a Since the light emission decoration of 2500 out of the frame can be performed by the decoration pattern 1150, the timing of light emission decoration of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 and the timing of light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 are combined as appropriate. Thus, it is possible to show the player various luminous effects, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the portion of the center character 2500 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed transparent, compared with the case where the notch is provided so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be viewed from the front, Since the surface (front) of the part can be made smooth, it becomes possible to make it difficult to affect the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game ball B moves unintendedly. The movement (flow) of the gaming ball B in the gaming area 5a can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed in substantially the same shape as the front component 1000 having a square outer shape and a substantially circular inner shape, so that the width between the inner periphery and outer periphery of the panel holder 1120 is a portion at four corners Will be the widest. And, since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the panel holder 1120, a space for attaching the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be easily secured, and, as a matter of course, Since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is positioned outside the panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is held by the panel holder 1120 in front view, the panel decoration substrate 1130 can not be seen in the game area 5a in front view, and the game area The appearance in 5a can be improved.

  Also, the panel holder 1120 is provided on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the front of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided on the panel holder 1120 can be covered by the front component 1000, so that The panel decoration substrate 1130 can be obscured from the side), and the appearance of the outside of the game area 5a can be improved. Further, since the panel decorative substrate 1130 can be made difficult to be seen from the player by the front component 1000, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the panel decorative substrate 1130. The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is less likely to be a light emitting decoration, and when the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 is performed, a strong impact can be given to the player, and It is possible to entertain the decoration and suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, thereby, in the normal state, the back downward movable decorative body 3110 of the back downward effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back upward movable decorative body 3210 of the back upward effect unit 3200, The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are respectively near the outer periphery of the game area 5a. Are in the standby position where they are separated from each other and dispersed, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the lower left upper movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decoration 3320, the lower right upper movable decoration The body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be used to decorate the periphery of the game area 5a, and can be used as a front unit The first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 of the table effect unit 2600 in 2000 are not displayed with light emission, and the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state, and is arranged at the center of the game area 5a The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the standby position, the back movable decoration 3110, the back movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration Since the body 3420 is separated from each other, the back movable decoration 3110, the back movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable The player that the decorative body 3420 gathers in a first combined position or a second combined position as a specific position to form a predetermined decoration mode (a first decoration mode of a hexagon or a second decoration mode of a ring) Can be difficult to recall, and can increase the impact when assembled. In this normal state, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back left top movable decoration 3310, the back left bottom movable decoration 3320, the back right top movable decoration 3410, and the back bottom right movable decoration 3420 , And when it is moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position, the first decoration aspect or the second decoration aspect is formed in order to form the first decoration aspect or the second decoration aspect near the center of the game area 5a. The appearance can surprise the player and can strongly attract the player's attention.

  Then, the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110, back-to-back movable decorative body 3210, back-upper-left movable decorative body 3310, back-bottom-left movable decoration 3320, back-upper-right movable decorative body 3410, and back-right lower-movable movable decoration 3420 When the first pattern 2610 as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 is made to emit light in the state of being moved to the second united position or the second united position, the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left While the decoration of each of the movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable movable body 3420 can be changed, the light emitting portion in the first pattern 2610 (first By changing the pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d), the back movable decorative ornament 311 The first decoration aspect and the second decoration which are formed by the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 Since the decoration of the embodiment can be variously changed, the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back movable movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back The pattern of the effect by the lower right movable ornament 3420 can be made various, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and also to give a strong impact to the player, something for the player It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest for the player's game by making the user think that there is a good thing.

  In the light guide plate 2601, the first pattern 2610a, the second pattern 2610b, the third pattern 2610c, and the fourth pattern 2610d of the first pattern 2610 emit light in order to emit light of a moving pattern Since the display can be made, it is possible to make the player feel strange by moving the first pattern 2610, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and the player is moved by the movement of the first pattern 2610. Can be entertained, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the first united back movable movable body 3110, back movable movable body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 When the second pattern 2630 is made to emit light as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 while being moved to the position or the second united position, the back movable movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left is made by the second design 2630 The outer periphery of the movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be emphasized, and the second image 2630 makes the movable decoration larger. While being able to show, the second design 2630 enables the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110, the back-to-top movable decorative body 3210, the back-to-upper-left movable decorative body 3310, the back-to-bottom movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be connected to each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decoration The body 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, the back right lower movable decoration 3420 and the second pattern 2630 can form one big decoration to give a strong impact to the player, It is possible to make the expectation for the game higher by making it think that there is something good.

  In addition, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are in a standby position At that time, the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 is made to emit light as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601, and the first combination position or the second combination position is near the center of the game area 5a. Decorate back movable movable body 3110, back movable movable body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable movable body 3420 at the second united position The first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a so that the first pattern 2 from the player side (forward) 10 or the second pattern 2630 can be visually recognized in a good condition, it is possible to entertain the first pattern 2610 and second pattern 2630 to the player. And in the state which made the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 emit light, the back bottom movable decoration 3110, the back top movable decoration 3210, the back left top movable decoration 3310, the back bottom left movable decoration 3320, the back top right movable decoration When the body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the lower left upper movable decorative body 3310 Because the lower left movable ornament 3320, the upper right movable ornament 3410, and the lower right movable ornament 3420 can be shown to the player such an effect that they are integrated with the first pattern 2610 and the second image 2630. The player can have a strong impact, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Also, the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110, back-to-back movable decorative body 3210, back-upper-left movable decorative body 3310, back-bottom-left movable decoration 3320, back-upper-right movable decoration 3410, and back-bottom-right movable decoration 3420 Or in the state of being moved to the second combined position, the back bottom back decoration substrate 3121, the back bottom front decoration substrate 3122, the back top back decoration substrate, the back top front decoration substrate, the back upper left base decoration board, the back top left front decoration Substrate, Back lower left base decoration board, Back lower left front decoration board, Back upper right base decoration board, Back upper right front decoration board, Back lower right base decoration board, Back lower right front decoration board When the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are made to emit light while the corresponding LED emits light, while the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are indirect light, the LED is close to direct light Because there is, the first pattern 26 Since the brightness of the part of the LED in 0 and the second pattern 2630 is high, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect which can not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine by the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 and the LED. It is possible to make the player have a strong impact, and to make the player think that there is something good to do, to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decline in interest Can.

  Furthermore, back bottom back decoration board 3121, back bottom front decoration board 3122, back top back decoration board, back top front decoration board, back left top base decoration board, back left top front decoration board, back left bottom base decoration board, back Backlighting is achieved by causing the LEDs mounted on the lower left front stage decorative board, the back upper right base stage decorative board, the back upper right front stage decorative board, the back lower right base stage decorative board, and the back lower right front stage decorative board to emit light. Since the movable decorative body 3110, the back movable movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made to emit light, The lower back movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are brightly lit. Lower movable decoration 3 10, back movable movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made to stand out, and a conventional pachinko machine and Similarly, the luminous ornaments of the lower back movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are played Can be entertained by

  In addition, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies moving from the standby position to the first combined position and the second combined position are provided, the back-to-back movable decorative body 3110, the back-to-top movable decorative body 3210, and the back top-left movable decorative body 3310 A plurality of movable decorations consisting of the lower left movable decoration 3320, the lower right upper movable decoration 3410, and the lower right lower movable decoration 3420 are separately moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position. After moving one movable decorative body to the first combined position or the second combined position, depending on whether the next movable decorative body moves to the first combined position or the second combined position, The player can be excited and excited, and the player can be entertained, and the timings at which the movable decorative bodies move to the first combination position and the second combination position are appropriately combined. The movable effects by a plurality of movable decorative body can be made more versatile, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  Furthermore, as described above, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right moveable decoration 3420 Movement, light emission of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 at the light guide plate 2601, and the back bottom back decoration substrate 3121, the back bottom front decoration substrate 3122, the back top back decoration substrate, the back top front decoration substrate, the back top left base Stage decoration board, back upper left front stage decoration board, back lower left base stage decoration board, back lower left front stage decoration board, back upper right base stage decoration board, back upper right front stage decoration board, back lower right base stage decoration board, back lower right By combining the light emission of the LED mounted on the previous stage decorative substrate as appropriate, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, by the light emission display of the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, the back movable decoration 3110, the back movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, And since the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is complemented between each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back Even if the upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 are not in contact with each other and there is a gap, the second design 2630 can hide the gap, so the back lower movable decorative body 3110, Back top movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 It is not necessary to increase the movement accuracy of each, so that the back movable decoration 3110, the back movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and The movement accuracy of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be low, and the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable It is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the moving mechanism of the decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back up movable decoration 3110 of the back down rendering unit 3100 as the pair of first movable decorations and the back up movable decoration 3210 of the back up rendering unit 3200 A back left upper movable decoration 3310 and a back lower left movable decoration 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300 as a second movable decoration and a back upper right movable decoration 3410 and a back lower right movable decoration 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are The back down movable decorative body 3110 and the back up movable decorative body 3210 face each other in the vertical direction around the effect display device 1600 disposed at the center of the game area 5a in front view. Back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right Since the moving decoration 3420 is mutually opposed in the left and right direction around the effect display device 1600, they are in a state of being separated and dispersed from each other, so the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration A body 3210, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 decorate the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the periphery of the game area 5a. As a result, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, and the player can enjoy the effect image.

  In the standby position, the pair of back left moving arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430, and the pair of back down moving arms 3130 and back up moving arm 3230 are separated from each other, and the back down movable decorative body 3110 Back up movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 together with the game area 5a in a front view Since the back left moving arm 3330, the back right moving arm 3430, the back down moving arm 3130, and the back up moving arm 3230 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 because the back left moving arm 3330, It is easy to see the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the player side (forward) without blocking It is possible to entertain an effect image in the state.

  Then, the pair of lower back moving arms 3130 and the upper back moving arms 3230 are moved closer to each other to move the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and the upper back movable decorative bodies 3210 to a first combined position as a predetermined position. The back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 are brought close to each other to back down the pair of back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and back left lower movable decorative body 3320 as well as the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decoration 3420 When the movable decorative body 3110 and the back-up movable decorative body 3210 are moved to the first combined position as a position for connecting them, they gather closely with each other in front of the effect display device 1600 at the center of the game area 5a in front view. Form one big first decoration aspect. As a result, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back left top movable decoration 3310, the back left bottom movable decoration 3320, the back top right movable are arranged so as to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 move to form the large hexagonal first decorative aspect, the back movable movable decorative body 3110 for the player, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made to notice movement, lower back movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable The decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 (a plurality of movable decorative bodies) It is possible to entertain the player and surprise the player by the appearance of the large first decoration aspect in the center of the game area 5a in front of the effect display device 1600, and something good for the player Can be made to increase the sense of expectation for the game as if there are any.

  In addition, the pair of back movable arms 3130 and the back movable arm 3230 is used as a second position between the standby position as the predetermined position and the first combined position. A pair of back left moving arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430 are moved to the combined position, and a pair of back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and back left lower movable decorative body 3320 as well as back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decoration When the 3420 is moved to the second combined position between the standby position and the first combined position as a position to connect the pair of back movable decoration 3110 and the back movable decoration 3210, the back movable decoration Body 3110, back-up movable decoration 3210, back left upper movable decoration 3310, back left bottom movable decoration 3320, back right upper movable decoration 3410, and back right bottom movable decoration 342 Since a second decoration form is formed in which the second ring forms a ring along the periphery of the hexagon, the back bottom movable decoration 3110, the back top movable decoration 3210, the back left top movable decoration 3310, and the bottom left bottom movable decoration 3320 The player can show the player a decoration which is distinctly different from the large hexagonal first decoration aspect in which the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are densely assembled. The player can make various effects by different decoration modes by back movable movable decoration 3210, back left upper movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable decoration 3320, back right upper movable decoration 3410, and back lower right movable decoration 3420 To make it difficult to get tired and to suppress the decline in interest. Also, from the state of the standby position, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left bottom movable decoration 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, and the back bottom right movable decoration In the effect of moving the 3420 to the first combined position via the second combined position, whether to move from the standby position to the second combined position or by moving from the second combined position to the first combined position, The player can be harassing and pounding at each scene, and the player can be entertained by the multi-stage effect to suppress the decrease in interest.

  By the way, the six back back movable decorative bodies 3110, back back movable decorative bodies 3210, back upper left movable decorative bodies 3310, back lower left movable decorative bodies 3320, back upper right movable decorative bodies 3410, and back lower right movable decorative bodies 3420 are at standby positions. When moving from the first united position to the first united position or the second united position, in the state of the standby position, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decoration 3310, the back bottom left movable decoration 3320, Since the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are separated from each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 It can be made difficult for the player to recall that the back right upper movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 gather to form the first decoration aspect and the second decoration aspect. . In addition, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back left upper movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back right upper movable decoration 3410, and the back bottom right movable decoration 3420 are from the standby position When moving to the one united position or the second united position, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 and the back top movable decorative body 3210 move without changing their orientations, and the back top left movable decoration 3310, the back bottom left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 change its direction to move, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body In 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420, since the direction is different between the standby position and the first combined position, in the standby position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper Forming the first decoration aspect by moving the decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310, back lower left movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, and back lower right movable decoration 3420 to a first combined position Can be hard to remind the player.

  More specifically, in the normal state, one vertex is directed upward in the back lower movable ornament 3110, and one vertex is directed downward in the back upper movable ornament 3210, and the back upper left movable ornament 3310 and In the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, one vertex (tip) is directed to the right, and in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, one vertex (tip) is directed to the left. Then, in the back down movable decorative body 3110 and the back up movable decorative body 3210, they move upward and downward respectively to be positioned at the first uniting position or the second uniting position, and the back upper left movable decoration 3310 In the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the tip facing the right moves to the first combined position or the second combined position while changing its posture so as to face the lower right and upper right, and the lower right upper movable decoration In the 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, the respective tips directed to the left move to the first united position and the second united position while changing their postures so as to turn left lower and left upper. The movable ornaments arranged up, down, left, and right in different directions move to the first united position such that their apexes gather at one point, or move to the second united position so as to line up annularly, and one large decoration body That is intended to form, it can be difficult to occur to the player.

  From such a point, the six back back movable decorative bodies 3110, back back movable decorative bodies 3210, back upper left movable decorative bodies 3310, back lower left movable decorative bodies 3320, back upper right movable decorative bodies 3410, and back lower right movable decorative bodies When the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position, the player can surprise the player by making an unexpected movement of the player, which gives the player a strong impact. As well as being able to do this, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in each of the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 Is a movement different from the movement between the standby position and the first combined position (a second movement, specifically, a movement that rotates around an axis extending back and forth in the back bottom movable decoration 3110 and the back top movable decoration 3210 Since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be rotated about an axis extending to the left and right, A lower movable decorative body 3110, an upper back movable decorative body 3210, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 34 Show the player the first decoration aspect of the first combined position and the second decoration aspect of the second combined position by making the second movement 0 at an appropriate position between the standby position and the first combined position. An effect different from the effect can be shown, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with various effects, and to make the player more entertaining and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, back movable movable decoration 3110, back movable movable decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310, back lower left movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, and back lower right movable decoration 3420 Specific apexes of the acute angle (verte facing upwards of the back movable decoration 3110, apex pointing downwards of the back movable decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310 and back lower left movable Since the apex (tip) of the decoration 3320 facing to the right and the apex (tip) of the back upper right movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 pointing to the left are included, The back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are at standby positions. When moving between one united position or when performing a second movement, the player is instructed to the back movable movable decoration 3110, back movable movable decoration 3210, back left upper movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable It can be made easy to recognize that the decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 are moving, and the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable The movement of the decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are a pair of back left Since the movable arm 3330, the back right moving arm 3430, and the pair of back down moving arms 3130 and the back up moving arm 3230 are respectively provided, the back down movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration Because the body 3310 and the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration 3420 can be moved separately to the first combined position or the second combined position , Back rear movable decoration 3110, back rear movable decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310 and back lower left movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3 By appropriately selecting the order of moving (moving) 10 and the lower right and lower movable decorative body 3420, it is possible to make the variation of the movable effect more colorful, making it difficult for the player to get bored with the colorful movable effect and making it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 as the lottery result by the drawing means Based on the various light sources (plural light sources) provided on the game board 5 of FIG. 135 as a plurality of light emitters, and the front stage decorative portion of FIG. 163 as a movable body. 3162, 3322, 3412, 3422, back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and back lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab ing.

  The various light emission sources (plural light emission sources) provided in the game board 5 can emit light. The front-end decorative parts 3312, 32322, 3412 and 3422 are magnets, magnets 3312a of the front-end decorative part 3312 of FIG. 163, magnets 3322a of the front-end decorative part 3322, magnets 3412a of the front-end decorative part 3412, and front ends. The magnet 3422 a of the decorative portion 3422 is provided. The upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the lower left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the lower right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab are provided for the magnet 3312a of the previous stage decorative portion 3312 and the previous stage decorative portion 3322. The magnet 3322a, the magnet 3412a of the front stage decoration portion 3412, and the magnetic pole-bearing surface of the magnet 3422a of the front stage decoration portion 3422 are separately disposed from the front stage decoration portions 3312, 3232, 3412, 3422, The magnetic poles of the magnet 3312a of the step decoration portion 3312, the magnet 3322a of the front decoration portion 3322, the magnet 3412a of the front decoration portion 3412, and the magnet 3422a of the front decoration portion 3422 are detected and the front decoration portions 3312, 3232, 3214 , Stand by as a specific position of 3422 It is capable of detecting the location (in situ).

  Light emitted from various light emission sources (a plurality of light emission sources) provided on the game board 5 while the previous stage decoration portions 3312, 32322, 3412 and 3422 are in operation is a back left upper pole change detection circuit 3311ab and a back left lower pole change detection A circuit 3321ab, a back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and a back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab can be incident.

  As described above, while the preceding decorative portions 3312, 32322, 3412 and 3422 are in operation, light emitted from various light emission sources (a plurality of light emission sources) provided on the game board 5 is the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back Although it is possible to enter the lower left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab, this light is not affected at all as disturbance light. The magnet 3312a of the previous stage decorative portion 3312 and the magnet 3322a of the previous stage decorative portion 3322 by the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the lower left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the lower right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab The magnet 3412 a of the front stage decoration portion 3412 and the magnet of the front stage decoration portion 3422 A specific position standby position Sakidan decoration 3312,3322,3412,3422 detects the magnetic poles of the net 3422a can be detected (original position). Therefore, the erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) which is a specific position of the preceding decorative portions 3312, 3232, 3412 and 3422 by the light emitted from various light sources (plural light sources) provided on the game board 5 is prevented can do.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board capable of controlling the progress of the game can be controlled based on the command from the main control board 1310 provided in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The peripheral control board 1510 provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided as an effect control board capable of controlling the movement. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 of FIG. 180 as a ROM substrate and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of FIG. 180 as a video signal output substrate. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 180 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) concerning effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can output, to the effect display device 1600, a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 130 as a display device.

  Between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, as a first connector, the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 in FIG. 180 and the special connector provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 in FIG. It is electrically connected by the socket of SCN 3 and the board-to-board connector which can be connected between boards by the board. As a second connector different from the first connector, between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 of FIG. 180 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of FIG. It is electrically connected by the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the and the board-to-board connector which can be connected between boards by the board.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 can control the progression of effects by control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and can output video signals to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by a plurality of types of methods. . Examples of a plurality of types of video signal methods include an RGB method, an LVDS method, an MIPI method, an eDP method, and a clockless method. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of video signal methods, four systems (1 system of RGB system, 2 systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system (4 systems in total) ) Has been adopted.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are configured to be accommodated in the peripheral control substrate box 1505 of FIG. 180 as the same substrate box.

  In this manner, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which control information (peripheral data) regarding effects based on the game specification is stored in advance is provided on a dedicated substrate called peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510 A substrate for outputting a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated substrate called a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510. That is, if the peripheral control board 1510 is not altered and newly manufactured according to control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specification, it conforms to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 Since it is not altered and manufactured anew, it can be configured as a common substrate that is not dependent on the game specification or the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to manufacture a plurality of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specification and the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and the cost can be reduced by manufacturing only the same peripheral control boards 1510. Can contribute to Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 of FIG. 93 is provided, in which one payout passage 580a to which the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 93 is supplied is formed. ing. The dispensing device 580 includes at least a dispensing motor 584 in FIG. 105 and a dispensing blade 589 in FIG. 105 as a ball feed rotating unit. The payout motor 584 is capable of rotating the rotation shaft by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step driving. The discharge blade 589 rotates via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the discharge gear 588a of the discharge gear member 588, wherein the rotation of the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 constitutes a rotation transmission member. Thus, a plurality of ball accommodating portions 589b are formed at equal intervals (three are formed at equal intervals every 120 degrees) as a ball receiving recess capable of receiving and sending out the game balls B one by one. .

  The reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of the one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Specifically, as the reduction ratio n, the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 are set by calculation by mechanics. The rotation angle of the delivery blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588 b of the delivery gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105 as a light shielding piece provided coaxially with the rotation shaft of the delivery blade 589. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588.

  As described above, since the speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member that does not become an integer is determined in advance, the number of steps of driving the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is predetermined. The positioning position is different every time the balls are taken out. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the above-mentioned reduction ratio n of the rotation transmission member that causes such a positioning error is set, although the error is accumulated, even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotational angle is detected by the plurality of detection pieces 588b of the delivery gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, and reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotary unit which receives and sends the game ball is changed each time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where dust and / or dust adheres are dispersed to the dust or the like. It is possible to have a strong dispensing device 580.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the effect is based on the result of the ordinary lottery, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. The peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 180 is provided as an effect control means capable of controlling the. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a metallic shield plate 1540 of FIG. 180 as the first shield, a metallic back cover in the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 184 as the second shield, and a diagram of the conductive covering portion. A conductive elastic member 1545 of 184 is provided. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is a core formed of an elastic member, and the surface of the foam 1545b of FIG. 184 is covered with the conductive covering portion 1545a of FIG. 184 as a conductive member.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back lid in the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back lid in the effect display device 1600 are conductive. It is electrically connected via the elastic member 1545.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 formed of the conductive member and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back lid in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be This can be reduced by the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence by electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gaming board 5 of FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 126 are provided. The game board 5 is provided with a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 126 as a box body to which the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 126 is attached as a substrate box. The ball tank 552 is capable of storing game balls. The tank rail 553 is capable of flowing the gaming balls stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side.

  The peripheral control unit 1500 as a substrate box is housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. The tank rail 553 is formed with a notch portion 553aa shown in FIG. 126 as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B flowing down can fall. An upper wall 3010 a of the game board 5 is disposed below the tank rail 553 as an upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1. In this pachinko machine 1, the foreign matter falling from the notch 553 aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received at the upper wall 3010 a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. .

  As described above, foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed on the tank rail 553 can be received at the top wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, so foreign matter Even if it falls from the notch 553 aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to a foreign object falling to the peripheral control unit 1500 as a substrate box accommodated in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical trouble due to the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail 553.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. It is equipped with the power supply substrate 630 of FIG. 189 as a power supply means capable of proceeding with the game based on etc. and capable of creating various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall as outside the gaming machine. There is.

  The power supply substrate 630 is, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5 of FIG. 189 in which package types (TO-220F) are the same, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 and D9. , D10 at least. Of the plurality of parts having the same shape, the silk-printed TSLK 9 in FIG. 192 (b) is a part other than this specific part on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, as silk printing on the specific part. The elements are silk-printed so that they can be distinguished from FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 in FIG.

  Specifically, as silk printing of a specific part FET Q5, while silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 192 (b) is silk printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, other than the specific part is excluded. The elements QQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 of FIG. 189 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 of FIG. 189 have the silk-printed TSLK1-TSLK8 of FIG. It is silk printed. In the silk print TSLK9, a white hatched line ad1 which does not exist in the silk print TSLK1 to TSLK8 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Q5 of FIG. 189 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 and D9 shown in FIG. 189 have the same package type (TO-220F) as a plurality of parts having the same shape. Even if D10 is provided on power supply substrate 630, silk-printed TSLK 9 for a specific part FET Q5 among a plurality of parts having the same shape is FET Q1, Q2, which is another part excluding this specific part. The components QQ, Q2, Q3, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are silk-printed so that the component QQ, which should be focused on, can be identified as the other components FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q3. It becomes possible to distinguish from Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10. There. Therefore, among the plurality of parts, the part to be noted can be identified from other parts.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. It is possible to advance the game based on the above, and perform light emission control on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full color LEDs provided on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 201 as light emission means. 201 includes a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba provided on the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 201 and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting an LED constant current drive circuit 402bb as light emission control means. As a strip-shaped decorative substrate formed in a predetermined shape, the door frame left in FIG. 201 And a left side under the decorative board 402b which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the Id decorative body 404.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and each side thereof extends along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the lower left-side decorative substrate 402b in the shape of a strip. It is arranged to be non-parallel. Specifically, the land sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 203 are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged as.

  Thus, the strip-like left-side lower decoration substrate 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bx Each side of the current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be non-parallel along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the strip-like lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, as compared with the case where the respective sides of constant current drive circuit 402bax and constant current drive circuit 402bbx are arranged in parallel along both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the lower left-side decorative substrate 402b in the shape of a band plate. Since it is possible to form a large area sandwiched between both end sides in the longitudinal direction of the strip-like lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx, Wiring can be drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx to be electrically connected to 10 full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring is drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx in the strip-like lower side lower decoration substrate 402b.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. An LED mounted on which hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full color LEDs provided as the light emitting means on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b as the light emitting means, can be advanced based on the game etc. A lower left side decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) having a surface 402bx and an LED non-mounting surface 402by on which the light emitting means is not mounted is provided.

  The left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist film as a white coating film, and dashed lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 in FIG. 203 (a) as a mounting auxiliary symbol (in FIG. 203 (a), dashed lines corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs shown in FIG. 203 (a) and LSLK4 and LSLK5 respectively (parts corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs in FIG. 203 (a)) Only certain LEDs 4 and 5 are shown.). A white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the entire surface of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The mounting auxiliary symbol specifies a dashed line LSLK1 to LSLK10 as an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on LED mounting surface 402bx of left side lower decoration substrate 402b and hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs The color of the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part number, yellow on the white resist of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b as a paint of a predetermined color different from white resist ( Or black).

  As described above, auxiliary lines (that is, dashed lines LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. A number identifying hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full color LED 203 (a) (that is, a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is full color LED) corresponds to the LED non-left side lower decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 203 (a). The white resist on the mounting surface 402 by is formed in yellow (or black) as a paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist. That is, a white resist is formed on the entire surface on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a), and the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 as full color LEDs in FIG. Auxiliary lines (that is, yellow dotted lines (or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) and numbers specifying hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs in FIG. 203 (a) (that is, hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs No corresponding yellow (or black) part numbers) are formed. Therefore, the numbers for identifying the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. 203 (a) (that is, the yellow (or black) part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and the full color in FIG. 203 (a) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the auxiliary lines (that is, yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs.

  In addition, the white resist formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a) is the light emitted from the hdLED1 to hdLED10 of FIG. 202 (a). 203 (a), since it is possible to increase the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b), the numbers identifying hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in FIG. Part number) and an auxiliary line (that is, a yellow dotted line (or black dashed line) LSLK1 indicating the mounting position of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 as full color LEDs in FIG. 203A). According to LSLK10), the full color shown in FIG. 202 (a) It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance in the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a) of light emitted hdLED1~hdLED10 is ED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) from being lowered due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 of FIG. 202 (a).

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, various substrates in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 or the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. The power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 195 is provided as a power supply means for supplying power to 1510 and the like. The power supply substrate 630 includes the fuse FUSE1 of FIG. 195 as a fuse, the surge absorber SA1 of FIG. 195 as a surge voltage absorbing element, the rectifier circuit 630c of FIG. 195 as a rectifier circuit, and a power generation circuit 630f 'of FIG. There is. The fuse FUSE 1 is capable of receiving an AC power supply from an island facility of the game hall as an outside of the game machine. The surge absorber SA1 can absorb the surge voltage of the AC power supply input through the fuse FUSE1. The rectifying circuit 630c can rectify an AC power input through the surge absorber SA1 into a DC power. The power supply generation circuit 630 f ′ can supply power to various substrates in the pachinko machine 1 based on a DC power supply input via the rectification circuit 630 c.

  When a commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V) having a voltage higher than the game machine power supply voltage (AC 24 V) as an AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall is input through the fuse FUSE 1, the surge voltage is an allowable voltage It is possible to form a circuit which blows the fuse FUSE1 by supplying a large current to the fuse FUSE1 in a short-circuited state by being destroyed beyond.

  Thus, when a commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V) having a voltage higher than the game machine power supply voltage (AC 24 V) as an AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall is input to the surge absorber SA1 through the fuse FUSE 1, the surge voltage However, the circuit is short-circuited by being broken beyond the allowable voltage, and a large current is supplied to the fuse FUSE1 to form a circuit for melting the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the plug of the power cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V), the power supply substrate 630 is destroyed. However, destruction of various substrates in the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply substrate 630 can be reliably prevented. Therefore, when the commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V) having a voltage higher than the gaming machine power supply voltage (AC 24 V) is supplied, it is possible to prevent the various substrates in the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. HdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full color LEDs provided on the lower left side decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) as light emitting means, can be played on the basis of the game etc. A lower left side decoration substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) to be mounted is provided.

  The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist solidly coated as a white coating, and a connector LDUCN of FIG. 202 (a) as a connector. The white coating is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs having a package of the same color as the white paint film or a color that can be discriminated as the same color A connector LDUCN having a housing of a distinguishable color is mounted. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist, and each package of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is recognized as white (the same color as white In addition to being made of resin of color), the connector LDUCN is made of resin of which the housing is white (also referred to as natural color and recognized as white (natural color) and the same color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized as the same color) as a white resist covered (solidly coated) on the entire surface. A full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) and a white resist covered entirely (solidly coated) are mounted. Electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have the connector and connectors that do not have the white color are not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decoration substrate 402b.

  Thus, a white coating (that is, a white resist) is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left-side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a), and a white coating (that is, a white). HdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs having a package of the same color or a color that can be determined to be the same color, and a housing of a color that can be determined to be the same color or the same color as a white coating Since the connector LDUCN is mounted, even if hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the LEDs of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b The entire surface of the mounting surface 402bx is a white coating (that is, a white resist) It has the same color or colors that can be identified as the same color. This can contribute to making the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decoration substrate 402b a bright light emitting surface. Therefore, the lower left side decoration substrate 402b can be made a bright light emitting surface.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gate portion 2003 of FIG. 130 of the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 of FIG. 130, the four general winning openings 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting The gate sensor 2506, the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the large winning opening sensor 2403 etc. Each of the detection means can be provided, and the game can be advanced based on the detection signal from the detection means.

  Among a plurality of ball entrances, for example, a first start-up sensor 3002 and a second start-up sensor 2402 as detection means corresponding to the first start-up port 2002 and the second start-up port 2004 as a ball entry similar in use. Are provided differently. Specifically, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002 a of the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. The connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. Further, as described above, the gate sensor 2506 corresponding to the first start opening 2002 and the gate unit 2003 corresponding to the second start opening 2004 and having a similar application to the second start opening 2004 is provided on the game board 5. Large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005, general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, gaming board 5 Together with various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting on the vicinity of the first start port 2002 provided on the panel, electrically connected and aggregated in the panel relay substrate 1710, and via the one connector, the main control substrate It is electrically connected to 1310.

  Thus, among a plurality of ball entrances, for example, a first start-up sensor 3002 which is a detection means corresponding to the first start-up port 2002 and the second start-up port 2004 as a ball entrance similar in use. Since the shape of the connector of the starting opening sensor 2402 is made to differ, for example, the first starting opening which is a detecting means corresponding to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 as a ball entry similar in use. Misconnection of the connectors of the sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 can be prevented. The gate sensor 2506, which is a detection unit corresponding to the first start port 2002 and the gate section 2003 as a ball entry similar in application to the second start port 2004, includes a special winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 2401, The panel relay substrate 1710 is electrically connected and aggregated together with various sensors such as 3001 and a magnetic sensor 3003 and the like, and is electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310 through one connector. That is, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, which is the detection means corresponding to the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate unit 2003 which are similar entrances. Misconnection of the connector of the sensor 2506 can be prevented. Therefore, incorrect connection can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 as game control means, the ball tank 552 of FIG. A ball guiding unit 570, and a dispensing device 580 of FIG. 13 as a dispensing device are provided.

  On the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 154 is mounted as a game control microprocessor, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result as a lottery result by lottery means. The game can be progressed, and the lottery result can be derived and displayed by performing display control of the function display unit 1400 as a display unit provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 5 of FIG. 130. is there. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, and the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. In the special symbol and special electric combination product control processing in step S114, when the lottery result is due to the first starting opening sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created as the first special lottery result When the lottery result is by the second starting mouth sensor 2402, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created as the second special lottery result, and stored in the transmission information storage area as the transmission information, and the special symbol The variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variable display pattern and the variable display pattern of the special symbol determined as described above. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display or second special symbol display of function display unit 1400 to light the first special symbol display or second special symbol display of function display unit 1400 according to And stores the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

  The ball tank 552 is disposed above the game board 5 and is capable of storing game balls. The ball guiding unit 570 is disposed in the vicinity of the game board 5 and can guide the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side via the tank rail 553 in FIG. 12. Dispensing device 580 is arranged in the vicinity of gaming board 5 and based on a dispensing instruction (instruction to dispense one by one based on the instruction from dispensing control board 633) of gaming balls guided from ball guiding unit 570. Can be paid out.

  A wire FCBL in FIG. 154 is a ball tank 552 as a wire electrically connecting a function display unit connector MFCN in FIG. 154 as a connector provided on the main control board 1310 and a connector (not shown) provided in the function display unit , A ball guiding unit 570, and at least one of the dispensing devices 580. The game balls are polished at the island facility of the game hall, rub against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to release electromagnetic wave noise. For this reason, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to which the gaming balls can be retained, and the periphery where the payout device 580 is attached. That is, the wiring FCBL for electrically connecting the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise. .

  A main control MPU 1310 a mounted on the main control board 1310 and a function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance dimension. Specifically, while the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing through the middle points of the main control MPU 1310a and the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, By arranging the main control MPU 1310 a on the upper side, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310 a are arranged to be separated on the main control board 1310.

  As such, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise. The main control MPU 1310 a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are separated by a predetermined distance dimension (that is, as described above) While the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line, the main control MPU 1310 a is disposed above the center line), and electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL Can be attenuated so as not to affect the main control MPU 1310a. It has been cut way. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 as the lottery result by the drawing means Based on the above, the game can be advanced, and as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 300 of FIG. And the door frame side various units such as the door operation device 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. Back-down rendering unit 3100, back-up rendering unit 3200, back-left rendering unit 3300, and back-right rendering unit 3 with which the game board 5 is equipped The effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. 23, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door as first class light emitting means used for light emission of various units on the game board side such as 00 Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side such as the frame top unit 450 etc., the back down rendering unit 3100, the back up rendering unit 3200, the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back right rendering unit 3400 etc. Is used for light emission of the light guide plate 2601 in the panel board 1110 of FIG. 143 and the table effect unit 2600 of FIG. 155 as various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side and other effect members different from this effect member A plurality of LEs for panel decoration that irradiate light toward the circumferential surface of the panel board 1110 of FIG. 1130a, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 light emitting decorated by causing light to enter from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in FIG. 155, and light emitting decorated by causing light to enter from the right side of the light guiding plate 2601 A plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a which are the second type light emitting means, a plurality of LEDs 2611, and various kinds of units provided in the door frame side various units which are the first class light emitting means Brightness adjustment means that can adjust the brightness of the various LEDs in the game board side various units based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) that is the operation means In the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. A lamp pallet setting process performed as one process of the output operation unit monitoring process and the received command analysis process of step S1022 is provided.

  In the lamp pallet setting process, which is the brightness adjustment means, the demonstration operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation means, performs a demonstration (demonstration effect performed in the player waiting state) with the predetermined period within And as a plurality of luminance designation values corresponding to one luminance designation value among the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, as a normal luminance setting value as a plurality of luminance designation values on the basis of being operated to A variety of LEDs provided in door frame side various units, which are the first class light emitting means, and a variety of LEDs provided in game board side various units by selecting a normal pallet value set for the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light Setting as a special brightness setting value different from the normal brightness setting value, and can be set for the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. Select special pallets value of the second kind light emitting means is a plurality of panels decorative LED1130a, thereby making it possible to set the brightness of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621.

  Specifically, in the lamp pallet setting process, for example, the player (or a clerk at a game hall clerk or the like) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise, and the current luminance is temporarily at the minimum luminance (for example, When the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the 0th (zero) luminance designation value at which light is turned off is set, the first luminance designation value moves from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance. To increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light along a predetermined equation (eg, linear tone curve or spline curve tone curve) If the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance is used to change the first luminance to the first luminance. The luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve) toward a fixed value Change to lower. When the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and press the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined.

  As described above, the demonstration operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation means, is operated during a demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in the player waiting state) and effects being within a predetermined period. Based on the selected brightness, the brightness of the LED used as direct light, which is the normal brightness setting value, corresponding to one of the plurality of brightness specification values from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value. The normal pallet value to be set with respect to is selected and set as the brightness of various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units which are the first class light emitting means, and various LEDs provided in the game board side various units, A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 11 are selected as special type light emitting means when special pallet values set for the luminance of the LED used as indirect light which is a special luminance setting value are selected. 0a, it is adapted to be set as the luminance of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621. As a result, the player proceeds with a demonstration (demonstration effect in which the player waits for a player) or an effect during which the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303) which is the operation means The various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units, which are the first-class light emitting means, and the various LEDs provided in the game board various units, so as to achieve the desired brightness by operating in the second The brightness of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the plurality of LEDs 2611, and the plurality of LEDs 2621 which are the seed light emitting means can be set. Therefore, the brightness adjustment can be easily performed.

[19. Another example]
The present invention is not limited to the embodiment described above, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be practiced in various forms within the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the back down movable decoration 3110, the back up movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration Although the shape of each front view of 3420 was shown as what was made an equilateral triangle, it is not limited to this, for example, "quadrangle", "hexagon", "octagon", "fan", "star" It is good as a form, etc.

  In the embodiment described above, the back down moving arm 3130 and the back up moving arm 3230 each have one movable decorative body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back down moving arm 3130 and The back up moving arm 3230 may be provided with a plurality of movable decorative bodies.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm each having two movable decorations are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back The right moving arm 3430 may be provided with one or more movable decorations.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the movable decoration of the lower back rendering unit 3100 and the upper back rendering unit 3200 (the lower back movable decoration 3110 and the upper back movable decoration 3210) are at the standby position and the first combination in the same posture. Although the thing which moves between positions is shown, it is not limited to this, and in the lower back rendering unit 3100 and the upper back rendering unit 3200, the movement in which the posture changes between the standby position and the first combined position It may be a decorative body.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the movable decorative bodies of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right rendering unit 3400 (the back upper movable movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable Although the decorative body 3420) shows one that changes posture and moves between the standby position and the first combined position, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right rendering unit 3400 The movable decorative body may move between the standby position and the first combined position without changing the posture.

  In the embodiment described above, peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs of special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with sockets for special connector SCN3, and liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with sockets for special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged to be able to visually recognize the direction in which information and signals flow. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals may be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals may be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in peripheral data ROM 1520a included in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred from peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to peripheral control substrate 1510, so peripheral data The ROM substrate 1520 is on the transmission side, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 is on the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket) which corresponds to a plug, and in response to this, when the peripheral control substrate 1510 becomes a socket, a special connector (or a plug and Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control substrate 1510 outputs the plurality of video signal systems to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so the peripheral control substrate 1510 is on the transmission side and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a socket, the special connector (or plug) is produced. Special connector) can be provided.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a nonconductive resin and are molded to be transparent. It may be molded in opaque black as a resin, or it may be molded in translucent color if the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 are made of conductive resin. It may be done. Even in this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control substrate described above on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) By fixing various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, etc. with metal nabe screws 1510, as described above, the circuit ground can be provided to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. It can be configured. As a result, the noise that has entered from the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 can be made to flow to the grounds (GND) of various substrates as circuit ground, and noise can be removed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. May be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 222 is a modification of the dispensing device, and is a cross-sectional rear view of the dispensing device provided with the dispensing blade 589 including the four arc-shaped blade pieces 589a and provided with the radio wave sensor. FIG. 222 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, taken at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade, and is given the same reference numeral as FIG. When the discharge blade 589 is provided with four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 222, the above-described discharge gear member 588 has a flat plate-like detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. The four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90 degree region in the circumferential direction of the delivery gear member 588 is taken as the light shielding range at the 45 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by 18 step rotation which united 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 and 9 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 with the region of 45 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed as a light receiving range. Thus, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 18 steps with respect to the payout of one game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission so that the discharge blade 589 integrally rotating with the discharge gear member 588 can rotate 90 degrees. By selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588, the reduction ratio n can be determined.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the payout device 580 is provided with the payout detection sensor 591 attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 to detect the gaming ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect passage of the game ball B, but the game ball B actually passes when it is affected by radio waves. Nevertheless, it is possible for the game ball B to appear to be in a non-passing state due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the payout motor By performing control to rotate the rotary shaft of 584 excessively, a large amount of gaming balls B will be paid out. In order to detect a fraudulent act (referred to as "radio wave goto") of acquiring the gaming ball B in such a fraudulent manner, as shown in FIG. 222, the radio wave sensor 594 is dispensed near the upper side of the payout detection sensor 591 Can be provided and configured. When a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is irradiated based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The emergency stop of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is performed, and the radio wave goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave broadcast notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the radio wave goto notification command of 8 bit width from the payout control board 633, the radio wave goto notification command is set from 8 bit width to 16 bit width and the radio wave goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. While flowing from various speakers, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that blinks in red) to be shaped into content that can notify a radio wave goto and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave broadcast notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "abnormality has occurred." Do.

  In place of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact-type ball passage sensor 594 'may be used, which is a contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switch. A detection signal from the contact ball passage sensor 594 'is input to the payout control substrate 633, and the payout control substrate 633 generates a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact ball passage sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of balls from which the game balls B have been paid out does not match, it can be configured that it can be determined that some injustice has been made. When it is determined that some fraud has been made, the payout control board 633 urgently stops the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584, and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a go notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives an 8-bit wide Goto notification command from the delivery control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the Goto alert sound to the maximum volume by changing the Goto notification command from 8-bit width to 16 bit width, While flowing, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red) to be shaped as content that can notify a goto and transmitted to the peripheral control substrate 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a Goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a large message "abnormality has occurred" on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. .

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is driven in a step manner, the rotation shaft is stepwise rotated at an angle of 18 degrees as a predetermined angle. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is configured via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmitting member. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated at a low speed, and the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, Alternatively, the speed may be increased and the discharge blade 589 may be rotated via the second transmission gear 587 'and the discharge gear 588a') of the discharge gear member 588. In this way, since the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, The positioning position is different every time one ball is taken out. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, whereby the adhesion position of dust and dirt can be dispersed. Of course, if the speed increase ratio of the above-mentioned rotation transmitting member is set to cause such positioning error, although the error is accumulated, the error of the game ball is accumulated each time one ball is paid out The rotational angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light shielding pieces) of the delivery gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the delivery blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance, the rotational position of the payout blade 589 for receiving and sending the gaming ball is changed every time the gaming ball is paid out. By dispersing the position where the dust adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust, dirt and the like.

  In the embodiment described above, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state in which shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between cover body 1501 and various substrates by this, a predetermined distance is provided between the front surface of each substrate (surface facing the back surface of cover flat 1501a) and the back surface of cover flat 1501a. A space having a height dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in the space to form two spaces. Space is the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) between the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of 540 and a surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 made of metal A second space 1505 b having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment) with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501 a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. In the case of arranging a large effect unit (electrical drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating the movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the home position and the operating position) on the game board 5, and in the depth direction When there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the distance dimension of the same predetermined height, or the second The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. The heat generated from the various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing the various electronic components and the like emitting the light.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 by forming a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az in the shield plate 1540 made of metal. And the type (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, part numbers, pin numbers, etc.) can be viewed. Also, the part numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, Part numbers, pin numbers etc.) can be visually recognized, and peripheral The part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and silk printed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively Although the content (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, the metal corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a A rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can also be viewed. . Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN 1 provided on peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 made of metal corresponding to a region larger than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate. From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with 1530 can be confirmed. Position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide an opening in the shape.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side and right side of the cover flat side of the cover body 1501 A plurality of ventilating holes 1501az may be formed in any one or a combination thereof except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side among 1501e. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be respectively formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a and the left side, lower side and right side . Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of gaming ball B) falls toward the inside of peripheral control board box 1505 via ventilation hole 1501az. It can be prevented from intruding. As a result, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble caused by foreign matter dropped onto various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical trouble due to the foreign matter dropped from the tank rail 553. As a reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, temporarily forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 via the ventilation holes 1501az. The foreign substance (for example, metal powder produced by the abrasion of the gaming ball B) generated by the gaming ball B falls into and enters the inside of the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the electric substance by the foreign substance dropped onto various substrates It is because the probability that a problem will occur is high.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat side A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side among 1501e. In this case, forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided respectively on the left side, the lower side, and the right side can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. As a reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, temporarily forming the ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side as described above, through the ventilation holes 1501az A foreign substance (for example, metal powder produced by wear of the game ball B) falling toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 falls and enters, thereby dropping the peripheral control board box 1505 to various substrates This is because the possibility of electrical troubles caused by foreign matter is high.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated due to the wear of the gaming ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Although it has been described above, one notch, hole or groove may be formed in the same manner as the notch 553aa with respect to the ball passage along which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner shown in FIG. 110, the metal of the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a A notch, a hole or a groove can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the ball guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. 104, which can remove the powder from the guiding passage 570a to the outside. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 110, a dispensing device 580, a substrate unit 620, etc. are disposed, and the dispensing device 580 has a substrate etc. on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The substrate unit 620 includes the power supply substrate 630, the payout control substrate 633, the interface substrate 635, etc. shown in FIG. 111, and various substrates are arranged. Therefore, when forming a notch, a hole or a groove on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the game ball falling through the notch, the hole or the groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 It is necessary to prevent metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates disposed below the ball guiding unit 570. Therefore, a wedge-shaped member can be formed to project rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. And the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted, or both can be adopted. Can also be configured. Further, along the upper sides of the power supply substrate cover 631 of the power supply substrate 630, the delivery control substrate box 632 of the delivery control substrate 633, the interface substrate cover 636 of the interface substrate 635 shown in FIG. The position of the notched portion, hole or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 can be formed to protrude, and the power supply substrate cover 631, the dispensing control substrate box 632, and the interface substrate cover 636. The position of and can be configured to shift, or both can be adopted and configured. Note that the ventilation holes are not formed on the side walls of the power supply substrate cover 631 of the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 111, the delivery control substrate box 632 of the delivery control substrate 633, and the cover substrate side wall provided on the interface substrate cover 636 of the interface substrate 635. Also, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310 disposed below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 is disposed at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 is overhanging, or the main control unit By arranging a bowl-shaped member corresponding to 1300 or forming a ventilation hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the power switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one power supply substrate 630. Although various electronic components and the like are provided, they can be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply substrate 630 includes the first power supply substrate 630A and the second power supply substrate 630B, and the first power supply substrate 630A and the second power supply substrate 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply substrate 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise reduction circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply substrate 630B are the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuits 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , Fuse FUSE 3 and wiring connector B mainly. The wiring connector A of the first power supply substrate 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply substrate 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply substrate 630A are connected to the second power supply substrate 630B via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Note that various DC voltages, such as +35 V, +12 V and +5 V DC, created on the second power supply substrate 630B are supplied from the second power supply substrate 630B to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply substrate 630A. Ru.

  In addition, the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 195 in the above-described embodiment can be divided into two substrates of a first power supply substrate 630A and a second power supply substrate 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply substrate 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap arrester AL1 and the power switch 630a and the noise reduction circuit 630b shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply substrate 630B is mainly composed of the connector A, and the circuit of the second power supply substrate 630B includes a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a relay drive circuit 630i, a relay RL1 shown in FIG. The thermistor TH1, the choke coil L2, the fuse FUSE3, and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply substrate 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply substrate 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply substrate 630A are connected to the second power supply substrate 630B via the noise reduction circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Note that various DC voltages, such as +35 V, +12 V and +5 V DC, created on the second power supply substrate 630B are supplied from the second power supply substrate 630B to each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply substrate 630A. Ru.

  In the embodiment described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 203, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax A configuration in which the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged to be inclined 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full color LEDs are divided into a group 1 and a group 2 Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is disposed between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can also be applied to an elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include, for example, decorative substrates provided on various effect units of the game board 5.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 performs light emission control by supplying constant current to eight full color LEDs, but is not limited to full color LEDs, white It may be a single color LED such as red, green, yellow, orange, blue and green. A single color LED can also be used. In this case, light emission control of a maximum of 24 single color LEDs can be performed by one LED constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, although +12 V DC from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the provided linear power supply (linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 200) is for lighting the LED within the current tolerance of the linear power supply It may be used as a voltage of For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of one single-color LED (for example, When the LED except red LED is electrically connected, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED, and the single color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the above-described heat dispersion resistor circuit. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, When the red LED is electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is connected It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dispersion resistance of the above-described heat dispersion resistance circuit. The decorative substrate configured in this manner can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to a decorative substrate provided to the game board 5.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, DC +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current drive circuit The cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full color LED is connected electrically to one output channel among the LG8 and the LB1 to LB8 through the heat dispersion resistance of the above-described heat dispersion resistance circuit. However, multiple full color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full color LEDs is two to three. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full color LEDs for one output channel, DC +35 V from the power supply substrate 630 is used as a voltage for lighting the LED instead of +12 V DC from the power supply substrate 630. You may The decorative substrate configured in this manner can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to a decorative substrate provided to the game board 5.

  In the embodiment described above, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door In the state where the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative substrate is large. The edges of the land pattern are arranged parallel to the upper and lower sides of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, but the door About any one decoration board among the frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, any 2 decoration boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. Then, the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 directly controls the light emission by the LED constant current drive circuit provided for itself, in addition to the full color LED provided for itself, another right decoration substrate on which two full color LEDs are mounted. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may be directly provided by the LED constant current drive circuit provided with itself, for example, the other left decorative substrate on which one full color LED is mounted in addition to the full color LED provided with itself. The light emission may be controlled.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the LED non-mounting surface 314y The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided for each decorative body to be used are solidly coated with a white resist, but may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after printing the whole of the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates by white silk printing, the full color LED, the corresponding part number for the full color LED, and the area showing the position of the full color LED are silk printing It will be printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, various decoration substrates provided in each decoration provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402 by of the left side lower decoration substrate 402 b and the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper center dish decoration substrate 314 In the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates is printed as silk printing with yellow dotted line (or black dotted line), but the full color LED mounting position (In other words, when printing the area where the full color LED is to be arranged with silk chain printing, using yellow dotted line (or black dotted line)), add the polarity mark of the full color LED It may be configured to specify the implementation orientation.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received by the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 The second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are separated by at least an erroneous detection preventing distance dimension, as in the case of the first start port sensor 3002. It may consist of two sensors (double sensors). If it carries out like this, the 2nd starting opening sensor 2402 comprised from two sensors (double sensor) of the 2nd starting opening sensor main side 2402a and the 2nd starting opening sensor slave side 2402b similarly to the 1st starting opening sensor 3002 By adopting this, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming ball B received by the second start port 2004. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached A person in charge of a game clerk or the like in the game hall is a radio wave irradiation goto by reliably detecting and notifying the fraudulent action by radio wave irradiation using the) in the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process of Can contribute to being able to discover early.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 is first detected by the second start opening sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start opening sensor main side 2402a, and the second start opening sensor second side After passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. Also, while the detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, it is directly electrically connected), the second start A detection signal from port sensor slave side 2402 b is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The panel relay substrate 1710 detects the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start opening sensor slave side 2402b. A first start opening sensor slave 3002 b constituting one start opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B which has passed through the gate section 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the accepted gaming ball B, a general winning opening sensor 2401 or 3001 for sensing the gaming ball B accepted at the general winning opening 2001 provided on the gaming board 5, and a fourth provided on the gaming board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of one start opening 2002 are electrically connected through their respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. Therefore, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor secondary 3002b to the panel relay substrate 1710, and the second start port sensor secondary is selected. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the side 2402 b to the panel relay substrate 1710. Thus, the two wires from the first start-up sensor slave 3002b and the two wires from the second start-up sensor slave 2402b may be electrically connected to each other. In the manufacturer, the worker of the line can use two wires from the first starting opening sensor slave 3002b and the second starting opening sensor slave in the manufacturing process. While making it possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) such as miswiring of two wires from the 2402b, in the gaming hall, a clerk such as a salesperson in the gaming hall is aware of the presence or absence of fraud In the case of confirmation, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned to the original state, two wires from the first start-up sensor slave 3002b and the second start-opening sensor slave 2402b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  In the embodiment described above, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 and the one general winning opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2400 are received. The connector having the same shape was selected to electrically connect the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay substrate 1710, but there are generally four connectors A general winning opening sensor 3001a for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200 when contributing to the progress of the game and the change in presentation with the entrance to the winning opening 2001. , 3001 b and 3001 c, and two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 General winning hole sensors 3001a, 3001b, respectively and two wiring from 3001C, connector shape may be respectively different. In this way, it is possible to provide a physical structure in which each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the corresponding one. In the manufacturer, the worker of the line is sure to make a mistake in the process of miswiring each of the two wires from the general winning hole sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, 3001c (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) in the manufacturing process. In the gaming hall, when a clerk or the like in the gaming hall checks the presence or absence of fraud, in the case of temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, the general winning opening sensor 2401, 240 can be prevented. Mistakes in the miswiring of each of the two wires from 3001a, 3001b and 3001c Wiring errors) that inserted mistake can be reliably prevented. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the two wirings from general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001 a, 3001 b, 3001 c are directly electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 without via panel relay substrate 1710. The ones having different connector shapes are selected. As described above, this has a physical structure in which each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, 3001c can be electrically connected to the corresponding one. In the manufacturing process, it is possible for a worker of the line to make a work mistake of miswiring of two wires from the general winning hole sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c. ) Can be reliably prevented, and in the gaming hall, when a clerk in the gaming hall or the like checks the presence or absence of fraud, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance, the general winning combination Miswiring of each two wires from the mouth sensor 2401, 3001a, 3001b, 3001c and Cormorant work miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the game ball B which has passed through the gate unit 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2506, but like the first start opening sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor slave side 2506b May be arranged from at least the false detection distance dimension and two sensors (double sensors). In this case, as in the case of the first starting opening sensor 3002, by adopting the gate sensor 2506 configured by two sensors (double sensors) of the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor secondary side 2506b, the gate unit 2003 The game ball B which has passed through can be detected with certainty. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached A person in charge of a game clerk or the like in the game hall is a radio wave irradiation goto by reliably detecting and notifying the fraudulent action by radio wave irradiation using the) in the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process of Can contribute to being able to discover early.

  In this case, the gaming ball B which has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2506a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2506a, and is detected by the gate sensor slave side 2506b by passing through the gate sensor second side 2506b. It will be done. Further, detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2506 a and the gate sensor slave side 2506 b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, they are electrically connected indirectly). Has been The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2506b is the main control input circuit 1310b Are input to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC (this input port is composed of 8 bits) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506 a and the detection signal from the gate sensor secondary side 2506 b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Therefore, as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a to the panel relay substrate 1710, one having a pitch of 2.5 mm is selected, and two wires from the gate sensor secondary side 2506b are selected. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring of FIG. Thereby, the physical structure that two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and two wires from the gate sensor secondary side 2506b can be electrically connected to each other corresponding to itself. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line in the manufacturing process may make a mistake in wiring between the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b. While being able to prevent work mistake (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) of being able to be prevented surely, in the game hall, clerks such as a salesclerk of the game hall temporarily remove wiring by maintenance when checking the presence or absence of fraud When returning to the original state, the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b are erroneous. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  In the embodiment described above, the connector having the 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002 a of the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 The connector with the 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. The four wires combining the two wires from the first start-up sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start-up sensor 2402 are configured as one connector. One connector composed of the four wires may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002 a of the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310, and 2 from the second start port sensor 2402 Since the physical structure can be made such that the connector electrically connected to the main control board 1310 and the connector electrically connected to the main control board 1310 do not exist separately but have a single connector composed of four lines, In the manufacturing process, the worker of the line produces two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002 a that constitutes the first start hole sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start hole sensor 2402. In addition to being able to reliably prevent a work error (misconnection error such as insertion error) such as miswiring in the game hall, in the gaming hall, a clerk or the like in the game hall confirms the presence or absence of fraud. In the case where the wiring is temporarily removed by maintenance and returned to the original state, the two wires from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (a wiring mistake called insertion mistake), such as a miswiring, of the two wires.

  Furthermore, the game ball B accepted in the second start port 2004 adopting this mode is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 The second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are separated by at least an erroneous detection preventing distance dimension, as in the case of the first start port sensor 3002. It may consist of two sensors (double sensors). If it carries out like this, the 2nd starting opening sensor 2402 comprised from two sensors (double sensor) of the 2nd starting opening sensor main side 2402a and the 2nd starting opening sensor slave side 2402b similarly to the 1st starting opening sensor 3002 By adopting this, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming ball B received by the second start port 2004. In addition, an irregular ball (a game ball or a ball approximately equal in diameter or a synthetic resin ball approximately equal in diameter) to which a flexible cord-like operation line (a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a linear member such as a catheter) is attached A person in charge of a game clerk or the like in the game hall is a radio wave irradiation goto by reliably detecting and notifying the fraudulent action by radio wave irradiation using the) in the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process of Can contribute to being able to discover early.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 is first detected by the second start opening sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start opening sensor main side 2402a, and the second start opening sensor second side After passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. In addition, two wires from the first start hole sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first start hole sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start hole sensor main side 2402 a constituting the second start hole sensor 2402 The four wires in combination are configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wires is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. While the detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402 a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), the second start port sensor is detected. The detection signal from the slave side 2402 b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The panel relay substrate 1710 detects the game ball B received by the first start opening 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start opening sensor slave side 2402b. A first start opening sensor slave 3002 b constituting one start opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B which has passed through the gate section 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the accepted gaming ball B, a general winning opening sensor 2401 or 3001 for sensing the gaming ball B accepted at the general winning opening 2001 provided on the gaming board 5, and a fourth provided on the gaming board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of one start opening 2002 are electrically connected through their respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Furthermore, this aspect is adopted, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002 b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402 b are transmitted through the same panel relay board 1710 to the main control board 1310. To the first start-up sensor side 3002b and the second connection from the second start-up sensor side 2402b. It may be configured as one connector and configured such that one connector composed of the four wires is electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 1710. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002 b of the first start port sensor 3002 to the panel relay substrate 1710 and the second start port sensor 2402 are configured. A connector that electrically connects two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay substrate 1710 is physically separated into a single connector composed of four wires. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can use two wires from the first start port sensor slave 3002b and two lines from the second start port sensor slave 2402b in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent work errors (wiring errors such as insertion errors) such as miswiring in the wiring of a book, and in the game hall, the clerks of the game hall, etc. In the case of confirming the presence or absence of a fraud, in the case of removing the wiring temporarily by maintenance and returning it to the original state, the two wires from the first starting opening sensor secondary 3002b and the second starting opening sensor secondary 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (a wiring mistake called insertion mistake), such as a miswiring, of the two wires.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and one general winning opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2400 are received. The connector having the same shape was selected to electrically connect the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay substrate 1710, but there are generally four connectors A general winning opening sensor 3001a for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200 when contributing to the progress of the game and the change in presentation with the entrance to the winning opening 2001. , 3001 b and 3001 c, and two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 The eight lines of the two common lines from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c and the two lines are configured as one connector (single connector), and the eight lines are configured 1 One connector may be configured to be electrically connected to panel relay substrate 1710. In this way, the physical structure is made such that each two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c do not have separate existences but one connector composed of eight wires. In the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line makes it possible for the worker of the line to make a work mistake of miswiring each of the two wires from the general winning hole sensors 2401, 3001 a, 3001 b, 3001 c (wiring mistake of insertion mistake) In the game hall, when a clerk in the game hall or the like checks the presence or absence of a fraud, a general winning opening may be opened when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance. Miswiring of the two wires from each of the sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c Vinegar (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented. In addition, one connector (single connector) is a combination of eight wires combining two wires from the general winning hole sensor 2401 and two wires from the general winning hole sensors 3001a, 3001b and 3001c. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one connector composed of the eight wires is electrically connected directly to the main control substrate 1310 without interposing the panel relay substrate 1710. Even with this configuration, as described above, one connector is configured of eight wires without the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001 a, 3001 b, and 3001 c being separately present. In the manufacturer, the worker of the line is said to be a miswiring of each of the two wires from the general winning hole sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent work errors (wiring errors such as insertion errors), and in the game hall, clerks of the game hall clerks etc., when checking the presence or absence of fraud, temporarily remove the wiring by maintenance In the case of returning to the original, the two from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001 a, 3001 b, 3001 c Mis task of wiring errors of wiring (interconnection of cuttings mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through the unshown connector provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is, as shown in FIG. 132, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 When it is routed to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and to the top side of the back surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward on the back surface of the back box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010 However, when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear face of the back box 3010, it bends from the upper side to the left side. Of the rear side of the back box 3010 and is bent downward again to the lower side of the back side of the back box 3010 along the left side of the back side of the back box 3010. The main control unit 1300 is bent and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100, gathered together by the formed wiring processing pieces When it is routed downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and the connector MFCN for the function display unit along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being drawn down to the lower side, it may be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  In this way, the distance dimension between the line FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-described first line separation distance dimension. It is possible to prevent the pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from entering through the space having the distance from the package to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. Because, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached and the periphery thereof, and when electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 This is because there is a possibility of intruding into the wiring FCBL, which is disposed below and which electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310.

  When adopting such an aspect and electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL. Thereby, it is possible to make the main control MPU 1310 a not affect the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistances, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements, and in the case of using coils or beads, a plurality of wirings It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to FCBL, and when using a capacitor, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of interconnections FCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or the bead and the capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through the unshown connector provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is, as shown in FIG. 132, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 When it is routed to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and to the top side of the back surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward on the back surface of the back box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010 The lines FCBL collected respectively by the wiring processing piece 3011 are bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 is temporarily collected. The game panel 1 is drawn around along the side and collected by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of 00 and is attached downward to the lower side of the main control substrate box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 After being drawn toward the right side, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and is drawn along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN, and then the function display unit When electrically connected to the connector MFCN, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182, connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on peripheral control substrate 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are disposed on the lower side of peripheral control unit 1500. . Corresponding various wires are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wirings FCBL cross or contact (cross over), electromagnetic noises invading the wirings FCBL are electrically transmitted to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When it penetrates into the various wiring connected to, the disturbance of the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 occurs, for example, under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise intruding on the wiring FCBL (for example, the disturbance of the symbol such as black screen) Occurs).

  Therefore, various lines electrically connected to connectors CN2 to CN9 cross line FCBL or line FCBL so that line FCBL is not drawn along lower side (lower side of peripheral control unit 1500) of peripheral control unit 1500. It is preferable to configure so as not to be in contact arrangement (arrangement arrangement). For example, an illustration provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 as a routing method of the wiring FCBL that does not become an arrangement (arrangement arrangement) where various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL do not intersect or contact Wiring FCBL electrically connected through the non-connecting connector is bent from the upper side to the left side when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear face of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear face of the back box 3010, At the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and gathered together by wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 The substrate is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the panel 1100. When the main control board box 1320 attached to the rear surface of the main control unit 1300 is drawn downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 is bent toward the right side, After being drawn around the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side, the circuit board may be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  By doing this, the distance dimension between the line FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-mentioned first line separation distance dimension, so the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the line FCBL It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the package left side of the main control MPU 1310a. Because, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached and the periphery thereof, and when electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 This is because there is a possibility of intruding into the wiring FCBL, which is disposed below and which electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control substrate 1310.

  When adopting such an aspect and electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL. Thereby, it is possible to make the main control MPU 1310 a not affect the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistances, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements, and in the case of using coils or beads, a plurality of wirings It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to FCBL, and when using a capacitor, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of interconnections FCBL. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or the bead and the capacitor may be inserted. A circuit formed by combining these may be inserted.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, while the function display unit connector MFCN is located above the center line. While the main control MPU 1310a is disposed in the above, the positional relationship is reversed, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed below the center line, while the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed above the center line. Alternatively, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310 a may be disposed apart from each other on the main control board 1310. Even with this configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be disposed apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise intruding into the wiring FCBL is for the function display unit It is possible to prevent the pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from entering the various pins of the main control board box 1320 via the space separating the connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a in the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310 a can be protected from wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through the unshown connector provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is, as shown in FIG. 132, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 When it is routed to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and to the top side of the back surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward on the back surface of the back box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010 The main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100, gathered together by the wiring processing pieces 3011 It has been routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. As described above, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 Was placed in As described above, the payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 having one guiding path for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 in a serpentine manner, and one guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the gaming balls B induced by the player one by one on the basis of an instruction from the payout control substrate 633, and an upper full-ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming balls B having passed through the payout device 580 downward. And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. In other words, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full ball path unit 610 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. It was arranged. Therefore, in the case where the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 besides the routing of the wiring FCBL. Are not routed around the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 through at least one vicinity of (or formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200) After being drawn to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 so as not to be accommodated and drawn around the wiring accommodation groove, electricity to the function display unit connector MFCN May be connected.

  In the embodiment described above, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, but in this area, a plurality of full color LEDs are used instead of the function display unit 1400. A decorative substrate to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wires (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wires”) electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the decorative substrate may be obtained, for example, with reference to FIG. To explain it, when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper edge of the back surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward of the back surface of the back box 3010. The connectors of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) are gathered together by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the right side and bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 Or the wiring method of electrically connecting to this connector after being drawn to the lower side of the game board, or When it is routed from the upper corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 It is bent again toward the right side, collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in plural in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and bent toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500 After being drawn to the lower side of the connector of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510), the wiring method of electrically connecting to this connector can be mentioned.

  In the area where the wiring is drawn by such a wiring drawing method, the payout base attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 As it is disposed in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (below) of the ball tank 552, as described above, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise may intrude into the wiring.

  Therefore, while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged below the central line passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, By arranging the peripheral control IC 1510 a on the upper side, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510 a are arranged to be separated on the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be disposed apart from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring causes the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a to be peripheral control board Intruding into various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510 a can be prevented via the space separated at 1510. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Also, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a In the space where the connector of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510 a are separated from each other on the control substrate 1510 or in the peripheral control substrate 1510, it is possible to attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring. Also in this point, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring to which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  Although the decorative substrate and the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly electrically connected by wiring, the decorative substrate and the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay substrate 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a straight line. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the above-described wiring (that is, to a plurality of wirings for transmitting control signals from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the decoration substrate). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise, respectively. Thus, it is possible to prevent the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise intruding through the wiring on the peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring which electromagnetic wave noise can penetrate.

  A resistor, a filter circuit, etc. can be mentioned as such an element. It is known from the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic wave noise that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs), and the filter circuit is a signal having a waveform width larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass through.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., examples of such elements include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). In the case where capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wires. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wires, respectively, or the bead and the capacitor may be Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the wiring UPCBL is disposed at the rear of the function display unit 1400 and is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131 a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131. Is bent toward the upper surface of the rear surface of the game panel 1100 as shown in FIG. 132, it is bent toward the rear surface of the rear box 3010 at the upper edge of the front surface of the rear box 3010 and approaches with the above-described wiring FCBL ( Or in contact with the back side of the back box 3010, it is bent downward of the back side of the back box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the back side of the back box 3010. Of the back side of the game panel 1100 and the back box 3010 from the upper right corner of the game board 5 When it is drawn to the upper side of the surface, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and is bent again to the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the side are collectively gathered and routed around the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 moves to the right side. It is bent toward the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 and is drawn up to the upper side of the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700 and then electrically connected to the predetermined connector. You may In this case, various wires electrically connected to connectors CN2 to CN9 shown in FIG. 182 are separated from the upper side of drive substrate unit 1700 by drawing along the lower side of peripheral control unit 1500 although not shown. . As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 does not cross (or cross over) the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, peripheral control of peripheral control board 1510 housed in wiring UPCBL routed under peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of drive substrate unit 1700 and peripheral control unit 1510. As the positional relationship between the mounting position of the IC (peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 154), arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the peripheral control board 1510 it can. That is, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the middle points of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the middle points of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated. can do. Thus, peripheral control IC 1510 a of peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from wiring UPCBL drawn under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of drive substrate unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a and is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins. Therefore, peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring UPCBL to which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left bottom front decoration substrate) as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3312 (front decoration) 3322 A front stage decorative portion 3312 (front stage decorative portion 3322) which is a movable body by using small electronic components (magnetic sensors) such as 3321a, back upper right front end decorative substrate 3411a, and back lower right front end decorative substrate 3421a). Adopted as a sensor to detect the standby position (original position) of 3412 and 3422), magnet 3312a (the magnet 3322a of the previous stage decoration portion 3322, the magnet 3412a of the previous stage decoration portion 3412, and the previous stage decoration portion) By detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a 3422 of 3422, the front decoration part 3312 (front decoration part 3322, 2) Identify and standby position the rotational position of 12,3422) (but had set situ), it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of a magnet by the magnet Goto. This is because small electronic components (magnetic sensors) such as back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left bottom first stage decoration substrate 3321a, back right upper first stage decoration substrate 3411a, back right bottom first stage decoration substrate 3421a) The magnets 3312a (the magnets 3322a of the front decoration 3332, the front decoration) intermittently in the situation where the front decoration 3312 (the front decoration 3322, 3241, 3422) is continuously rotated. The magnetism of the magnet 3412a of 3412 and the magnet 3422a) of the front stage decoration portion 3422 should be detected, but when the magnetism is continuously detected, it is possible to detect an approach of an incorrect magnet as a magnet goto. is there.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring UPCBL in FIG. 132 and the periphery control substrate 1510 are used as a wire for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 as a specific one of the rendering devices. The wiring UPCBL among the wiring (not shown) electrically connecting between the substrate and the panel drive substrate 1720 is in the vicinity of the ball supply means (near the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580). It was supposed to pass through. Then, among the wires forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the wiring UPCBL does not include the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131, and various decoration substrates 184, 273, etc. and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are arranged so as not to intersect or contact the wiring forming the transmission path. Therefore, such a configuration can also be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310. For example, among various wires electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310, a wire passing under an environment strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise and a wire other than the wire are arranged so as not to intersect or contact with each other. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310) capable of operating by the high frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator from being forcibly reset by the above-mentioned built-in reset circuit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

  In the embodiment described above, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are ball supply means, are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 which are provided in the game area 5a divided into 5 and divided into the game board 5 A ball collecting device is provided which has a collecting port for collecting the gaming balls collected to the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a and collecting balls collected by the ball collecting device as ball emitting devices 540. The ball launcher 540 and the game board 5 are provided with a ball transport device for transporting toward the end without supplying payout of game balls to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. It is also possible to form a circulation path of gaming balls by the game area 5a to be played, the ball collecting device, and the ball conveying device, and to circulate a predetermined number of gaming balls in a closed manner and play a game .

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the back left upper base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which itself is attached. 3311a had mounted a plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa that radiates light toward the left surface side of the previous stage decoration portion 3312, but made a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decoration substrate a side view type A plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311 a may be selected along with selection, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left basic decorative substrate may be side selected A plurality of full color LEs mounted on the back upper left first stage decorative board 3311a while selecting the view type The top view type of 3311 aa may be selected, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board may be selected on the top view type and mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311 a A plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa to be selected may be selected as the top view type, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left basic decorative substrate may be selected as the top view type A plurality of full color LEDs 3311 aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3311 a may be selected as a side view type.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the back lower left base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3321 to which itself is attached. In the 3321a, a plurality of full color LEDs 3321 aa for emitting light toward the left surface side of the previous stage decoration portion 3322 were mounted, but a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back lower left base decoration substrate are side view type A plurality of full color LEDs 3321 aa mounted on the back lower left front end decorative substrate 3321 a may be selected along with the selection, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the rear lower left base decorative substrate may be selected. A plurality of full color LEs to be mounted on the back lower left first stage decorative substrate 3321a while selecting the view type The top view type 3321aa may be selected, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back lower left base decorative board may be selected on the top view type and mounted on the back lower left front decorative board 3321a. A plurality of full color LEDs 3321 aa to be selected may be selected from those of the top view type, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back lower left basic decoration substrate may be selected from the top view type The plurality of full color LEDs 3321 aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3321 a may be selected as the side view type.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3411 to which the back upper right base decorative substrate is attached is mounted. 3411a had mounted a plurality of full color LEDs 3411 aa for emitting light toward the right surface side of the previous stage decoration part 3412, but a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper right basic decoration substrate have side view type A plurality of full color LEDs 3411 aa mounted on the back upper right front end decorative board 3411 a may be selected along with selection, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the rear upper right base decorative board may be selected. A plurality of full color LEs to be mounted on the back upper right first stage decorative board 3411a while selecting the view type 3411 aa may be selected as the top view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper right basic decorative substrate may be selected as the top view type and mounted on the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411 a A plurality of full color LEDs 3411 aa to be selected may be selected from the top view type, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper right basic decoration substrate may be selected from the top view type The plurality of full color LEDs 3411 aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3411 a may be side view type.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of full color LEDs (not shown) for emitting light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3421 to which the back lower right base decorative substrate is attached is mounted. A plurality of full color LEDs 3421 aa for emitting light toward the right surface side of the previous stage decoration portion 3422 are mounted on the decoration substrate 3421 a, but a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the lower right rear stage decoration substrate are side view type It is also possible to select a plurality of full color LEDs 3421 aa mounted on the back lower right front end decoration substrate 3421 a while selecting the ones, or a plurality of the full color LEDs mounted on the back lower right base decoration substrate Of full-color LEDs of the side view type and a plurality of full-color LEs mounted on the lower right front end decorative board 3421a 3421 aa may be selected from the top view type, and a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back lower right basic decorative substrate may be selected from the top view type and the back lower right front decorative substrate 3421 a For the plurality of full color LEDs 3421 aa mounted on the top view type may be selected, and for the plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the lower right rear base decoration board is selected the top view type The plurality of full color LEDs 3421 aa mounted on the lower right first stage decorative substrate 3421 a may be side view type.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the wiring (upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the specific one of the plurality of rendering devices The wiring UPCBL shown in FIG. 132 and the wiring (not shown) for electrically connecting the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the panel drive substrate 1720 are used as the wiring for forming a transmission path for electrical connection. Wiring UPCBL ′, which is a connection cable electrically connected via connection connector 1131 a provided on the back side of upper left panel decoration substrate 1131, is routed so as to be directly electrically connected to peripheral control substrate 1510. It is also good. In this case, the wiring UPCBL 'is a wiring forming another transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 (various decorative substrates 184 on the door frame side as other rendering means except the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131, It is arranged not to intersect or contact with the wiring forming the transmission path between the H. 273, etc etc. and the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, that is, the direct connection between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 Wiring that forms another transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by popping out electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL '(the transmission path between the other rendering means and the control means excluding the specific rendering means It is possible to prevent intrusion into various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 of the peripheral control unit 1500, which are wirings to be formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the under-back effect unit 3100, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and cause malfunction. In addition, when the surface area of a single conductor increases as compared with the predetermined surface area, there is a possibility of damage, and each is structurally brought into contact, fixed and brought into conduction, for example, under a metal back The reinforcing plate for the movable arm and the slide rail 3151 ns for the metal back lower moving arm are attached and structurally brought into contact with each other for electrical connection, and these conductors are connected to each other for the under-back effect unit 1 Conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc, metal casing of back and bottom raising and lowering drive motor 3151, second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 fc for back and bottom effect unit, It is a path to be grounded to the ground (GND) through the resistance Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720, but a metal screw is provided in place of the metal case of the up-down drive motor 3151. Alternatively, a metal screw may be used alone, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal may be fixed to an insulating substrate) may be provided, and the lug plate may be used. Good. In other words, these conductors are the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc for the lower back rendering unit, the screw (or lug plate) made of metal, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 fc for the lower back rendering unit, and the panel drive board 1720 It may be a path grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0 of A plurality of conductors provided in back-up effect unit 3200 can be configured in the same manner.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left rendering unit 3300, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. For example, the conductor of the slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm made of metal is different from the surface area of a single conductor which has a possibility of being damaged, compared with the surface area of a predetermined surface. 1 Conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc, metal casing of back left lateral driving motor 3351, second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 fc for back left rendering unit, and resistance Rs2 of relay substrate 3351 a provided in back left rendering unit 3300 But the back left traversing drive motor 3351 is made of metal. Instead of the above, metal screws may be provided, and this may be performed via the metal screws alone, or a lug plate (for fixing metal lug terminals to the insulating substrate) may be provided. You may make it carry out via this lug board. That is, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm is the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc for the back left rendering unit, a screw (or lug plate) made of metal, the second conductor potential for the back left rendering unit It may be a path grounded to the ground (GND) through the fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 fc and the resistance Rs2 of the relay substrate 3351 a provided in the back left rendering unit 3300. A plurality of conductors provided in the back right rendering unit 3400 can be similarly configured.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left rendering unit 3300, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and cause malfunction. For example, the conductor of the slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm made of metal is different from the surface area of a single conductor which has a possibility of being damaged, compared with the surface area of a predetermined surface. 1 Conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc, metal casing of back left lateral driving motor 3351, second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 fc for back left rendering unit, and resistance Rs2 of relay substrate 3351 a provided in back left rendering unit 3300 Through the connection to ground (GND), but the relay board 3351a is connected to ground (GND). In the case where the ins is not formed and the resistor Rs2 is not provided, a resistor Rs2 'is provided on a panel drive substrate 1720 which is an upper substrate of the relay substrate 3351a, and one end of the resistor Rs2' And the other end of the resistor Rs2 'is provided as part of an electric wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the third conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring for the back left rendering unit (relay board 3351a and the panel driving board 1720). May be electrically connected via In this case, the metal conductor for the slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm is a metal casing for the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc for the back left rendering unit and the back left traverse drive motor 3351 for the back left rendering unit The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc, the relay substrate 3351a provided on the back left rendering unit 3300, the third conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring for the back left rendering unit, and the panel drive substrate 1720 via the resistor Rs2 ' Path to the ground (GND) of the

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm is a metal of the back left traversing drive motor 3351 through the crossover wiring of the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351 nc for the back left rendering unit Of the metal slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm and other conductive members (for example, a structure used to improve rigidity, a drive mechanism, etc.) Mechanical parts, electrical parts (including the housing of electric parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and structures molded of conductive resin (including decorative structures) And the like, among the plurality of conductors, etc., may be electrically connected to one other via the other crossover wiring. That is, it may be configured to be electrically connected by two or more stages of crossover wirings. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected to each other by means of crossover wiring, or a plurality of conductors may be connected in series and in parallel by crossover wiring, respectively, and a metal screw is provided. Relays for electrically connecting one conductor to another conductor may be performed via the metal screw alone, or the lug plate (the metal lug terminal may be used as an insulating substrate). (The one fixed to the rear) may be provided via this lug plate. It is preferable that the plurality of crossover wires be configured to be short in length.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, various drive motors provided in various effect units such as the front effect unit 2600, the back downward effect unit 3100, the back upward effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400 are stepping Although it is a motor, you may use a motor (servo motor) provided with rotation detectors, such as an encoder. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the servomotor is detected by the rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. Thereby, the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the servomotor can be set to a predetermined rotational speed.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, driving to various drive motors provided in various rendering units such as the front rendering unit 2600, the back-down rendering unit 3100, the back-up rendering unit 3200, the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back right rendering unit 3400 The power supply line (for example, +35 V power supply line from power supply substrate 630 or +12 V power supply line from power supply substrate 630) is a substrate to which wiring from various drive motors is directly connected (for example, raising and lowering the lower back of rendering unit 3100) In the drive motor 3151, in the panel drive board 1720, in the back left traverse drive motor 3351 in the back left rendering unit 3300, in the relay board 3351 a provided in the back left rendering unit 3300, fuses (or chip fuses) or poly A switch may be provided, or A fuse (a chip fuse may be used) or a poly switch for a substrate 630 supplied as a drive power supply line (for example, a +35 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630 or a +12 V power supply line from the power supply substrate 630) May be provided.

[20. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 224, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3002 to The first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the first start opening 2002 is entered) (step S231) A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S232). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2402 is in the on state (there is entering the second starting opening 2004) (step S233) The second starting opening passage processing such as storing it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S239) is performed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) is 16R when it suggests the "16R big hit", 16R A process of controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit gaming state. In addition, when it becomes the mode which suggests “4R big hit”, processing to open and close the big winning a prize opening 2005 according to 4R big hit game state is executed.

  Also, in the big hit control process (step S241), after the release control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and a big hit gaming state based on a big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) controlled to a high probability state (high probability time short state) after the end of the big hit gaming state Set when finished. Then, when the high probability flag is set, or when the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time reduction counter becomes “0” first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 235 described later or A high probability flag is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and ends the big hit gaming state based on a big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) which is controlled to the time saving state (high probability time short state) It is set when you And when the time saving flag becomes the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 235 described later or the second special symbol not shown shown in FIG. It is reset by processing.

  In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and the time reduction state (high probability) When ending the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) controlled to time saving state), the number of continuation times of the time short state is set. And, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but before the counter value becomes "0", it became the next big hit Sometimes, it is reset in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 235 described later or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0" (Step S236), the first special symbol process processing including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S237), and the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol storage area The second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter showing the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S236) Process processing is executed (step S238). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S232).

  Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3002 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002, this is shown in FIG. 225. As described above, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires, from the main control built-in RAM, a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S24 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 corresponds to the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM Store in

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach type as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit After the effect pre-determination process of determining the prior determination information such as the type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning combination (step S245), the process ends.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S242 that the first number of pending storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245.

  In addition, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended for the first While updating to correspond to the number of memories, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command (first pending number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the first pending memory number to perform peripheral control. It is to be transmitted to the substrate 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the first number of pending storages on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect advance determination process, the advance determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S241, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether it will be a big hit by comparing it with a random number, the type of big hit if it is big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it does not become a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

  Then, the identified prior determination information (whether or not to be a big hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit According to the type of game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of held memories (value of the held number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the pre-decision command. For example, in the effect prior determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified prior determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first pending storage number A first special symbol predetermination command according to one special suspension number counter value) is set (step S262).

  Then, a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), so that it is stored corresponding to the first starting port 2002 where the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of pending storage, whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the starting winning a prize is made a big hit or not, the type of big hit if it is big hit, the effect display device 1600 if it is not big hit Peripheral control to be carried on the peripheral control board 1510 prior to starting variable display according to the start winning, such as executing reach effect as the game effect to be executed or prior determination information such as the type type of the game effect to be executed The IC 1510a can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC 1510 a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the a priori determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first holding storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Also, the first pending storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the pending storage number, and the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the first (first) prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the prior determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the prior determination information notified to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area when the a priori determination command is received Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area according to the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (in the pending storage area Shift stored pre-decision information). Thereby, the prior determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information.

  As described above, when the variable display control is put on hold, although the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (pending), the jackpot expectation of the variable display control (pseudo-winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold termination. .

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S234).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S233 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, this is shown in FIG. 227. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. It is judged whether it is "4" which is) or not (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following step S253 to the next to put the variable display control of the second special symbol a new pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S254, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S251. Store in

  However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of step S253 to step S254.

  In addition, when the number of second reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended second While updating to correspond to the number of memories, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command (second pending number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the second number of pending storage numbers and performs peripheral control. It is to be transmitted to the substrate 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510 a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to display the second hold storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S237). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S 237 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S 238 of the special symbol process processing are the same program modules, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S237 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing and the like at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol )
3. The fluctuation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fluctuation random number, and the fluctuation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process where the lottery process etc. for the subject is performed (step S282)
4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283)
5. The mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 First special symbol stop processing to stop the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 210).

  FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 229, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S301. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the processing of step S302 next. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol . Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special holding number counter is counted down and the first special symbol storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored. A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S305, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S281), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the jackpot determination table for high probability shown in FIG. 181A if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state) (step S311) (Step S312) If the current gaming state is a low probability state (Step S311), the big hit determination table at low probability shown in FIG. 231 (A) is selected (Step S313), and the selected big hit determination table and the first One special symbol normal processing is compared with the first special random number read out in step S302 (step S314).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 231 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the big hit determination at low probability used when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state)) A table and a high probability big hit determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability / short time status) are provided. Then, in the jackpot determination table at low probability to be compared with the first special random number, it matches with the jackpot judgment value indicating that one kind of first special random number is won in the big hit, The first special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the outlier determination value indicating that the special random numbers are the above outliers (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the special symbol and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S138 of the special motorized symbol control process, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to compare with the second special random number, Similar to the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the special random number, it matches the big hit judgment value indicating that one kind of second special random number is won in the big hit, and 299 second special random numbers The second special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the outlier judgment value indicating that the above is an outlier (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300).

  Also, in the high probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the first special random number, 10 types including the first special random number identical to the first special random number set in the low probability big hit judgment table The first special random numbers are associated with each other such that the first special random number matches the jackpot determination value and the 290 types of first special random numbers match the outlier determination value (big hit probability at high probability: 30 minutes 1). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time short state), the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won is 10 times the low probability time (normal state (low probability non-short state)). Be enhanced. In the special symbol and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S138 of the special motorized symbol control process, in the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability, which is referred to compare with the second special random number, Similar to the high probability big hit determination table to be compared with the special random number, the 10 types of the second kind of second special random number identical to the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table The second special random numbers are associated with each other such that the special random numbers coincide with the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the 290 types of second special random numbers coincide with the outlier judgment value indicating that the above is a departure. Yes (big hit probability at high probability: 1/30).

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S315) ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is hit big is set, it ends processing (step S316), the 1st special read out at step S302 of the selected big hit judgment table and the 1st special symbol normal processing As a result of comparison with the random numbers, when it is determined to be out, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random numbers read out in step S302 (step S317). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random numbers read in step S302, when it is determined that the reach is out (step S318), the reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set and processing is performed. The process ends (step S319).

  FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 231 (B). (Step S322) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S323). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S321, it is determined that the first special symbol is out of pattern as the variation stop state (step S324).

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each determination result (16R big hit, 4R big hit) . The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
The large winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 1.16R big hit gaming state, and the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times after the end of the big hit gaming state 16R jackpot to control to high probability time short state until the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times before becoming the next big hit or before the next big hit The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 2.4R big hit gaming state, and after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times 4R large to control to high probability time short state until the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times before becoming the next big hit before or the next big hit This From among the two types of jackpots, one of the jackpots is determined.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, of the 16R big hit and 4R big hit, 100 judgments are made against the 4R big hit with a small profit for the player. Distribution of the value is set. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, of the 16R big hit and 4R big hit, distribution of 55 judgment values is set for the 16R big hit which the player has a large profit, The distribution of 45 judgment values is set for the 4R jackpot in which the player has little profit. As described above, in the normal state (non-short time state), the drawing of the first special symbol side is performed by causing the game ball B to enter the first starting opening 2002, but when the first special symbol side is a big hit (first time In the case of a big hit), the player must always decide the 4R big hit with a small profit. On the other hand, in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, it becomes possible to enter the gaming ball B into the second starting opening 2004, and by entering the gaming ball B into the second starting opening 2004 The lottery of the second special symbol side is performed, but at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol side (at the time of consecutive villas), how to decide either the 16R big hit or the 4R big hit where the profit of the player is different It can be noticed that the kind of big hit is decided. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous because the game nature changes between the first big hit time and the consecutive time time.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is decided to be 4R big hit, it is decided to be 4R big hit symbol as a big hit symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process not shown, when it is determined to be 16R big hit, it is determined as a big hit symbol 16R big hit symbol and when it is determined to 4R big hit, it is determined to be 4R big hit symbol as a big hit symbol.

  And after the decision processing about the stop design is done in this way, as the processing of step S325, these drawing results (the type of big hit, reach out, indication of either of the removal (the form of the stop special pattern of the first special symbol A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510). And after that, this process is complete | finished when the above-mentioned 1st special symbol process flag is updated so that a process may be transfered to said 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) as a process of step S326. The peripheral control IC 1510a starts fluctuating display of left, middle and right decorative symbols based on the received judgment result notification command and fluctuation pattern command, and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, and from the received judgment result notification command, 16R of the big hit related to the special symbol is received. When it is specified, it is decided to be 16R big hit symbol (combination that the left, middle and right decorative symbols become all 7 symbols among “1” to “9”), and 4R if it is specified the big hit Big hit design (decoration of left, middle and right is decided to the combination which becomes the same design excluding “7” among “1” to “9”), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses ( At the end of the reach effect), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is fluctuatingly stopped at either the 16R big hit symbol or the 4R big hit symbol, it can be determined from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that it is a big hit, Furthermore, since different symbols are used as the 16R big hit symbol and the 4R big hit symbol, either the 16R big hit or the 4R big hit can be determined.

  In addition, peripheral control IC 1510a, when it specifies reach out of the decision result notification command which is received as a mode (stop design) at the time of fluctuation stop of the decoration design which is indicated in production indication device 1600, it is the departure design with reach (A combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same.) A combination of non-identical outlying designs (not identical), but with left and right decorative designs if outliers are specified. Is determined to be non-identical, and display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended).

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the current game state is selected (step S342) If the reach flag is set (step S343), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S344), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag If it is not set, that is, it will be normal release (a reach effect is not performed) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S345).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S346), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S347). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S348). As a result, effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  In addition, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol process flag described above is processed to be transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S283) as the processing of step S349 next. When updated, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of short is associated with the above special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). When the time is short, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. That is, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-short time, the variation pattern at the time of short time selected as the time-short can be extremely short in time required for the variable display control of the special symbol. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

  FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S371, as shown in FIG. 234. As processing of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above first special symbol stop processing (step S284) in the processing of step S373, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 235, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S381. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed as the processing of the first special symbol stop symbol, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the count value of the time counter is "0" while the time reduction flag is set and the number of continuation times of the time reduction state is set. (Step S383). Then, if the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S384), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S385). . As a result, when the same counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S386). If it is determined in the process of step S383 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S385 that the time reduction counter is not "0". At that time, the process proceeds to step S387.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S387), a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started is set (step S388), and the big hit gaming state is started (big hit round start command is set) The standby time (period for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) until it is set is set in the interval timer (step S389). Then, next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and when the time shortening flag is set, the time shortening flag is reset, and the count value of the time reduction counter is If it is not "0", the same counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S390), and the first special symbol process is executed. When the flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S391), this processing is ended.

  The big hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit). In step S 388, a big hit start command (16 R big hit start command, 4 R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit is set. As a result, the effect corresponding to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S239).

  In the above step S389, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state starts is set in the interval timer, but in the processing of step S401, after the waiting time set in this interval timer has elapsed, FIG. As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 and sets the high probability time shorting state as the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state (step opening processing (step S402) is performed.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening / closing process (step S402).

  If it is determined in step S411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, then the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured to receive the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when opening for a long time, 0.5 seconds when opening for a short time) has elapsed from the open state (step S412), or the above-mentioned large winning opening 2005 When the ball B has won the maximum number of winnings (for example, nine) (step S413), the big winning opening 2005 in the open state is controlled to be in the closed state (step S414). When it is determined that the current round is ended by controlling the large winning opening 2005 closed (step S 415), the type of the big hit and the current number of rounds as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The big hit round end command according to is set (step S416), and it transfers to step S428.

  In addition, if it is determined in the process of step S411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured to receive the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237. When it is determined that the new round is to be started by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to an open state (step S418), the peripheral control board 1510 is reached. A big hit round start command according to the type of big hit and the number of new rounds is set as a command to be sent to the (step S419). Then, the big winning opening 2005 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. In addition, when it is judged that it will not start a new round by opening the above-mentioned special winning opening 2005 (for example, the second opening in the same round) (step S418), The special winning opening 2005 is controlled to the open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. As a result, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. can execute effects according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command and the current number of rounds.

  Further, if it is determined in the process of step S428 that the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the peripheral control board. A special winning a prize entry command is set as a command to be sent to 1510 (step S429), and this processing ends. Thereby, when the special winning opening entry ball command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like according to the acceptance of the gaming ball B to the special winning opening 2005 Can be performed by

  If it is determined in the process of step S417 that it is not time to open the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 receives the command. When all the round numbers have been completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S424). Then, the high probability flag is set (step S426), and the time saving flag is set, and an initial value (for example, 50 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state to the counter value of the time saving counter (step S427). This process ends. As described above, when the big hit gaming state ends, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are set, and the high hit time short state is controlled as the gaming state after the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 238 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric product control process (step S116).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 238, The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol storage area of the RAM as the processing of step S802. Run.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S804)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. The pattern of the normal symbol at the time of the fluctuation control stop determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display pattern at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Normal symbol stop processing to stop the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of normal design becomes the mode which suggests “per common figure”, upper 2nd starting opening door 2411 retreats, game ball to 2nd starting opening 2004 Ordinary motorized item opening process (step S 807) which executes a process for controlling the acceptance of B.

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 210).

  FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S802).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 239, The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-code variation random number from the above-mentioned random number counter as the processing of step S811.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the above ordinary hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, the number of ordinary symbols held is the maximum value "4" It is determined whether or not (step S812). If it is determined in the process of step S812 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S813 to S814 are performed in order to newly put variable display control of the normal symbols into the pending state. It will process. That is, first, as the process of step S 813, the normal hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S814, each random number acquired in step S811 is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. .

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S812 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S813 to step S814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 240, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S821. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, next, as the processing of step S822, the normal stored in the regular symbol storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of the steps S823 and S824, while counting down the above-mentioned normal number-of-holds counter, at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol stored in each storage area The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 is from the first (first) area Store in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage The various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the determination table (not shown) for the popular drawing at the time reduction (step S826) if the current gaming state is the time reduction state (high probability time reduction state) (step S826) Step S826) If the current gaming state is the non-short time state (low probability non-short state) (step S825), the non-short time common drawing determination table (not shown) is selected (step S827) and selected The determination table for common drawing is compared with the normal random number read out in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S828).

  It should be noted that the per-common-figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the per-common-pattern determination table used when the game state is short (high probability time short state) and the game state is non-short It has a non-time-shorted common drawing determination table to be used in the case of time (low probability non-short state). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, the 251 common random numbers correspond to the common-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the common random numbers were selected per common diagram, The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. Thus, when time passes, when the game ball B passes to the gate section 2003, the player always wins per flat map, and the upper second starting opening door 2411 retreats to the second starting opening 2004. It is possible to control the reception of the game ball B.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the non-short time, even if the game ball B passes to the gate section 2003, there is no chance to win per game, so the second upper starting door 2411 retreats and the second There is no possibility to control the reception of the game ball B into the starting opening 2004.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829) ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S 830), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal design) at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol when it is determined to be out of place. A common figure as a mode (stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a misaligned symbol (step S832). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804), this processing is ended.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol always becomes a hit, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is extreme. Is shortened to a predetermined short time (for example, 0.3 seconds). And when the lottery result of the above-mentioned normal design becomes a hit, it controls with the opening and closing pattern which closes the above-mentioned 2nd starting opening 2004 as an open state for a very long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds) . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability of the lottery result of the normal symbol being hit is extremely high, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short. The game ball B is significantly easier to win in the second starting port 2004 because of the longer time of the game, etc., and it is more efficient to aim the second starting port 2004 than the first starting port 2002 more efficiently. You can win B. In the control of the non-short time state, the winning probability of the above normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the above normal symbol does not always hit, and it is assumed that the second starting port 2004 is targeted. Also, the game ball B can not be won in the second start port 2004.

  As described above, during the control of the non-short time state, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed at, the game ball B can not be won in the second start port 2004, so the first start port 2002 In order to win the game ball B, the game ball B must be fired (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center character 2500. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted on the front face of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B is the obstacle nail By abutting on N, the game ball B is given various motions to flow downward. For this reason, even if the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center role 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it is not limited to winning in the first start opening 2002, but winning in the first start opening 2002. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower end in the left-right direction center of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during control of the time saving state, it is more efficient to aim the game ball B more effectively when aiming at the second starting opening 2004 than the first starting opening 2002, so the second starting opening 2004 is played In order for the ball B to win, the game ball B must be fired (so-called "right-handed") by aiming at the right side of the center character 2500. In addition, when the second start port 2004 is opened due to the structure of the game board 5, the game machine B is hit on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004. The game ball B which has passed is made to win the second start port 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball B struck into the right side of the center combination 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time saving state As compared with the first starting opening 2002 in the middle, the gaming ball B comes to be awarded to the second starting opening 2004 extremely efficiently.

  Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will hit is extremely high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol Since the time required for control is constant and short, and the time of the open state of the second start port 2004 is long, etc., the game ball B is likely to be won in the second start port 2004, and further to the second start port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds in the control of the non-time-short state, so a short time The variation display control of the special symbol (the suspension of the variation display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when the control is made to the above time reduction state after the end of the big hit gaming state, hitting the gaming ball B on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004 makes a big hit again in a short time. It is possible to control the jackpot gaming state and expect to obtain many game balls B. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of gaming balls B to be paid out by the winning of the gaming ball B in the second starting opening 2004 is one, the game for the second starting opening 2004 Even if the ball B is frequently hit, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced while enhancing the interest of the player.

[21. Hold notice effect and hold change effect]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number specification command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the display mode of the hold display until the hold display is digested. By changing, it is possible to execute a suspension announcement effect that suggests a big hit expectation for the variation display (the variation display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol based on the suspension display. Moreover, during the display period of a pending | holding display, it is possible to perform pending | holding change presentation which suggests the possibility that the display mode of a pending | holding display may change.

  Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), the main control board 1310 transmits a hold number designation command and an advance determination command. . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the hold number specification command and the advance determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, the hold notification number determined from the hold notification determination table according to those commands, that is, the hold number specification command Select the pending notice decision table corresponding to (number of pending storages) and prior decision information (either big hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the prior decision command, and obtain the decision value set in the pending notice decision table The type of the pending notice pattern set in the pending notice determination table is determined by comparing with the random number for the pending notice determination. In the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold notice pattern differs depending on the prior determination information (one of big hit, reach loss, and loss) specified from the pre-decision command. The appearance rate is different.

  In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (holding memory number) specified from the holding number designating command is increased, thereby displaying the effect The device 1600 additionally displays one pending indication. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold display (the variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (the number of holding memories) specified from the holding number specification command decreases. , Erase the pending display in the effect display device 1600. Then, during the display period from when the on-hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to when the on-hold display is erased, the display mode of the on-hold display is displayed based on the on-hold notification pattern. The display mode of the hold display can be changed each time the variable display (the change display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol based on another hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied). In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold display (the variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted. Even after the start of the change display (the change display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241 and FIG. 242, a suspension notice determination table in which a plurality of suspension notice patterns are set for each suspension number (retention storage number) specified from the suspension number specification command will be described. Note that the hold advance notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 241 (A) is a pending notice determination table used when pending 1 is lit (number of pendings = 1), and FIG. 241 (B) is a pending notice determination used when pending 2 is on (number of pendings = 2) It is a table, FIG. 241 (C) is a pending notice determination table used when pending 3 lights on (number of pendings = 3), and FIG. 242 (D) is used when pending 4 lights on (number of pendings = 4) It is a reservation notice determination table to be performed.

  As described above, a plurality of types of pending notification patterns are set in the pending notification determination table corresponding to the number of pending (the number of pending storages), but the number of pending statuses for winning (for pending notification patterns) It is set how the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 changes each time the hold storage is digested by the number of storages). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241 (A), the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 may change in the hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is on (number of holds = 1). Otherwise (that is, it only digests the hold indication), a hold notification pattern is set in which only the display mode of one hold indication is set. Also, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once before the hold display is digested in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 is on (number of holds = 2). Since there exists, the pending notice pattern in which the display mode of two pending displays is set is associated. Also, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice before the hold display is digested in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 3 is on (number of holds = 3). Since there exists, the pending notice pattern in which the display mode of the pending display for 3 times is set is associated. Also, as shown in FIG. 242 (D), the display mode of the hold display can be changed three times before the hold display is digested in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 4 is on (number of holds = 4). From the fact that there is a hold notification pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for 4 times is set is associated.

  In addition, as a display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 set to the hold notification pattern, four displays such that the hold display is displayed in white (basic color), blue, red, or rainbow color Aspects are provided. Then, when determining the suspension notice pattern from the suspension notice determination table, as a result of the display mode of the suspension display changing to the end, the big hit expectation is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color It is set to become. That is, when the lottery result is identified as the big hit as the prior determination information, the pending notice pattern to be a display mode (for example, rainbow color) having a high hit probability is determined as the display mode of the final pending display. When the lottery result is specified as loss (losing, reach loss) as the determination information, as the display mode of the final hold display, the hold notification pattern to be a display mode (for example, white) with low big hit expectation degree is determined with high probability From the above, when the display mode of the final hold display is displayed in the display mode with a high hit probability, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased.

  In addition, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → red → rainbow color in the reserve notification pattern, and the display mode of the reserve display is maintained when the reserve display is digested. Or, the next display mode is set to be a display mode having a high hit probability. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low hit probability, the possibility of changing to a display mode with a high hit probability when the hold display is digested remains, and the display of the hold display Aspects can be watched with expectation to the end.

  Moreover, the display mode of the hold display does not necessarily need to change in the order of blue → red → rainbow color after the display mode of the hold display is displayed in white (basic color) in the reserve notification pattern, and display in the middle not white (basic color) Start from the mode (for example, suddenly with a suspension notice pattern number 4 when hold 1 lights on, and start with rainbow color) or skip one or more display modes and change to the next display mode (for example, when hold 2 lights on) It is also set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color) according to the reservation notice pattern number 7 of. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) in which the display mode of the hold display changes, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display in a display mode with a high hit probability. In addition, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low hit probability, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode changes to, and the display mode of the hold display is to the end It can be made to pay attention with expectation.

  Also, in the pending notice determination table, a pending notice pattern that becomes rainbow color as a display mode of the final pending display only when a big hit is identified as the prior decision information from the prior decision command 4. Pending notice pattern number 4, 7, 9, 10 when Pending 2 lights up, Pending notice pattern number 4, 7 when Pending 3 lights, etc. Is set to be possible. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is digested, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. .

  In addition, when a loss is identified as prior determination information from the prior determination command in the suspension notice determination table, a suspension notice pattern (white 1 (basic color) or blue) will be displayed as the display mode of the final suspension display Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, Hold notice 2 hold hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, etc. Hold 3 turn on hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, etc. Hold 4 turn on hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 etc.) If the big hit as the pre-judgment information is determined from the pre-judgment command and the reach is specified, the pre-decision command specifies red as the display mode of the final on-hold display (p. Hold notice pattern number 3, 6, 8 when hold 2 lights up, hold notice pattern number 3, 6 when hold 3 lights up, etc. hold notice pattern number 3 when hold 4 lights up 6, etc.) are also set to be able to determine. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is determined that at least reach at the time of the end of the hold display and the reach effect is executed, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notification pattern at the start of display of the hold display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is digested is determined. However, as the determination method, only the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display may be determined at the start of the display of the hold display. And when the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display are different, the display mode of the final hold display before at least the target hold display is digested. It is also possible to determine how the display mode of the hold display changes, each time when the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can be changed comes, so that is displayed. Even with such a determination method, it is possible to sequentially change the display mode of the hold display until the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is digested.

  Next, the pending change presentation that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the pending display changes during the pending display period will be described below. In the suspension notice effect mentioned above, the display mode of the suspension display can be changed every time the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the suspension display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, it is possible to execute a hold change presentation that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

  Specifically, whether the display mode of the hold display changes based on the hold notification pattern at the time of starting the change display (the change display of the special symbol) of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the start condition is satisfied) It is judged whether or not it is not, the holding change presentation determination table corresponding to the judgment result is selected, and the judgment value set in the holding presentation change decision table is compared with the read random number for holding presentation changing decision, The type of the on-hold change effect pattern set in the on-hold change effect determination table is determined. That is, whether or not to execute the on-hold change effect, and when performing on-off change effect, determine the type of the on-hold change effect.

  Here, a plurality of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and the hold change effect pattern is not executed (on hold change effect pattern number 1), as a hold change effect Hold change effect pattern for executing the first hold change effect (hold change effect pattern No. 2), hold change effect pattern for performing the second hold change effect as hold change effect (hold change effect pattern number 3), hold change The hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern No. 4) for executing the third hold change effect is set as the effect. The hold change presentation determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. In the hold change production determination table, the distribution of the determination value for each of the hold change production patterns (hold change production pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change production is the same degree, and the appearance rate of each hold change production Although the distribution of the determination values may be made different, the appearance rate of each of the pending change effects may be made different.

  Further, in the on-hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the on-hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the on-hold change effect In the on-hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the on-hold display does not change, many determinations are made on the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern No. 1) that does not execute the on-hold change effect Values are distributed. As described above, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed, and when the hold change effect is performed, the display mode of the hold display changes with high probability. Thus, it can be expected to pay attention to whether the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change presentation.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of first special symbol side holding (the number of holding storage) is four, but it is possible to display the number of holding displays corresponding to the number of holdings in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600 There is. Similarly, although the upper limit is four as the number of reservations on the second special symbol side (number of reservations stored), the number of suspension displays corresponding to the number of reservations can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600 . And, in the lower left area or the lower right area in the effect display device 1600, hold 1 (number of holds = 1), hold 2 (number of holds = 2), hold 3 (number of holds = 3), hold 4 (number of holds = 4) At the time of lighting, it is displayed to add one hold display sequentially from left to right. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display of the hold 1 displayed on the left side of the lower left area or the lower right area is deleted. Along with it, the hold displays of the other hold 2 to 4 are displayed as moving to the left while being displayed in the display area. In addition, when it is a pending change effect pattern (pending change effect pattern number 1) which does not execute the pending change effect, the display mode of the pending display after the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves. Does not change, and does not execute a hold change presentation that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the on-hold notice effect and the on-hold change effect are performed during normal change which is a stage of whether or not the reach state is formed at the time of the change display of the decorative symbol. For this reason, after the start of the change display of the decorative symbol, it can be expected to pay attention to the holding notification effect and the holding change effect being performed for the holding display regardless of whether or not the reach state is formed. .

[21-1. Countdown production after undecided production (first hold change production)]
First, in the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern No. 2) in which the first on-hold change effect is executed as the on-hold change effect, the on-hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of variation of the decorative symbol After moving, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and the character moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in such a trajectory that the character contacts the holding display that the display mode will change. One of the fixed effect to be performed and the non-fixed effect of moving in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the track where the character does not contact the hold display are executed. When this fixed effect is executed, the display mode of the held display with which the character contacts is changed by the contact of the character with the held display, but when the unconfirmed effect is executed, the held When the character does not touch the display, the display mode of the hold display does not change. That is, it indicates whether the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether the character contacts the hold display. In addition, when any of the fixed effect and the non-fixed effect is executed, after the character moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the character is erased outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this example, although the effect of whether or not the character contacts the hold display is executed as the fixed effect and the non-fixed effect, the fixed effect is displayed in the display mode in which the display mode of the hold display may change. It is sufficient to execute the non-decision effect in the display mode in which the display mode of the hold display can not be changed while the display mode of the hold display can be distinguished, as long as each display mode can be distinguished from the player.

  The item possessed by the character is displayed in one of blue, red, and rainbow colors, as in the display mode of the hold display which may change. Then, when the display mode of the hold display that the character has touched changes by the character touching the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display color of the item that the character has. ing. For this reason, what display mode the hold display may change, that is, how the big hit expectation of the hold display may indicate, rather than whether the display mode changes. It can be grasped before.

  In addition, when the non-decision effect is executed, the character having the item in the predetermined display color reappears in the predetermined period after the end of the non-decision effect, and the display mode changes. On the other hand, there is a case where a fixed effect of moving in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on a track where the character contacts may be performed. On the other hand, if the character does not appear again in a predetermined period after the end of the non-confirmed effect, the fixed effect is not performed. That is, it indicates whether or not the mode of the on-hold display changes depending on whether or not the character appears again in a predetermined period after the end of the non-confirmed effect.

  FIG. 243 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the first hold change effect. First, in the confirmed effect pattern, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and when the character touches the held display that causes the display mode to change, the held display that the character contacts It is an effect pattern in which the display mode changes.

  In the non-determination effect pattern, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and when the character does not contact the hold display, the non-confirmation effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change After performing for the same time as the finalized effect, the countdown effect is executed over a predetermined time, but the fixed effect is not executed during the execution of the countdown effect, and as a result, the display mode of the pending display changes. There is no effect pattern.

  In addition, in the non-finalized fixed effect pattern, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and the non-fixed display pattern does not change due to the non-contact of the character with the non-displayed display. After executing the determined effect for the same time as the determined effect, the countdown effect is performed for a predetermined time, and the character appears again during the execution of the countdown effect to execute the fixed effect, and as a result, the display of the hold display It is an effect pattern in which the aspect changes. Further, after the non-confirmed effect, the confirmed effect patterns A to C are effect patterns having different timings for the character to appear again during the execution of the countdown effect and to execute the fixed effect. Specifically, the determined effect pattern A after the unconfirmed effect is an effect pattern in which the character reappears and executes the confirmed effect at the remaining two seconds of the three seconds of the countdown effect, and the determined effect after the unconfirmed effect The pattern B is an effect pattern in which the character appears again in the remaining one second of the three seconds of the countdown effect to execute the fixed effect, and the non-finalized effect effect pattern C after the non-fixed effect is among the three seconds of the countdown effect. It is an effect pattern in which the character appears again at the time of remaining 0 seconds and the fixed effect is executed. In the non-finalized determined effect pattern A to C, the display color of the item that the character has at the time of non-finalized effect execution may be different from the display color of the item that the character has at the time of fixed effect execution. The display color of the item may be changed to a display color that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high when the display mode of the hold display changes, as the display color of the item when the fixed effect is performed rather than the non-fixed effect. For example, the display color of the item is displayed in blue at the first appearance of the character at the time of execution of the non-determination effect, and the display color of the item is displayed in red at the second appearance of the character at the time of execution of the determination effect. Even if the display color of the item at the first appearance of the character is displayed in a display color that suggests that the jackpot expectation is low, the display color of the item changes at the second appearance of the character. It can be made to pay attention with expectation.

  Further, in the special effect pattern after the non-confirmed effect, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and the display mode of the held display does not change due to the character not contacting the held display. After executing the determined effect for a time equivalent to the determined effect, the countdown effect is performed for a predetermined time, and a specific symbol (in this example, appears at a normal time as a variable display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the countdown effect It is an effect pattern in which a temporary symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol which never occurs, and then it is determined that a specific symbol changes to a reach symbol. In addition, when a specific symbol is displayed temporarily while the countdown effect is being executed, the countdown effect is ended at that time even if there is a remaining time, and the fixed effect is not executed, and as a result, it is displayed on hold It is an effect pattern in which the display mode does not change. As described above, when a specific symbol is displayed temporarily while the countdown effect is being executed, the countdown effect is not ended and the fixed effect is not executed, but it is determined that the reach is formed in the fluctuation. The expectation does not decline with the end of the countdown production.

  Further, the special effect patterns A to C after the non-decision effect are effect patterns having different timings at which a specific symbol is temporarily stopped during execution of the countdown effect. Specifically, the special effect pattern A after the non-decision effect is an effect pattern for temporarily displaying a specific symbol at the remaining 2 seconds of the 3 seconds of the countdown effect, and the special effect pattern B after the non-determination effect is The effect pattern is to temporarily display a specific symbol at the remaining one second of the three seconds of the countdown effect, and after the non-confirmed effect, the special effect pattern C is at the remaining zero seconds of the three seconds of the countdown effect. It is an effect pattern in which a specific symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the first hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 shows a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the first hold change effect.

  First, in the present example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as the hold display corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side. Then, when, for example, the execution of the first hold change effect is determined for the hold display of hold 2 at the time of starting the change display of the decorative symbol, it is shown in FIGS. 244 (A) and (B). As shown, after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, a character having an item in red appears from the left side of the display area toward the central portion. Among them, as shown in FIG. 244 (A), when a non-decision effect is to be performed, the character contacts the hold display in the process of the character returning from the central portion of the display area to the left side. And the display mode of the hold display does not change. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (B), in the case of executing the fixed effect, the character contacts the hold display of hold 2 in the process of the character returning from the central portion of the display area to the left side. The display mode of the hold display of hold 2 with which the character has touched changes to the red color of the item possessed by the character. In this manner, when the character appears, in the process of the character returning to the left from the central portion of the display area, the character contacts any one of the pending displays, and the pending display of which the character contacts The display mode may change to the red color of the item that the character has, but when the character appears, whether the character contacts the hold display or the character does not touch the hold display It is not possible to grasp whether or not to do so, and it is possible to pay attention to the advancing direction of the character.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 244 (C), when the non-decision effect is executed, after the non-decision effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed for 3 seconds. In this countdown effect, by displaying "3.fwdarw.2.fwdarw.1.fwdarw.0" in order in the display area with the passage of time, it is possible to expect the expectation whether or not the fixed effect will be executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 244 (D), when the fixed effect is executed while the countdown effect is being executed, the character having the item in red appears again from the left side of the display area toward the central portion. Thus, when the character appears again, in the process of the character returning to the left from the central portion of the display area, the character contacts the holding display of holding 2 and the holding 2 where the character contacts The display mode of the hold display of the icon changes to the red of the item that the character has. However, when the character reappears, in the process of the character returning to the left from the center part of the display area, the character always contacts any one of the holding displays and the holding display that the characters touch The display mode of is changed to the red of the item possessed by the character, but when the character reappears, it is not possible to grasp which hold display the character is in contact with, and the progress of the character It can make you pay attention to the direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (E), a specific symbol (in this example, a skull symbol as a decorative symbol that does not appear at normal times) is temporarily displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbol during execution of the countdown effect. In this case, even if there is a remaining time, the countdown effect is ended at that time, and no fixed effect is performed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change. However, as shown in FIGS. 244 (F) and (G), when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped during the countdown effect, the timing at which the reach symbol set in the fluctuation pattern is formed thereafter Then, it changes from a specific symbol to a reach symbol. In this example, a specific symbol is displayed temporarily as a variation display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the countdown effect, but any symbol may be used as long as it is notified in advance that a reach is formed in the variation. Moreover, it may not be a temporary stop display of a specific symbol during execution of countdown production, but a stop display of a reach symbol may be made at that time, and it may be decided that a reach will be formed. Also in this case, the countdown effect is ended at the time of formation of the reach, the fixed effect is not performed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 244 (H), when the fixed effect is not executed during the execution of the countdown effect, and the specific symbol is not temporarily displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbol, It is decided that the display mode of the hold display does not change with the end.

[21-2. Repeating parallel production (second hold change production)]
Next, in the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern No. 3) executing the second on-hold change effect as the on-hold change effect, the on-hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of variation of the decorative symbol. After the movement of the character, a plurality of characters appear in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time so that a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display and each character contacts any hold display. Perform parallel rendition to move. In this parallel rendition, only the number of characters will be in contact with the hold display, but the display mode of the hold display that the character has touched in any of the plurality of touches of the character on the hold display is Either of the parallel effects at the time of changing the hit, and the parallel effects at the time of losing where the display mode of the holding display with which the character has touched does not change in any contact. That is, in the parallel effect, when a plurality of characters move in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time, the timing at which the character contacts the hold display occurs at the same time, and the display mode of the hold display is It notifies that there are multiple chances of changing or not. Further, in the parallel effect, when a plurality of characters move in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time, only the number of characters contacts the hold display, so the display mode of the hold display for the number of characters Can get a chance of changing or not. In this example, as a parallel effect at the time of the hit and a parallel effect at the time of the loss, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes when the character contacts the hold display is executed. While the parallel presentation at the time of the hit is executed in the appearance mode in which the display mode of the suspension display changes, the parallel effect at the time of the loss may be executed in the appearance mode in which the display mode of the suspension display can not change. It is sufficient if the appearance modes can be distinguished by the player.

  In addition, when the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, a plurality of characters reappear near the hold display as the second parallel presentation, and either of the parallel rendering at the time of hitting or the parallel rendering at the time of losing May run. In addition, when the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed as the second parallel production, a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel production, and the parallel production at the time of hitting and the parallel at the time of losing There is a case to carry out any of the effects. In addition, when the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed as the third parallel production, a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display as the fourth parallel production, and the parallel production at the time of hitting and the parallel at the time of losing Among the effects, there may be cases where only parallel effects at the time of hitting are executed. As described above, even when the parallel rendition at the time of the loss is performed, as long as a plurality of characters appear again in the vicinity of the hold display, the parallel rendition at the time of hitting may be performed. It can be expected to pay attention to whether or not a plurality of characters appear again after the effect is executed. In addition, in the fourth parallel rendition, since the parallel rendition at the time of the hit is always executed, even if the parallel rendition at the time of the loss is executed, it is expected that the parallel rendition will be continued thereafter It can be noticed. It should be noted that as the first to third parallel rendition, as the number of executions of the parallel rendition increases, the probability of the parallel rendition being the parallel rendition at the time of the hit is increased and the possibility of changing the display mode of the hold display becomes high It may be set as As a result, since the possibility that the display mode of the on-hold display changes may be increased by continuing the parallel rendering after that even if the parallel rendering at the time of losing is performed, the on-hold display is performed when the parallel rendering is continued It can be made to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of is changed.

  FIG. 245 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the second hold change presentation. First, in the hit parallel rendering pattern A, a plurality of characters appear at the same time so that a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the suspension display and each character contacts any of the suspension display. The effect pattern is to move in the display area of, and to perform parallel rendition when the display mode of the hold display that the character contacts changes in any of the plurality of touches of the character on the hold display is there.

  In addition, when the parallel effect pattern A at the time of loss, a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display, and the plurality of characters are displayed simultaneously at the same time so that each character contacts any of the hold display. The effect pattern is to move in the display area of the display area and to execute parallel rendition at the time of the loss when the display mode of the suspension display with which the character contacts does not change in any of the plurality of touches of the character on the suspension display. is there.

  In addition, the hit time parallel rendering pattern B is to execute the parallel rendering twice, and after the parallel rendering at the time of losing, a plurality of characters appear again in the vicinity of the hold display as the second parallel rendering. It is an effect pattern in which the parallel display of the hit display is performed, and the display mode of the hold display that the character has touched changes in any of the plurality of touches of the character on the hold display in the hit parallel display. . In addition, the parallel effect pattern B at the time of losing is to execute the parallel effect twice, and after execution of the parallel effect at the time of losing, a plurality of characters appear again in the vicinity of the hold display as the second parallel effect. It is an effect pattern in which a parallel effect at the time of losing is executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  In addition, the hit time parallel effect pattern C is to execute the parallel effect three times, and after repeating the parallel effect execution at the time of the loss twice, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel effect. Reappears and executes the parallel presentation at the time of the hit, and the display mode of the held display that the character contacts changes in any touch among the multiple touches of the character to the hold display in the concurrent presentation at the hit Effect pattern. In addition, the parallel effect pattern C at the time of loss is to execute the parallel effect three times, and after repeating the execution of the parallel effect at the time of the loss twice, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel effect. Is a rendition pattern that appears again and executes parallel rendition at the time of a loss, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  In addition, the hit time parallel effect pattern D is to execute the parallel effect four times, and after repeating the parallel effect execution three times at the time of losing, a plurality of characters near the hold display as the fourth parallel effect Reappears and executes the parallel presentation at the time of the hit, and the display mode of the held display that the character contacts changes in any touch among the multiple touches of the character to the hold display in the concurrent presentation at the hit Effect pattern.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the second hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 shows a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the second hold change effect.

  First, in the present example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as the hold display corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side. Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), when execution of the second hold change presentation is determined with respect to the hold display of hold 2 at the time of starting variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. After the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, a plurality (eight characters in this example) of characters appear in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display while passing from the lower side of the hold display to the upper side while passing the back side of the hold display. As described above, when a plurality of characters appear, each character appears passing through the back side of the hold display, so that the visual display of the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not hindered.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 246 (B) and (C), after eight characters appear in the vicinity near the upper side of the hold display, each character contacts one of the hold display of hold 1 to 4 At the same time, eight characters flow downward toward the hold display while passing through the front side of the hold display. In addition, each time the character touches any of the hold display of the hold 1 to 4, the hold display with which the character is in contact emits light as indicated by the star mark, and the character touches Notification that the display mode of the pending display may change. In this way, when each character touches any of the hold display of hold 1 to 4, each character flows past the front side of the hold display and the hold display that the character contacts is Since light is emitted, it can be easily grasped whether or not the character has touched the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 246 (B), in the case of executing parallel rendition at the time of losing, when each character touches any of the holding display of holdings 1 to 4, in any contact Also, the display mode of the hold display touched by the character is not changed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (C), in the case of executing the parallel effect at the time of hitting, when each character touches any of the pending display of the pending 1 to 4, the pending 2 is performed. When the character touches the hold display (If the contact of the character occurs multiple times on the hold display of hold 2, any contact cycle may be made), the hold that the character has touched The display mode of the hold display of 2 changes to the display mode (red in this example) of the hold display determined by the hold notice effect pattern.

  In the above-described parallel rendition, when a plurality of characters appear and each character touches any of the hold display of the hold 1 to 4, the display mode of the hold display with which the character contacts changes each time Since there is a possibility, it is possible to obtain a chance of changing the display mode of the hold display by the number of characters. In addition, at the start of the parallel rendering, all eight characters that come into contact with the hold display appear and the number of characters is clearly indicated, so whether the display mode of the hold display changes or not The number of chances of can be grasped at the start of the parallel production. Furthermore, in parallel rendition, a plurality of characters appear, and the characters are made to contact any of the hold display of hold 1 to 4 but when a plurality of characters appear, any hold display is made. On the other hand, it is not possible to grasp whether each character touches or not, and it is possible to notice the progress direction of each character with respect to the hold display. In addition, it is not possible to grasp which display mode of the hold display changes among the hold display of the hold 1 to 4 in which each character has touched, each time each character contacts the hold display It can be made to notice whether or not the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes.

  In this example, each character is in contact with any of the hold display of hold 1 to 4 but among the eight characters appearing in the upper vicinity of the hold display, the hold 1 to 1 Two characters are in contact with each of the four hold displays. However, among the hold display of the hold 1 to 4, many characters among the eight characters may be in contact with the hold display in which the display mode of the hold display is changed. In this case, it is highly likely that the display mode of the hold display in which many characters are in contact changes in the parallel effect, so that it is possible to pay particular attention to which hold display the many characters touch. it can. In addition, when performing parallel rendition at the time of the loss, even if the character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display that the character contacts is not changed, but the parallel rendition at the loss At the start of, the number of appearing characters may be reduced. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the display mode of the hold display is likely to change depending on whether the number of appearing characters is large or not at the start of the parallel effect.

  Then, when the parallel rendering at the time of losing is executed, eight characters appear again near the upper side of the hold display as the second parallel rendering, and the parallel rendering at the time of hitting and the parallel rendering at the time of losing You may want to do one. In addition, when the parallel production at the time of the loss is executed as the second parallel production, eight characters appear again in the upper side of the hold display as the third parallel production, and the parallel presentation and the loss at the time of hitting Sometimes there is a case of performing parallel with time. In addition, when the parallel presentation at the time of the loss is executed as the third parallel presentation, as shown in FIG. 246 (D), eight characters are again displayed in the upper side of the hold display as the fourth parallel presentation. As shown in FIG. 246 (E), there are cases in which only parallel rendition at the time of hit is performed among the parallel rendition at the time of hit and the parallel rendition at the time of loss. As described above, even when the parallel rendition at the time of losing is performed, as long as eight characters appear again near the upper side of the hold display, there is a possibility of executing the parallel rendition at the time of the hit. After performing time parallel rendition, it can be noticed with an expectation whether eight characters will appear again. In addition, in the fourth parallel rendition, since the parallel rendition at the time of the hit is always executed, even if the parallel rendition at the time of the loss is executed, it is expected that the parallel rendition will be continued thereafter It can be noticed.

  In this example, a plurality of (eight characters in this example) characters appear in the upper vicinity of the hold display at the start of the parallel rendering, but at the start of the parallel rendering at the time of hitting, A plurality of characters can be made to appear to include a special character that is determined to change the display mode of the hold display. In this case, when the special character is included in the plurality of characters at the start of the parallel rendering, the display mode of the holding display in which the special character contacts when the special character contacts the holding display. Because it always changes, it is possible to focus attention on the type of character that appears at the start of the parallel rendering. In addition, special characters are displayed larger than normal characters other than special characters from the time of their appearance so that special characters stand out and it is easy to determine whether a plurality of characters contain special characters. To be able to grasp. Also, multiple characters are displayed so that each other's characters partially overlap at the time of their appearance, but if multiple characters contain special characters, the special characters will be in the foreground The special character is made to stand out so that it can be easily grasped whether or not the plural characters include the special character. In addition, a special character is allowed to appear at the time of execution of the parallel production at the time of hitting, but as the number of times of execution of the parallel production is increased, that is, of the 1 to 4 parallel production The later the execution timing, the higher the probability that a special character will appear may be set. As a result, since the possibility of the appearance of a special character is high by continuing the parallel rendering after that even when the parallel rendering at the time of losing is executed, the special character is selected when the parallel rendering is continued. It can be noticed with expectation whether it will appear or not.

[21-3. Beam production after target production (third hold change production)]
Next, in the on-hold change effect pattern (on-hold change effect pattern No. 4) executing the third on-hold change effect as the on-hold change effect, the on-hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of variation of the decorative symbol. After the movement of the character, the character appears and the aim in the predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the effect is displayed so that the aim matches the hold display that the display mode may change. Either the target effect at the time of moving within the display area of the device 1600 or the target effect at the time of loss of moving within the display area of the effect display device 1600 such that the aim is not aligned with the hold display Running. In the target effect at the time of this hit, by aiming at the hold display, there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold display matching the aim may change in the beam effect described later, but the target at the time of losing In the effect, it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change without executing the beam effect to be described later because the aim is not matched with the hold display. That is, it indicates whether the display mode of the hold display may change depending on whether or not the aim is matched to the hold display.

  In addition, the aim with respect to the hold display is displayed in any of blue, red, and rainbow colors, similarly to the display mode of the hold display which may change. Then, when the display mode of the hold display whose aim is matched by the beam effect described later changes by aiming the hold display, the display mode of the hold display changes to the display color of the aim. I have to. For this reason, it can be grasped | ascertained before what display mode changes whether display conditions may change to what kind of display mode.

  In addition, when the target presentation at the time of hitting is executed, the beam is emitted toward the holding display to which the aim is matched by the target directing at the time of hitting, and when the beam collides against the holding display to which the sight is matched. And the beam presentation at the time of losing where the beam is reflected without colliding with the holding display to which the aim is matched. In the beam presentation at the time of this hit, when the beam collides with the reserved display in which the aim is matched by the target presentation at the time of hitting, the display mode of the reserved display where the beam collides changes, In the beam rendering, the display mode of the suspension display does not change by the fact that the beam does not collide with the suspension display whose aim is matched in the target presentation at the time of hitting. That is, it indicates whether the aspect of the pending display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the pending display. As described above, although the target display color is notified by the display color of the aim that the on-hold display may change to what kind of display mode when the target effect is executed, the target effect at the time of the hit among the target effects The display mode of the holding display is not changed if the beam presentation at the time of hitting is not executed after the execution of.

  In addition, as a character that appears in the target effect and the beam effect, there is a probability of whether the aim matches the hold display in the target effect or a probability of whether the beam collides with the hold display in the beam effect. One of three different characters A to C appears. Among them, the character A is set so that the probability of aiming at the hold display is higher in the target effect than in the other characters, but the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display is lower in the beam effect. ing. In addition, the character B is set so that the probability of aiming at the hold display in the target effect and the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display in the beam effect are medium compared to other characters. It is done. Also, the character C is set so that the probability of aiming at the hold display is lower in the target effect than in the other characters, but the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display is higher in the beam effect. There is. As described above, the degree of attention to the effects of the target effect and the beam effect can be made different by making the respective expectation degrees of the target effect and the beam effect different depending on the type of the character appearing at the start of the target effect.

  FIG. 247 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of an effect pattern set as the third hold change effect. First, in the target effect pattern at the time of losing, the character appears and the character in the predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the beam effect is executed by not aiming at the hold display. It is an effect pattern which performs a target effect at the time of a loss which determines that the display mode of a pending | holding display does not change.

  In addition, the hit beam pattern is displayed when the character appears and a target with a predetermined display color appears from the character to the hold display, and the aim is matched to the hold display, so that the target matches the hold. After performing a target rendition that indicates the possibility of a change in the display aspect of the display, the beam is emitted toward the aiming display with the aim, and the beam collides with the holding display with the aim It is an effect pattern which performs the beam effect at the time of the hit when the display mode of the suspension display which the beam collided changes.

  Also, in the beam effect pattern at the time of losing, the character appears and the aiming in the predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the aim is matched to the hold display, so that the target matches After performing a target presentation that indicates the possibility of changes in the display aspect of the display, the beam is emitted toward the aiming display with the aim, and the beam does not collide against the holding display with the aim It is an effect pattern which performs the beam effect at the time of the loss which determines that the display mode of a pending | holding display does not change by this.

  Next, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the third hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 shows a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the third hold change effect.

  First, in the present example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as the hold display corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), when execution of the third hold change presentation is determined with respect to the hold display of hold 2 at the time of starting the change display of the decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. After the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the character appears on the right side of the display area, and the two red aimings directed from the character to the hold display appear near the hold display. These two sightings are made to meet expectations by repeating whether each sighting is matched or not for any of the hold displays of the holds 1 to 4. Thus, when two sights in red appear, it can be understood that the display mode of the hold display may change to red, which is the sight color of the sights, but two in red When the aim appears, it is not possible to know whether the aim matches the hold indication or which hold indication does not aim, and allows the two aiming directions to be focused. it can.

  And as shown to FIG. 248 (B), when performing the target presentation at the time of a hit, with respect to the pending | holding display of pending | holding 2 after progress of two predetermined time after appearance of two aiming in red The two aims are aligned. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248C, in the case of executing the target effect at the time of the loss, after the elapse of a predetermined time after the appearance of the two aim in red, the two for the hold display It is erased without aiming and it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change. In this way, when two sights match the hold indication of hold 2, it is understood that the display mode of the hold indication of hold 2 may change to red, which is the indication color of the aim. Although it is possible, when two sights are matched to the hold indication of hold 2, it is not possible to actually grasp whether or not the display mode of the hold indication of hold 2 changes, and in the subsequent beam effect, It can be made to notice whether the display mode of the hold display of hold 2 changes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), after the execution of the target effect at the time of the hit, the beam effect is executed, but in the beam effect, it is directed to the hold display of the hold 2 whose aim is matched at the target effect at the hit Fire a beam. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (D), when the beam presentation at the time of hitting is executed, the beam collides with the hold indication of the hold 2 whose aim is matched by the target presentation at the time of hitting, and the beam The display mode of the hold display of the held 2 that has collided changes to red, which is the display color of the aim. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (E), when performing beam presentation at the time of a miss, the beam is bounced without collision with the pending display of Hold 2 that is aimed at by the target presentation at the time of hitting. The display mode of the hold display of hold 2 is not changed.

  In the target effect described above, after notifying that the display status of the hold display may be changed by the display color of the aim, the display of the hold display depends on whether the aim matches any of the hold display. It notifies whether the possibility of changing the display mode continues or which hold display that the display mode may change is, and in the beam effect after execution of the target effect at the time of hitting, the aiming is It is notified whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the matched hold display, and is notified in stages. In this way, by notifying in stages until the display mode of the suspension display changes, it is possible to focus attention on the contents of the target effect and the beam effect while giving different expectations in each step. .

  In the present example, when two sights appear in the target effect, and the sight matches any of the hold displays, two sights for the same hold display among the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4 The following patterns may be set. For example, even if the first aim is matched to any one of the two pending displays, and the second aim is not matched to any of the two pending displays. Good. Also, of the two aimings, the first aim is made to match any of the hold indications, and the second aim is made to be different from the hold indication which is the first aim match. You may set a pattern that matches the However, if each of the two sights matches two different pending displays, then each of the two different pending displays will be fired when the beam is launched to the focused presentation in subsequent beam directing And the beam does not collide with at least one of the two different suspension displays, and the display mode of the suspension display which the beam did not collide does not change. Also, when both of the two aimings match the same reserved display, the probability that the beam collides with the two focused aiming displays in the subsequent beam rendering, as compared to the other patterns. To increase the probability that the display mode of the hold display changes. In such a case, at the stage whether the aim is directed to the hold indication in the target effect, two sights may be matched to the same hold indication, or two sights may be indicated to different hold indications. You can also get some attention.

  Further, in the above, a pattern may be set in which the display color of the first aim and the display color of the second aim are different among the two aim. Also, make two characters appear in the target effect, set a pattern in which the character with the first aim and the character with the second aim are different, and aim at the hold display where the aim is matched in the beam effect At the time of firing the beam, each character may fire the beam toward the hold display.

[22. Stock production across multiple fluctuations]
In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, an operation effective time for validating the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is set during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the variation display of the special symbol). It is possible to execute an operation effect capable of operating the pressing operation unit 303 over the operation effective time. In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the game specified from the pre-determination command When the fluctuation pattern which is to execute the operation effect is specified as the prior determination information such as the type type of the effect (the type of the fluctuation pattern), from the time of prior judgment of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect It is possible to execute a stock effect of sequentially adding any one of a plurality of types of addition times at a plurality of timings set between them. In the present example, among the time from prior determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect, any of the addition times of a plurality of types of additions is made at least for each pending digestion (every fluctuation display of the special symbol) It is possible to add time sequentially.

  In addition, at the time of prior determination of the execution of the operation effect, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the total of the addition times added in the stock effect sequentially in the stock effect so as to coincide with the operation effective time By setting the addition time to be added, it is possible to keep operating (press and hold) the pressing operation unit 303 for the operation effective time which is the total of the addition time added in the stock effect when the operation effect is executed. There is.

  FIG. 249 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of stock effect across a plurality of changes when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance. As shown in FIG. 249 (A), when it is determined in advance that the operation effect is to be performed when the hold 4 is on (number of holdings = 4), a predetermined addition time is taken until the operation effect is performed at the time of the hold settlement. Six stock times are set as the timing of adding. Specifically, as a timing for adding a predetermined addition time, stock time 6 during the change at the 3rd change, stock time 5 during the change at the 2nd change, and stock time 4 during the change at the 1st change Before the execution of the operation effect during the change at the time of the reserve processing, a total of six stock times consisting of stock times 1 to 3 are set. In this manner, one stock time is set at each hold change before the hold process that will execute the operation effect during the time from the prior determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect. At the same time, there are three stock times set at the time of holding and finalization that will carry out the operation effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), when it is determined in advance that the operation effect is to be performed when the hold 3 is on (number of holdings = 3), a predetermined time is taken until the operation effect is performed at the hold digestion As the timing for adding the addition time, five stock times are set. Specifically, as a timing for adding a predetermined addition time, execution of the operation effect during the change at the time of hold 2 change, the stock time 5 during the change at the time of change 2 A total of 5 stock seasons have been set, consisting of stock seasons 1 to 3 before.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), when it is determined in advance that the execution of the operation effect is performed at the time of holding 2 lighting (number of holdings = 2), a predetermined time is taken until the operation effect is performed at the time of the suspension process. Four stock times are set as the timing for adding the addition time. Specifically, as a timing for adding a predetermined addition time, a total of 6 consisting of stock time 4 during the change at the time of change of hold 1 and stock time 1 to 3 before execution of the operation effect during change at the time of the hold process The stock period of times is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (D), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance at the time of holding 1 lighting (number of holdings = 1), a predetermined time is taken until the operation effect is performed at the time of the holding and settling Three timings are set as timings for adding the addition time. Specifically, a total of three stock times consisting of stock times 1 to 3 are set before the execution of the operation effect during the change at the time of the reserve processing as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (A), any one of 5 to 10 seconds is set as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, and each operation is effective as a variation pattern for executing the operation effect. Several types of fluctuation patterns having time are set. Moreover, at each timing which adds predetermined | prescribed addition time, either 0 to 5 second is set as addition time. When the addition time is 0 seconds, the addition time does not increase. Then, at the time of predetermination of the execution of the operation effect, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and addition is performed at each timing so that the total addition time added in the stock effect matches the operation effective time. The addition time to be performed is determined in advance, and the predetermined addition time is sequentially added until the execution of the operation effect. In this example, any of 0 to 5 seconds is set as the addition time at each timing at which the predetermined addition time is added, but at each timing, the predetermined time is set to be subtracted. For example, addition and subtraction may be repeated until execution of the operation effect. As described above, even when time is subtracted in the stock effect, the sum of the time added in the stock effect and the time subtracted in the stock effect is set to coincide with the operation effective time. It is supposed to be.

  In addition to any one of 5 to 10 seconds, ∞ (infinity) is also set as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, but this 変 動 is a variation pattern that will execute the operation effect Among them, only the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is set. In addition, when 事前 is specified as the operation effective time set in the operation effect at the time of prior determination of the execution of the operation effect, the addition is performed at any one of a plurality of timings to which the predetermined addition time is added. The addition time to be performed is determined in advance as 、, and the addition time of ∞ is added at that timing to coincide with the operation effective time 有効. As described above, when the addition time of ∞ is added in the stock effect, the hit is always derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) that is to execute the operation effect. It can be noticed with an expectation whether to add ∞ as the addition time. However, although it is notified that the operation effective time used for the operation effect is 場合 when the addition time to be added in the stock effect is ∞, the operation effective time is 10 seconds when the operation effect is executed. As in the case of being notified, the operation effective time is set to end when 10 seconds elapse.

  In addition, in the case of determining the fluctuation pattern that is to execute the operation effect, the fluctuation pattern is determined so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes higher as the operation effective time used for the operation effect becomes longer. Further, since the sum of the addition times to be added in the stock effect coincides with the operation effective time, the longer the addition time added at each timing, the higher the probability that the operation effective time becomes longer. As described above, the longer the operation effective time used for the operation effect, the higher the probability of deriving a hit as a result of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) that is to execute the operation effect. It can be expected to pay attention to whether the addition time to be added at each timing or the operation effective time which is the sum of the addition times is long.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (B), when it is determined in advance that the operation effect is to be performed when the hold 4 is on (number of holdings = 4), a predetermined addition time is taken until the operation effect is performed at the time of the hold termination. Since six stock timings are set as the timing for adding S, using the pending 4 o'clock scenario determination table so that the total addition time to be added at the six timings matches the operation effective time. The addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Specifically, when 10 seconds is determined in advance as the operation effective time, one of the scenarios PTN_G4_A1 to A3 is determined. For example, when the scenario PTN_G_C4_A3 is determined, the added time is determined. 2 seconds for stock time 0, 0 seconds for stock time 5 (not added), 1 second for stock time 4, 1 second for stock time 3, 1 second for stock time 2 and 1 second for stock time 1, By sequentially adding the predetermined addition time at the six timings, the operation effective time is made to coincide with 10 seconds. In addition, when ((10) seconds is determined in advance as the operation effective time, one of the scenarios PTN_G4_B1 to B3 is determined, but such scenario PTN_G_B1 to B3 is not 0 seconds. The addition time of ∞ is added at the last timing of the stock time to which the addition time is added.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 250 (C), when it is determined in advance that the operation effect is to be performed at the time of holding 3 lighting (number of holdings = 3), a predetermined time is taken until the operation effect is performed at the time of holding Since five stock timings are set as the timing for adding the addition time, the pending 3 o'clock scenario determination table is set so that the total of the addition time to be added at the five timings matches the operation effective time. It is assumed that the addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Similarly, each of the cases where the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 2 is on (number of reservations = 2) or when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 1 is on (number of reservations = 1) The addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance using a corresponding scenario determination table (not shown).

  In addition, in the operation effect, it is possible to operate the pressing operation unit 303 over the operation effective time, and by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined meter can be raised, and within the operation effective time The effect of determining whether the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined among the fluctuation patterns that are to execute the operation rendition, by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303 by the operation rendition, the predetermined time is within the operation valid time. While it is possible for the meter to reach the upper limit, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continued to be operated by the operation effect, the predetermined time is within the operation effective time. The meter does not reach the upper limit. However, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the predetermined meter has an upper limit although the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated by the operation effect or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated by the operation effect When it is determined that the predetermined meter has not reached the upper limit at the time when the operation valid time has elapsed, for example, when it does not reach, the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit at the time when the operation valid time elapses. That is, whether or not to derive a hit as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the special symbol) is notified depending on whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective period. In addition, as described above, when determining the variation pattern that is to execute the operation presentation, the variation pattern is determined so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes higher as the operation effective time used for the operation presentation becomes longer. Therefore, the probability that the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective period becomes higher as the operation effective time used for the operation effect becomes longer, and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated with expectation in the operation effective time. .

  Next, a specific example of effects on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of stock effects and operation effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. FIG. 251 and FIG. 252 show examples of specific effects in the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of stock effects and operation effects.

  First, in this example, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is on (number of holdings = 4), the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the addition is added in the stock effect With the stock 3 during the change with hold 3 and with the stock 2 with change with the hold 2 and with the stock 1 with change during the hold 1 change so that the total time matches the operation effective time The addition time to be added at each timing of the stock timings 1 to 3 is determined in advance before execution of the operation effect during fluctuation during digestion. Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), when variation display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, if 2 seconds is determined as the addition time to be added during the change when the hold 3 changes, As shown in FIG. 251 (B), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "2:00 STOCK" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and the addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. I have notified.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 251C, during execution of the stock effect, the total of the addition time added in the stock effect is displayed above the display area, and, for example, 2 seconds is added as the addition time. In the case of being displayed, "TOTAL 2:00" is displayed above the display area, and it is notified that the total addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. Then, each time the holding order changes (every time the variation display of the decorative symbol is started), the addition time in the stock effect is repeatedly added, until the stockpiling is to be performed, which is to execute the operation effect. The total of the addition time added by the effect can be increased stepwise. Similarly, even during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol at the time of reserve processing that will execute the operation effect, the addition of the addition time in the stock effect is repeated before the execution of the operation effect, and the addition performed in the stock effect The total time can be increased gradually.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 252 (D), at the start of the operation effect, first, "TOTAL 5:00" is displayed above the display area, and the total addition time added in the stock effect, ie, the pressing operation unit 303 It is notified that the operation effective time to validate the operation of is 5 seconds. In addition, at the approximate center of the display area, a message of "Align symbols in time!" Is displayed, and behind that, the number symbol of "777", which is a big hit symbol, is displayed in a semitransparent manner. doing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 252 (E), after the start of the operation effect, the remaining time obtained by subtracting that time from the operation effective time with the elapse of time on the upper side of the display area (in this example, “remaining 3:30 ") Is displayed. Further, an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area, and a message instructing to continue operating the pressing operation unit 303 (long press) is displayed. Then, when the pressing operation unit 303 continues to be operated within the operation effective time, the meter drawn inside the translucent numeric symbol is made to gradually rise, and the area of the opaque increases, so the big hit symbol becomes It is getting closer to completion.

  In addition, as an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303, three display modes are provided so as to be displayed in any of blue, red and rainbow colors. Then, the big hit expectation is set to be high in the order of blue, red and rainbow colors. Therefore, when a display mode with a high hit probability is displayed as an image resembling the pressing operation unit 303, the probability that the meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time is high, and the motivation to participate in the operation effect can be enhanced .

  Further, as the operation effective time, which is the sum of the addition times added in the stock effect, is shorter, the rate of increase of the meter with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is set to be faster. In addition, as the remaining time of the operation effective time is shorter, the rising speed of the meter with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is set to be faster. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the rising speed of the meter with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is set to be faster, while the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined. In this case, the rising speed of the meter with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is set to be slow. Such control of the rising speed of the meter can effectively enjoy whether the meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 252 (F), when the meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time, the number symbol of “777” which is the big hit symbol is completed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol It is notified that the result of) is a big hit. When the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the meter can reach the upper limit by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303 within the operation effective time, but the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. When it is determined that the meter has not reached the upper limit at the time when the operation valid time has elapsed, such as when the meter has not reached the upper limit even though the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated. At the elapsed time, the meter is set to reach the upper limit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 252 (G), when the meter does not reach the upper limit within the operation valid time, the numeric symbol of “777” which is the big hit symbol is not completed, and at the time of the operation valid time. The message "TIME UP" is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the special symbol) is a loss. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined, the meter does not reach the upper limit even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated within the operation valid time.

[22-1. Stock effect at the time of predetermination of the operation immediately before operation of operation effect]
In the embodiment described above, at the time of execution of the operation effect, it is possible to continue operating (press and hold) the pressing operation unit 303 for a predetermined effective operation time, and at the time of prior determination of the execution of the operation effect Although the stock effect of sequentially adding the addition time is performed so that the total matches the operation effective time, in this example, the predetermined operation immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is performed when the operation effect is performed. It is possible to operate the pressing operation unit 303, and at the time of predetermining the execution of the operation effect, the stock effect of sequentially stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation effect is performed.

  Specifically, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, but it is specified from the pre-determination command When a fluctuation pattern that is to execute an operation effect having a predetermined operation immediately before is specified as the prior determination information such as the type type (type of fluctuation pattern) of the game effect to be played, the operation effect is executed At a plurality of timings set between the pre-determination of and the execution of the operation effect, it is possible to execute stock effect of sequentially stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation effect. In addition, as a timing which stocks the content of the aspect immediately before the operation which operate | moves by operation production, the stock timing is provided similarly to the timing which adds the above-mentioned predetermined | prescribed addition time. That is, one stock time is set at the time of each hold change before the hold settlement that will execute the operation effect during the time from the pre-determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect. At the same time, three stock times are set at the time of holding and settling to execute the operation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (A), as the contents of the operation immediately before operation mode operated by the operation effect, whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates either strongly or weakly; A combination of whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 lights up in red, green, or blue is set, and a plurality of items having the content of the mode immediately before each operation as a variation pattern for executing the operation effect The type of fluctuation pattern is set. In addition, at each timing of stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation operated by the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, or the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates with strength or weakness, or the pressing operation unit 303 is red, The content is either green or blue, or set. Then, at the time of predetermination of the execution of the operation effect, the content of the operation immediately before operation mode operated by the operation effect is specified, and the content of the operation immediately before operation stocked by stock effect is the content of the operation immediately operation mode operated by operation operation The contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked at each timing are decided in advance so that they coincide with each other, and the contents of the mode immediately before the operation decided beforehand are sequentially stocked until the execution of the operation rendition. .

  In this example, at each timing of stocking the content of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, or the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates either strongly or weakly, or the pressing operation unit The content is set such that either 303 turns on in red, green or blue, but at each timing, it may be set to delete the content of the stock operation immediately before operation For example, stocking and erasing of the content immediately before the operation may be repeated until the execution of the operation effect. Thus, even if the content immediately before the operation is erased by the stock effect, the content of the operation immediately before the operation stocked by the stock effect and the content immediately before the operation erased by the stock effect are added up. Is set to coincide with the content of the operation immediately before operation mode which is operated by the operation effect.

  In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern that will execute the operation effect, it is determined whether the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes or the pressing operation unit 303 is strong or weak as the content of the operation immediately before the operation operation in the operation effect The fluctuation pattern is determined so that the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of whether or not it vibrates or whether the pressing operation unit 303 lights up in red, green, or blue. In principle, the fluctuation pattern is determined in the order of lighting, vibration and protrusion of the pressing operation unit 303 so that the big hit expectation is high. Further, in the mode immediately before the operation in which the pressing operation unit 303 is lit, the variation pattern is determined in the order of blue → green → red so that the big hit expectation is high, and in the mode immediately before the operation The fluctuation pattern is determined in the order of weak vibration → strong vibration so that the big hit expectation is high.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (B), when it is determined in advance that the operation effect is to be performed when the hold 4 is on (number of holdings = 4), the operation effect is performed by the time it is performed until the operation effect is performed at the time of the hold termination. Since the stock timing of six times is set as the timing of stocking the content of the mode immediately before the operation to be performed, the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked at the six timings is the content of the mode immediately before the operation of operating in the operation effect In order to be consistent with the above, the content of the operation immediately before mode stocked at each timing is determined in advance using the 4 o'clock on-hold scenario determination table. Specifically, when the mode immediately before the operation (protrusion & vibration A & red) is determined in advance as the content of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation effect, one of the scenarios PTN_G4_A1 to A5 is determined, For example, when the scenario PTN_G4_A1 is determined, notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes at stock timing 6, notification that the pressing operation unit 303 strongly vibrates at stock timing 5, and pressing operation unit 303 red at stock timing 4 The notice to turn on at, the notice not to stock at any of the stock times 1 to 3 are determined in advance, and the contents immediately before the action determined at the six times are sequentially stocked, thus the action immediately before the action To match the content of the In this example, if the content of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation effect is mode 1 (protrusion & vibration A & red), the highest hit probability among the plurality of types of operation immediately before is the highest. Execute notification of blessing message etc. at notification of notification that pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, notification that pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly, notification that pressing operation unit 303 lights in red, etc. doing. Also, in this example, as in stock periods 1 to 3 of scenario PTN_Guarantee A1, if the content immediately before the operation is not stocked even though it is a stock period, a disappointing effect of notifying that the stock is not executed is executed. doing.

  Also, when the content of the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red in the content of the mode immediately before the operation, for example, it is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red as in the scenario PTN_G4_A3. It is possible to notify that it lights in blue or green, which is a color with a lower expectation of big hit than red, at a stock time earlier than that of red. Thus, in this example, it is possible to notify up to the color of the pressing operation unit 303 determined in advance in the order of green → blue → red, which is the order of the jackpot expectation. For this reason, even in the case where notification of lighting in a color with low jackpot expectation is given, it should be noted whether it changes to notification of lighting in a color with high jackpot expectation in the subsequent stock period. Can.

  In addition, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation includes strong vibration of the pressing operation unit 303, for example, as in the scenario PTN_G4_A4, it is more preferable than notifying that the pressing operation unit 303 performs strong vibration. In the previous stock period, it is possible to notify that it is a weak vibration that is a vibration mode in which the big hit expectation is lower than the strong vibration. As described above, in this example, it is possible to notify the vibration mode of the pressing operation unit 303 determined in advance in the order of weak vibration → strong vibration, which is the order of the jackpot expectation. For this reason, even in the case of notifying a weak vibration with a low probability of big hit, it can be made to notice whether it changes to a notification of strong vibration with a high probability of big hit in the subsequent stock period. .

  In addition, when it is determined in advance that the operation immediately before operation 18 (no projection & no vibration & blue) is made in advance as the content of the operation immediately before operation in the operation effect, one of the scenarios PTN_G4_B1 to B3 is determined. However, in such a scenario PTN_G4_B1 to B3, it is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in blue at any timing of the stock times 4 to 6.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 253C, when it is determined in advance that the execution of the operation effect is performed when the hold 3 is on (number of holdings = 3), the operation effect is performed until the operation effect is performed at the time of the hold settlement. Since five stock timings are set as the timing to stock the content of the operation immediately before the operation to operate in the mode, the content immediately before the operation stocked at the five timings is the operation immediately before the operation to operate by the operation effect In order to be consistent with the contents of (1), the 3 o'clock on-hold scenario determination table is used to predetermine the contents of the operation immediately before mode stocked at each timing. Similarly, each of the cases where the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance at the time of holding 2 lighting (number of holdings = 2) or when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the holding 1 is on (number of holdings = 1) The corresponding scenario determination table (not shown) is used to predetermine the content of the operation immediately before operation stocked at each timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 254, a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of stock effects and operation effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 shows a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of stock effects and operation effects for stocking contents of the mode immediately before operation.

  First, in this example, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is on (number of holdings = 4), the content of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation effect is specified and stocked in stock effect In order to match the content of the mode immediately before the operation with the content of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation production, the stock time 6 during the change at the hold 3 change and the stock time 5 during the change at the hold 2 change The contents of the immediately before operation mode stocked at each timing of the stock time 4 during the fluctuation of time and the stock time 1 to 3 before execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation during the reserve digestion are determined in advance. Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, as the content of the operation immediately before the operation stocked during the change at the time of holding 3 change, the pressing operation unit 303 is red. When the notification of lighting is determined, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, “button red STOCK” is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and the stock is displayed. It is notified that the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the effect is lighting of the pressing operation unit 303 in red.

  In addition, when the start of the change display of the decorative symbol, for example, when the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 is strongly vibrated is determined as the content of the mode immediately before the operation which is stocked during the change at the 3rd change. In the figure, as shown in FIG. 254 (C), after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, “Button vibration A STOCK” is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and the contents of the mode immediately before operation stocked in stock effect However, it is notified that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 303 is strong. In addition, at the time of starting the change display of the decorative symbol, for example, when the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes is determined as the content of the mode immediately before the operation which is stocked during the change at the time of holding 3 change. As shown in FIG. 254 (D), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, “Button projection STOCK” is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and the content of the operation immediately before operation stocked in the stock effect is It is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is a protrusion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), during execution of the stock effect, a list of the contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect is displayed above the display area, for example, When lighting in red of the pressing operation unit 303 is stocked as the content, the button red STOCK is displayed above the display area, and the content of the operation immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect is the pressing It is notified that the operation unit 303 is lit in red. Then, until the end of the reserve process that will carry out the operation effect, each time the hold order changes (every time the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started), the stock of the content of the mode immediately before the operation in the stock effect is repeated. Thus, the contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock direction can be gradually increased. Similarly, even during the variation display of the decorative symbol at the time of reserve processing that will carry out the operation production, the stock of the content of the mode immediately before the operation in the stock production is repeated before the execution of the operation production, The contents of the immediately preceding operation can be increased gradually.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (F), at the start of the operation effect, that is, immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 is batched with the contents of the operation immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect. It is working. For example, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation operating in the operation effect is the mode 1 (protrusion & vibration A & red), the pressing operation unit 303 lights in red, strongly vibrates, and further protrudes. doing. During the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in the content of the mode immediately before the operation, “during STOCK release” is displayed above the display area. Then, in the operation effect, as in the operation effect after the execution of the stock effect for adding the above-described addition time, it becomes possible to operate the pressing operation unit 303 for the effective operation time and operate the pressing operation unit 303. By continuing the operation, it becomes possible to raise the predetermined meter, and effects are performed as to whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time.

  In this example, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect is the vibration of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates just before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Immediately after the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the pressing operation unit 303 may vibrate. Further, in this example, after the content immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect, immediately before the operation of the pressure operation unit 303, the pressure operation unit 303 is collectively operated with the content immediately before the operation. When the content immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect, the pressing operation unit 303 may be operated once with the content immediately before the operation. In addition, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 with the content immediately before the operation may be maintained from the time when the content immediately before the operation is stocked to the time immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in stock effect. In such a case, the content immediately before the operation can be grasped at the time when the content immediately before the operation is stocked by the stock effect, without depending on the visual recognition for the display area.

[23. Limitations of light guide effect using light guide plate]
In this embodiment, when the light guide effect during light emission decoration is performed in which the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is decorated during the change display of the decorative symbol (during the change display of the special symbol), the change Even when the variation display of the decoration symbol (the variation display of the special symbol) is performed during the period from when the variation of the decoration symbol that performed the light guiding effect is stopped (when the variation symbol of the special symbol stops) until the specific period elapses, It limits that the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is performed. In addition, when a specific period has passed from the time of fluctuation stop of the decoration design which executes the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation (at the time of fluctuation stop of the special symbol), the light guide decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. When the release notification is performed, the light guide effect is executed, and it is notified that the restriction of the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is canceled.

  In addition, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed at the time when the specific period has passed from the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol for which the variable light guide effect is performed is stopped, the time of the release notification as the light notification effect for the cancellation notification When variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed while the light guide effect A is executed, the light guide plate 2601 emits light in a mode different from the light notification effect at the release notification time as the light notification effect at the release notification time. The light guiding effect B is executed at the release notification time to decorate. That is, when the specific period has passed from the time of the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbol for which the light guiding effect is performed during fluctuation, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is different depending on whether or not the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is being performed. ing.

  FIG. 255 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the cancellation notification light guiding effect when the specific period occurs after the fluctuation light guiding effect is performed. First, when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the variation pattern command and determination from the main control board 1310 When the result notification command is transmitted, and the fluctuation pattern that will execute the fluctuation light guiding effect is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, during fluctuation display of the decoration pattern, as fluctuation light guiding effect, A light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 to display a design. In addition, as the timing for displaying the pattern on the light guide plate 2601, it is possible during normal fluctuation whether or not to reach, or during reach effect after the reach, and the pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 2601. By doing this, it is indicated that it is highly likely that the lottery result will be a big hit in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol for which the variable light guide effect is executed is stopped changing, counting of time whether the specific period has elapsed is started, and is the specific period elapsed until the specific period elapses? Continue to count the time of no. Until the specific period elapses, the light guide effect during fluctuation is limited to be performed, and the light guide plate 2601 is not decorated by light emission. In addition, the count of time whether or not the specific period has elapsed is not only the period in which the variation display of the decoration symbol (the variation display of the special symbol) is not performed, but also the variation display of the decoration symbol (the variation display of the special symbol In the middle) also keep counting. That is, even if the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is performed based on the fluctuation pattern which will execute the fluctuation light guiding effect until the specific period elapses, the execution of the fluctuation light guiding effect is limited. Therefore, the light guide plate 2601 is not decorated to emit light. As described above, after the fluctuation light guiding effect is performed, the fluctuation light guiding effect is not executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol until the specific period elapses, so the fluctuation light guiding effect is performed. Does not continue for a short period of time, and prevents the player's eyes from being strained by the light of the LED 2611 or the LED 2621, and further prevents the loss of the rarity of the effect itself of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 can do.

  In this example, while the variation time of the decorative symbol (special symbol) when the normal variation that does not reach is performed is set to about 5 seconds on average, the execution of the variation light guiding effect is limited. Period is set to about 20 seconds. That is, as the specific period, it is set so as to be able to perform normal fluctuation four times without reaching the reach. For this reason, even when the upper limit number of the hold is held at the time of fluctuating stop of the decorative symbol for which the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is executed, it is until the four hold is digested, ie 4 It is possible not to execute the variable light guide effect until the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the two reservations is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (A), when the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed at the time when the specific period has elapsed from the stop of the variation of the decoration symbol for which the light guiding effect during variation is performed, As the light guide effect, the light guide effect A at release notification is executed, and it is notified that the restriction of the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is canceled. Then, in the release notification light guide effect A, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is prevented from appearing in the change light guide effect so that the light guide plate 2601 is decorated by emitting light in a mode different from the change light guide effect. It is assumed that it only appears in the light guiding effect A at the time of release notification. In release notification light guiding effect A, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the fluctuation light guiding effect is provided on the front of the effect display device 1600, and the LED light is irradiated to the light guide plate. Alternatively, the design shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed. As described above, in the release notification light guiding effect A, the light guide plate 2601 is decorated by emitting light in a mode different from the fluctuation light guiding effect, and it is not confused whether it is the fluctuation light guiding effect or not. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the variable display of the decorative symbol suggests that the lottery result is likely to be a big hit.

  In addition, in the release notification light guide effect A, the time for light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is set to a very short time (for example, 1 second or less) than the time of execution of the variable light guide effect. The time to display the pattern on the screen is finished in an instant. Thereby, even if the light guide effect A on cancellation notification is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol performed by the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601 It is possible to pay attention to the fluctuation effects without any hindrance to visual recognition for the effects.

  In addition, at the time when the specific period has passed from the time of the fluctuation stop of the decoration design which executes the fluctuation light guiding effect, the restriction of the execution of the fluctuation light guiding effect is canceled, Even when it is the timing to execute the fluctuation light guiding effect (when the fluctuation pattern that will execute the fluctuation light guiding effect is being executed), the fluctuation light guiding effect is executed at that time. Without giving notice, priority is given to light guiding effect A at the time of release notification. In such a case, a predetermined time after the termination of the light guiding effect for cancellation notification (for example, After 1 second has passed, it is decided to execute the fluctuating light guiding effect. In this way, by temporarily stopping the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 from the end of the release notification light guide effect A to the start of the change light guide effect, the light guide plate 2601 is released at the time of execution It is possible to prevent the occurrence of misunderstanding that the light guiding effect A is continuing upon notification.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (B), when the variation display of the decoration symbol is not performed at the time when the specific period has passed from the time of the variation stop of the decoration symbol for which the light guiding effect during variation is performed, As the light guiding effect, the light guiding effect B at the time of cancellation notification is executed, and it is notified that the restriction of the execution of the light guiding effect at the time of fluctuation is canceled. Further, in this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has not passed since the variation symbol of the decorative symbol has not been displayed since the variation symbol is stopped, the effect display device 1600 or the like is used. Since the demonstration effect (demonstration effect) such as the introduction of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, the possibility of performing the demonstration effect is high at the time of executing the light guide effect B at release notification. Then, in the release notification light guide effect B, the light guide plate 2601 emits light and decorates in a mode different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. It does not appear in the light effect, and appears only in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification. In the release notification light guide effect B, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the variable light guide effect is provided on the front of the effect display device 1600, and the LED light is irradiated to the light guide plate. Alternatively, the design shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed with the central portion missing. As described above, in the release notification light guiding effect B, the light guide plate 2601 is decorated by emitting light in a mode different from the fluctuation light guiding effect, and it is not confused whether it is the fluctuation light guiding effect. In addition, in light release effect B at the time of release notification, when light emitting decoration of light guide plate 2601 is performed, the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 through the central portion to display the pattern lacking the central portion. It is possible to clearly see the image under demonstration. Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the variation indication of the decorative symbol is not being performed in the light notification effect for cancellation notification B, and to prevent the occurrence of misunderstanding that it is a light introduction effect for variation.

  In addition, in the release notification light guide effect B, the light emission decoration time of the light guide plate 2601 is set to a time (for example, 5 seconds or more) longer than the time of the fluctuation light guide effect execution. The time to display the pattern is to be continued for a long time. Thereby, when the change display of the decorative symbol is not performed, although attention is not paid to the effect display device 1600, by performing the light guide effect B for cancellation notification for a long time, the change light guide effect It can be easily grasped that the restriction of execution of has been lifted. In addition, for the player who is dissatisfied with the fact that the execution of the light guide effect during fluctuation is limited, the game is to be on standby from the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol for which the light guide effect during fluctuation is executed stops After executing the light effect B, it is possible to resume the game.

  In addition, when the variation display of the decoration symbol is started during the release notification light guide effect B during the release notification in the state where the variation display of the decoration symbol is not performed, the light guide effect B at the release notification is ended. It is like that. Thereby, even when variable display of the decorative symbol is started during execution of the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601 etc. This makes it possible to pay attention to the fluctuation effects without the visual recognition of the fluctuation effects being disturbed. In addition, when the fluctuation indication of the decoration design is started during execution of the light announcement effect B at the time of cancellation notification, although the light guiding effect B at the time of cancellation notification is ended, immediately after the start of the fluctuation indication of the decoration symbol Does not execute the light guide effect during fluctuation. That is, a predetermined time (for example, one second) elapses after the termination of the light guiding effect for cancellation notification B so that the fluctuation light guiding effect is not continuously executed after the termination of the light notification effect for cancellation notification B. After that, it is decided to execute the light guide effect during fluctuation. In this way, by temporarily stopping the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 from the end of the release notification light guide effect B to the start of the change light guide effect, the light guide plate 2601 is released when the change light guide effect is executed. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the light guide effect B is continuing at the time of notification.

  In addition, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 during the release notification light guide effect B, it is possible to end the release notification light guide effect B. As described above, in the release notification light guide effect B, the time for light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is longer (for example, 5 seconds or more) than when the variation light guide effect is performed, but When it is desired to end the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the player may operate the pressing operation unit 303, and it is possible to determine the end timing of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification And It should be noted that even when the release notification light guide effect A is being performed, the player may operate the pressing operation unit 303 to end the release notification light guide effect A.

  In addition, while the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is accompanied by the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601, the effect sound is output from the speaker etc., the light guide effect at the release notification (light guide effect at the release notification A, light guide at the release notification In effect B), although the light guide plate 2601 is decorated to emit light, an effect sound is not output from a speaker or the like. Thereby, during execution of the notification of cancellation light guide effect, it is not confused whether it is the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation, and it is highly possible that the lottery result will be a big hit in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. It can prevent that the misunderstanding that it is suggesting arises.

  In this example, various sounds are output from the speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game, but the peripheral control IC 1510a dynamically sets each channel for each sound to be output from the speaker or the like. While allocating and managing, when the number of combinations of sounds to be output concerned exceeds the maximum number of channels of each channel (for example, 16 channels), the output is scheduled within the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. Each channel is dynamically assigned to a combination of sounds. Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via the channels dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority. In this respect, when performing variational light guide effect, the effect sound accompanying the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is allocated to the channel and output, while when light guide effect at the release notification is executed, the effect accompanying light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 The sound is not assigned to the channel itself, and the effect sound is not output. That is, at the time of execution of the light release effect at the time of cancellation notification, an empty channel is likely to be generated by not assigning the effect sound accompanying the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 to the channel itself. Thereby, at the start of the light notification effect A at the time of release notification, although the fluctuation effect such as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is performed, it is prevented that the situation that the effect sound according to the fluctuation effect is not output is generated. Can. In addition, at the start of the notification light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the change effect such as the change display of the decorative symbol is not performed, but it is a case where the change effect is started during execution of the light guide effect B at release notification. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the effect sound concerning the fluctuation effect is not output.

  Next, a specific example of effects on the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 at the time of execution of the fluctuation light guiding effect and the cancellation notification light guiding effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 shows a specific effect example of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 at the time of execution of the variable light guide effect and the release notification light guide effect.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (A), when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the main control While the variation pattern command and the judgment result notification command are transmitted from the substrate 1310, when the variation pattern that will execute the variation light guide effect is specified from the variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is being displayed. The light is emitted from the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 to display a design. As described above, displaying the design on the light guide plate 2601 suggests that the lottery result is highly likely to be a big hit in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), when the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern has passed and the stop symbol of the special symbol is to be stopped and displayed, the main control board 1310 transmits a stop display command, and Therefore, the stop display with the stop symbol of the decoration symbol according to the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided. At this time, counting of time whether or not a specific period has elapsed is started, and it is limited that the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is executed until the specific period elapses, and the light guide plate 2601 emits light. I try not to decorate.

  And as shown to FIG. 256 (C), when the specific period from the fluctuation | variation stop time of the decorative symbol which performed the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation has passed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, FIG. 256 (D) As shown in the figure, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 as the light guide effect A at the release notification, and a pattern different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is displayed doing. As described above, in the release notification light guide effect A, the light guide plate 2601 is decorated by emitting light in a mode different from the change time light guide effect, thereby notifying that the restriction on the execution of the change time light guide effect has been released. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), a demonstration effect is executed when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has not elapsed since the variation display of the decoration symbol has not been performed since the variation pattern stopped. However, as shown in Fig. 256 (F), when the specified period from the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol for which the variation light guiding effect has been performed has passed while the demonstration effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. The light from the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 is irradiated to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 as the light guide effect B, and the pattern with the central part missing is used as a pattern different from it's shown. At this time, the image in the demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly viewed from the central portion of the pattern. As described above, in the release notification light guide effect B, the light guide plate 2601 is decorated by emitting light in a mode different from the change time light guide effect, thereby notifying that the restriction of the execution of the change time light guide effect has been released. ing.

[24. Disappointment production in temporary stop period of lost design in super reach production]
In this embodiment, when starting the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the variation from the main control board 1310 The pattern command and the judgment result notification command are transmitted, and based on these commands, variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started, and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle The stop display is in the order of the decoration pattern. In addition, when the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern has passed and the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the main control board 1310 transmits the stop display command, and based on the command, the stop symbol according to the special symbol The stop display on the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is decided. In addition, before the stop display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is decided, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped before the stop symbol is fixed, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is swayed and the stop display is decided During the temporary stop period (about 1 to 2 seconds), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is in a swinging state (the decorative symbol is slightly in the vertical and horizontal directions).

  In addition, as a fluctuation pattern in which fluctuation effects such as reach effects are set, after the lost symbol is temporarily displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started again from the state in which the fluctuation is fluctuated. After the lapse of the period, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the re-variation fluctuation pattern for determining the stop display with the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is also set. For this reason, in a state where the lost symbol swings and fluctuates as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, it can be expected to pay attention to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again.

  In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the game specified from the pre-determination command When a specific fluctuation pattern is specified that will execute reach production (such as super reach production) with high expectation of big hit among reach production as pre-decision information such as mode type (type of fluctuation pattern) of production In the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the light of the LED 2621 is irradiated to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 to display the pattern, and the fluctuation is performed in the subsequent stage. It is possible to perform stop pre-reading effect that suggests in advance that high reach effect will be performed. That is, in the pre-playing effect at stop, the lottery result can be a big hit in the subsequent fluctuation effects by irradiating the light of the LED 2621 to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 and displaying the design. It is intended to indicate in advance that the sex is high.

  If the above-mentioned stop pre-reading effect mentioned above determines in advance a specific fluctuation pattern that will execute a reach effect (such as a super reach effect) having a high hit probability among the reach effects, the fluctuation based on the specific fluctuation pattern Regardless of whether or not a plurality of change effects are performed during the period until the effect is performed, the temporary stop period of each decorative symbol in the change effect is executable. That is, when there is a suspension, when the predetermined variation pattern is determined in advance, the stop prefetching effect can be executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol in the variation effect, but in the state where there is no suspension, It does not execute in the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the fluctuation production.

  However, if the fluctuation effect in the period after the specific fluctuation pattern is determined in advance is the fluctuation effect at the time of big hit when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, In some cases, stop pre-reading effect is not performed. That is, only when it is a fluctuation effect at the time of a loss that displays the lost symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and only when it is a fluctuation effect other than the super reach effect, the prefetching effect when stopped during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol Is made executable. In this way, when stop pre-reading effect is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol should be started again from the state where the lost symbol sways and fluctuates like the fluctuation pattern of re-variation mentioned above. Because there is no, since the stop display in the lost design is decided, at the time when the stop look-ahead effect is executed, the expectation for whether to start the change display of the decoration symbol again is not given, but in the subsequent change effect The expectation that the lottery result will be a big hit is enhanced.

  In the present example, it is determined whether or not a particular fluctuation pattern that is to execute a reach effect (such as a super reach effect) having a high expectation of a big hit among reach effects is determined in advance while there is a suspension. It has been decided whether or not to perform preview look-ahead effect during stop during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of change effect other than reach effect, but in the state where there is hold, change pattern will be a big hit When it is determined, it may be determined that the stop pre-reading effect is executed with a higher probability than when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation pattern causing the lottery result to be lost. In such a case as well, the stop look-ahead effect is a effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and it is suggested in advance that there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in subsequent change effects.

  In addition, among the super reach effects with high expectation for big hit, the variation pattern command that is transmitted from the main control board 1310 is the variation pattern that executes the super reach effect at the time of losing where the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol of the decorative symbol. When it is specified, in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, the disappointing effect of notifying that the big hit was not obtained is executed. Such a disappointing effect is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect regardless of whether there is a pending state or no pending state. In addition, when it is the super reach production at the time of the big hit which displays the big hit design as the stop design of the decoration design in the case of the fluctuation production other than the super reach production and is the stop design of the decoration design There is no As described above, when disappointing effects are executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, the symbol of the lost symbol changes again from the state in which the lost symbol sways and fluctuates like the fluctuation pattern of the revariation described above. Since the display is not started and the stop display with the lost symbol is decided, when disappointing production is performed, the expectation as to whether or not to start the change display of the decorative symbol again is not given There is.

  As described above, in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, the disappointing effect is executed without executing the stop read ahead effect. Therefore, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, not only is no expectation given to whether or not to start the change display of the decoration symbol again, the lottery result is a big hit in the subsequent change effect Not to be given the expectation of becoming In addition, in the super reach production, the expectation of becoming a big hit is raised because the big hit expectation among the reach production is high, but at the time of the end of the super reach production at the time of losing, it is not something for the player like disappointing production. By performing the production which does not give an expectation, it is possible to prevent the tension from being sustained excessively after the end of the super reach production.

  FIG. 257 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of stop pre-reading effect and disappointing effect in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol. First, when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the variation pattern command and determination from the main control board 1310 When the result notification command is transmitted, but the fluctuation effect other than the super reach effect is specified among the fluctuation effects at the time of the loss based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation effect other than the super reach effect In the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end time, it is possible to execute stop pre-reading effect.

  As shown in FIG. 257 (A), in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the change effect other than the super reach effect, if there is no hold or if there is a hold, among the reach effects If a specific change pattern that will cause a reach effect (such as a super reach effect) having a high hit probability is not determined in advance, the stop look-ahead effect is not performed. In such a case, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, with the background image at the time when the lost symbol is displayed for a temporary stop, the lost symbol is made to fluctuate and transmitted from the main control board 1310 The stop display of the lost symbol is determined based on the stop display command.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the change production other than the super reach production, in the state where there is a hold, reach production with high expectation of big hit among reach production ( In the case where it is determined in advance that a specific variation pattern that is to be executed (such as super reach effect), stop preview effect is executed. In such a case, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 is made to emit light as a stop look-ahead effect during stop in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, and the big hit expectation is high in the subsequent change effect. It is suggested in advance that reach production will be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 257 (C), when the super reach effect is specified among the change effects at the time of the loss based on the change pattern command, the state is with or without hold. Regardless of whether or not there is a disappointing effect of notifying that the big hit was not obtained in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect. In such a case, in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily displayed is different from the background image at the time of temporary stop display, and the lost symbol shakes and fluctuates Thus, based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the stop display of the lost symbol is decided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 258, a specific effect example of the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of stop pre-reading effect and disappointing effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 shows a specific effect example of the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of stop pre-reading effect and disappointing effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 258 (A), when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the main control Although the variation pattern command and the judgment result notification command are transmitted from the substrate 1310, the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started based on the variation pattern command. . Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (B), after a predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbol is temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol of the decorative symbol, and the background image at the point when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped is maintained. , The lost design is made to fluctuate. Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (C), the stop display of the lost symbol is determined based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310. In addition, in the temporary stop period of the lost design at the end of the fluctuation production other than the super reach production, in the state where there is no hold, or in the state where there is a hold, reach production with high expectation of big hit among reach production ( In the case where the specific fluctuation pattern that is to execute the super reach effect etc.) is not determined in advance, the stop pre-reading effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 258 (D), in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the change production other than the super reach production, in the state where there is a hold, reach production with high expectation of big hit among reach production ( In the case where it is determined in advance that a specific variation pattern that is to be executed (such as super reach effect), stop preview effect is executed. In such a stop time pre-reading effect, the light of the LED 2621 is irradiated to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front of the effect display device 1600 to display the design, and a reach with a high probability of big hit in the subsequent change effect. It is intended to suggest in advance that the production will be performed. In addition, when the light guide plate 2601 is decorated for light emission, the light emission mode (light emission color, light emission time, number of times of light emission, etc.) of the light guide plate 2601 is changed according to the big hit expectation at the time of execution of the predetermined variation pattern It is possible to change the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2601 or to change the pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (E), when the super reach effect is specified among the change effects at the time of the loss based on the change pattern command, the state is with or without hold. Regardless of whether or not there is a disappointing effect being executed in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect. In such a disappointing effect, it is different from the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as the disappointing effect-only effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started again The message "end" is displayed to clearly notify that there was no jackpot and no big hit. Also, in the disappointing effect, the lost symbol in the temporary stop display state is displayed small in the upper right of the display area, while the disappointing effect-specific effect image is displayed largely in the entire display area Unfortunately, it has become easier to pay attention to the effect image dedicated to the effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (F), based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the stop display of the lost symbol displayed small in the upper right of the display area is decided.

  In the above-described disappointing effect, the effect image dedicated to the disappointing effect is displayed as a still image having no movement such as a character. In addition, while super reach production is being performed, while loud sound output is performed louder than usual from the speakers etc., while disappointing production is being executed at the end of super reach production at the time of the loss, the speaker etc. There is no sound output from. Also from this point of view, in the disappointing effect, the player can grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started again and it is clearly notified that the big hit has not been obtained. .

  Also, in the disappointing production, the character that appears in the super reach presentation is displayed as a staging image dedicated to the disappointing production. That is, as disappointing effects, plural types of disappointing effects different in character are provided, and among the multiple types of super reach effects, super reach so that characters appearing in the executed super reach effect appear even in disappointing effects The disappointing effect is changed according to the type of effect. As a result, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, only the same disappointing effect is not performed, and it is possible to make the player bored. However, after providing multiple types of disappointing effects, disappointing effects may be randomly performed among a plurality of types during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect.

[25. Button related effects]
Next, button-related effects will be described. FIG. 259 is an explanatory view showing a serif notice as an example of button-related effects executed by the effect display device 1600, FIG. 260 is a timing chart of the serif notice shown in FIG. 259, and FIG. FIG. 262 is an explanatory view showing a non-operation pseudo error effect as an example of the button related effect performed by the effect display device 1600. 263 (A) is a timing chart of the operation trigger pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 261, and FIG. 263 (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error effect shown in FIG.

  First, serif announcements as button-related effects will be described. In this example, upon receiving from the main control board 1310 a fluctuation pattern command instructing start of a fluctuation effect and a judgment result notification command according to a lottery result, the peripheral control board 1510 performs drawing on a notice or the like in the reception command analysis process. Execute the process That is, while selecting the notice lottery table corresponding to the notice lottery table according to the lottery result (big hit, reach loss, lose etc.) specified from the fluctuation pattern command and the judgment result command, the random number for notice decision (notice random number) The presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice type in the case of executing the notice effect are determined by comparing the judgment value set in the notice lottery table and the acquired notice random number.

  Then, when it is determined to execute serif announcement as a button-related effect, the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control of the effect display device 1600 at timing t0 in FIG. 260 to start fluctuation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols. 259 (A), a reach is generated in which the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol, and a normal reach effect is performed in which the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed at a low speed (FIG. 259 (B)). Further, at timing t1 of FIG. 260 (A) after reach occurrence, an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing button operation and a remaining time display 1600b are displayed (FIG. 259 (C)). In this example, "Press the button!" Is displayed as the operation instruction display 1600a.

  In addition, after the peripheral control board 1510 displays the operation instruction display 1600a, the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 (the pressing operation unit 303) becomes effective at timing t2 of FIG. , And the scale displayed as the remaining time display 1600b is reduced according to the lapse of the effective period (FIG. 259 (D)). Then, when the rendering operation unit 300 is operated at timing t3 of FIG. 260 (A) within the effective period and the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the main character 1600c to the effect display device 1600. And a serif of the main character 1600c (so-called cut-in), a serif notice is executed (FIG. 259 (E)). In this example, “Atsui!” Is displayed as the line of the main character 1600 c, which suggests that the possibility of a big hit is high as a result of the variable display during execution. In addition, the contents displayed as the line of the main character 1600c in the line announcement are not only those related to the lottery result such as the big hit expectation degree, but also the line unrelated to the lottery result (for example, "a long time no see") is displayed. In this case, the player is supposed to have a low probability of being a big hit as a result of the variable display being executed.

  Further, when the rendering operation unit 300 is not operated within a valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 is valid, the speech preview is not performed. As described above, since the speech warning is not executed unless the rendering operation unit 300 is operated, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the rendering operation unit 300. It should be noted that the serif announcement may be executed even when the rendering operation unit 300 is not operated within a valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 is effective, in this case, the rendering The player who forgot to operate the operation unit 300 can be rescued to convey the contents of the speech preview, that is, the jackpot expectation.

  In this example, after the serif announcement is performed and the serif of the main character 1600c is displayed for a predetermined period, the notice of the serif is ended at timing t4 in FIG. 260, and the dialogue of the main character 1600c and the main character 1600c disappears. Super reach effect different from the normal reach effect (FIG. 260 (F)). Although a detailed rendering example during each reach production is not illustrated, in the normal reach production, for example, the inside decoration pattern changes and displays at low speed near the center of the screen, and it corresponds to the background of the left, middle and right decoration symbols "Background image for normal reach effect" different from the background image at the normal time is displayed as the background image to be displayed, and further, the effect sound for normal reach effect is outputted, and the decoration pattern in the middle is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time Deriving and displaying the result can be exemplified. In addition, in super reach production different from normal reach, for example, main character 1600c and the like are displayed in the central part of effect display device 1600 (at this time, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are reduced in the lower left part of effect display device 1600 etc.) "Display background image for super reach effect" different from the background image at the time of normal reach or normal reach as a background image corresponding to the background of the main character 1600c), and further, the effect sound for super reach effect It can be exemplified to output and display a success / non-presence effect image or the like as to whether or not the main character 1600c or the like can achieve a predetermined purpose. In the super reach effect, if the main character 1600c or the like can achieve the predetermined purpose after a predetermined time, it becomes a big hit, and if the purpose can not be achieved, it becomes a loss.

  In the example shown in FIG. 259, since the determination result notification command indicating that a big hit is received is received, after displaying the mode in which the predetermined purpose has been achieved by the super reach effect (FIG. 259 (F)), the big hit symbol ( The state in which all the decorative symbols in the left, right and left are stopped with the same symbol, “777” in the example of FIG. 259 (G) is displayed (FIG. 259 (G)), and the big hit gaming state is controlled (FIG. H)). In addition, it is possible to execute even when the judgment result notification command that the serif notice becomes out of order is received, and in this case, after the serif notice, the middle decoration pattern is executed without executing the super reach effect different from the normal reach effect. It may be made to stop with a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols, and after displaying an aspect in which a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is performed and the predetermined purpose can not be achieved after the notice of the speech, An off-set symbol may be displayed in which symbols are stopped and displayed with symbols different from the left and right decorative symbols.

  As described above, in the serif announcement as the button-related effect, an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the effect operation unit 300 is effective is set during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and the effect operation unit 300 is set within this effective period. When the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 by operating the key, the effect display device 1600 causes the main character 1600c to appear and also displays the words of the main character 1600c. In addition, in the dialogue warning, regardless of the operation timing of the rendering operation unit 300, the dialogue of the main character 1600c and the main character 1600c is displayed for a predetermined period, and disappears before starting the super reach effect different from the normal reach effect. It is supposed to be. Therefore, when the rendering operation unit 300 is operated at an early stage of the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) and the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the announcement of the serif is ended, and then up to the timing t4 of FIG. The normal reach is performed and super reach effect different from normal reach effect starts at timing t4 in FIG. 260, and the effect operation unit 300 is operated to operate the peripheral control board 1510 just before the end of the effective period (for example, 5 seconds). When the signal is input, the speech preview is ended, and immediately thereafter, the timing reaches t4 in FIG. 260, and super reach production different from normal reach production is started.

  Next, an operation trigger pseudo error effect as a button-related effect will be described. Upon receiving from the main control board 1310 a fluctuation pattern command instructing start of a fluctuation effect for executing an operation trigger pseudo error effect and a judgment result notification command according to the lottery result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the above described reception command analysis processing. After performing lottery processing for notice etc. and controlling the display of effect display device 1600 at timing t0 'in FIG. 263A to start the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols are identical A normal reach effect is executed to generate reach reaching a stop at the symbol and to change and display the decoration symbol inside at low speed (Fig. 261 (A)). When the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed, the lottery result to the effect that the button related effect other than the operation trigger pseudo error effect is performed is not obtained in the lottery process for the notice or the like. That is, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect is performed, no other button related effect is performed.

  After the variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 displays an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing button operation and a remaining time display 1600b at timing t1 'in FIG. 263A. When a timing t2 'in FIG. 261 (B) and FIG. 263 (A) comes, an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 becomes effective is started, and the remaining time is displayed according to the elapse of the effective period. The scale displayed as 1600b is reduced (FIG. 261 (C)). Then, when the rendering operation unit 300 is operated at timing t3 'in FIG. 263A during this effective period and the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation rendering of the decorative symbol or the sound rendering (in this example After switching and displaying the pseudo-error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 was in an error state (including a state in which a bug occurs) by interrupting the display and sound during normal reach production (FIG. 261 (D)), the predetermined period At time t4 'in FIG. 263A (after 5 seconds, for example), a pseudo recovery mode is displayed as if the pachinko machine 1 is recovered from the error state (FIG. 261E).

  In this example, as a pseudo error mode, a special image (FIG. 261 (D)) is displayed as if the display contents of the effect display device 1600 were disturbed and solidified (progress of the effect was stopped). Specifically, a special image (mosaic-like special image) obtained by partially shifting the image ((261) in FIG. 261) at a predetermined timing during normal reach production is displayed, and the effect display device 1600 looks abnormal. While the special image is being displayed, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size at the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600 while the special image is being displayed. Also, the reduced left, middle, and right decorative symbols are clearly displayed without partial displacement as in the special image, and are true to the game arcade manager etc. It is made to recognize that it is not abnormal (error state) and not to be mistaken as abnormal (error state).

  Further, the pseudo error mode may be any mode as long as it is possible to make an illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state, and in addition to the example of the mosaic special image described above, for example, The image may be displayed in an incomplete state, or the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be displayed as a still image without being updated. In addition, an image (such as a mosaic special image in which the display content of the effect display device 1600 described above is disturbed) displayed as a pseudo error mode is prepared in advance (stored as image data in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) (For example, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out the image data currently displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Effect display device 1600 so as to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a mode (a mosaic mode, a mode in which the aspect ratio is different from normal, a mode in which the direction ratio is different from normal, or the like) Control IC for drawing data to draw an image on Generated on the VRAM 510a, it may be processed to) the display. Further, in this example, a message image such as "Please wait while returning" is displayed as a pseudo recovery mode, as if it is restored from an error state, but the player is that the pseudo recovery mode is recovering from an error state. Any mode may be used as long as it is a recognizable mode, and for example, a mode similar to the start screen of a computer may be displayed.

  In addition, when switching and displaying in the pseudo error mode, a pseudo error sound (for example, an abnormality or a failure occurs in the gaming machine 1) whose output is completed in a short period (for example, 1 second) than the display period (for example 5 seconds) of the pseudo error mode. At the time of switching, output a special sound such as "Gakotsu!" As it occurs, and while displaying the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode, do not output any effect sound, or suppress the volume. (Including muffling) may be performed, and by performing such special sound effects in accordance with the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode, it is easier for the player to further illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 was in an error state. can do. In addition, when displaying the pseudo return mode, a pseudo return sound different from the pseudo error sound (for example, a specific sound such as "pipi pi pi ... ..." as if the upper gaming machine 1 is restored) is output. The pseudo return sound may be continuously output during the display period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pseudo return mode in order to give the player the impression of being restored from the abnormality. it can. However, since it is necessary for the game arcade manager or the like to recognize that it is not a true abnormality (error state), the occurrence of a problem or the player even while being displayed in the pseudo error mode or the pseudo return mode. In the case where an illegal act occurs, the notification sound and the notification sound for notifying them are output so as to be reliably transmitted to the outside at a large volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) without suppressing the volume. . Further, the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound depend on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510 d and the volume adjustment based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 as the other effect sound. Note that, for the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound, the volume may be set to be relatively large with respect to other effect sounds, and the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510 d and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 Even if the volume of the effect sound is changed according to the volume adjustment based on the false error sound and the false return sound are output at a predetermined volume or more, thereby further increasing the truth that the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state It can be made easy for the player to feel illusion.

  Also, since the pseudo error mode is displayed immediately after the operation of the rendering operation unit 300, the relationship between the operation of the rendering operation unit 300 by the player and the pseudo error mode becomes close, and the player operates the rendering operation unit 300. Can be recognized as an error condition. In this example, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode are displayed also when the rendering operation unit 300 is not operated within a valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 is effective. As a result, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by thinking that an error state has occurred by not operating the rendering operation unit 300 within the effective period.

  In addition, one or both of the display periods of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be adjusted according to the remaining period of the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 is effective. . Specifically, the period from the display of the operation instruction display 1600a at timing t1 'in FIG. 263 to the end of display of the pseudo return mode at timing t5' is always regardless of the operation acceptance timing of the rendering operation unit 300. It may be made constant. Thereby, regardless of the timing of the operation reception of the rendering operation unit 300, it is possible to execute the fluctuation presentation matched to the fluctuation time.

  After displaying the pseudo return mode (FIG. 261 (E)), at timing t5 'in FIG. 263 (A), normal reach production and normal reach production are not performed, which is the production mode before the pseudo error mode is displayed. Displays another presentation mode (super reach presentation) and starts the variable presentation. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the central portion of the effect display device 1600 to expose the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d to face each other, and the left, middle, and right decorations at the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600. The symbol is displayed in a reduced size (Fig. 261 (F)). Then, a battle effect is executed in which the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d are confronted. Further, when the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, the main character 1600c displays a mode in which the main character 1600c attacks the enemy character 1600d as a result of the battle effect (FIG. 261 (G)), and the main character 1600c is the enemy character. The mode of winning on 1600 d is displayed (FIG. 261 (H)). On the other hand, when the received determination result notification command indicates a release, a mode in which the enemy character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c is displayed as a result of the battle effect, and a mode in which the main character 1600c loses the enemy character 1600d is displayed. It will be.

  Then, at timing t5 ′ ′, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 stops the variation display of the special symbol and transmits a stop display command instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol. In a mode in which the determination result command indicates the decorative symbol based on the reception of the stop display command 1510, "777" is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol in the example shown in FIG.

  Next, non-operation pseudo error presentation as button-related presentation will be described. Upon receiving from the main control board 1310 a fluctuation pattern command instructing start of a fluctuation effect for executing a non-operation pseudo-error effect and a judgment result notification command according to the lottery result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives Perform lottery processing about notice etc. and control the display of effect display device 1600 at timing t0 ′ ′ in FIG. 263 (B) to start left, middle and right decorative symbol variation display, then left and right decorative symbols are identical Execute normal reach effect to generate reach to stop at the symbol and change the display of the inside decoration pattern at low speed (Fig. 262 (A)) In addition, when executing non-operation pseudo error effect, lottery process for notice etc. In the above, it is arranged such that a lottery result to execute button-related effects other than the non-operation pseudo error effect is not obtained. Other button-related production is so as not to be executed when you run the error performance.

  After the variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 displays an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing button operation and a remaining time display 1600b at timing t1 ′ ′ in FIG. 263B. 262 (B)) Thereafter, without starting the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 is effective, the variation effect of the decorative symbol or the like at the timing t2 ′ ′ in FIG. After the sound effect (display or sound during normal reach effect in this example) is interrupted and switched to the pseudo error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 was in the error state (FIG. 262 (C)), after a predetermined period has elapsed For example, at timing t3 ′ ′ in FIG. 263 (B) after 5 seconds, a pseudo recovery mode is displayed as if the pachinko machine 1 is recovered from the error state. Figure 262 (D)).

  That is, in the non-operation pseudo error effect, the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the player is suddenly switched to the pseudo error mode while instructing the button operation, and the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 Even in actuality, the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation acceptance of the rendering operation unit 300 is effective is not started, and the operation signal is output in response to the rendering operation unit 300 being operated. The peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the operation signal (the operation signal may not be output even if the rendering operation unit 300 is performed outside the effective period). As such, since the pseudo error mode is displayed suddenly at an unexpected timing, it is possible to give surprise to the player who is preparing to operate the rendering operation unit 300.

  After displaying the pseudo return mode (FIG. 262 (D)), at timing t4 ′ ′ in FIG. 263 (B), the normal reach effect and the normal reach effect which is the effect mode before displaying the pseudo error mode are not performed. Displays another presentation mode (super reach presentation) and starts the fluctuation presentation.In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 faces the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d in the central portion of the presentation display device 1600. At the same time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 262 (E)), and a battle effect is executed in which the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d are confronted. Also, if the received judgment result notification command indicates a release, the enemy is produced as a result of the battle effect. A mode in which the character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c is displayed (FIG. 262F), and a mode in which the main character 1600c defeats the enemy character 1600d is displayed (FIG. 262G). When the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1600c attacks the enemy character 1600d is displayed as a result of the battle effect, and a mode in which the main character 1600c wins the enemy character 1600d is displayed.

  Then, at timing t5 ′ ′, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 stops the variation display of the special symbol and transmits a stop display command instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol. In a mode according to the determination result command 1510, based on having received the stop display command, in the example shown in FIG. 262, in the example shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect as button-related effects are executed, the variation effect of the decorative symbol (in this example, normal reach effect) is interrupted and the pachinko machine 1 becomes an error state. After switching to a pseudo error mode as described above, a pseudo recovery mode is displayed such that the pachinko machine 1 is recovered from the error state after a predetermined period (for example, after 5 seconds). In addition, after displaying the pseudo return mode for a predetermined period, the variation effect of the decoration pattern before the interruption is not resumed, but the variation effect of the effect mode different from the variation effect is started. In addition, the super reach production as a production mode different from the normal reach production performed after the display of the false return mode is higher in the big hit expectation than the normal reach production (a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit symbol is easily derived)) It is. Therefore, instead of resuming normal reach production after the operation trigger pseudo error production, it is a completely different production mode, and it is switched to super reach production having a higher degree of big hit expectation than the normal reach production, and game play is performed by executing fluctuation production. Can be improved.

  In the above example, the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as button-related effects during the normal reach effect, and the big hit expectation degree than the normal reach effect after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non operation pseudo error effect Switching to a high super reach effect and executing a variable effect, but before the variable effect of the decorative symbol is interrupted by the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect, the super reach effect other than the normal reach effect In this case, the presentation mode (type of super reach presentation) or the jackpot expectation degree of the super reach presentation to be executed after the end of the operation trigger pseudo error presentation and the non-operation pseudo error presentation, the decoration It is different from the super reach production which was executed before the interruption of the fluctuation production of the design May be a big hit expectations higher effect is produced than in the in a by super reach demonstration that was previously run interruption of variation effect decorative symbol (different types of super reach effect). In other words, after the completion of the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect, it is only required that the variation effect more advantageous for the player is executed than before the execution of the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect. . As a result, it is possible not only to increase the expectation for the big hit before the execution of the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect, but after the end of the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect Expectations for a big hit can be raised by the high degree of super reach production being started, and game interest can be improved.

  In addition, control to stop the firing of the game ball or control to stop the payout of the game ball may be executed in synchronization with the display of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode. That is, the display period of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode (period from timing t3 'to timing t5' in FIG. 263A, and period from timing t2 '' to timing t4 'in FIG. 263B) By stopping the firing of the ball or stopping the payout of the game ball, it is possible to make the simulated error state have a real taste and make it possible for the player to believe that the error state has actually been achieved. You can be surprised by the change.

  In addition, the execution timing of the button-related effect is not limited to the above, and the change effect of the decorative symbol is interrupted before the reach occurs, the button-related effect is executed, and the reach is generated after the end of the button-related effect. By performing the super reach effect, a change effect of the effect aspect different from the change effect of the decorative symbol before interruption may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be removed (the decorative symbol including at least two kinds of symbols) In this case, the left and right decorative symbols may be the same and the reach of the symbols different only in the middle decorative symbol may be out, or at least the left and right symbols may be different. After the temporary stop (in a state where it is displayed in a small width slowly up and down and to the left and right and is not completely stopped), the change effect of the decoration pattern is interrupted and the button Related effect may be executed variation effect of different representation embodiment the variation effect decorative symbol before interruption after completion of the button-related effect running (so-called re-change and quasi-continuous variation). Also, in this case, if the judgment result command to be deviated is received, the decorative symbol is variably displayed without starting the fluctuation effect of the effect mode different from the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol before the interruption after the end of the button related effect It is also possible to stop the decorative symbol with a different symbol at least on the left and right, and to end the fluctuation effect without generating a reach.

  Moreover, as a button-related effect (serif notice, operation trigger pseudo error effect, non-operation pseudo error effect), the operation is not limited to the above-described one, and the production operation involves movement (e.g., upward movement) from the reference position of the pressing operation unit It may be a movable effect that prompts the player to operate after the appearance of the unit 300 has been changed. The display of the pseudo error mode or the pseudo return mode in the case of such a movable effect is, for example, a predetermined timing during movement of the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 or immediately after the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the rising position. It can be exemplified that the movement of the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped at the timing of to display the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode. Moreover, in the case of such an embodiment, the state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is deviated from the reference position (the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped in the middle of movement, the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position) It is preferable that the pressing operation unit 303 which is out of the reference position be restored to the reference position at a predetermined timing after the end of the pseudo return mode, by keeping the state of being stationary. By thus generating the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode together with the sudden stop of the movement in the movable effect operation unit 300, it is easier for the player to further illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 was in the error state. can do.

  In addition, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effects, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the speech preview is performed as the button-related effects. For example, when an operation trigger pseudo error effect and a non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as button-related effects, a super reach effect of a predetermined big hit expectation or higher is executed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non operation pseudo error effect is finished. (Or higher if the percentage of execution of super reach effect above the prescribed big hit expectation is higher than the percentage of super reach production below the prescribed big hit expectation) and if the serif notice is executed as a button-related effect Execute the super reach effect less than the predetermined big hit expectation degree (or increase the execution ratio of the super reach effect less than the predetermined big hit expectation degree more than the execution ratio of the super reach effect more than the predetermined big hit expectation degree) after the end of You may As a result, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effects, the expectation of the big hit can be increased, and the game interest can be improved.

  In addition, one of the big hit expectation degree may be made higher than the other when the operation trigger pseudo error effect is performed as the button-related effect and when the non-operation pseudo error effect is performed. For example, when an operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed as a button-related effect, a super reach effect of a predetermined big hit expectation degree or more is executed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect is finished When the non-operational pseudo error effect is executed as a button-related effect, the super reach effect less than the predetermined big hit expectation degree is performed. You may make it perform (or raise the execution ratio of the super reach presentation less than predetermined | prescribed big hit expectation degree rather than the execution ratio of the super reach production more than predetermined | prescribed big hit expectation degree). As a result, the degree of expectation of the big hit can be changed according to the switching display timing of the pseudo error mode, and the game interest can be improved.

  Also, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be generated at different timings different from the button related effects described above. As another timing, it is preferable that the timing at which the player can feel illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state, for example, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and back upper right movable decorative body 3410 The back left moving arm 3330 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right moving arm 3430 of the back right rendering unit 3400 from the normal state during the movement of any of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 Timing immediately after moving to the state, timing immediately after moving the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 to the second state For example, back left upper movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable decoration 3320, back right upper movable decoration at these timings 3410, and the movement of the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 is stopped may be displayed pseudo error mode or pseudo-return manner. In addition, the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration 3320, the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration 3410, the front of the back lower right movable decoration 3420 The rotation may be stopped at a predetermined time during rotation of any of the step decoration portions 3422 to display a pseudo error mode or a pseudo return mode.

[26. Barbell reach production]
Hereinafter, the barbell reach effect which is the effect performed during the special symbol change will be described. The barbell reach effect is an effect performed during the SP reach performed in the present embodiment. The SP reach is an effect that is easy to be executed when the special lottery result of the change is a big hit, and an effect that is hard to be executed when the special lottery result of the change is an off, that is, an effect with a high hit probability. The barbell reach effect is an example of the effect in which the effect of promoting the first index and the second index indicating the big hit expectation in the fluctuation is executed, and the other effects described in FIG. It goes without saying that the effect of promoting one indicator and the second indicator is executed. Also, the barbell reach effect is an example of the effect that may be simulated continuous effect.

  The pseudo continuous rendition is a rendition in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is performed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . For example, a mode in which part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player is made to recognize that the variation in the decorative pattern is once ended, and the term "finish the change in the decorative pattern" There is a mode in which a pseudo run symbol (a symbol for which a pseudo run is determined if this symbol stops) stops in a part, and the like. The pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N continuous pseudo continuous effects, and the variation of the M-th decorative pattern in the N continuous pseudo continuous effects (M is 1 or more N The following natural numbers are called M-series pseudo-continuous effects. In addition, during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the player is actually re-executed the operation while suggesting to the player that the operation may be performed again. The effect that does not occur is called "pseudo-gaze effect". Also, hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is simply referred to as "simulated continuous effect".

  An operation that pseudo-series rendition is generated or continued, that is, the variation of the decorative symbol is made and the variation of the decorative symbol is finished is executed again during one variation of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator When it is determined that the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol. In the following example, the peripheral control IC 1510a causes a character such as "Continued!" To be stopped in the middle decoration pattern as a pseudo continuous symbol. In addition, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even and reach non-occurrence) may be set as the pseudo-connected symbol.

[26-1. Variation pattern table]
FIG. 265 is an example of a variation pattern pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310. In the description of FIG. 233 and the like, the example in which the variation pattern table exists for each success classification of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. Is defined.

  The fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 265 shows the correspondence between the winning classification of the special lottery result, the identifier of the fluctuation pattern, the presentation outline of the fluctuation pattern, and the distribution. "Other than 4" in the current category indicates that the number of reserved special symbol variations at the time of winning a prize corresponding to the change is 3 or less, and "4" means at the time of a prize corresponding to the variation. Indicates the condition where the number of reserved special symbol variations was 4.

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 265, information of fluctuation patterns of each special lottery result (fall type including the suspension state) is stored in one fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern corresponding to the winning category corresponding to the winning and the number of reserved special symbol variations at the time of the winning according to the distribution of the variation pattern table.

  In addition, "+ pseudo | simulation 1" and "+ pseudo | simulation 2" described in the production | presentation outline column show that two series of pseudo | simulation continuous production and 3 series of pseudo | simulation continuous production are performed, respectively. In addition, the pseudo | simulation case effect mentioned above may be performed, for example, when the presentation outline is "not reach (normal fluctuation time)" etc. In addition, even if it is the fluctuation pattern where “+ pseudo 1” is executed, the pseudo cast effect may be executed which suggests the occurrence of the third series of pseudo run in “+ pseudo 2”.

  The fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be defined in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. Also, in the following example, the jackpot probability (the jackpot probability in the low probability state) by the special lottery at the time of non-activation of the definite state is assumed to be 1/200, and the probability change ratio is 1 / It shall be 2.

[26-2. About the first index and the second index]
On the effect display device 1600, for example, during execution of the special symbol variation, a first meter for displaying the first index and a second meter for displaying the second index are displayed. The first meter and the second meter may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 even when the special symbol variation is not being executed, in which case “0” may be displayed as the numerical value of the meter, The numerical value displayed at the end of the previous change may be displayed. The first indicator and the second indicator indicate, for example, the big hit expectation of the special symbol change under execution (in principle, the larger the value is, the higher the big hit expectation is, the higher the hit probability) It can be promoted. Each of the first index and the second index consists of a plurality of stages, and the number of stages that can be taken by the first index is larger than the number of stages that can be taken by the second index.

  In the example described below, when the second indicator reaches a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 or more), a predetermined effect with a high probability of a big hit (for example, SP reach or movie reach (effect display device 1600) It is determined that the occurrence of a big hit expected reach (a high reach achievement)) in which a predetermined movie flows above. In addition, the second indicator does not exceed the predetermined value until the predetermined effect is started. That is, in the state where the second indicator is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the second indicator also indicates the occurrence expectation of the predetermined effect. In addition, when the second indicator is above the predetermined value, the second indicator only suggests the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation, that is, the jackpot expectation in the predetermined effect. Specific details will be described later.

  In addition, for example, when the first index and the second index become predetermined values (for example, 777), the special lottery result in the change may be determined as a big hit decision or a probability variation big hit decision. In addition, it is desirable that the distribution in which the predetermined value is displayed is extremely small (for example, the lowest distribution value in the stage existing as the distribution value).

  Although this chapter describes an example in which the indicators displayed on the first meter and the second meter show the jackpot expectation in the on-going fluctuation, it may indicate the expectation on any pending fluctuation. That is, an effect in which the indices of the first meter and the second meter change may be implemented as a pre-reading effect.

[26-3. How to determine the first index value]
FIG. 266 and FIG. 267 are examples of the first index determination table. Specifically, an example of the first index determination table is divided into two and described in FIG. 266 and FIG. 267. FIG. 266 is an example of the left half of the first index determination table, and FIG. 267 is the first index It is an example of the right half of the decision table.

  The first index determination table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The first index determination table stores, for example, an identifier of a fluctuation pattern, an outline of the effect of the fluctuation pattern, and distribution of the final numerical value of the first index displayed on the first meter in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a specifies the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU 1310 a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the first index determination table to determine the final numerical value of the first index displayed on the first meter in the fluctuation according to the distribution corresponding to the identified fluctuation.

  In the example of FIGS. 266 and 267, the final numerical value of the first index is a value of 25 levels (0, 100, 200, 333, 500, 700, 777, 900, 999, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, Take one of 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 6000, 7000, 7777, 8000, 9000, 9995, 9998, 9999).

  The first index displayed on the first meter in the effect display device 1600 in the special symbol variation is gradually promoted toward the selected final value at the promotion timing predetermined for each fluctuation pattern.

  At each promotion timing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the first promoted lottery table shown in FIG. 268, carries out the promoted lottery, and promotes the value of the first index displayed on the first meter. The value of the first indicator of the first meter immediately before the start of fluctuation is assumed to be "0" which is the lowest value.

  FIG. 268 is an example of a first promoted lottery table. The first promoted lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The first promotion lottery table stores promotion patterns and sorting of each promotion pattern. For example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a selects “not promoted” as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a does not promote the value of the first index of the first meter at the promotion timing.

  For example, when “MAX” is selected as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a promotes the value of the first index of the first meter to the selected final value at the promotion timing.

  For example, in the case of selecting “one-step promotion” as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a promotes the value of the first index of the first meter by one step at the promotion timing. Note that “progress in N stages” (N is a natural number) means that N stages are promoted in the final numerical value group of the first index that can be taken by the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation.

  Specifically, for example, when the variation pattern 2 whose production outline is “no reach (normal variation time)” is selected, the final numerical value group that can be taken in the variation pattern 2 is “0”, “100”, It is assumed that "200", "500", and "700" are selected, and "700" is selected as the final value. If the value of the first index immediately before the start of fluctuation is “0” and the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 a selects “three-level promotion” as the promotion pattern at the start of fluctuation, which is an example of promotion timing, in this state: Promote the value of the first indicator displayed on the first meter to "500", which is a value three steps above "0" in the final value group.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects “N step promotion” in a state where the first index is exceeded the final value selected by N steps, for example, the first at the promotion timing Promote the value of the meter's first indicator to the selected final value. Also, when the promotion timing is reached with the first index promoted to the final value already selected, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 does not execute the promotion lottery, and the distribution exists only in the “do not promote”. Conduct a promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table, or forcibly change the promotion lottery result to "do not promote". Thereby, it is possible to make the first index displayed on the first meter not exceed the final value.

  In addition, when the first index becomes a big hit finalized number ("333", "777", "7777", etc.), the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 performs the promotion lottery at the subsequent promotion timing regardless of the final value. It is not necessary to carry out the promotion lottery using the first promoted lottery table in which the distribution does not have to be carried out or the distribution exists only in the case of “do not be promoted”. If the first index of the first meter is changed from the big hit finalized value to a value where the big hit is not finalized, the player may be confused, which is to be avoided.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may forcibly promote the value of the first index to the selected final value at the final promotion timing in the variation. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table in which the distribution exists only for “promotion to MAX” at the last promotion timing in the variation, or You can force the selected promotion pattern to be "up to MAX" promotion.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 268, a plurality of types of first promoted lottery tables are illustrated, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may, for example, change the first of the different types according to the variation pattern, the selected final numerical value, or the promotion timing. Conduct a promotion lottery using the promotion lottery table.

  Specifically, for example, in a state where the final value with a low hit probability is selected, if the first index reaches the final value at the early promotion timing, the promotion is not performed at the subsequent promotion timing, so the game A person may guess at an early stage that the displayed low hit expectation value is the final value, and the sense of expectation may be lowered. On the other hand, the player is promoted at each promotion timing when a situation where a value with a low jackpot expectation is displayed until just before the last promotion timing is frequent though the final value with the high hit expectation is selected. They may not be interested in the rendition, but may only focus on the final promotion timing.

  In order to suppress the occurrence of such a situation, as described below, a promotion lottery is performed using different first promotion lottery tables. For example, the first promotion including a promotion pattern (eg, four-step promotion, five-step promotion, etc.) with a large number of stages to be promoted, as the variation pattern having the larger number of elements in the final numerical value group and the higher the final numerical value selected. It is good to carry out a promotion lottery using a lottery table and a first promotion lottery table in which the number of stages of promotion is high and distribution of promotion patterns is large. Also, for example, the higher the number of promotion timings, or the lower the selected final value, the higher the number of stages of promotion (for example, four stages, five stages, etc.) It is good to carry out a promotion lottery using a promotion lottery table or a first promotion lottery table in which the number of stages of promotion is small and the distribution of promotion patterns is large. Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may perform the promotion lottery using only one first promotion lottery table.

  Hereinafter, an example of promotion timing in each variation pattern will be described. In the following description of the promotion timing example, the arriving timing is described in the order of earlier. Also, hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also simply referred to as a "symbol". In the presentation outline based on each variation pattern described below, at the final promotion timing, a promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (B) is performed.

(1) When the outline of the presentation is “shortened fluctuation” (a) Only at the start of fluctuation. Accordingly, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the final numerical value of the first index at the start of the change.

(2) When the presentation outline is "not reach (normal fluctuation time)" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, and (d) Right symbol stop . In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing in (a) to (c), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (A) is referred to.

(3) When the presentation outline is "not reach + pseudo 1" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e The promotion lottery when the pseudo run symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, (f) during the second symbol all symbol high speed fluctuation, (g) left symbol stop, and (h) right symbol stop. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (a) to (g), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (A) is referred to.

(4) When the production outline is "Normal reach" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e) At reach telop And (f) when the reach symbol and the same symbol have passed. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing in (a) to (e), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(5) When the production outline is "normal reach + pseudo 1" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e) (F) During the second symbol stop, (g) When the left symbol is stopped, (h) when the right symbol is stopped, (i) when the reach telop is generated, and (j) When the reach symbol and the same symbol have passed. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (a) to (i), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(6) When the production outline is "the first half of SP reach" (a) Promotional lottery at the start of fluctuation (b) All symbols during high speed fluctuation, (c) Left symbol stop, (d) Right symbol stop, (e) When reach telop occurs, (f) when the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (g) when the middle symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation and becomes white background, (h) when displaying the title of the barbell reach, and (i) Just before the fall of Barberreach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (a) to (h), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(7) When the presentation outline is “SP reach first half + pseudo 1” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e) ) When the pseudo run symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second symbol all symbol high speed fluctuation, (g) left symbol stop, (h) right symbol stop, (i) reach telop generation, (j) ) Reach symbol When the same symbol passes, (k) middle symbol becomes high speed fluctuation and becomes white background, (l) at the time of barbell reach title display, and (m) just before the hit branch of barbell reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (l), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (D) is referred to.

(8) When the production outline is "the first half of SP reach first half" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e) Reach When the telop occurs, (f) when the reach symbol and the same symbol pass, (g) when the middle symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation and becomes a white background, (h) when the barbell reach title is displayed, (i) the barbell reach (J) the movable decoration (in the case of the barbell reach, the movable decoration on the back, the movable decoration on the back, the movable decoration on the upper left, the movable decoration on the lower left, the movable decoration on the lower right, and the rear) Lower right movable decoration body), (k) at the time of the title display of the second half start, and (l) just before the falling of the second half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (a) to (k), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (E) is referred to.

(9) When the presentation outline is "SP reach first half second half + pseudo 1" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (D) e) When the pseudo run symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second symbol all symbol high speed fluctuation, (g) at the left symbol stop, (h) at the right symbol stop, (i) at the reach telop generation, j) Reach symbol When the same symbol passes, (k) middle symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation and becomes white background, (l) barbell reach title display, (m) just before the falling edge of barbell reach, (N) At the time of the movable decoration body union, (o) at the time of the title indication of the second half start, and (p) just before the falling of the second half of the Barber reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing in (a) to (o), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (E) is referred to.

(10) When the presentation summary is "SP reach first half second half + pseudo 2" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high-speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (D) e) When the pseudo run symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, (f) during the second time all symbol high speed fluctuation, (g) at the left symbol stop, (h) at the right symbol stop, (i) the pseudo run symbol in the middle symbol (J) All symbols in high speed fluctuation during the third time, (k) When left symbol stopped, (l) When right symbol stopped, (m) when reach telop is generated, (n) Reach symbol and same symbol When it passes, (o) when the middle pattern becomes high-speed fluctuation and becomes a white background, (p) when displaying the title of the barbell reach, (q) just before the main branch of the barbell reach, (r) the movable decoration body combination At the time, (s) at the time of the title display of the second half start, and (t) just before the falling branch of the second half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (s), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (F) is referred to.

(11) When the presentation outline is "Movie reach" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high-speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e) Reach telop generation When (f) reach symbol and the same symbol passed, (g) when the middle symbol becomes high-speed variation and white background, (h) when the movie reach title is displayed, (i) the movie reach title Every 5 seconds from the display (for example, 5 times), and (j) just before the main branch of movie reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing in (a) to (i), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (G) is referred to.

(12) When the presentation outline is "movie reach + pseudo 1" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high-speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e) When the pseudo run symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second full symbol high-speed fluctuation, (g) when the left symbol stops, (h) when the right symbol stops, (i) when the reach telop occurs, (j) When the reach pattern and the same pattern pass, (k) When the middle pattern changes rapidly and becomes a white background, (l) When the movie reach title is displayed, (m) 5 seconds have passed from the movie reach title display Every, and (n) before the critical branch of the movie reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (m), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (H) is referred to.

(13) When the presentation outline is "movie reach + pseudo 2" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high speed fluctuation, (c) At left symbol stop, (d) At right symbol stop, (e) When the pseudo run symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, (f) during the second time all symbol high speed fluctuation, (g) at the left symbol stop, (h) at the right symbol stop, (i) the pseudo run symbol stops in the middle symbol When (j) during the third time all symbol high speed fluctuation, (k) left symbol stop, (l) right symbol stop, (m) reach telop generation, (n) reach symbol and the same symbol passed When (o) the middle pattern becomes high-speed fluctuation and becomes white background, (p) when the title of the movie reach is displayed, (q) every 5 seconds after the title display of the movie reach, and (r) the movie reach Before the fall of the branch. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing in (a) to (q), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (H) is referred to.

  In addition, in the example of the promotion timing mentioned above, there is also one defined by the period (ie, when the promotion timing is not determined uniquely) such as “during all symbol high speed change”, but in such an example The timing may be any timing in the period. That is, when the promotion timing is "all symbols at high speed fluctuation", any timing at which all the symbols are fluctuated at high speed may be the promotion timing.

  However, for example, as in the case of "(b) All symbols high-speed variation" in the production summary "Movie reach + pseudo 1", and "(b) All symbols high-speed variation" in the movie summary "Movie reach + pseudo 2". It is desirable that the timings coincide with each other for the promotion timings whose names are common. Temporarily, at promotion timing where the names are common, if the timings do not match (for example, "(b) All symbols high-speed variation in" the movie summary + "movie reach + pseudo 1") is 1 from the start of all symbols high-speed variation After 2 seconds, “(b) All symbols in high speed variation” in the presentation summary “Movie reach + pseudo 2” is 2 seconds after the start of all symbols high speed variation etc.), the player is affected by the difference in the promotion timing. The ability to predict fluctuation patterns diminishes interest in the production. In order to avoid the occurrence of such a situation, it is desirable that the timings coincide for the promotion timings with common names. The same applies to the promotion timing of the second index described later.

[26-4. How to determine the second index value]
FIG. 269 is an example of a second index determination table. The second index determination table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The second indicator determination table stores, for example, an identifier of a variation pattern, an outline of presentation of the variation pattern, and distribution of a final numerical value of a second indicator displayed on the second meter in the variation of the variation pattern.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a specifies the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU 1310 a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the second index determination table to determine the final numerical value of the second index displayed on the second meter in the fluctuation according to the distribution corresponding to the specified fluctuation.

  In the example of FIG. 269, the final numerical value of the second index takes one of 12 levels (0, 18, 35, 52, 98, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500, 777, 999). . The second indicator displayed on the second meter in the effect display device 1600 in the special symbol variation can be promoted stepwise toward the selected final value at the promotion timing predetermined for each variation pattern. In the example of FIG. 269, when the numerical value of the second index displayed in the second meter exceeds 100, (final numerical value of the second index) / 10 (%) becomes approximately equal to the jackpot expectation Thus, the distribution of the final numerical value of the second index value in each variation pattern is defined. Specifically, for example, when the numerical value of the second indicator displayed on the second meter is "200", the big hit expectation is "20.02%", and for the second indicator displayed on the second meter, When the numerical value is “500”, the jackpot expectation is “50.90%”, etc., the numerical value is distributed for each presentation outline, and the same is true for other numerical values exceeding 100.

  In addition, in the variation pattern in which neither SP reach nor movie reach is included in the presentation summary, there is no distribution in which the final value exceeds 100. As a result, as described above, when the second index of the second meter reaches 100, occurrence of SP reach or movie reach with high expectation of big hit is determined, and the player can get a feeling of exhilaration at that time it can.

  In the variation pattern in which the final value of the second index can take a value greater than 100 (that is, the variation pattern including SP reach or movie reach in the presentation summary), there is a distribution in which the final value is “100”. Do. As described later, before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach in the variation where SP reach or movie reach occurs, the value of the second indicator “100” at which the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach is determined is displayed on the second meter It is to make it possible.

  The CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the second promoted lottery table shown in FIG. 270 at each promoted timing, performs the promoted lottery, and promotes the value of the second indicator displayed on the second meter at the corresponding timing. . Note that the value of the second indicator of the second meter immediately before the start of fluctuation is assumed to be "0" which is the lowest value.

  FIG. 270 (A) is an example of a second promotion lottery table used at a promotion timing other than during SP reach and during movie reach, and FIG. 270 (B) is at the promotion timing during SP reach and movie reach. It is an example of the 2nd promotion lottery table used. That is, in the variation pattern including neither SP reach nor movie reach in the presentation outline, only the second promoted lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) is used.

  The second promoted lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The second promoted lottery table stores the promoted pattern and the distribution of each promoted pattern. The meaning of "N-stage promotion" in the second promotion lottery table is the same as the meaning of "N-stage promotion" in the first promotion lottery table.

First, the second promoted lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) will be described. The second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) includes a promotion pattern of “promotion to smaller one of 100 or MAX”. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example,
When “Promotion to smaller one of or MAX” is selected, the value of the second indicator of the second meter at the promotion timing is the smaller of the selected final value of the second indicator and “100”. (If the final numerical value is "100", promote it to "100"). Thereby, in the variation pattern in which SP reach or movie reach occurs, the second indicator displayed on the second meter can be made to not exceed 100 before occurrence of SP reach or movie reach, and SP In a variation pattern in which neither reach nor movie reach occurs, the second indicator displayed on the second meter can be prevented from reaching 100.

  Note that the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a exceeds the selected final numerical value when the second index is promoted to N levels, or when the second index is promoted to N levels, 100 before SP reach or movie reach occurs. If “N level promotion” is selected in a state where it exceeds, for example, at the promotion timing, the value of the second indicator of the second meter is promoted to the smaller one of the selected final numerical value and 100. .

  In addition, if the second index has been promoted to the final value selected or the second index has been promoted to 100 before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach, for example, peripheral control The CPU of the IC 1510 performs the promotion lottery using the second promotion lottery table in which the distribution is present only in “do not promote”, or forcibly changes the lottery result to “do not promote”. In addition, in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern including SP reach or movie reach, the peripheral control IC 1510 a sets the value of the second meter to 100 before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach when the selected final value exceeds 100. It may be promoted to a larger value (and below the final value).

  In addition, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a performs the last promotion timing in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern including neither SP reach nor movie reach, and the execution of SP reach or movie reach in the fluctuation pattern fluctuation including SP reach or movie reach. At the final promotion timing, the value of the second index may be forcibly promoted to the selected final numerical value or the smaller one of 100.

  Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a is promoted using the second promoted lottery table in which the distribution exists only at “promoted to a smaller one of 100 or MAX” at the last promoted timing in the fluctuation. The lottery may be implemented, or the promotion lottery result may be forcibly changed to "progress to the smaller of 100 or MAX".

  Subsequently, the second promoted lottery table of FIG. 270 (B) will be described. As described above, in the example of FIG. 270 (B) used at the promotion timing during SP reach and movie reach, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (B) is “one-step promotion” and Only "do not promote" is included. That is, compared to before the start of the SP reach or the movie reach, the distribution of the promotion pattern having a smaller number of stages that can be promoted is increased.

  In addition, at the final promotion timing of the change during which SP reach or movie reach is performed, the value of the second index may be forcibly promoted to the selected final value. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a promotion lottery using a second promotion lottery table in which a distribution exists only for “promotion to MAX” at the last promotion timing in the variation, or You can change the promotion lottery result to "promotion to MAX" by force.

  Also, if the second indicator is a big hit finalized number ("777"), the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510 does not carry out the promotion lottery at the subsequent promotion timing regardless of the final number, only to "do not promote" It is desirable to conduct a promotion lottery using the second promotion lottery table in which the distribution exists, or to forcibly change the promotion lottery result to "do not promote".

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may carry out the promotion lottery of the second index using a second promotion lottery table other than that described with reference to FIG. Specifically, similarly to the first promoted lottery table, for example, a second promoted lottery table may be present which differs every fluctuation pattern, every selected final numerical value, or every promotion timing.

  In addition, the promotion timing of the 2nd index in the change pattern which does not include either "SP reach" or "movie reach" in the presentation outline is the same as the promotion timing of the 1st index, for example. However, as described above, at the promotion timing, the second promotion lottery table to be referred to may differ depending on the promotion timing. For example, in these variation patterns, in the promotion lottery other than the final promotion timing, for example, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) is referred to, and in the final promotion timing promotion lottery, for example, FIG. ) Is referred to).

  Further, the promotion timing of the second indicator up to the start of the SP reach in the fluctuation pattern including “SP reach” in the presentation outline is, for example, the same as the promotion timing of the first indicator. In these variation patterns, for example, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) is referred to at the promotion timing other than the last among the promotion timings before the SP reach start, and the promotion of the last promotion timing before the SP reach start In the lottery, for example, the second promoted lottery table in FIG. 270 (C) is referred to.

  Similarly, the promotion timing of the second indicator before the start of the movie reach in the fluctuation pattern including “movie reach” in the presentation outline is, for example, the same as the promotion timing of the first indicator. In these variation patterns, for example, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) is referred to at promotion timings other than the last among promotion timings before the start of movie reach, and promotion of the last promotion timing before the start of movie reach In the lottery, for example, the second promoted lottery table in FIG. 270 (C) is referred to.

  Hereinafter, an example of the promotion timing after the SP reach start in the fluctuation pattern including “SP reach” in the presentation summary and the promotion timing after the start of movie reach in the fluctuation pattern including “movie reach” in the presentation outline will be described.

(1) When the presentation outline includes the “first half of SP reach” and does not include the “second half” (ie, in the case of SP reach, only the first half stage is implemented)
(A) At the time of the title display of the barbell reach, and (b) just before the ramification of the barber reach. In elevation lottery promotion timing (a), for example, the second elevation lottery table of FIG. 2 70 (B) is referred to, in the elevation drawing elevation timing (b), for example, first in FIG. 2 70 (D) The second promotion lottery table is referred to.

(2) When the presentation outline includes "the first half of the SP reach first half" (a) When displaying the title of the barbell reach (b) Just before the main branch of the barbell reach (c) When the movable decoration is combined (d) At the time of the title display of the start of the second half, and (e) just before the falling branch of the second half of the barbell reach. (A) in elevation timing elevation drawing of ~ (d), for example, is referred to a second elevation lottery table of FIG. 2 70 (E), in the promotion lottery promotion timing (e), for example, FIG 70 ( The second promotion lottery table of D) is referred to.

(3) When the presentation outline includes "Movie reach" (a) When the movie reach title is displayed, (b) 7 seconds, 14 seconds, 22 seconds, and 28 seconds after the movie reach title display c) Just before the main branch of Movie Reach. (A) in elevation timing elevation drawing of ~ (b), for example, it is referred to a second elevation lottery table of FIG. 2 70 (F), in the promotion lottery promotion timing (c), for example, FIG 70 ( The second promotion lottery table of D) is referred to.

  In the above example, the promotion timing of the first indicator and the promotion timing of the second indicator completely coincide (a variation pattern including neither SP reach nor movie reach), and the promotion timing of the first indicator and the second indicator Although an example (a variation pattern including either SP reach or movie reach) in which a part of the promotion timings of the two groups coincide is described, the promotion timing of the first indicator and the promotion timing of the second indicator are completely different. May be

  Specifically, for example, there may be a variation pattern in which all promotion timings of the first index do not coincide with any of the promotion timings of the second index. Also, do not promote the second indicator at the promotion timing won in the promotion pattern of one step promotion or more of the first indicator, or do not promote the first indicator at the promotion timing won in the promotion pattern of one step promotion or more of the second indicator The timing at which the first indicator is promoted may be completely different from the timing at which the second indicator is promoted.

Note that referring to the examples in FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, regarding the first index, the distribution of high final values is not small even in the variation pattern frequently selected at the time of out-of-line such as “Normal reach” For example, the distribution of 9999 is 21). On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 268, for the second index, the distribution of the high final value in the fluctuation pattern at the time of outlier is extremely small (for example, the outlier fluctuation pattern for which 999 allocations exist is only “Movie reach + pseudo 2” Yes, the distribution is 1). That is, compared with the second indicator, the first indicator is more likely to select the final value of the upper stage even in outliers (the final stage of the first indicator is indicated but the final stage of the second indicator is not indicated) The latter is considered to have a much higher expectation when it is compared with the time when the final stage of the second indicator is shown but the final stage of the first indicator is not shown. Therefore, the big hit expectation is higher in the case where the second indicator of the upper level is compared compared to the case where the first index of the upper level is displayed.
If “999” is displayed in the second indicator, the jackpot expectation is “99.34%”, and since it is a violent ats effect that almost hits the jackpot, the percentage displayed as “999” is extremely low. , "999" in the first index is made to appear frequently. This is because the player wants to taste the event that “999” is displayed on the meter. For example, it is more preferable to add an effect such that the numerical value displayed on the first index moves to the second index as it is.

[26-3. Summary of Barbell Reach production]
Hereinafter, the barbell reach effect which is an example of the effect of promoting the first index and the second index displayed on the effect display device 1600 will be described. 271 to 274 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the outline of the barbell reach effect. Barbell reach production is an example of SP reach. 271 (A) to 274 (T) all illustrate the promotion timing of the first index and the second index.

  Hereinafter, an example will be described in which the jackpot fluctuation pattern (probability variation) whose presentation outline is “the first half of SP reach first half + pseudo 2” is selected. In addition, it is assumed that "9999" is selected as the final numerical value of the first index, and "999" is selected as the final numerical value of the second index.

  On the effect display device 1600, a first meter 1641 for displaying a first index and a second meter 1642 for displaying a second index are displayed. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the color in the second meter 1642 changes in accordance with the value of the second meter 1642. Specifically, for example, when the value of the second meter 1642 is “0” and “18”, white is “35”, blue is “52”, yellow is “98”, and green is “98”. "Red" for "100", "150", "200", and "300", gold for "500" and "999", rainbow for "777" (big hit confirmed), and so on It is assumed that the color in the meter 1642 changes.

  The reason for the fact that the color of only the second meter 1642 changes according to the numerical value is that, as described above, the second indicator of the upper stage compared to when the first indicator of the upper stage is displayed It is because the big hit expectation is higher in the compared case. However, the color of the first meter 1641 may be changed according to the numerical value.

  Just before the start of the change of the special symbol, the display of the first meter 1641 and the second meter 1642 both show "0" which is the lowest numerical value.

  In FIG. 271 (A), at the start of the change of the special symbol, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the change of the decoration symbol on the effect display device 1600, and executes the promotion lottery of the first index and the second index. In FIG. 271 (A), the “2-step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first indicator, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “200”, and the “not promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator The display of the second meter 1642 remains "0".

  In FIG. 271 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes all the symbols to be changed at high speed in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (B), when all symbols are changing at high speed (the timing may be arbitrary as long as all symbols are changing at high speed. The same applies to the following description). The "2-step promotion" is selected in the promotion drawing, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "500", the "1 step promotion" is selected in the promotion drawing of the second indicator, and the display of the second meter 1642 is " It is promoted to 18 ".

  In FIG. 271 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a causes the effect display device 1600 to stop the left symbol during high speed fluctuation. In FIG. 271 (C), “do not promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 remains “500”, and “do not promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator The display of the second meter 1642 remains "18".

  In FIG. 271 (D), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510 a causes the effect display device 1600 to stop the right symbol during high speed fluctuation. In FIG. 271 (D), in the promotion lottery of the first indicator, “three-step promotion” is selected, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “900”, and in the promotion lottery of the second indicator, “one-step promotion” The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “35” when selected, and the color of the second meter 1642 changes to blue.

  27E, in the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the middle symbol to stop the pseudo run symbol ("Continue! X 2"). In FIG. 271 (E), in the promotion lottery of the first indicator, “one-step promotion” is selected, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “999”, and in the promotion lottery of the second indicator, “do not promote” is selected. The display of the second meter 1642 remains "35".

  In FIG. 271 (F), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a causes all the decoration symbols to change at high speed again in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (F), “do not promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, and the display of the first meter 1641 remains “999”, and “do not promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator The display of the second meter 1642 remains "35".

  In FIG. 272 (G), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to stop the left symbol during high speed fluctuation. In FIG. 272 (G), “1 step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “1500”, and “1 step promotion” in the promotion lottery of the second indicator The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "52" when selected, and the color of the second meter 1642 changes to yellow.

  In FIG. 272 (H), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to stop the right symbol during high speed fluctuation. In FIG. 272 (H), the “2-step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first indicator, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “2500”, and the “not promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator The display of the second meter 1642 remains "52".

  In FIG. 272I, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the medium display to stop the pseudo run symbol (“Continued! × 3”) in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (I), “Don't promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first indicator, the display of the first meter 1641 remains “2500”, and “Promotion of one step” is in the promotion lottery of the second indicator. The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "98" when selected, and the color of the second meter 1642 changes to green.

  In FIG. 272 (J), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a causes all the decoration symbols to change at high speed again in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (J), the “one-step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “3000”, and “not promoted” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator The display of the second meter 1642 remains "98".

  In FIG. 272 (K), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to stop the left symbol during high speed fluctuation. In FIG. 272 (K), “two-step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first indicator, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “4000”, and “one-step promotion” is promoted in the promotion lottery of the second indicator. The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "100" when selected, and the color of the second meter 1642 changes to red.

  At this time, since the display of the second meter 1642 has become “100”, it is possible to make the player recognize that the occurrence of the SP reach or the movie reach has been decided. Further, as described above, thereafter, the promotion of the numerical value of the second meter 1642 is not performed until the barbell reach effect which is the SP reach is started.

In FIG. 272 (L), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to stop the right symbol during high speed fluctuation in the reach state. In FIG. 272 ( L ), “Promot to MAX” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, and the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “9999”. At this time, since the first index displayed on the first meter 1641 has been promoted to the final value, no further promotion of the value of the first meter 1641 is performed in the fluctuation.

  In FIG. 273 (M), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510 a causes the effect display device 1600 to display reach telop indicating that the reach has occurred.

  273 (N), in the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a varies the middle symbol at a low speed, and passes the same middle symbol as the reach symbol between the middle symbol and the right symbol.

  In FIG. 273 (O), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the middle symbol to change at high speed again in the effect display device 1600, and further displays other than the first meter 1641, the second meter 1642 and the decorative symbol, for example. It is deleted and the background of the effect display device 1600 is displayed white. The indication indicates that further reach effect has occurred.

  In FIG. 273 (P), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510 a causes the effect display device 1600 to display a title indicating that the barbell reach effect which is an SP reach has started. Since the barbell reach effect, which is the SP reach, is started, the elevation lottery of the numerical value of the second indicator displayed on the second meter 1642 is started again. In FIG. 273 (P), “do not promote” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator, and the display of the second meter 1642 remains “100”.

  In FIG. 273 (Q), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs a falling branch effect of barbell reach in the effect display device 1600. In the final branch effect, the special lottery result is notified (big hit or missed), or the development to the second half effect of the barbell reach effect having a higher degree of expected big hit is notified. In FIG. 273 (Q), in the promotion lottery of the second indicator, “one-step promotion” is selected and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “150”.

  In FIG. 273 (R), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs a falling branch effect of barbell reach in the effect display device 1600. In the final branch effect, the special lottery result is notified (big hit or missed), or the development to the second half effect of the barbell reach effect having a higher degree of expected big hit is notified. In FIG. 273 (Q), “promoted by one step” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index immediately before the notification in the main branch effect, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “200”. Note that although the movable decorative body appears on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 273 (R), it is shown that the second half of the barbell reach effect is developed, but the execution timing of the operation of the movable decorative body May be before or after showing a drop in the first half of the barbell reach production.

  In FIG. 274 (S), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a includes a back movable decoration 3110, a back movable decoration 3210, a back left upper movable decoration 3310, a back left lower movable decoration 3320, a back upper right movable decoration 3410, and After the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is moved to the first combined position, it is returned to the original position. The said operation | movement of these movable decoration bodies is an example of the production | presentation which alert | reports the development to the latter half production of barbell reach production. In FIG. 274 (S), “two-step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator, the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “500”, and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to gold. .

  In FIG. 274 (T), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a performs a falling branch effect of barbell reach in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 274 (T), immediately before the notification in the final branch effect, “two-step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “999”. Therefore, at this time, the player can be made to recognize that the special lottery result in the change is a big hit (only the movie reach is displayed as “999” in the second meter 1642 and does not become a big hit, Because the reach that has been revealed is the barbell reach equivalent to the SP reach).

  In FIG. 274 (U), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a stops the same middle symbol as the reach symbol as a hit notification effect in the hit branch effect of the barbell reach in the effect display device 1600, and the special lottery result in the variation is a big hit To notify that the change is finished.

  It should be noted that in a promotion lottery at a certain promotion timing, it is decided that the numerical value of the second meter 1642 is promoted to a value with a high probability of big hit or a big hit is decided (for example 999 etc.), and immediately before the promotion timing. When the value of the first meter 1641 is the same as the value after promotion of the second meter 1642, the peripheral control IC 1510 a causes the value of the first meter 1641 to move to the second meter 1642 in the effect display device 1600. Of the second meter 1642 may be promoted.

  As a result, the player can enjoy the effect by speculating that there is a relationship between the first index indicated by the first meter 1641 and the second index indicated by the second meter 1642. In particular, in the above-mentioned example, the jackpot expectation degree when the second indicator is promoted to the upper stage value is lower than the jackpot expectation degree when the first indicator is promoted to the upper stage, but such an effect is executed As a result, the player can also have an expectation for the display of the first meter 1641. In the example described above, even if “999” is displayed in the first index, although the expectation for the big hit is not so high, if “999” shown in the first index moves to the second index, It is because it becomes intense heat production.

  The CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a may execute a predetermined effect when promoting the numerical value of the first meter 1641. Specifically, for example, when promoting the value of the first meter 1641, the peripheral control IC 1510 a rapidly changes the numerical value in the first meter 1641, and according to the allocation indicated by the effect color selection table described later, A white or red effect (for example, a flame-like effect, an aura-like effect, etc.) is displayed on the periphery, and then the numerical value selected at the promotion timing is displayed.

  FIG. 275 is an example of an effect color selection table in the first index. The effect color selection table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The effect color selection table stores the distribution of each of the effect colors (white and red) in each of the special lottery results (big hit or miss) of the variation.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a refers to, for example, the effect color selection table shown in FIG. 275 (A) when the second meter 1642 has not been promoted even before the promotion timing of the fluctuation. The peripheral control IC 1510 a refers to the effect color selection table of FIG. 275 (B), for example, when the second meter 1642 is promoted even once before the promotion timing of the fluctuation.

  In the example of FIG. 275, the special lottery result of the variation deviates more in the case where the second meter 1642 has not been promoted once before the promotion timing of the variation. When it is, red is easy to be selected. That is, when the meter display of the second indicator is promoted even once (the stage is up), the effect color which is considered to have high expectation when the meter display of the first indicator is displayed in stages By making it easy to reveal the red color in the example of FIG. 275, the player can be given a sense of excitement.

[27. Notice notice production]
[27-1.1 Notice board notice effect in fluctuation]
Hereinafter, notice board notice effects which are an example of the suggestion effects of the special lottery result will be described. FIG. 276 and FIG. 277 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the outline of the notice board notice effect. For example, in the variation corresponding to the variation pattern for which the reach is executed, notice board notice effects using two bulletin boards are executed at a predetermined rate.

  For example, in the normal gaming state other than the big hit gaming state, and in a state where a special effect such as SP reach is not executed, the first display 1610 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The first bulletin board 1610 is displayed, for example, in the upper region of the effect display device 1600. The first bulletin board 1610 displays, for example, the display of the model explanation of the pachinko machine 1, the display for prompting the operation of various operation units such as the pressing operation unit 303, and the display for suggesting the development and continuation to the pseudo-series effect. The display which suggests the contents of the presentation which develop in the change concerned or the look-ahead subject change, and the presentation etc. as a mere bustling with a low correlation with a big hit expectation are displayed.

  In addition, the effect display device 1600 includes the hold display area 1620 located in the lower left area in the effect display device 1600, and the hold display area 1620 displays, for example, the number of pending changes in the above state, and the hold The pedestal of the display is displayed. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the number of filled circles indicates the number of pending changes, and the number of open circles indicates how many more changes can be reserved. That is, in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, one variation is pending, and three more variations can be pending.

  First, in FIG. 276 (A), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a starts the variation of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays, for example, “Anything may be found in the first bulletin board 1610 displayed at the top of the effect display device 1600 simultaneously with the start of variation of the decorative symbol or And others, and a bustling message with a low correlation with the jackpot expectation.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays on the first bulletin board 1610 a message indicating that the big hit expectation in the fluctuation such as “chance!” Is high. In FIG. 276 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays, for example, the first bulletin board 1610 to indicate execution of a pseudo-series effect such as “Continued!”, And then re-apply the decorative symbol in the pseudo-series effect. After the change, the process may move to FIG. 276 (D).

  Also, if there is a pending change, in FIG. 276 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, the first bulletin board 1610 with a display indicating the execution of a pending change effect such as “change!” The on-hold change presentation may be executed, and in the variation corresponding to the on-hold, the presentation on the (D) and subsequent stages may be executed. In addition, only one of FIG. 276 (B) and FIG. 276 (C) may be implemented about the display of the 1st bulletin board 1610, in addition to or instead of FIG. 276 (B) and 276 (C). Another display may be implemented.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a urges the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 to be described later, such as “See the lower bulletin board !! Display. Further, in FIG. 276 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays, for example, a mode in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates in the effect display device 1600 and suggests that the hold display area 1620 may move. To perform the effect.

  In (E) of FIG. 276, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a mode in which at least a part of the hold display area 1620 disappears from the effect display device 1600 by the hold display area 1620 moving downward in the effect display device 1600. Display of. That is, on the first bulletin board 1610, the display such as “look at the bulletin board below !!” moves the reserved display area 1620 (or decreases the area of the reserved display area 1620 in the effect display device 1600). This is also a suggested display, and when displaying “See the lower bulletin board !!” on the first bulletin board 1610, a predetermined display is selected among a plurality of types of displays, such as red characters and the background color of the bulletin board being red. If the effect is determined to be at least reach (or more than SP reach), the effect on the first bulletin board 1610 implies that a predetermined reach will occur in addition to the decrease in the area of the hold display area 1620. It is also an effect to do. The same applies to the other examples described later.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (F), only a part of the hold display area 1620 (for example, only an area where the number of holds can be recognized) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510 a may erase all of the hold display area 1620 from the effect display device 1600. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has, for example, a display capable of recognizing the number of reservations (for example, the number itself indicating the number of reservations, etc.) sufficiently smaller than the suspension display area 1620 and large enough for the player to recognize. It is desirable to display on the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 277 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to display the second bulletin board 1611, and the second bulletin board 1611 indicates that the big hit expectation such as “big chance !!” is high. Show the display. As in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the display in the second bulletin board 1611 suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the display in the first bulletin board 1610 (the second bulletin board 1611 itself is It is desirable that the big hit expectation is high by being expressed). Note that the area in which the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed is at least one of the areas before the hold display area 1620 is moved (that is, the area in which the hold display area 1620 was displayed in FIGS. 276 (A) to (D)). Overlap with the department.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 277 (H), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510 a causes the effect display device 1600 to display the decorative symbol in the reach state, and then performs the effect corresponding to the change pattern of the change.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays the first bulletin board 1610 and the second bulletin board 1611 when the SP reach is started, for example, when the SP reach is started, or when the SP reach is not performed, when the variation is ended. Erase In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a may perform, for example, the first bulletin board 1610 at a timing before the second bulletin board 1611 appears, a timing at which the second bulletin board 1611 appears, or a timing at which the second bulletin board 1611 performs the above display. You may erase the display inside.

  In the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the display in the first bulletin board 1610 and the display in the second bulletin board 1611 before reach development, but it is executed at another timing. You may For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes, for example, the display in the first bulletin board 1610 after the reach development, and immediately before the development to the reach with high expectation of big hit such as SP reach, the second bulletin board 1611 A display may be implemented to suggest development.

  In addition, in the bulletin board effect, it is desirable that the time in which the characters are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611 be longer than the time in which the characters are displayed on the first bulletin board 1610. In particular, as in the above-described example, the player is suggested that the content displayed in the second bulletin board 1611 indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than the content displayed in the first bulletin board 1610. The sense of expectation of can be sustained longer.

  Further, in the example of FIGS. 276 and 277, even after the characters are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, the characters are still displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, but the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 or the second bulletin board 1611 The display in the first bulletin board 1610 may be erased after the characters are displayed. As a result, the player's awareness can be directed to the second bulletin board 1611 that provides a display with a higher degree of expectation.

  Further, it is desirable that the number of types of content that can be displayed on the second bulletin board 1611 be larger than the number of types of content that can be displayed on the first bulletin board 1610. Since the first bulletin board 1610 has a longer time displayed on the effect display device 1600 as compared to the second bulletin board 1611, the first bulletin board 1610 can be used for various effects because the number of types of content that can be displayed is large.

  Also, for example, when a character etc. is displayed on the first bulletin board 1610 and when a character etc. is displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, the sound output from the speaker, the lamp to emit light, the color of the lamp, etc. May be different from one another. In particular, for example, when a high display indicating that the big hit expectation is high among the display that may be displayed only on the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, a dedicated sound is output from the speaker Alternatively, a dedicated lamp may emit light.

  In the example of FIG. 276, in the first bulletin board 1610, a display of an aspect in which the jackpot expectation level gradually develops as “Can you see?” And then “Chance!” Is displayed. In the second bulletin board 1611, such a stepwise development display may not be performed. In particular, in the case where only a display with a high hit probability is performed on the second bulletin board 1611, the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 itself is synonymous with the high hit probability and the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 It can give the player a sense of excitement.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a may cause the second bulletin board 1611 to appear and cause the second bulletin board 1611 to be displayed, without displaying on the first bulletin board 1610 a request for viewing the second bulletin board 1611. In addition, it is desirable that the appearance rate of such a pattern is set to be lower than the appearance rate in the case of displaying to prompt the user to see the second bulletin board 1611 on the first bulletin board 1610, and the jackpot expectation of the pattern It is desirable that the first bulletin board 1610 is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation when displaying a prompt to view the second bulletin board 1611.

  As a result, the player can feel a sense of surprise due to the sudden appearance of the second bulletin board 1611. In addition, for a player who knows the existence of the pattern, even if the first bulletin board 1610 does not have a display prompting the user to see the second bulletin board 1611, the expectation for the second bulletin board 1611 to appear In addition to maintaining the feeling, in this case, it is possible to obtain an uplifting feeling when the second bulletin board 1611 appears.

  In addition, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a makes the second bulletin board 1611 appear, and causes the second bulletin board 1611 to display a prompt to view the first bulletin board 1610, and then the first bulletin board 1610 makes a big hit such as "chance!" A display may be displayed indicating that the degree of expectation is high. In addition, it is desirable that the appearance rate of such a pattern is set to be lower than the appearance rate in the case of displaying to prompt the user to see the second bulletin board 1611 on the first bulletin board 1610, and the jackpot expectation of the pattern It is desirable that the first bulletin board 1610 is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation when displaying a prompt to view the second bulletin board 1611.

  As a result, it is possible to realize an effect different from the normal effect aspect that the second bulletin board 1611 appears after the characters are displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, and the player can feel a sense of surprise.

  FIG. 278 and FIG. 279 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the outline of the notice board notice effects. Differences from FIGS. 276 and 277 will be described. In the examples of FIGS. 278 and 279, the hold display area 1630 is displayed in the lower area of the effect display device 1600. While the hold display area 1620 described with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277 has a shape that covers only the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, the hold display area 1630 straddles the lower left area and the lower right area of the effect display device 1600. It is a shape.

  In the example of FIG. 278, the left part of the pending display area 1630 displays the number of pending changes, but the right part of the pending display area also displays the number of pending changes. It is also good. Specifically, for example, the left part of the suspension display area 1630 displays the number of pending fluctuations of the first special symbol, and the right part displays the number of pending fluctuations of the second special symbol. It may be done.

  278 (A), (B) and (C), the points other than the shape of the hold display area 1630 are the same as those in FIGS. 276 (A), (B) and (C), and therefore the description thereof is omitted. Do. Further, the display contents of the first bulletin board 1610 in FIG. 278 (D) and the subsequent figures are the same as the display contents of the first bulletin board 1610 in FIG.

  In FIG. 278 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a mode in which the right part of the hold display area 1630 vibrates in the effect display device 1600, and the right part of the hold display area 1630 may move. Perform a production that suggests something.

  In FIG. 278 (E), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a moves downward of the right portion of the hold display area 1630 in the effect display device 1600 so that at least a part of the right portion of the hold display area 1630 is the effect display device Display an aspect of disappearing from 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 278 (F), the right portion of the hold display area 1630 disappears from the effect display device 1600.

  In FIG. 279 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to display the second bulletin board 1611, and the second bulletin board 1611 displays a display indicating that the big hit expectation such as “big chance !!” is high. Do. In the area where the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed, the right part of the hold display area 1630 is displayed in the area before the right part of the hold display area 1630 moves (that is, the right part of the hold display area 1630 in FIGS. Overlap with at least part of the Subsequently, in FIG. 279 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a causes the effect display device 1600 to display the decorative symbol in the reach state.

  In FIGS. 278 and 279, the right part of the reserved display area 1630 moves and the second bulletin board 1611 appears, but for example, the left part displays a display indicating the number of pending changes of the first special symbol. If the right special part is configured to indicate the number of pending changes in the second special symbol, one of the right part and the left part where the number of pending changes is 0 moves Then, a second bulletin board 1611 may appear.

[27-2. Pre-reading effect using notice board notice effect]
FIG. 280 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of an outline of pre-reading effect using a bulletin board advance effect. First, in FIG. 280 (A), there is no change on hold, and the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 while the first change is being executed. A second change, which is a change corresponding to the winning, is a change of the prefetch target, and a notice board notice effect is executed as a prefetch effect.

  In FIG. 280 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays, for example, the first bulletin board 1610 shown in FIG. 276 (B) simultaneously with the winning or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning and during the execution of the first variation. The same display (display of a roaring message, a message of bustle with a low degree of correlation with the expectation of a big hit, etc.) is performed.

  In FIG. 280 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, on the first bulletin board 1610, a message indicating that the big hit expectation in the second change is high, for example, at the end of the first change which is the change in out of range.

  In FIG. 280 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays, for example, the same display as in FIG. 276 (D) on the first bulletin board 1610 at the start of the second change or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the second change. 2) a display to urge the player to pay attention to the bulletin board 1611). Further, in FIG. 279 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays, for example, a mode in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates in the effect display device 1600 as in FIG. 276 (D). Perform an effect that suggests that you may move. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a may display the first bulletin board 1610 prompting the player to focus on the second bulletin board 1611 in the first variation. Since the effects after FIG. 280 (D) are the same as the effects after FIG. 276 (E), for example, the description will be omitted.

[27-3. Notice notice effect using the operation unit]
Hereinafter, an example in which notice board notice effects are changed by operations of various operation units will be described. FIG. 281 is an explanatory view showing an example of the outline of notice board notice effect using the pressing operation unit 303. As shown in FIG. FIG. 281 (A) shows a state in which the first change is started and the second change which is the pre-reading target change is suspended.

  In FIG. 281A, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the first bulletin board 1610 to display a message urging the player to press the central pressing operation unit 303a at the start of the change or after the elapse of a predetermined time, The operation unit 303a is put in the operation valid state. As in the example of FIG. 281 (A), the display on the first bulletin board 1610 suggests that there is a possibility that some change may occur in the lower part of the effect display device 1600 when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. It is desirable that the display be

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, in FIG. 281 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, urging the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 and the operation valid Exit the state. If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 281A on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the first bulletin board The display of 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is ended, and after the end of the first fluctuation, the process shifts to FIG. 281 (D).

  Subsequently, in FIG. 281C, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the combination of the decorative symbols of which at least one is a different number, for example, in order to end the first fluctuation which is the outlier fluctuation. In addition, the display of the 1st bulletin board 1610 in FIG. 281 (B) is continued, for example.

  In FIG. 281 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a continues displaying to urge the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 in the first bulletin board 1610, as in FIG. 276 (D). At 1600, for example, a mode is displayed in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates, and an effect is suggested that suggests that the hold display area 1620 may move. The effects after FIG. 281 (D) are the same as the effects after FIG. 276 (E), for example.

  In FIG. 281, an example is described in which a notice of notice on a bulletin board using the operation unit is executed as pre-reading effect, but it may be executed as an effect in one change.

  FIG. 282 is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of a bulletin board notice garbled effect using the pressing operation unit 303. As shown in FIG. Although what is suggested in FIG. 282 is the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611, the second bulletin board 1611 does not appear. FIG. 282 (A) shows a state in which the first change is started and the second change which is the pre-reading target change is suspended. In FIG. 282 (A), the same effect as that in FIG. 281 (A) is executed.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, in FIG. 282 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has, for example, that the first bulletin board 1610 has a low hit probability such as “. Is displayed, and the operation valid state is ended. If the central pressing unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 282 on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates a first bulletin board The display of 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is ended, and after the end of the first change, the process shifts to FIG. 282 (D).

  Subsequently, in FIG. 282 (C), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510a ends the first change, which is, for example, a release change. In addition, the display of the first bulletin board 1610 in FIG. 282 (B) continues, for example, for a predetermined time from the display or until the end of the first fluctuation. Subsequently, in FIG. 282 (D), the second variation starts.

[27-4. Notice notice effect using multiple operations on the operation unit]
Hereinafter, an example in which a notice board notice effect is changed by a plurality of operations by various operation units will be described. FIG. 283 and FIG. 284 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an outline of notice board notice effects using the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. In FIG. 283A, first, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, presses the central pressing operation portion 303a in the first bulletin board 1610 as shown in FIG. 281A at the start of the change or after the elapse of a predetermined time. Is displayed to the player, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is put into an operation valid state.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation valid state, in FIG. 283 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs, for example, a display prompting the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 The operation valid state of the operation unit 303a is ended.

  If the central pressing unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 283A on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates a first bulletin board The display of 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is ended, the bulletin board effect does not progress, and the effect defined in the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is executed.

  In FIG. 283 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a continues the display to urge the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 in the first bulletin board 1610, as in FIG. 276 (D). At 1600, for example, a mode is displayed in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates, and an effect is suggested that suggests that the hold display area 1620 may move.

  In FIG. 283D, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is, for example, at least a part of the hold display area 1620 by moving the hold display area 1620 downward in the effect display device 1600 as in FIG. The display of the aspect which is disappearing from the effect display apparatus 1600 is performed. Subsequently, in FIG. 283E, at least a part of the hold display area 1620 disappears from the effect display device 1600.

  In FIG. 283F, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes, for example, the second display board 1611 to appear on the effect display device 1600, and the second display board 1611 such as “hard to turn! Urge the player to rotate the player, and the jackpot expectation is extremely high when the rotary operation unit 302 is turned (for example, the highest jackpot expectation or higher among the jackpot expectation of the display displayed on the first bulletin board 1610 ) A display showing that the display is likely to be executed (in the example of FIG. 283 (F), a display that reminds the player that “superheat” is displayed when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. And the rotation operation unit 302 is put into an operation enabled state.

  When the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the operation valid state, in FIG. 284 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a displays on the second bulletin board 1611 that the big hit expectation such as “super heat !!!” is extremely high. And the operation valid state of the rotation operation unit 302 is ended.

  If the rotation operation unit 302 does not rotate even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second bulletin board 1611 displayed FIG. 283 (F), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a generates a second bulletin board 1611 Is deleted, the operation valid state of the rotation operation unit 302 is ended, the bulletin board effect does not progress, and the effect defined in the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is executed.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 284 (H), the CPU of the periphery control IC 1510 a causes the effect display device 1600 to display the decorative symbol in the reach state, and thereafter performs the effect corresponding to the change pattern of the change.

  In the example of FIG. 283 and FIG. 284, effects are advanced by the operation of different operation units (the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302), but a plurality of one operation unit (for example, only the center pressing operation unit 303 a) The presentation may proceed by the operation of the turn.

  In addition, for example, when using the operation of a plurality of operation units, for example, when performing an operation in which a plurality of operation units are operated, the operation of one operation unit is performed a plurality of times. When using it, when using one operation of one operation part, it is desirable that a big hit expectation degree is high in order. As a result, the player's willingness to operate the operation unit is improved, which in turn improves the interest.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to pachinko machines, and gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as slot machines The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine (playing a slot game using a game ball) in which a gaming machine) or a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused. Here, a slot machine as a reel-type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are mutually connected via a hinge not shown. The front door 6002 can be released from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with the hinge as a rotation center.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a projection projecting forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020 and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this projection. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the stored payment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is done. The main control board 1310 is attached and fixed to a not-shown board holder provided in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotary bodies (not shown), a rendering device (not shown), etc. installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window. It is possible to see through. Three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  In these variable rotary bodies, a translucent design band on which plural types of designs (eg, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as design information is attached to each cylindrical skeleton ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotary body are connected. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, plural kinds of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the display window described above It looks like

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of a effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310 The progress of the effect is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above.

  A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 of the main control board 1310, and variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the integrated gaming machine, the medal insertion slot 6008 becomes the ball insertion slot 6008 ', and a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball insertion slot 6008' as gaming media in the main control board 1310, and the operation of the start lever 6014 is performed. The variable display of symbol information is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018 and the right stop button 6020 or the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit gaming state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... outer frame, 3 ... door frame, 4 ... main body frame, 5 ... game board, 5a ... game area, 558 ... external terminal board, 559 ... frame earth board, 560 ... payout unit, 570 ... ball Induction unit, 580: Dispensing device, 580a: Dispensing passage, 580b: Ball extraction passage, 581: Dispensing device main body, 582 ... Dispensing device rear lid, 583 ... Dispensing device front lid, 584 ... Dispensing motor, 585 ... Drive gear, 586 ... First transmission gear, 587 ... Second transmission gear, 588 ... Dispensing gear member, 588a ... Dispensing gear, 588b ... Detection piece, 589 ... Dispensing blade, 589a ... Blade piece, 589b ... Sphere housing part, 590 ... Blade rotation detection Sensor, 591 ... Payout detection sensor, 592 ... Ball extraction movable piece, 593 ... Ball extraction lever, 600 ... Upper full ball path unit, 610 ... Lower full ball path unit, 630 ... Power supply substrate, 6 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 0a ... Power switch, 630 b ... Noise countermeasure circuit, 630 c ... Rectification circuit, 630 d ... Power factor improvement circuit, 630 e ... Smoothing circuit, 630 f ... Power generation circuit, 630 g ... Power destruction circuit, 633 ... Dispense control board, 1300 ... Main Control unit, 1310: main control board, 1500: peripheral control unit, 1501: cover body, 1502: base body, 1503: wiring cover body, 1510: peripheral control board, 1520: peripheral data ROM board, 1530: liquid crystal output board, 1540: Shield plate, 1545: conductive elastic member, 1600: effect display device

Claims (1)

Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
A determination unit that determines whether it is a hit based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit;
Special symbol variation execution means for executing special symbol variation based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
The suggestions that can produce a result of determination by the determination means, a pre-Symbol gaming machine comprising directing an execution unit, the performed during the special symbol variation period according to the special symbol variation execution means,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a first effect capable of stepwise development and a second effect capable of stepwise development ;
The first effect and the second effect can be manifested in the same special symbol variation,
When the first effect and the second effect appear and the stepwise development is performed, the degree of expectation which is the hit is improved.
The number of steps that can be taken in the step-wise development of the first performance is said to be greater than the number of steps that can be taken in the step-wise development of the second movement,
The timing at which the first effect appears and the gradual development takes place differs from the timing at which the second effect appears and the gradual development takes place,
There are at least a low expectation drop performance with a low degree of expectation which is the hit and a high expectation drop with a high degree of expectation which is the hit as a drop effect indicating whether it is the hit,
When the predetermined number of stages is reached in the second effect, the high expectation success effect is performed with high frequency,
When the number of stages progresses in the second effect, the first effect can be performed in a display mode in which the expectation degree that is the hit is high.
In the case where the first effect is performed again after the first effect is performed in the display mode in which the number of stages progresses in the second effect and the degree of expectation that is the hit is high. The first effect can be performed in a display mode in which the degree of expectation that is the hit is high.
After the first effect performed in the display mode in which the number of stages advances in the second effect and the expectation degree that is the hit is high, the expectation degree that is the hit is high Enabling the movable body to be positioned in an overlapping manner with the area where the first effect performed in the displayed mode is displayed,
It is possible to not carry out the stepwise development in the second production after the high expectation final production started after reaching the predetermined number of stages in the second production.
A game machine characterized by